LIFEBRIDGE HEALTH Volume - brown & heim

PROJECT MANUAL

CONSTRUCTION SET

LLIIFFEEBBRRIIDDGGEE HHEEAALLTTHH

NNOORRTTHHWWEESSTT HHOOSSPPIITTAALL OORR RREENNOOVVAATTIIOONNSS BBIIDD PPAACCKKAAGGEE 22

VVoolluummee 11

HCM Project No 212021.00

October 3, 2013

HORD COPLAN MACHT. INC. 750 E. Pratt Street, Suite 1100 Baltimore, Maryland 21202

410‐837‐7311 410‐837‐6530 (fax)

LEACH WALLACE ASSOCIATES 6522 Meadowridge Road Elkridge, MD 21075

410‐579‐8100 (410) 540‐9041(fax)

CENTURY ENGINEERING 10710 Gilroy Road

Hunt Valley, Maryland 21031 443‐589‐2400

443‐589‐2401 (fax)

HCM Project #212021.00 NORTHWEST HOSPITAL

OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 1

SECTION 00010 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division Section Title Pages

SERIES 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS

00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3

00015 LIST OF DRAWINGS 2

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01100 SUMMARY 4

01150 HOSPITAL PROCEDURES 5

01210 ALLOWANCES 4

01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5

01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 9

01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 6

01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 14

01330a SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES – DIGITAL INFORMATION RELEASE FORM 2

01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 10

01420 REFERENCES 12

01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 9

01510 INFECTION CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITES 3

01510a NW ICRA 7

01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 9

01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 5

01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 5

01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 7

01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 9

01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 4

01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 9

01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 5

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

NOT APPLICABLE


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


DIVISION 5 - METALS

STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS ON DRAWINGS

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 7

06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 12

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 9

07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 6

07920 JOINT SEALANTS 10

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 STEEL DOOR FRAMES 8

08212 VINYL CLAD FLUSH WOOD DOORS 5

08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 4

08580 ALUMINUM SLIDING SELF CLOSING SERVICE WINDOW 6

08710 DOOR HARDWARE 18

08716 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 9

08800 GLAZING 10

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 5

09250 GYPSUM BOARD 9

09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 9

09650 RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES 8

09671 RESINOUS FLOORING 5

09721 HYGIENIC VINYL WALL COVERING 6

09722 DRY ERASE WALLCOVERING 5

09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 8

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10265 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 6

10801 TOILET ACCESSORIES 4

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11700 MEDICAL EQUIPMENT 2

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12365 HEALTHCARE CASEWORK 5


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13090 RADIATION PROTECTION 9

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

15050 BASIC METHODS AND MATERIALS

15070 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

15200 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION

15300 PLUMBING

15500 FIRE PROTECTION

15600 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

15620 PUMPS

15625 PREPURCHASED EQUIPMENT

15640 CHILLERS

15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION

15825 SYSTEMS BALANCING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

15850 MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING

15900 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

16012 SEISMIC RESTRAIN SYSTEMS

16110 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES

16721 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM

16750 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

16760 HOSPITAL PAGING SYSTEM

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 LIST OF DRAWINGS 00015 - 1

SECTION 00015 – LIST OF DRAWINGS

CS.10 COVER SHEET

CS.20 NOTES & SYMBOLS

CS.30 LIFE SAFETY PLAN

CS.40 PHASING - LEVEL 1 PHASE 2A, ROOF PLAN PHASE 2A & 2B

CS.41 PHASING - PHASE 2B

ARCHITECTURAL

A1.01 PHASE 2A - PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - DEMOLITION

A1.02 PHASE 2B - PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - DEMOLITION

A2.00 OVERALL FLOOR PLANS

A2.01 PHASE 2A - PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN

A2.02 PHASE 2B - PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN

A2.03 PHASE 2A - PART LEVEL 2 ROOF PLAN

A3.00 OVERALL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

A3.01 PHASE 2A - PART LEVEL 1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

A3.02 PHASE 2B - PART LEVEL 1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

A7.01 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS - PHASE 2A

A7.02 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS - PHASE 2A & 2B

A7.03 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS - PHASE 2B

A9.01 CASEWORK & CEILING DETAILS

A9.02 CASEWORK DETAILS

A10.01 SCHEDULES

A11.00 INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE/LEGEND

A11.01 INTERIOR FINISH PLAN - PHASE 2A

A11.02 INTERIOR FINISH PLAN - PHASE 2B

A11.03 INTERIOR DETAILS

EQUIPMENT

EQ1.01 EQUIPMENT PLANS - PHASE 2A

EQ1.02 EQUIPMENT PLANS - PHASE 2B

STRUCTURAL

S1.01 PHASE 2A - PART. LEVEL 1 LOW ROOF / AHU FRAMING PLANS

S2.01 PHASE 2A - SECTIONS & DETAILS

MECHANICAL

M1 MECHANICAL LEGEND, CONVENTIONS, AND ABBREVIATIONS

M2 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - PHASE 2A - REMOVAL WORK - HVAC

M3 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - PHASE 2A - REMOVAL WORK - PLUMBING

M4 PART ROOF PLAN - PHASE 2A- REMOVAL WORK - MECHANICAL


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 LIST OF DRAWINGS 00015 - 2

M5 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - PHASE 2A - NEW WORK - HVAC

M6 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - PHASE 2A - NEW WORK - PLUMBING

M7 PART ROOF PLAN - PHASE 2A - NEW WORK - MECHANICAL

M8 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - PHASE 2B - REMOVAL WORK - HVAC

M9 PART PLANS - PHASE 2B - REMOVAL WORK - HVAC

M10 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - PHASE 2B - REMOVAL WORK - PLUMBING

M11 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - PHASE 2B - NEW WORK - HVAC

M12 PART PLANS - NEW WORK - HVAC

M13 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - PHASE 2B - NEW WORK - PLUMBING

M14 PRE-PURCHASED AHU PLANS, SECTIONS, AND SCHEDULES

M15 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES

M16 MECHANICAL DETAILS

M17 MECHANICAL DETAILS

M18 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

M19 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AND MECHANICAL RISERS

ELECTRICAL

E1 ELECTRICAL LEGEND, CONVENTIONS, AND ABBREVIATIONS

E2 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - REMOVAL WORK - ELECTRICAL

E3 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - REMOVAL WORK - ELECTRICAL

E4 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - LIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM

E5 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - LIGHTING AND FIRE ALARM

E6 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - POWER

E7 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - POWER

E8 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - COMMUNICATION

E9 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - COMMUNICATION

E10 PART ROOF PLAN - REMOVAL & NEW WORK - ELECTRICAL

E11 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - ELECTRICAL

E12 PART LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - SPECIAL SYSTEMS

E13 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND SCHEMATIC POWER RISER DIAGRAM

E14 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS

END OF SECTION 00015


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 SUMMARY 01100 - 1

SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Work covered by Contract Documents.

2. Type of Contract.

3. Phased construction.

4. Work under separate contracts.

5. Owner-furnished products.

6. Taxes.

7. Specification and drawing conventions.

8. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 1 Section “Hospital Procedures” for use of premises, Owner’s occupancy

requirements, work restrictions, limitations and procedures.

2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification:

1. Project Location: The work of this Contract shall be performed at Northwest Hospital,

5401 Old Court Road, Randallstown, Maryland 21133.

2. Project Coordinator: Dorothy Hellman has been appointed by Owner to serve as Project

Coordinator c/o Construction Management Department – Building 13, Greenspring &

Cylburn Avenue, 2401 West Belvedere Avenue, Baltimore, Maryland 21215.

B. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. Renovation to the existing OR Suite on the first floor of the main hospital at Northwest

Hospital to create larger OR #3, 4 and 5, renovated OR #2, construct new OR Control and


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PAT Office in existing Equipment Storage Room, convert existing OR Control and PAT

Office back to Pre Op Bays, convert existing Equipment Room back to Staff Lounge,

renovation to existing north ramp, Housekeeping Room, and Men’s Locker Room.

2. Provision of new AHU, and support rooftop galvanized steel framing, to serve the OR

Suite. Provision of galvanized steel bridge over horizontal piping run on the roof.

3. The total renovation area in this project is approximately 5,700 SF.

4. Occupancy use group: I-2. Construction type: 1B.

5. The renovation includes partial demolition and interior renovation to accommodate the

Work, as indicated in the documents.

6. The Work will include roofing repairs for rooftop mechanical and structural work. These

repairs shall be coordinated with the existing roofing system so as not to void any

existing warranties.

7. The Owner is obtaining the building permit for this project. The Contractor is

responsible for obtaining all remaining permits, associated with this project.

C. Type of Contract

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION

A. The Work shall be conducted in multiple phases, as indicated on the drawings, with each phase

substantially complete.

B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit an updated copy of the Contractor's

construction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates for all

phases of the Work.

1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried

out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts.

Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Preceding Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction

operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before

work under this Contract begins.

1. Infection Control.

C. Concurrent Work: Owner has awarded separate contract(s) for the following construction

operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under

this Contract.

1. Infection Control.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1.6 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to

receive Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples where

applicable to Contractor.

2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to

Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be

present for and assist in Owner’s inspection.

4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective or missing, Owner will arrange for

replacement.

5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer’s field services and for delivery of manufacturer’s

warranties to Contractor.

6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished

products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall

designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor’s Construction

Schedule.

7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples and return them to

Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.

8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items

at Project site.

9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during

storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.

10. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor’s operations, Contractor

shall repair or replace them.

11. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Refer to Division 10 Section “Toilet Accessories” and Division 11 Section “Medical

Equipment” for the Owner furnished equipment list.

1.7 TAXES

A. The General Conditions define the taxes to be paid by the Contractor.

B. Tax Exempt Materials:

1. Materials which are permanently incorporated into the Work under this Contract are

exempt from Maryland State Sales or Use Tax. Contractor shall obtain the exemption

number from the Owner for use when purchasing material.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of

all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings

are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the

Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in

the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on

Drawings.

1.9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

A. Electrical Fixtures and Mechanical Devices:

1. The exact positions of electrical fixtures and mechanical devices such as louvers,

thermostats, and similar devices shall be approved by the Architect before any back

boxes or headers are installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 HOSPITAL PROCEDURES 01150 - 1

SECTION 01150 - HOSPITAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Use of premises.

2. Owner's occupancy requirements.

3. Work restrictions.

1.3 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb

portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

B. The Contractor shall, at all times, abide by the regulations of Northwest Hospital, and

amendments, particularly those pertaining to circulation, noise, sanitation, safety, behavior and

dress.

C. Proper dress and appearance is expected by all who work on Hospital campus. This is

mandatory for all who utilize the cafeteria and all public areas within the Hospital (no shorts,

tank tops, etc).

D. Worker’s safety is an important factor. Generally, hard hats are not required; however, the

wearing of appropriate safety equipment is required.

E. Northwest Hospital is a non-smoking facility. Smoking within its premises is strictly forbidden.

Violation may lead to dismissal of employees from the job site.

F. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout

construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and

its occupants during construction period.

G. Personnel Parking: At no time shall the employees of the Contractor or subcontractors

employed by the Contractor be allowed to park their vehicles on the Hospital lots. In areas

assigned for Contractor’s occupancy, the Contractor is free to assign parking as he sees fit, or

space will permit. Vehicles parked in improper location of Owner’s property will be towed at


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


vehicle Owner’s expense. Parking passes are supplied on an as-needed basis, along with

contractor’s badges.

1.4 PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION

A. All employees of the Contractor and subcontractors shall be required to wear picture

identification badges, issues by Owner, while on the Hospital premises.

1. Identification badges will be issued after a letter on company letterhead is submitted

stating the name SSN and home phone number of each employee working on site.

B. The identification badges shall be conspicuously fixed to outer garments above the elbow level.

C. Any of the Contractor’s personnel or subcontractor’s personnel who do not comply with this

requirement at all times will be denied access to the Hospital or will be escorted off the

premises by Hospital Security Guards.

D. Badges shall be surrendered to Owner upon completion of Project. Lost badges are subject to a

charge of $10.00 per badge.

1.5 OWNER’S PROJECT COORDINATOR

A. The Contractor shall abide by the direction of the Owner’s Project Coordinator in matters

affecting the operation, safety, and security of the Hospital, its patients and its visitors.

B. The Contractor shall abide by all directions of the Owner’s Project Coordinator in matters

affecting fire safety and preventative maintenance.

C. All oral instructions given to the Contractor by the Owner’s Project Coordinator or Safety

Manager shall be implemented by the Contractor immediately. Confirmation or explanation of

oral instructions will be made by the Owner by written notice or at the next scheduled progress

meeting.

D. The Contractor will provide a written response to any directions given by the Hospital Safety

Manager. Response will be made as an entry to the Safety Log located at the job site.

E. All personnel employed by the Contractor, including subcontractors and their employees, shall

be instructed by the Contractor to abide by all published regulations, and all directives of the

Owner’s Project Coordinator.

F. Prior to the start of construction, Contractor’s and subcontractor’s personnel shall be required

to attend an Owner’s Safety Training Session.

1.6 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,

with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to

interfere with Owner's operations.

B. Normal Limit of Operations:

1. Work in the construction area will be scheduled with the Owner.

2. The Owner will prohibit his personnel, patients and visitors from using the areas as a

routine passageway as much as Hospital functioning will allow.

3. The Contractor shall maintain corridors and stairways within the area for emergency

purposes. Minimum emergency corridors and stairways within the area lighted and clear

of obstructions and shall comply with Interim Life Safety Measure (ILSM) requirements,

specified in Division 1 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls.”

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Noise Control

1. The Contractor shall execute the work in this Contract as quietly as practicable to avoid

unnecessary disturbances to patients within the Hospital premises.

2. Any complaints duly registered by the Owner of unacceptable noise levels shall be cause

for the use of special precautions and methods of operation by the Contractor to reduce

noises to acceptable levels.

3. The Owner shall be the sole judge of the tolerability of noise levels.

B. Scheduling:

1. All arrangements for work which will involve interference with normal Hospital

functioning, particularly in occupied patient areas, shall be scheduled in advance with

Owner for the sake of speed and a minimum of inconvenience.

2. The Owner will schedule such interference so as to cause a minimum of disruption to

Hospital routine.

3. The main Hospital loading dock shall not be used unless approved by the Owner’s

Project Coordinator.

C. Overnight Storage:

1. Coordinate storage of all materials and equipment with Owner’s Project Coordinator

prior to delivery.

2. Do not store materials and equipment in public areas, corridors and unfenced yards or in

areas specifically disallowed by Owner’s Project Coordinator.

D. Outages:

1. Utility and service outages shall be kept to a minimum, and will be permitted only with

written approval of the Owner, within his time schedule.

2. Forms for outage requests are available from the Owner. Requests for outages will not be

honored unless they included an identification of all areas which will be affected by the

outage.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Make outage requests at least five (5) working days before outage is desired. Outage

requests will be submitted at coordination meetings held on the first work day of each

week.

4. Search out utility lines to determine the effect of any outage of Hospital services within

or outside limit of construction. Notify Owner before starting search.

E. Overtime Notification:

1. Notify Owner when personnel will be working outside of normal daytime working

hours either within or outside of limit of construction.

2. If necessary to reach proper stopping place in any portion of the work, Contractor shall

work overtime both his forces and forces of his subcontractors without addition to the

Contract Price. Contractor shall be responsible for all incidental cost in connection with

such overtime work.

3. If it is necessary, for the Hospital’s convenience, for portions of the work to be performed

during overtime hours, and no increase is made in the scope of the work, the Owner will

pay, as an extra to the Contractor, only that portion of wages which is over the above

“straight time” pay, excluding overhead and profit. Such overtime work must be

authorized in advance by the Owner, for each occurrence.

F. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of

entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.

1.8 HOSPITAL PROPERTY

A. Existing Attached Equipment:

1. Certain attached equipment shall be retained by the Hospital. Such equipment will be

tagged, by Owner prior to demolition.

2. Contractor shall cap all services and patch removal area.

3. Removed equipment shall remain property of the Hospital and shall be delivered by the

Contractor to storage areas as designated by the Owner.

B. Other Existing Equipment:

1. After a final inspection, by the Owner, of the Project area at the time of demolition or

removal, all equipment not tagged by the Owner shall become property of the

Contractor.

2. The Contractor shall remove his property from the Hospital as promptly as possible.

C. Protection of Existing Work: The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all

conditions which are to remain and which existed before the Contract (interior and exterior

areas), as well as work included under the Contract, and shall repair or replace to its present

condition and damage or injury caused by him or people responsible to him, at no change in the

Contract Price.

D. Refer to Division 1 Section “Selective Demolition” for requirements for selective demolition.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1.9 SECURITY AND SAFETY

A. Keys:

1. When necessary, the Contractor will be issued keys to mechanical spaces by Owner’s


2. These keys shall be returned immediately upon completion of project or task as

appropriate and acceptable to Owner’s Project Coordinator.

3. Lost keys shall be replaced at a cost to the Contractor of $250.00 per key.

B. Hot Work Permits:

1. Neither open-flame burning or welding nor arc welding will be permitted without the

Contractor having secured an appropriate permit and zone impairment notice from the

Owner’s Project Coordinator. The contractor is responsible for making sure the correct

zone is pulled. The Safety Director may stop work at any time if unsafe conditions exist.

2. Keep a charged hand fire extinguisher for the appropriate class within reach while

burning or welding. Keep means of exit clear and open. Remove flammable within 35

feet of work. Know location of fire alarm pull box. Cover fixed flammable items with

non-combustible blankets. Screen arc welding from vision of passers-by. Conduct fire

watch for 30 minutes after completion of burning or welding.

3. Dial 2911 in the event of fire should start.

4. Follow, in addition, requirements of Hot Work Permit by the Owner’s Safety/Security

Department.

1.10 LABELING AND NUMBERING

A. Rooms:

1. Use Hospital room numbers in all drawings and correspondence relating to the Project.

2. Where rooms are removed or new rooms are added, obtain instructions from Owner as

to system to be followed.

3. Place and maintain temporary room labels to aid in identifying work.

B. Labels: Labels on pipes, conduit and equipment shall follow Hospital standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

(Not Used)



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1

SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have

been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual

materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to the

Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of

allowances for testing and inspecting.

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances.

1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final

selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed

to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections.

Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form

specified for Change Orders.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for

use in fulfillment of each allowance.

B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of

allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of

the Work.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to

coordinate installation.

1.7 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials selected by

Architect under allowance and shall include freight, and delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor,

installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials selected by

Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the

allowance.

1.8 UNUSED MATERIALS

A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer of supplier for credit

to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.

B. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not

economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused

material to Owner’s storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor’s

responsibility.

1.9 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based

on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final

measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances

for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar

margins.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the

allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of

overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders

related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent

quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance

described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's

handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost

amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from

what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-

priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects.

Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and

installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with

related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance No. 1: Lump Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $5,000.00 for gypsum board

replacement due to mold remediation. Mold remediation shall be performed by others under a

separate contract.

1. This allowance includes material cost, receiving, handing, and installation, and

Contractor overhead and profit.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Allowance No. 2: Lump Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $7,500.00 to cover the cost of

radaring/x-raying the existing roof and floor slab(s) in areas of the Work.



C. Allowance No. 3: Lump Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $5,000.00 for repairs to missing

fireproofing on existing structural steel.



D. Allowance No. 4: Lump Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $2,000.00 for firestopping of

existing mechanical and electrical penetrations in existing rated walls.





OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and

process Applications for Payment.


1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and

processing of allowances.

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative

requirements governing the preparation and submittal of Contractor's construction

schedule.

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for requirements for Substantial Completion

and Final Completion payment applications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract

Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's

Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of

Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms

and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.

b. Submittal schedule.

c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor’s construction

schedule.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven

days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items

for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.

c. Architect's project number.

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division.

b. Description of the Work.

c. Name of subcontractor.

d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.

e. Name of supplier.

f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.

g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor.

2) Materials.

3) Equipment.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the

Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract

amounts where appropriate.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for project

closeout requirements.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated

and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,

include evidence of insurance.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.

Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by

measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine

quantities.

8. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each

purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments

or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.

9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.

Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual

work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values

or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result

in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as

certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement

between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application

for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703

Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

1. Indicate the Lifebridge Project Name, Project Number and Application for Payment or

purchase order number on each Application for Payment.

D. Certificate of Insurance shall be submitted to Owner’s Project Coordinator prior to payment of

Contractor’s first invoice.

1. Clearly indicate the project identification on the Certificate.

2. Indicate Lifebridge Health as the Certificate holder.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete

applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction

schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,

whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at

time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before

last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Include payment documentation with each Application for Payment in accordance with

the requirements of the General Condtions.

F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or

equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between

items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of

surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.

Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include

overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment.

b. Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials.

c. Additional materials stored with this Application.

d. Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application.

G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for

Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include

waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording

appropriate information about application.

H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's

lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and

related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after

deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full

waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers.

4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of values.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Contractor's construction schedule.

4. Submittal schedule.

5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

6. List of Contractor's principal consultants.

7. Copies of building permits.

8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work.

9. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

10. Performance and payment bonds.

J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial

Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of

the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

K. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting

documentation not previously submitted and accepted and as stated in the General Conditions.

1. Refer to Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures” for additional requirements.





OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Administrative and supervisory personnel.

2. Coordination drawings.

3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

4. Project meetings.


1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general

installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and

control points.

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Request for Interpretation (RFI): Request, initiated either by the Owner or the Contractor,

asking for interpretation of an item in the Contract Documents..


A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for

each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated

to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Key Personnel Names: Within 10 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key

personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project

site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone

numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses.

Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the

absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before

or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and

repair of all components.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees

at meetings.

C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with

requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop

Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is

required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than

one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed

data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.

Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of

various systems and components.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings

by multiple subcontractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the

information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before

submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated

replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,

valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences.

g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance

requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed

resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations

will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and

mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of

visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan

drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical

and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum

to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict

between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans

and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical

equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door

floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and

similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including

insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors,

cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inch diameter and larger.

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire

alarm locations.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler

heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being

coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's

responsibility. If the Architect determines that the coordination drawings are not being

prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, the Architect will so

inform the Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints in accordance with

requirements of Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of

the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or

interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.

2. Project number.

3. Date.

4. Name of Contractor.

5. Name of Architect.

6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

7. RFI subject.

8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

12. Contractor's signature.

13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe

items needing interpretation.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: CSI Form 13.2A or software-generated form with substantially the same content as

indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.

Architect will respond to RFIs in an average of seven working days. It is acknowledged and

understood that some RFIs will take longer to respond to than others dependent on the

complexity of the specific issue. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as

received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.

f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to

Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within seven days of receipt of the

RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response

to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within five days if Contractor

disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

Submit log at each Progress Meeting.

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Architect.

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date Architect's response was received.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Owner’s Project Coordinator shall schedule meetings and conferences in the

Construction Management Conference Room. Contractor shall conduct the meetings and be

responsible for the following:

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled

meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,

including Owner and Architect, within seven days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Owner will schedule a preconstruction conference before starting

construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect and at a location designated by the

Owner. Contractor shall conduct the conference..

1. Review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned

parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with

Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

e. Lines of communications.

f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

g. Procedures for RFIs.

h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

k. Submittal procedures.

l. Preparation of record documents.

m. Use of the premises and existing building.

n. Work restrictions.

o. Working hours.

p. Owner's occupancy requirements.

q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.

s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.

t. Construction waste management and recycling.

u. Parking availability.

v. Office, work, and storage areas.

w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


x. First aid.

y. Security.

z. Progress cleaning.

aa. Infection Control requirements.

4. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Pre-Installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise

Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFIs.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. Review of mockups.

i. Possible conflicts.

j. Compatibility problems.

k. Time schedules.

l. Weather limitations.

m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

n. Warranty requirements.

o. Compatibility of materials.

p. Acceptability of substrates.

q. Temporary facilities and controls.

r. Space and access limitations.

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

t. Testing and inspecting requirements.

u. Installation procedures.

v. Coordination with other work.

w. Required performance results.

x. Protection of adjacent work.

y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties

requiring information.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these

meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to

conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,

in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction

behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to

do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and

subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Project manpower.

3) Sequence of operations.

4) Status of submittals.

5) Deliveries.

6) Off-site fabrication.

7) Access.

8) Site utilization.

9) Temporary facilities and controls.

10) Progress cleaning.

11) Quality and work standards.

12) Status of correction of deficient items.

13) Field observations.

14) Status of RFIs.

15) Status of proposal requests.

16) Pending changes.

17) Status of Change Orders.

18) Outage Requests.

19) Safety Logs.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Minutes: Record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties

requiring information within seven days of the meeting.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress





OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1

SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of

construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Start-up construction schedule.

2. Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Daily construction reports.

4. Material location reports.

5. Site condition reports.

6. Special reports.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Schedule of Values.

2. Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination” for submitting and

distributing meeting and conference minutes.

3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Submit two paper copies.

2. Submit PDF electronic file.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule

for entire construction period.

C. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies. Arrange the following in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal.

2. Specification Section number and title.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Submittal Category (action or informational).

4. Name of subcontractor.

5. Description of Work covered.

6. Scheduled date for Architect’s and Owner’s final release or approval.

D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.

E. Material Location Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.

F. Site Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.

G. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event.

H. Owner’s Weekly Construction Survey Documentation/Inspection Log: Submit two copies at

weekly intervals.

1. Sample document is included at the end of this Section.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,

submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and

reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Arrange in chronological order by dates required by Construction Schedule.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and

Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

2. Provide separate sub-schedule construction progress schedule indicating submittal

daters for shop drawings, product date, samples and other similar data.

3. Submit Submittals Schedule 15 days prior to first Application for Payment.

4. Include time required for review, re-submittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and

delivery when establishing dates.

a. Indicate when reviewed submittals will be required from Architect taking into

consideration the quantity of days specified for Architect’s review.

b. Allow sufficient time in schedule for re-submittal of disapproved submittals.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


c. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes and colors.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final

completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows

an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart Construction Schedule.

Submit within 15 days of the date established for Commencement of the Work.

1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a

continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same

breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the Schedule of Values as a minimum.

2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments.

As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.

3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of staple transparency, or other

reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.

Maximum size allowed is 24-inches by 36-inches.

4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties

involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities;

include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in

proper sequence. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related

portions of the Work.

5. Coordinate the Contractor’s construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of

subcontractors, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other

schedules.

6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion.

Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect’s

procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

C. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a two item cost correlation line,

indicating “pre-calculated” and “actual” costs. On the line, show dollar-volume of Work

performed as of the dates used for preparation of payment requests.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following

information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.

4. Equipment at Project site.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


5. Material deliveries.

6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain

or snow.

7. Accidents.

8. Meetings and significant decisions.

9. Unusual events (refer to special reports).

10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

11. Meter readings and similar recordings.

12. Emergency procedures.

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.

14. Change Orders received and implemented.

15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.

16. Services connected and disconnected.

17. Equipment or system tests and startups.

18. Partial completions and occupancies.

19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of

materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials

previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on

and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project

site.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and

the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for

Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute

copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at

Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.

List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of

results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these

events are known or predictable.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, subcontractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know

schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their

assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction

activities.

B. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each

meeting.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1

SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and

the schedule of values.

2. Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination” for submitting and

distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.

3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule and submittals schedule.

4. Division 1 Section “Quality Requirements” for submitting test and inspection reports and

for mockup requirements.

5. Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures” for submitting warranties.

6. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

7. Division 1 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals.

8. Division 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require

Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual

Specification Sections as action submittals.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not

require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with

requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual

Specification Sections as informational submittals.

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from

another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal

and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard format licensed by Adobe Systems used

for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolutions-independent

fixed-layout document format.

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will

be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect may furnish Contractor digital data drawing files of requested sheets of the

Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project Record Drawings

upon request by the Contractor.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of the

digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in the

version of digital drawing software program and operating system denoted on the

Architect’s “Digital Information Release Agreement.”

c. Prior to release of the files, Contractor and each subcontractor requesting digital

data drawing files shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of the

Architect’s “Digital Information Release Agreement” included in Project Manual

as an attachment to this Section.

d. The final determination of which files can be released will be made by the

Architect.

e. The following digital data drawing files may be furnished for each appropriate

discipline at the Architect’s discretion.

1) Floor plans.

2) Reflected ceiling plans.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of

related construction activities to avoid delay.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless

partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.

Time for review shall commence on Architect's and Owner’s Project Coordinator’s receipt of

submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Architect will review and return submittals in an average of 14 calendar days. It is

acknowledged and understood that some submittals will take longer to review than

others dependent on the complexity of the specific issues involved and the magnitude

and quantity of submittals in review at that time. Allow additional time if coordination

with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a

submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy

submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Stamp the submittal with the Contractor’s review and approval markings.

4. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Lifebridge Capital Project Number.

c. Date and revision dates as applicable.

d. Name and address of Architect.

e. Name and address of Contractor.

f. Name and address of subcontractor.

g. Name and address of supplier.

h. Name and address of manufacturer.

i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as

follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling

navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by

a hyphen and then a sequential number (e.g., NWH-ORBP2-06100-01). Re-

submittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another hyphen (e.g., NWH-

ORBP2-06100-01-A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor’s review and approval

markings and action taken by Architect.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,

containing the following information:

a. Project Name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

g. Category and type of submittal.

h. Submittal purpose and description.

i. Specification Section number and title.

j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for

each of multiple items.


l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

m. Related physical samples submitted directly.

n. Indication of full or partial submittal.

o. Transmittal number.

p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

q. Other necessary identification.

r. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file

metadata:

a. Project name.

b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

c. Manufacturer name.

d. Product name.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect.

G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

H. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and

handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,

without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name.

b. Lifebridge Capital Project Number.

c. Date.

d. Destination (To:).

e. Source (From:).

f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

g. Category and type of submittal.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


h. Submittal purpose and description.

i. Specification Section number and title.

j. Indication of full or partial submittal.


l. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

m. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

n. Remarks.

o. Signature of transmitter.

2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant

information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on

previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,

including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as

related submittal.

I. Refer to Submittal Flow Chart diagram and Submittal Flow Chart explanation at the end of this

Section.

J. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements of Division 1 Section “Construction Progress

Documentation” for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of

related construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by

individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification

Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals as PDF electronic files as directed by Architect. Architect

will return annotated file.

2. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will return two copies.

3. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will not return copies.

4. Certificates and Certification Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that

entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data

are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer’s product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency label and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless

submittal based on Architect’s digital drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable.

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

a. For Shop Drawings submitted in PDF electronic format, the maximum size shall be

11 by 17 inches, when printed without scaling. Submit one electronic file in Adobe

Acrobat PDF format for each set of Shop Drawings. Each file to include a cover

page from the Contractor indicating that the Contractor has reviewed the

information being submitted per “Contractor’s Review” Article in Part 3 of this

Section. Architect will return a file in Adobe Acrobat PDF format with a comment


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


sheet denoting Architect’s action included at the front. Print out and retain one

returned copy as a project record document. PDF electronic files for Shop

Drawing sheets that, when printed, are larger than 11 by 17 inches will not be

accepted and will not be reviewed by the Architect or the Architect’s and Owner’s

consultants.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are used, provide corresponding electronic

submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and

identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-

control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time

of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work or otherwise designated as Owner’s

property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer’s color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern,

texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer’s

product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range

of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the

following: Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or

containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing

color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent

testing and inspection.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two

Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to

be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of

paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the

following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product: Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract

Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.

3. Number and name of room or space.

4. Location within room or space.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

“Project Management and Coordination.”

G. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

“Construction Progress Documentation.”

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in

Division 1 Section “Payment Procedures.”

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with

requirements specified in Division 1 Section “Quality Requirements.”

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements

specified in Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures.”

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section “Operation and

Maintenance Data.”

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience

of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact

information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure

Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names

of firms and personnel certified.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


N. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

O. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

T. Research Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.

3. Time period when report is in effect.

4. Product and manufacturers' names.

5. Description of product.

6. Test procedures and results.

7. Limitations of use.

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before

installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract

Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed

before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

W. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and

normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in

Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

Y. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.

Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for

calculations. Include page numbers.

Z. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents

manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a

product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of

manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates.

2. Required substrate tolerances.

3. Sequence of installation or erection.

4. Required installation tolerances.

5. Required adjustments.

6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

AA. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized

service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.

5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

6. Statement as to whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

BB. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to

Architect.

1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire

submittal for re-submittal.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit

a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and

other required submittals, submit three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the

responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor

to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing

these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections

and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect and Owner’s


B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 1

Section "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and

will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp

and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will

return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to

appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial

submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be

returned without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be

discarded.

G. Simultaneous submission of six or more submittals to the Architect will result in extended

review time. Such submittals will be reviewed based on priority determined by the Architect in

consultation with the Owner and Contractor.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


FLOW CHART

1

2

3 4

5 6

7

8

9

10

11

Vendor, Sub-Contractor or Fabricator

General Contractor or Construction Manager

Architect Lifebridge Construction Management

Consultants LifebridgeEngineering & Maint

Architect

Lifebridge ProjectCoordinator

General Contractor or Construction Manager

Architect

Lifebridge ProjectCoordinator


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT

SUBMITTAL FLOW CHART

1. VENDOR, SUBCONTRACTOR OR FABRICATOR submits one reverse sepia and four prints of all shop drawings or fourteen copies of all other submittals to General Contractor/Construction Manager.

2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER reviews submittals for compliance with contract documents and so indicates in accordance with this Section 01330, or submits one sepia with two prints of each shop drawing or twelve copies of all other submittals to Architect. Two prints or copies of each submission shall be simultaneously submitted to Lifebridge Project Coordinator.

3 & 5. ARCHITECT reviews submittals for compliance with contract documents and, where applicable, transmits to Consultants for approval. CONSULTANT reviews applicable submittals, stamps and returns them to Architect. ARCHITECT holds submittals until receipt of comments from Lifebridge Project Coordinator.

4 & 6. LIFEBRIDGE PROJECT COORDINATOR transmits one copy of each of all shop drawings or submittals to Engineering & Maintenance to review for compliance with contract documents. ENGINEERING & MAINTENANCE will return to Lifebridge Project Coordinator within three (3) days or advise in writing of a problem. LIFEBRIDGE PROJECT COORDINATOR will consolidate comments, stamp and return one copy to Architect for processing.

7. Upon receipt of Project Coordinator's stamped copy, ARCHITECT consolidates comments and transmits one (1) stamped sepia and one (1) print or eleven stamped submittals to LifebridgeProject Coordinator.

8. LIFEBRIDGE PROJECT COORDINATOR reviews submittals for consolidation of comments and transmits one (1) processed sepia or ten processed submittals to the General Contractor or Construction Manager.

9. GENERAL CONTRACTOR OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER shall respond as indicated and/or distribute processed submittals, making required prints from sepia, if applicable. General Contractor or Construction manger shall maintain six (6) processed copies for inclusion in Operation & Maintenance Manuals to be provided at a project closeout.

10. At substantial completion, General Contractor or Construction Manager shall submit six (6) bound copies of Operation & Maintenance Manuals and Record Drawings, Specifications and Documents to Architect. ARCHITECT reviews, processes and transmits all copies of Operation & Maintenance Manuals and Record Documents (mylar sepia drawings & AutoCad disc) to Lifebridge Project Coordinator.

11. LIFEBRIDGE PROJECT COORDINATOR distributes three (3) Operation & Maintenance Manuals to Engineering & Maintenance, complete with drawings, if applicable, and three (3) Operation & Maintenance Manuals and Record Documents to the Secretary for filing/future reference.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 01330 - 1

Project Name: Northwest Hospital – OR Renovations Bid Package 2

Project Number: 212021.00

Hord, Coplan Macht, Inc. (HCM) is preparing construction documents on a computer system, which documents are

being published for bidding and construction purposes only in hard copy (paper). The undersigned has requested to

be provided certain information in digital format. HCM will provide services to develop modified copies of digital

files for the subject project with the following understanding and conditions:

1. The undersigned understands that the digital information may change after this issuance in digital format.

The digital information has not been finally verified against the hard copy, and thus may contain errors and

extraneous data. Data stored on electronic media can deteriorate undetected and may be modified or

altered without the knowledge of HCM. The use of the digital information is wholly at the risk of the

undersigned.

2. The hard copy of these documents as issued by HCM is to be relied upon for the purposes of bidding and

construction, not the digital information. To the extent there is any variation between the hard copy and the

digital format thereof, the hard copy is the sole basis for determining all matters relating to the Work.

3. The use of the digital information shall not in any way obviate the undersigned’s responsibility for the

proper checking and coordination of as built conditions, dimensions, details, member sizes and gauge, and

quantities of materials as required to facilitate complete and accurate fabrication and erection.

4. The digital information was generated utilizing commercial software under license to HCM, and HCM is

under no obligation to provide any software or hardware required to read and manipulate said information.

HCM is also under no obligation to provide supplemental files, and linked data (e.g., font files, line types, or

external references).

5. HCM is under no obligation to correct, modify, or update the digital information or to notify the

undersigned of any need to correct, modify, or update the digital information.

6. Unless modified elsewhere, the digital information is the property of the author/ design professional.

Hence, HCM neither owns nor controls the release of our consultants digital files (i.e. MEP, structural, civil,

etc.).

7. It is at the sole discretion of HCM to determine the architectural files to be released and any cost for the

same.

8. The undersigned agrees to indemnify, defend, release, and hold HCM, their consultants, and the owner

harmless from any responsibility or obligation as to the accuracy or completeness of the digital information

and further waives any claim it may have for expenses, including but not limited to attorney’s fees, resulting

from the undersigned relying upon or utilizing the digital information.

9. The digital files are provided for the exclusive use of the undersigned personnel ONLY. The information

will not be transferred or transmitted by the undersigned for use by others.

10. The above shall constitute the entire agreement between Hord Coplan Macht, Inc, and the undersigned for

providing the above service.

11. This agreement does not constitute a waiver of copyright or a transfer of ownership of said information and

documents. The said information and documents can be used only for the above referenced Project.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 01330 - 2

HORD COPLAN MACHT, INC. THIS AGREEMENT ACCEPTED BY:

Company:

Name: Name:

Signature: Signature:

Title: Title:

Date: Date:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality

control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified

or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those

Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document

requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required

by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of

this Section.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract

enforcement activities performed by Architect.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed

to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where

indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to

show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified

installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved

mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before

products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance

with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to

establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,

plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or

that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully

completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;

being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards

establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply

with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision

before proceeding.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

3. Description of test and inspection.

4. Identification of applicable standards.

5. Identification of test and inspection methods.

6. Number of tests and inspections required.

7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to

Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format

acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records,

and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control

responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and

experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures

similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through

review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible

for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work

requiring testing or inspection, including the following:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and

inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the

"Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during

construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and

inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into

compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and

approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of

approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or

defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with

requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.

2. Project title and number.

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

7. Identification of product and Specification Section.

8. Complete test or inspection data.

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements.

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.



6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.


C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections

specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.



4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.


D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well

as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed

for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and

extent to those indicated for this Project.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according

to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation

of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for

this Project.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for

this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the

following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and

analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with

performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will

perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and

methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups and

laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor.

Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected

work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed during the construction at Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or

construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified

in individual Specification Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to

perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are

Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that

the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required

by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of

Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in

writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires

testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal

Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's

services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and

conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed

portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the

following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and

replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-

control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-

control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule.

Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party

involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are

required.

1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as

required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections,

and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control

procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform

the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed

in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control

service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,

which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected

work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test

and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas

and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as

possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in

Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 REFERENCES 01420 - 1

SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the

Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that

control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,

protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is

shown on Drawings.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are

not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain

copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate

and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960

www.aluminum.org

AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333

www.aaadm.com

AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202

www.aabchq.com

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664

www.aamanet.org

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141

www.aatcc.org

ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888

www.airbarrier.org

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155

www.abma-dc.org

ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700

www.concrete.org

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530

www.aeic.org

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878

www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000

www.aga.org

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118

www.agc.org

AHA American Hardboard Association

(Now part of CPA)

AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837

www.aia.org (202) 626-7300

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400

www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100

www.steel.org

ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700

www.alsc.org

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150

www.amca.org

ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020

www.ansi.org

ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800

www.ari.org

ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917

www.asphaltroofing.org

(See ASCE)

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers

(800) 527-4723

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400

ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763

(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170

www.asme.org

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040

www.asse-plumbing.org

ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500

(American Society for Testing and Materials International)

www.astm.org

AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (703) 534-8300

www.awci.org


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association

(Now WCMA)

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636

www.awinet.org

AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077

(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association)

www.awpa.com

AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353

www.aws.org (305) 443-9353

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122

www.buildershardware.com

BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010

www.bia.org

BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405

www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991

BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association

International)

www.bifma.com

CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282

www.copper.org (212) 251-7200

CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555

www.ce.org (703) 907-7600

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919

www.cisca.org

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137

www.cispi.org

CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523

www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175

CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846

www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200

www.crsi.org

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900

www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300

CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)

www.cti.org

DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010

www.dhi.org

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500

www.eia.org

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040

www.ejma.org

ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (800) 967-5352

(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)

www.intertek.com

FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300

www.fmglobal.com

FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000

(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)

www.fmglobal.com

FMRC Factory Mutual Research

(Now FM Global)

FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0

www.fsc.org

GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440

www.gypsum.org

GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208

www.glasswebsite.com

GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400

www.greenseal.org

HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267-9700

www.pumps.org

HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200

www.gamanet.org

HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

(Part of NAAMM)

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900

www.hpva.org

HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550

www.hpwhite.com


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


IAS International Approval Services

(Now CSA International)

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369

www.icea.net

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830

www.icri.org

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11

www.iec.ch

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900

www.ieee.org

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000

www.iesna.org

IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561

www.iest.org

ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11

www.iso.ch

Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020

www.ansi.org

ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732

www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150

ITS Intertek Testing Service NA

(Now ETL SEMCO)

ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11

www.itu.int/home

LMA Laminating Materials Association

(Now part of CPA)

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610

www.metalframingmfg.org

MH Material Handling

(Now MHIA)

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815

www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190

MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937

www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings

Industry Inc.

(703) 281-6613

www.mss-hq.com

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591

www.naamm.org

NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200

www.nace.org

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926

www.nadca.com

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084

www.naima.org

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900

www.ncma.org

NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094

www.ncpi.org

NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-2300

www.ncta.com

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698

www.nebb.org

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110

www.necanet.org

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901

www.nelma.org

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200

www.nema.org

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382

www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382

NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555

(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000

www.nfpa.org

NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642

www.glass.org (703) 442-4890

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318

www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


www.nlga.org

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545

www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622

www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400

NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275

(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010

www.nsf.org

OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc.

(Now ITS)

PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300

www.pci.org

PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322

www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956

www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580

www.rfci.com

SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323

www.sae.org (724) 776-4841

SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647

www.sdi.org

SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010

www.steeldoor.org

SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424

www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424

SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers

(See ASCE)

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234

www.sgcc.org

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980

National Association

www.smacna.org

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611

www.spib.org


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026

www.spri.org

SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355

www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772

www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331

STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265

www.steeltank.com

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974

www.swrionline.org

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.

(Now TCNA)

TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646-8453

www.tileusa.com

TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7700

www.tiaonline.org

TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700

www.masonrysociety.org

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577

www.ul.com (847) 272-8800

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902

www.uni-bell.org

USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747

www.usgbc.org

WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869

www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486

www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651

WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122

www.wcmanet.org

WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636

(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) (212) 297-2109

www.windowcoverings.org

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) (847) 299-5200

www.wdma.com


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of

California)

(916) 372-9943

www.wicnet.org

WIC Woodwork Institute of California

(Now WI)

WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930

www.wwpa.org

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,

telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-

to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100

www.iapmo.org

ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233

www.iccsafe.org

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587

www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications

or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the

following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed

to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011

www.usace.army.mil

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772

www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923

DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000

www.commerce.gov

DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257

http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil

DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220

www.energy.gov

EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167

www.epa.gov

FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322

www.faa.gov

FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


www.fcc.gov

FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332

www.fda.gov

GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111

www.gsa.gov

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112

www.hud.gov

LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000

www.lbl.gov

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478

www.nist.gov

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742

www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999

PBS Public Buildings Service

(See GSA)

PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694

www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs

D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and

regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to

change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities

Available from U.S. Access Board

www.access-board.gov

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-2664

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

FED-STD Federal Standard

(See FS)

FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

Available from Defense Standardization Program

www.dps.dla.mil

Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


www.gsa.gov

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800

www.wbdg.org/ccb

FTMS Federal Test Method Standard

(See FS)





OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection

facilities.

2. Owner’s Interim Life Safety Measures.


1. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.

2. Division 1 Section “Infection Control During Construction Activities” for temporary

barrier and Work area ventilation requirements.

3. Division 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation and humidity

requirements for products in those Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous

Carpentry.”

B. Gypsum Board: 5/8-inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; Sheetrock

Brand FireCode C, USG, or approved equal.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary

use during construction, provide filter with MERV of [8] <Insert number> at each return air


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in

Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the

Work.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on

completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to

produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

B. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination

for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

B. Parking: Refer to Division 1 Section “Hospital Procedures.”

C. Project Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs in accordance with requirements of

the General Conditions.. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated to inform public

and individuals seeing entrance to Project.

2. Temporary Signs: Provide directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste

from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and

with Owner’s Infection Control Procedures. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution

Requirements" and the General Conditions for progress cleaning requirements.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


E. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs may be permitted, provided stairs are

cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore

stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs

and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no

evidence remains of correction work.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible

air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

C. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt

migration and to separate occupied areas from fumes and noise.

1. Locate dustproof partitions as indicated on the Drawings and as otherwise required to

provide complete separation.

2. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints and edges. Fit

partitions snugly within openings.

3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.

4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors with door

closers and security locks.

5. Protect air-handling equipment.

6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

D. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with

NFPA 241.

1. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and

information.

3. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning

sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.

Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document

visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building

enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in

conditions.

2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.

3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and

gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and

remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during

construction operations or after installation. Record daily readings over a forty-

eight hour period. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than

allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured

moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated

results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than

Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may

have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,

clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1

Section "Closeout Procedures."

3.7 OWNER’S INTERIM LIFE SAFETY MEASURES

A. Implementation of interim life safety measures (ILSM) is required in or adjacent to all

construction areas and throughout buildings with existing life safety code (LSC) deficiencies.

ILSM consists of the following actions, which the project team and the contractors must address

prior to and during construction:

1. Ensure exits provide free and unobstructed egress. Personnel shall receive training if

alternative exits must be designated. Contractor is to inspect and document on a daily

basis.

2. Ensure free and unobstructed access to emergency departments/services and for

emergency forces.

3. Contractor is to ensure that the building fire detection and suppression systems are not

impaired. Contractor is to install a temporary hardwired smoke and/or heat detector

system within the areas affected by construction activities (or where required) when the

fire detection and suppression system is impaired. A temporary sprinkler system is also

acceptable. Contractor is required to provide documentation on initial testing of

temporary systems immediately after installation. Contractor is also required to inspect

these temporary systems on a monthly basis or more frequently as determined by the

ILSM team and to provide written documentation of the inspection to the owner.

4. Ensure temporary construction partitions are smoke tight and built of non-combustible

materials.

5. Provide additional firefighting equipment and use training for personnel.

6. Develop storage, housekeeping, and debris removal policies and procedures that reduce

the flammable and combustible fire load to the lowest level necessary for daily

operations. Contractor is to document and enforce these policies on a daily basis.

7. Contractor is to conduct and document hazard surveillance on a daily basis of buildings,

grounds, and equipment with special attention to excavations, construction areas,

construction storage, and field offices.

B. Refer to the Lifebridge Health “Project Safety Protocol” at the end of this Section for

requirements.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


LifeBridge Health

Capital Improvements Department

2401West Belvedere

Building #13

Baltimore, MD 21215

Phone: 410-601-6059 Fax: 410-367-5648

Exhibit A

Project Safety Protocol

LifeBridge Health is committed to meeting its occupational health and safety and environmental responsibilities to Contractors. Contractor agrees by acceptance of this project that he is working within a hospital environment of care that is regulated by special codes and regulation. Contractor agrees to abide by such obligation in execu-tion of project, including but not limited to the following.

• Acknowledging that working in a safe and environmentally responsible and com-pliant manner is a condition of engagement of all Contractors who perform con-tract work for LifeBridge Health. Thatcontractors are responsible for the occupa-tional health, safety and environmental compliance of all their Personnel who work at or for LifeBridge Health. In addition, the Contractor's Personnel must comply with all OH&S, Environmental. Regulatory, JCAHO, and all other appli-cable Legal requirements and not take any action which may expose them-selves or other persons in theWorkplace to a risk to their health or safety.

• Providing the safest possible workplace for LifeBridge Health associates, sub-contractors andcontract employees while working onsite at LifeBridge Health facilities.

• Providing information, and training as required to sub-contractors to enable them to work in asafe and responsible manner.

• Providing appropriate emergency response services for sub-contractors, con-tract activities, andcontract employees.

• Complying with applicable safety and environmental laws and regulations re-garding LifeBridgeHealth associates, sub-contractors, contract activities, and contract employees.

• Communicating requirements to sub-contractors, if applicable, regard-ing safety and environmental performance while working onsite at LifeBridge Health facilities.

• Ensuring sub-contractors are responsible for their safety and environmental performance whileworking onsite at LifeBridge Health facilities and are expected to perform services in a safe andresponsible manner.

Contractor Safety Management Plan

A Contractor OH&S Safety Management Plan ("SMP") is required for all new loca-tions, refurbishmentworks, construction works, and high risk works. The plan must include:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


• a statement of responsibilities listing names, positions and responsibilities of all persons who willhave specific OH&S responsibilities on the site;

• the risk management process;• details of arrangements for ensuring compliance with OH&S induction training;• details of arrangements for managing OH&S incidents;• any site safety rules and details for ensuring all persons in the Workplace are

informed of therules;• a copy of the Owner's ICRA of the work to be completed;• a SJES for all work activities assessed as having a class III or IV risk as identified in

the ICRA.

Infection Prevention Control Risk Assessment

Contractor will participate in Life Safety meetings and when requested by the owner will pro-vide such services when rendered as part of the bid documents either as a sole source, or in partnership with aprofessional affiliate approved by the hospital. Contractor also agrees to the following:

• Ensure all site personnel attend mandatory safety orientation held by LifeBridge Health, reviewand complete the acknowledgement of the "project orientation and gen-eral safety & health rules"guide book, and abide by the rules therein.

• Ensure that Supervisory personnel utilize and submit the "Weekly Construction Survey Doc-ument/Inspection Log" [Exhibit K] as provided by the Owner in a manner prescribed for reporting.

• Abide by the specific requirements for the determined type of construction as detailed in the finalICRA [Exhibit J] as approved by Owner.

Infection Prevention Control Risk Assessment ("ICRA") is a part of the risk management process preparedby the Owner with the active participation of the Contractor and Architect. It is used to determine what the risks and class of construction are associated with a particular job or task within a certain area, and then to decide on what control measures will be required, to eliminate if possible, or control, those risks and hazards. In the hospital industry risk classes are commonly classified as a Class 1, Class II, Class III or Class IV. These are defined as fol-lows:

• Class I — Low Risk• Class II — Medium Risk• Class III & IV — High Risk

Safe Job Execution Statement

The Contractor is required to utilize the information in the approved ICRA when completing a Safe JobExecution Statement ("SJES") for those projects and or tasks that have a Class III or IV risk. The SJESmust describe the work to be completed, outline the steps involved in under-taking the job, identify the associated hazards with the job and indicate the risk control measures that will be implemented toeliminate (if possible) or minimize the risk to worker safety.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


If the job to be completed by the Contractor is routine work, one SJES is sufficient for all occa-sions when that work is performed, provided the working conditions associated with that job do not change andprovided all relevant Personnel are trained in the work practice and understand the safety controls to be implemented in undertaking that work. Generic SJES can be used at a number of sites as long as the task and working conditions do not change and all Personnel performing the work are trained in the workpractice and understand the safety controls to be implemented in undertaking that work.

The SJES must be submitted by the Contractor to LifeBridge Health and accepted in writing by LifeBridge Health prior to work commencing. The Principal Contractor must ensure all sub-contractors have a copy of the completed SJES, which is to be provided to LifeBridge Health on request, and ensure that its subcontractors and their Personnel can demonstrate an understand-ing and successful implementation of allcontrol measures.

The LifeBridge Health Representative will discuss with the Contractor any known hazards that may ariseor be present in LifeBridge Health owned or leased premises and which might affect the health and safety of the Contractor and their Personnel. The LifeBridge Health Repre-sentative will ensure that theContractor carries out a documented risk assessment (as part of the SJES), which takes these existing hazards into account, and will agree with the Contractor on the appropriate precautionary measures to be taken as a condition of LifeBridge Health providing an authority to the Contractor to commence work.

The following apply in respect of SJES:• LifeBridge Health will not permit Contractors to undertake the job on LifeBridge

HealthWorkplaces unless an approved Owner's ICRA and/or SJES has been carried out to thesatisfaction of the LifeBridge Health Representative. The Owner's ICRA and/or SJES wherepossible, must be submitted to the LifeBridge Health Representative at least 48 hours prior to thecommencement of any work by the Contractor.

The SJES should include:• the name of the Contractor;• a description of the work activity or task to be undertaken;• the location of the work;• the date the SJES was developed;• the key steps involved in undertaking the job;• the equipment or plant required to undertake the job;• the hazards, (existing and potential),associated with the work to be undertaken;• an assessment of risks arising from the identified hazards involved in undertaking the

job;• the control measures that will be put in place to eliminate (if possible) or minimize the

potentialhazards;• the licenses, qualifications and/or work permits required;• the name of the person/s responsible for ensuring that the control measures are in

place;• attach a maintenance/inspection schedule for monitoring the safety controls;• a description of how the safety control measures will be monitored by the Contractor for

theireffectiveness;• a date for the review of the SJES;


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


• the name and signature of the person who developed the SJES; and• the SJES must be reviewed and signed by the LifeBridge Health Representative.

The Contractor must not proceed with the job until the above criteria have been complied with, in addition to any other risk assessment and risk management procedures contained in relevant OH&SRequirements.

Failure To Comply

In such circumstances where the sub-contractor is non compliant to the LifeBridge Health Poli-cies, theContractor must immediately remove the nominated Personnel from the Workplace and arrange a suitable and qualified replacement, at the earliest possible opportunity. Life-Bridge Health bears noresponsibility or liability (financial or otherwise) in respect of the remov-al of the Contractor's Personnel.

LifeBridge Health may also, in accordance with any agreement it has with a Contractor, termi-nate thatagreement or fail to renew the agreement, in circumstances where any Contractor fails to comply with relevant Safety, Health and, Environmental regulations, any other applicable OH&S Requirements, andany LifeBridge Health requirement as detailed in this Contact or other applicable manuals; or any otherLifeBridge Health requirement as otherwise advised.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 INFECTION CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 01510 - 1

SECTION 01510 - INFECTION CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for infection control during construction.

B. When planning demolition, construction or renovations, Lifebridge Health will make

provisions to evaluate the project’s impact on air quality and infection control systems in

occupied buildings or spaces. Lifebridge Health will use established criteria to assess each

project for the selection and implementation of controls to minimize the impact of construction

activities.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION/ RENOVATION PROJECT TEAM RESPONSIBILITIES

A. A team responsible for the implementation and monitoring of indoor air quality and infection

control systems shall be established to assess major construction/ renovation projects. The

Construction Assessment Team (CAT) shall consist of the following at each campus.

1. Director Facilities Management.

2. Manager Infection Control.

3. Vice President Operations.

4. Facilities Manager.

5. Manager and/or Director of Department under construction/ renovation.

6. Design Architect.

7. Construction Contractor Director, Manager, Foreman or other leader.

8. Other designers, contractor/ subcontractor personnel or Lifebridge Health staff as

needed.

1.4 RISK ASSESSMENT OF PROJECTS

A. The Directors of Facilities Management or their designee shall assess every construction,

renovation, repair or installation project that causes or has the potential to cause dust, dirt and

other debris to become airborne.

B. The Directors of Facilities Management or their designees shall use the Infection Control Risk

Assessment procedures to identify what precautions must be implemented in relationship to

the type of work and Patient Risk Group.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Construction Class 1 or Class 2 projects shall only need evaluation by the Directors of Facilities

Management and not the Construction Assessment Team.

D. The Directors of Facilities shall assemble the Construction Assessment Team for all construction

Class 3 and 4 projects.

E. The team will evaluate the potential impact of the project to the patient population and ensure

adequate precautions are taken to minimize dust, dirt, debris and noise.

F. An Infection Control Construction Permit must be submitted to Lifebridge Health and

authorized before construction/ renovations can begin on all construction Class 3 and Class 4

projects.

G. This project is a Class 4 project and will follow those construction guidelines

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBCONTRACTORS

A. Infection Control Subcontractor: Rolyn Construction Corporation, 5706 Frederick Avenue,

Rockville, Maryland, 20852, (310) 468-1553.

2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Plastic Barriers: Fire retardant polyethylene sheet, minimum 6 mil thick.

B. Portable HEPA Air Scrubbers: PAS2000HC (Abatement Technologies) or equivalent, 2000 cfm

peak airflow capacity, with 12-inch diameter exhaust outlet and HEPA filters that have capacity

to remove particulates to at least 99.98%.

C. Small HEPA portable vacuum for site and clothing cleanup.

D. Exhaust Hoses: 12” heavy duty PVC Wire-Reinforced Flex Duct or better.

E. Walk Off Tack Mats: 24” x 36” as manufactured by 3M or equivalent.

F. Portable Barrier Systems For Ceiling Access: Kontrol Kube manufactured by Fiberlock

Technologies or equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 BARRIERS

A. Closed doors sealed with duct tape over each frame and door is acceptable for projects where

construction/ renovations can be contained to one room.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Barriers for construction, demolition or reconstruction that cannot be contained to a single room

must have the following features.

1. Airtight plastic barrier that extends from the floor to the ceiling with all seams sealed

with duct tape or,

2. Barriers constructed from metal studs and gypsum board and extending from the floor to

the ceiling with the joints covered or sealed.

a. All holes, gaps or openings of any type must be sealed so the barrier will be

airtight.

3. Anteroom that allow workers to remove protective clothing or vacuum existing clothing

before exiting.

4. Overlapping of entrances spaced a minimum of 2 feet apart.

3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES/ IMPLEMATION

A. Removal of debris shall be in tightly covered containers and in routes approved by Facilities

Management.

B. Tack mats or walk-off carpets shall be kept clean and changed as necessary to prevent

accumulation of dust.

C. HVAC ducts shall be capped off in a manner that is dust-tight and prohibits airflow with the

exception of one exhaust connected to the air scrubber.

D. Vacuuming outside of construction area that is not negative pressure shall only be done using

HEPA filtered vacuum.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 01510 - 1

Complete this checklist prior to beginning construction or renovation projects. Refer to the Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA) on the following pages to determine the Type of Construction Activity, Population Risk Group, and Specification Class of Infection Prevention and Control Measures Precautions that are needed.Note: Notify and obtain approval from Infection Prevention and Control (IC) and/or Safety Department before construction or renovation activity begins.

Date:

Name of Project/Project # : Location of Project/Floor:

Project Manager/Coordinator (PC) and Phone #: Projected Start and End Date:

Contractor Name: Brief Project Description:

Infection Prevention and Control (IC) Consultant and phone # :

• Check appropriate Activity and Risk Group:Yes Construction Activity Yes Population Risk Group* Adjacent Areas

Type A: Inspection and non-invasive activity Group 1: Lowest Risk (green)

Type B: Small scale, short duration, minimal to moderate dust-generating activities

Group 2: Medium Risk(yellow)

Type C: Activities that generate moderate to high levels of dust, require more than one work shift to complete

Group 3: Medium to High Risk (orange)

Type D: Major demolition, construction, and renovation activities requiring consecutive work shifts to complete; activities that generate high levels of dust.

Group 4: Highest Risk(red)

* See also Facilities floor plans for Risk Group designation (color-coded)

Circle appropriate Class of precautions:

CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITYType A Type B Type C Type D

Risk Group ↓Group 1 - Lowest (green) Class I Class II Class II Class III/ IVGroup 2 - Medium (yellow) Class I Class II Class III Class IV*Group 3 - Higher (orange) Class I Class III Class III/ IV Class IVGroup 4 - Highest (red) Class I-III

Contact IC to ensure appropriate classification

Class III/IV Class III/ IV Class IV

Will Risk Group of this area change after construction or renovation is completed?[ ] Yes [ ] No (If yes, new Risk Level __________________)

Northwest Infection Prevention and Control Risk Assessment (ICRA):


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 01510 - 2

Drawings Attached: [ ] Yes [ ] No

Step 1: Determine type of Construction Project Activity (Types A to D) using the following table.

Type A Inspection and Non-Invasive ActivitiesThese activities create minimal disturbance and include, but are not limited to:• removal of ceiling tiles for visual inspection limited to 1 tile per 50 square feet• painting (but not sanding)• wall covering, electrical trim work, minor plumbing, and other activities that do not

generate dust or require cutting of walls or access to ceilings other than for visual inspection.

Type B Small scale, short duration activities that create minimal to moderate dust. These include, but are not limited to:• access to chase spaces• cutting of walls or ceiling (where dust migration can be controlled) for installation of

minor electrical work, ventilation components, telephone wires or computer cables• sanding of walls to paint or repair small patches

Type C Activities that generate a moderate to high level of dust. These include, but are not limited to:• demolition or removal of any fixed building components or assemblies (e.g. counter

tops, cupboards, sinks) patching and sanding of walls for painting or wall covering• removal of floor coverings, ceiling tiles, and casework• new wall construction• utility work— minor duct work, electrical, HVAC, cabling, plumbing & piping that

requires disruption to water supply of more than one patient care area (e.g., >2 rooms)–in walls and above ceilings

• work that cannot be completed within a single work shift

Type D Major demolition, construction, and renovation projects that generate a high level of dust and result in unfinished or open walls, floors and ceilings.Includes, but is not limited to:• work that requires heavy demolition of walls, ceilings, floors or utility systems—

electrical, HVAC, cabling, plumbing & piping• new construction that requires consecutive work shifts to complete

Step One Determination: ___________________________

Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA): Steps for Determining Infection Control Measures Needed for Construction and Renovation


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 01510 - 3

Step 2: Determine Population Risk Group.

Using the following table, identify the areas that will be affected and determine the Population Risk Group. If more than one area or group will be affected, choose the group with the highest risk. If area is not listed here, refer to the color-coded Facilities plans.

GROUP ILowest Risk (Green)

GROUP 2Medium Risk(Yellow)

GROUP 3High Risk(Orange)

GROUP 4Highest Risk(Red)

1. Office areas2. Public areas3. Basement4. Environment

al services area

5. Facilities6. Clinical

engineering7. Credit Union8. Tele-

communications

1. Most patient care units:a. PCUb. 2A,2C, &

2Dc. 3A & 3D.d. 4A

&4B(subacute, rehab, and sleep study rooms)

e. 4C & 4D2. Breast Care

Center.3. Distribution

storage

1. Emergency Room2. 3B & 3C3. Radiology/MRI4. Nuclear Medicine5. Post-Anesthesia Care

Units6. Admission/Discharge

area7. PT 8. Cafeteria/Kitchen9. Laboratories10. Pharmacy (main and

storage areas)11. Laundry12. Outpatient Wound

Care Center13. HBOT

1. ICU2. Hematology/Oncology

Outpatients. NWHC Infusion.

3. Operating Rooms 4. Central Sterile Processing5. Cardiac Catheterization

Areas6. Ambulatory Surgery Unit.7. Dialysis (2nd floor)8. Pharmacy Admixture9. Negative Pressure Rooms

Step Two Determination:__________________________

Step 3: Determine Class of Infection Control Precautions Needed

Using the matrix below, match the Risk Group (Lowest, Medium, High, Highest) with the planned Construction Project Type (Type A, B, C, or D) to determine the Class of Precautions (I, II, III, or IV).

CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITYType A Type B Type C Type D

Risk Group ↓Group 1

Lowest (green)Class I Class II Class II Class III/ IV

Group 2 Medium (yellow)

Class I Class II Class III* Class IV*

Group 3 Class I Class III* Class III/ IV* Class IV*


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 01510 - 4

High (orange)Group 4

Highest (red)Class I-III *

Contact IC to ensure appropriate classification

Class III/IV* Class III/ IV* Class IV*

• Note: For Class III and IV activities, notify and obtain approval from Infection Prevention and Control (IC) and/or Safety Department before construction or renovation activity begins.

Step Three Determination: ______________________

Step 4: Identify Specifications for Infection Prevention and Control Precautions by Class (check all that applies)

Before/ During Construction Project After Completion of Construction Project

Cla

ss 1 q Use work methods that will minimize raising dust from

construction operations.q Immediately replace a ceiling tile displaced for visual

inspectionq Schedule water disruption during low activity periods

q Clean up any dust or dirt produced.q Use HEPA filtered vacuum cleanersq Wet mop/wipe work surfaces with disinfectantq Flush taps after water disruption

Cla

ss I

I Use precautions above PLUS: Provide active means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere such as: q Water mist work surfaces to control dust while cuttingq Block off and seal air vents in construction/renovation

area before starting workq Seal windows and unused doors with duct tape before

starting workq Seal holes, pipes, conduits, electrical outlets and

punctures to prevent escape of dust from work areaq Close ceiling access panels when unattended

q Remove and replace wet ceiling tilesq Place walk-off mats (tacky mat) at entrance to and exit

from work areasq Clean-up as needed during the project (wet mop and/or

vacuum with HEPA filtered vacuum)q If possible, minimize traffic into area.q Disable or isolate HVAC system in area where work is

being done to prevent contamination of ducts.q Monitor need to change and/or clean filters in work area

Use precautions above PLUS:q Contain construction waste before transport in

tightly covered containers.q Wet mop and/or vacuum with HEPA filtered

vacuum before leaving work area.q Inspect filter systems before being placed back

into normal operationsq Restore HVAC system to normal operation.q Flush taps after water disruption


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 01510 - 5

Before/ During Construction Project After Completion of Construction Project

Cla

ss I

II Use precautions above PLUS:q Before construction/renovation work begins, review

proposed barriers/precautions with Infection Prevention and Control and/or Safety personnel.

q Educate staff regarding the risksBefore construction/renovation work begins:q Either use control cube method (cart with plastic covering

and sealed connection to work site with HEPA vacuum), or

q Erect an impermeable dust barrier from true ceiling (includes area above false ceilings) to the floor consisting of 6 mil fire rated polyethylene or Sheetrock.

q Ensure that windows, doors, plumbing penetrations, conduits, electrical outlets and intake and exhaust vents are properly sealed with plastic and duct tape within the construction area.

q Set up HEPA-equipped air filtration units exhausted to outside to maintain negative air pressure within work site.

q Conduct smoke test of barrier dailyDuring work:q Ensure that negative pressure is maintained within work

zone and anteroom:q keep HEPA unit running 24/7 until project is completeq ensure that walls and barriers remain intact q Require personnel exiting work site to clean shoes and

remove dust from clothing before exiting (to prevent spreading dust and debris)

q Contain construction waste in tightly covered containers before transport.

Use precautions above PLUS:q Do not remove barriers from work area until

completed project is inspected by the Safety Department and Infection Control Department and thoroughly cleaned by the Environmental Services Department.

q Remove barrier materials carefully (during off-hours when possible) to minimize spreading of dirt and debris associated with construction

q Vacuum work area with HEPA filtered vacuum at end of each day and when debris accumulates.

q Wet mop area with disinfectant.q Thoroughly clean area before use or patient

admittance

Cla

ss I

V q Use precautions above PLUS:q Consult with Infection Prevention and Control and/or

Safety Personnelq Relocate patients if affectedq Construct an impermeable dust barrier that includes an

anteroom.q Require contractors to pass through the anteroom so they

can be vacuumed using a HEPA vacuum cleaner before leaving work site or they can wear cloth or paper coveralls that are removed each time they leave the work site.

q Require other personnel to wear coveralls and shoe covers when visiting the site

q Change coveralls and shoe covers each time worker exits work area

q Use precautions above as for Class III

STEP 4: IDENTIFY THE AREAS SURROUNDING THE PROJECT AREA AND THEIR APPROPRIATE RISK RISK GROUP.

Location of Unit Relative to Construction

Name of Unit Risk Group

Below


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 01510 - 6

Above

Lateral (right)

Lateral (left)

STEP 5: IDENTIFY SPECIFIC SITE OF CONSTRUCTION/RENOVATION ACTIVITY (E.G., PATIENT ROOMS, MEDICATION ROOM, ETC.)

STEP 6: IDENTIFY THOSE UTILITY SERVICES THAT MAY BE SUBJECT TO POTENTIAL OUTAGES DUE TO CONSTRUCTION/RENOVATION ACTIVITIES.

STEP 7: CONSIDER POTENTIAL RISK OF WATER DAMAGE. IS THERE A RISK DUE TO COMPROMISING ELEMENTS OF THE BUILDING ENVELOPE OR STRUCTURE? IF SO, WHAT STEPS WILL BE TAKEN TO KEEP WATER OUT OF THE BUILDING?

STEP 8: IDENTIFY CONTAINMENT MEASURES. DESCRIBE HOW THE BARRIERS WILL BE CONSTRUCTED. DESCRIBE HOW NEGATIVE PRESSURE WILL BE MAINTAINED WITHIN THE WORK ZONE. WHAT LEVEL OF FILTRATION WILL BE PROVIDED? .

STEP 9: WORK HOURS. CAN THE WORK BE PERFORMED DURING OFF-PEAK HOURS? WHAT WILL BE YOUR WORK SCHEDULE?

STEP 10: DESCRIBE THE PROCESSES AND PLANS FOR MANAGING TRAFFIC FLOW, HOUSEKEEPING, AND DEBRIS REMOVAL.

STEP 11: WILL AIR SAMPLING BE PERFORMED PRIOR, DURING OR AFTER THE PROJECT? PROVIDE DETAILS OF THE AIR-MONITORING PLAN.

STEP 12: WHO HAS THE AUTHORITY TO TEMPORARILY STOP ALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES DUE TO IMMINENT INFECTION CONTROL OR SAFETY RISKS?


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 01510 - 7

STEP 13: WILL EXCESSIVE NOISE OR VIBRATION BE GENERATED DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES? WHEN WILL THESE EVENTS OCCUR? DESCRIBE THE PLAN FOR MINIMIZING THE NOISE AND VIBRATION AND ITS IMPACT ON PATIENT CARE SERVICES.

STEP 14: DO PLANS ALLOW FOR ADEQUATE NUMBER OF PROTECTIVE ENVIRONMENT AND ISOLATION ROOMS?

STEP 15: DO THE PLANS ALLOW FOR THE REQUIRED NUMBER & TYPE OF HAND WASHING SINKS?

CRA PROJECT TEAM DOCUMENT APPROVAL:

Approved by: _________________________ ___________

End User Department Director Signature Date

Approved by: _________________________ ___________

Construction Mgmt. Director Signature Date

Approved by: _________________________ ___________

*Infection Control Officer Signature Date

Approved by: _________________________ ___________

*Safety Officer Signature Date

Approved by: _________________________ ___________

Facilities Director Signature Date

Approved by: _________________________ ___________

Contractor’s Representative Signature Date

Approved by: _________________________ ___________

Project Architect/ Engineer Signature Date

Approved by: _________________________ ___________

*Project Manager/ Coordinator Signature Date

* Mandatory signatures required


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in

Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on

products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.

2. Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.

4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product

literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or

facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new

products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal

process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or

exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's

product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or

model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,

function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers

named in the specification.

C. Substitution: Change in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by the Contractor.


A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and

title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided at end of Section.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the

following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate

contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of

the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as

performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and

requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication

and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting

test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect

for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's

letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated

results.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even

if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items

that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and

other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and

to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.

5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.

6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract

Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide

specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular

requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TRADEMARKS AND NAMES

A. General: Manufacturer’s trademarks and names on manufactured and fabricated items which

will be exposed to view in completed Work are not permitted. Eliminate trademarks and

names at no additional cost to Owner. Applications for relief from this requirement will be

considered by Architect if submitted in writing with shop drawings and product data.

Architect may grant or withhold such relief at his sole discretion. Failure to apply for relief

shall constitute agreement to comply with first two sentences of this paragraph.

2.2 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,

are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used

successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict

with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or

"or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable

Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the

named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions

for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with

requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will

not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers

and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be

considered, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with

requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience

will not be considered, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product

indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or

indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.

Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics

that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable

Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named

manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",

provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's

decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution

Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect

from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with

requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's

product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable

product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with

these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the

indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.

2.4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions: Items proposed which are equally in quality and utility to those specified may be

acceptable, at Architect’s discretion, when:

1. The Drawings or Specifications do not specifically prohibit substitutions.

2. Contractor submits to Architect, within 15 calendar days after date of Agreement, a

completed “Substitution Request Form” for each proposed substitute items or material.

a. Comply with requirements of Part 1 Article Submittals.

b. Sample Substitution Request Form is included at the end of this Section.

3. Sufficient data, drawings, samples, tests, literature, or other detailed information

demonstrates to Architect that proposed substitution is not less than equal in quality and

utility to the material specified.

4. Architect’s acceptance does not relieve Contractor from complying with requirements of

the Contract Documents, and Contractor shall be responsible at his own expense for any

changes resulting and subsequently becoming apparent from his proposed substitutions

which affect other parts of his own work or the work of other contractors.

5. Late Proposals: Failure to propose the substitution of any product in ample time before

its scheduled installation for evaluation may be deemed sufficient cause for the denial of

the request for substitution. After the specified 15 day period, only specified items

product unavailability, verified in writing by manufacturer, will be considered as

legitimate reason for substitution request.

6. Tests: Substitutions proposed by Contractor for any material, product or equipment may

be subject to such tests as will determine its quality.

a. Handling, testing, and inspection costs pertaining to thereto shall be paid by the

Contractor.

b. All such tests shall be made upon the request of the Contractor and Architect.

7. Added Costs: Contractor shall pay any added costs caused by a substitution proposed by

the Contractor.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


8. Proposal: Constitutes representation that Contractor:

a. Has investigated proposed product and determine that it meets or exceeds the

quality level of specified product.

b. Shall provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product.

c. Shall coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be

required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.

d. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which ay subsequently

become apparent.

e. Shall reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval

by authorities.

f. Shall provide all cost savings to Contract Sum as credits.

g. Shall provide specified product, material, or system should substitution be

rejected, at no change in Contract Sum.

9. Irregular Proposals: Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or

implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request,

or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.

10. Architect’s Duties:

a. Review Contractor’s proposal when complete to determine acceptability. Architect

reserves the right to reject proposals due to insufficient information or failure to

conform to requirements of Contract Documents.

b. Notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.




OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

TO: HORD COPLAN MACHT, INC.

PROJECT: NORTHWEST HOSPITAL – OR RENOVATIONS BID PACKAGE 2

We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item:

1. Section______________________________________________________________

2. Specified Team________________________________________________________

3. Proposed Substitution (Mfg., Type, Model, etc.)

_____________________________________________________________________

B. Complete all of the following:

1. Does this substitution offer the Owner a cost credit (including costs for changes by other

trades)? ___________________ How much?

______________________________________________________________________

2. Does this substitution offer earlier delivery or less construction time? _______________

How much and why? _____________________________________________________

3. How does substitution affect any dimensions, layout, or details of other trades as shown

on the Drawings?

______________________________________________________________________

4. What are the specific affect any dimensions, layout, or details of other trades as shown on

the Drawings?

______________________________________________________________________

C. Following items are attached as applicable. Check if attached.

1. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts and technical data.

2. Laboratory test or performance results.

3. Drawings and wiring diagrams of the proposed product.

4. Drawings and description of changes required by other trades.

5. Samples.

6. Manufacturer’s warrantee and maintenance instructions. _______


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


D. The undersigned agrees to pay for all additional review, design, testing, changes in the contract

documents, and construction as a result of the acceptance of this substitution at no cost to

Owner.

E. Submitted by (Firm) ____________________________________________________________

Signature __________________________________________________ Date _____________

Accepted _____ Rejected _____ Revise and Resubmit

See Attached


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of

the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Installation of the Work.

3. Cutting and patching.

4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.

5. Progress cleaning.

6. Starting and adjusting.

7. Protection of installed construction.

8. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 1 Section “Infection Control During Construction Activities” for special

procedures required to protect air quality and infection control systems.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the

Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where

indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.

c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are

to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit

to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control

of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

D. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for

preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify

Architect promptly.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm).

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products

in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated

requirements.

G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate

size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned

with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify

size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver

such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous.

3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by

Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule

for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences

in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation

conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend

preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of

the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Comply with requirements of General Conditions. Clean Project site and work areas

daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more

than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days

if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

4. Refer to Division 1 Section “Infection Control During Construction Activities” for special

requirements and procedures.

B. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

C. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed

surfaces.

D. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

E. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

F. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

G. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


H. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or

otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

I. Refer to Division 1 Section “Infection Control During Construction Activities” for special

procedures.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation

without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section

"Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired

without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components

that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1

SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the

building.

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to

cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

3. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated

construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after

installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days

before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed.

Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate

why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's

appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated

and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will

be disrupted.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to

structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations prepared, stamped, and

signed by a structural engineer registered in the State of Maryland, showing integration

of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting

and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement

of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change

their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a

manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in

increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the

following:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment.

2. Air or smoke barriers.

3. Fire-suppression systems.

4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.

5. Control systems.

6. Communication systems.

7. Conveying systems.

8. Electrical wiring systems.

9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

C. Roofing: Cutting of existing roofing in areas of roofing designated to remain shall not exceed

what is required for proper installation of the new work.

1. Unless otherwise directed or required to maintain existing warranty:

a. Cut and fold back existing roofing.

b. Cut and remove insulation and associated items.

c. Provide protection as required to maintain weather-tight conditions until new

roofing and flashings are installed.

D. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components

in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their

capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased

operational life or safety.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or

in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's

aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually

unsatisfactory manner.

F. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved

in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential

interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before

proceeding.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void

existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use

materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when

installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to

be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,

including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be

exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage

to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before

cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and

patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their

original condition.

B. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer’s

written recommendations.

1. Perform cutting and patching with Project’s current Installer for the following:

a. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

b. Finished surfaces exposed to view.

C. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and

similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements

retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original

Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size

required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover

openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill.

4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


D. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar

operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as

invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in

other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence

of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and

appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint

coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface

containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent

surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weathertight condition.

E. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely

remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1

SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of the interior walls, finishes, mechanical

and electrical systems, as indicated on the drawings.

2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Related Requirements include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for use of premises, phasing, and Owner-occupancy

requirements.

2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and

environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.

3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures.

4. Division 15 and 16 Sections for disconnecting, removal, and relocation of existing

mechanical and electrical work including equipment, piping and wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless

indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to

Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and

reinstall them where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Qualification Data: For demolition firm, professional engineer and refrigerant recovery

technician.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending

dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Use of elevator and stairs.

5. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress.

6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from

building.

C. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed

and salvaged.

D. Pre-demolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction

and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused

by selective demolition operations. File photographs with Owner’s Project Coordinator prior to

start of Work.


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work

similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification

program.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

E. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed

by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

6. Review Owner’s requirements for noise, access to adjacent areas, and Infection Control

measures.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as

far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding

with selective demolition.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing

warranties.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of

selective demolition required.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be

removed and salvaged.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.

Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing

any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of

structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.

F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings

preconstruction photographs, preconstruction videotapes and templates.

G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition

activities.

3.2 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services

and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Bypass Connections: Provide as necessary to maintain continuity of services to occupied

areas of building. Provide minimum of 5 working days advance notice to Owner if

shutdown of services is necessary during changeover. Refer to Division 1 Section

“Hospital Procedures.”

2. Services to Remain: Verify existing utility services to remain in operation during course

of Work. Cooperate with Owner in scheduling Work so there will be a minimum of

interference. Prearrange utility shutdown or temporary interruption with Owner prior to

commencement of Work.

3. Other Agencies: Contact municipal and regulatory agencies affected by and interested in

Work, including but not limited to Public Works, Water, Street, Police, Fire, and Building

Inspection. Secure necessary information and permits required, and make detailed

arrangements for smooth, safe prosecution of Work.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection included in the General Conditions

and specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as

required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction

and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of

construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations

of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete

selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting

members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering

and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover

openings to remain.

3. Use of mechanical jackhammers in any form is prohibited without specific written

permission from Owner.

4. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

5. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of

hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable

fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse

of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated

on Drawings without Architect's approval.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint

equipment to match new equipment.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials

necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their

original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to

recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum.

1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the

methods recommended by RFCI.

B. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or

otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site

and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2




OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1

SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,

but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final Completion procedures.

3. Warranties.

4. Owner’s Turnover Checklist.

5. Final cleaning.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment

for Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.

3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data.

4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing

Owner's personnel.

6. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements

for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The General Conditions define Substantial Completion and Partial Occupancy or Use. Project

Closeout is the term used in this Section to describe certain collective project requirements

indicating completion of the Work that are to be fulfilled near the end of the Contract Time in

preparation for final acceptance and occupancy of the Work by the Owner, as well as final

payment to the Contractor and the normal termination of the Contract.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. General: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion,

complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request.

B. In the progress payment request that coincides with, or is the first request following the date

substantial completion is claimed, show either 100 percent completion for the portion of the

Work claimed as “substantially complete”, or list incomplete items, the value of incomplete

work, and reasons for the Work being incomplete.

C. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these contract documents.

D. Submit a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

E. Submit special warranties, workmanship/ maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final

certifications and similar documents.

F. Obtain and submit releases required by the General Conditions and as required to enable the

Owner’s full, unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Where required,

include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases.

1. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of material and similar physical items to Owner.

2. Make the final change-over of locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner’s

personnel of the change-over in security provisions.

3. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner’s operation and

maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities and

services from the project site, along with construction tools and facilities, mock-ups, and

similar elements.

4. Complete full cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting of marred surfaces.

5. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.

G. Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of the Contractor’s request for inspection, the Architect

will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor or unfilled prerequisites.

H. Architect and Owner’s Project Coordinator will inspect the Work.

I. Should the Work be considered substantially complete:

1. The Date of Substantial Completion for the Project or designated portion of the Project

will be established.

2. Architect will prepare a list of items to be completed or corrected. Neither the list nor its

contents or omissions shall relieve the Contractor of his obligations and liabilities under

the Contract.

3. Architect will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete with

signatures of Owner and Contractor, accompanied by list of items to be completed or

corrected.

4. Contractor shall complete work list for completion or correction within a two week

period following receipt of list.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


5. Results of the completed inspection will form the initial “punch-list” for final acceptance.

6. If the work is considered not substantially complete:

a. The Architect shall immediately notify the Contractor, in writing, stating reasons.

b. The Contractor shall complete the Work, and send second written notice to the

Architect certifying that the project, or designated portion of the Project, is

substantially complete.

1.5 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. General: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the

following. List any incomplete items with request.

1. Submit the final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not

previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and

completed operations where required.

2. Evidence of Payments and Release of Liens.

3. Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims: AIA G706.

4. Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA G706A, with:

a. Consent of Surety of Final Payment: AIA G707 Separate releases of waivers of liens

for sub-contractors, suppliers and others with lien rights against property of

Owner, together with lists of those parties.

5. All submittals shall be duly executed before delivery to Architect.

6. Final adjustment of Accounts.

7. Submit final statement of accounting to Architect.

8. Statement shall include the following:

a. Original Contract Sum.

b. Additions and deductions resulting from:

1) Previous Change Orders.

2) Cash Allowances.

3) Unit Prices.

4) Other Adjustments.

5) Deductions for uncorrected Work.

6) Penalties and Bonuses.

7) Deductions for Reinspection Payments.

8) Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.

9) Previous Statements.

10) Sum Remaining Due.

9. Contractor will prepare final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract

Sum not previously made by Change Orders.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


10. Submit certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, that Project has been

inspected for compliance with Contract Documents and that equipment and systems

have been tested in the presence of Owner’s Project Coordinator and are operational.

11. Submit certified copy of the Architect’s final punchlist of itemized work to be completed

or corrected, stating that each item has been completed, resolved or accepted and has

been endorsed and dated by the Architect.

12. Submit consent of surety.

13. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements.

14. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, damage or settlement survey, and

similar final record information.

B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect, Consulting Engineers, and Owner’s Project Coordinator

will reinspect the Work within 14 days after receipt of the Contractor’s notice that the work,

including punch-list items resulting from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for

these items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances that are acceptable to

the Architect.

1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will either prepare a certificate of final

acceptance, or will advise the Contractor, in writing, of work that is incomplete or of

obligations that have not been fulfilled, but are required for final acceptance.

2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send second

written notice to Architect certifying that the Work is complete.

3. If necessary, the reinspection procedure will be repeated.

1.6 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of

the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is

indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during

construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the

Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty.

Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the

product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and

telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title

"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.7 OWNER’S TURNOVER CHECKLIST

A. Refer to sample “Turnover Checklist” at the end of this Section for checklist that will be

maintained by the Owner’s Project Coordinator.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially

hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use

products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC

levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution

regulations.

1. Cleaning products used on surfaces installed, or to be installed, inside the

weatherproofing system shall not exceed the following limits for VOC content when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), and shall not contain any

of the chemicals listed as restricted components in Division 9 Section “Interior Painting.”

a. 250 g/L.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and

maintenance program and as required by provisions of the General Conditions. Comply with

manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of

Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, and in areas disturbed by construction activities, of rubbish,

waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


b. Sweep areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign

deposits.

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site.

d. Clean exposed interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their

original condition.

e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

f. Clean insect and bird screens of debris and wipe with a solvent soaked cloth to

leave surface free of oil and grease.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.

i. Clean resilient floors and apply two coats of non-slip wax; buff with commercial

equipment.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.

Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish

mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.

l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or

that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,

including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign

substances.

n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede

operation or reduce longevity.

o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure.

p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction or that display contamination with particulate matter upon

inspection.

r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply

with requirements for new fixtures.

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Architect, remove

temporary protection devices and facilities that were installed during the course of the Work to

protect previously completed work during the remainder of the construction period.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris

or excess materials on Owner’s property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous

materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of

lawfully.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


Turnover Check list

Building Name: _______________________________________ Project ID Number:

Address: _______________________________________ Project Coordinator:

City / State: ________________________________

No. Item Date Received Responsible Party / Remarks1 Request for Inspection for Substantial

Completion

2 Identify required attendees at the punchlist walk through

3 Progress Payment identifying 100% completion

4 Appliance/Equipment Warranties & the In-staller & Manufacturer Contact Names & Con-tact Info

5 Attic stock quantities & storage locations.

6 Specified tools & spare parts & storage loca-tions.

7 Final changeover of locks and keys to Work area.

8 Keys to areas where client maintained equipment is located, with hardware & key-ing schedule

9 Final City Inspections Documents / Cer-tificates of Occupancy

10 Project Directory – Designers, General Con-tractors and Sub-Contractors, Landlord / On-Site Management Co, Etc.

11 Contractor’s Project Record Documents toinclude annotated MEP/Architectural Dwgs

12 ME&P Operation & Maintenance Manuals, in-cluding warranties

13 Copy of Submittals received by theEngineer of Record, all approved Shop Draw-ings, Equipment Submittals, Catalog cuts & Test & Balance Reports.

14 Training for FM staff on Mechanical, Electrical & Fire Alarm Systems and Equipment

15 Final Lien Waiver Release (unconditional) from General Contractor & all Sub- Contractors

16 Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


17 Consent of Surety to Final Payment

18 Certificates of Insurance for products and com-pleted operations

19 Evidence of final, continuing insurance cov-erage

20 Final statement of accounting including Change Orders, allowances, unit prices, and other adjustments

21 Certification that equipment & systems are tested and operational.

22 Final Panel Schedules with circuits iden-tified (Electric, Voice, Data).

23 Copy of the Final Punch List with ap-propriate Sign-Off.

24 Final Certificate of Occupancy

25 Coordination with Contract Manager to sub-mit all Correspondence, Meeting Minutes, Change Orders, RFI’s, Addenda, Safety Viola-tions, ICRA, & ISLMs

26 Record set of Plan & Specifications: Architec-tural, Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical & Structural Record Construction Documents & CADD files

27 Finish Book – ie. Paint, carpet, Ceiling Tiles, Fur-niture, Lighting, Etc. Include Samples & all maintenance & cleaning instructions if availa-ble. Also require electronic files of construction Documents

28 Contractor’s Final Payment Release

The above items have been completed and turned over as of: Date:

General Contractor: ______________________________________

Project Coordinator:________________________________________

Facility Management Representative:_________________________

• Turnover Check list Page 2


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1

SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record

Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Submittals.

B. Related requirements include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents

of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents:

1. At completion of project (prior to final payment), deliver Record Documents.

2. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, containing:

a. Date.

b. Project Title and Lifebridge Project Number.

c. Contractor’s name and address.

d. Title and number of each Record Document.

e. Certification that each document submitted is complete and accurate.

f. Signature of Contractor or an authorized representative.

3. Number of Copies: Submit marked-up Record Drawings in the number of copies

required by the General Conditions.

4. Print and submit each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


5. Submit Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

6. Submit a copy of each Product Data submittal.

a. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance

manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of

submittal as Record Product Data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT, GENERAL

A. Maintain at job site, one current copy of:

1. Contract Drawings.

2. Project Manual.

3. Addenda.

4. Shop Drawings.

5. Product Data and Samples.

6. Change Orders and Other Modifications to Contract.

7. Field Test Records.

B. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.

C. File in accordance with Project Manual’s Table of Contents.

D. Label each document “PROJECT RECORD” in 2 inch high printed letters.

2.2 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:

1. Locations of various elements of structure in relation to established bench marks and

lines shall be done by a registered surveyor.

2. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level.

3. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenance referenced to

permanent surface improvements.

4. Location of internal utilities and appurtenance concealed in construction referenced to

visible and accessible features of structure.

5. Field changes of dimension and detail.

6. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.

7. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain a record set of blue- or black-line prints of contract drawings and

shop drawings in a clean, undamaged condition. Mark-up the set of record documents to show

the actual installation where the installed work varies substantially from the work as originally

shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing the actual “field” condition fully


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


and accurately; however, where shop drawings are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference

at the corresponding location on the working drawings. Give particular attention to concealed

work that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.

1. Mark up new information which is known to be important to the Owner, but for some

reason was not shown on either contract drawings or shop drawings.

2. Note related Change-Order number where applicable.

3. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover

sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set.

4. Legibly record the following:

a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to survey data.

b. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances

referenced to permanent surface improvements.

c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction

referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.

d. Field changes of dimension and detail.

e. Changes made by Change Order and Field Order.

f. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

2.3 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Specification and Addenda: Legibly mark up each Section to record:

1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of

equipment actually installed.

2. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.

3. Other matters not originally specified.

2.4 RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Maintain as Record Documents. Legibly annotate

to record changes made after review.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project

Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as

they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project

Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to

Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1

SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes

systems and equipment.


1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for

operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance

manuals.

3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for

operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual

requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual

Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of the Section submittals. Submit reviewed

manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals

are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to

revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file: Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.

Submit on digital media acceptable to Owner.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable

item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance

directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittal.

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose

title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.

C. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting

inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance

directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content

of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Submittal: Submit the number of copies required by the General Conditions in final form

at least 15 days before final inspection.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by

more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information

furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and

maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to

desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.

2. List of systems.

3. List of equipment.

4. Table of contents.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation

and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For

pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance

manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,

identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the

Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to

ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building

Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for

each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a

system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.

2. Table of contents.

3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.

6. Name and address of Architect.

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed

to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project

Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each

volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear

plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to

hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize

data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-

reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper

operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.

Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

c. All volumes shall be of the same color and size.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each

tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of

equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification

Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic

software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and

use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in

manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of

contents, and drawing locations.

F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic

PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable

file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file

names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names

used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and

subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so

that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a

readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on

opening file.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Type of emergency.

2. Emergency instructions.

3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

2. Flood.

3. Gas leak.

4. Water leak.

5. Power failure.

6. Water outage.

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,

and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for

notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Control diagrams.

8. Piped system diagrams.

9. Precautions against improper use.

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routine and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.

Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and

sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and

related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance

service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each

product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance

service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements as indicated

in the General Conditions, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and

service with standard time allotment.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local

sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that

provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies

indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment

not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include

only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each

product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a

tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.

Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and

where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment

or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence

and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record

Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section

"Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation

and maintenance documentation.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 1

SECTION 01820 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.


1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for

preinstruction conferences.

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training

for products in those Sections.


A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration

and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and

instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each

training module.

1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating

maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for

this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful

learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and

maintenance procedures and training.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.

2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction.

4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction

time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance

data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules

for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification

Sections, and as follows:

1. Motorized doors, including overhead coiling doors.

2. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems.

3. Medical equipment, including medical gas equipment and piping.

4. Refrigeration systems, including chillers, condensers, pumps and distribution piping.

5. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems and terminal

equipment and devices.

6. HVAC instrumentation and controls.

7. Electrical service and distribution, including panelboards, uninterruptible power supplies

and motor controls.

8. Lighting equipment and controls.

9. Communication systems, including intercommunication, surveillance, voice and data

equipment.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include

a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each

module, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

c. Operating standards.

d. Regulatory requirements.

e. Equipment function.

f. Operating characteristics.

g. Limiting conditions.

h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.

b. Operations manuals.

c. Maintenance manuals.

d. Project Record Documents.

e. Identification systems.

f. Warranties and bonds.

g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Control sequences.

f. Safety procedures.

g. Instructions on stopping.

h. Normal shutdown instructions.

i. Operating procedures for emergencies.

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.

b. Checking adjustments.

c. Noise and vibration adjustments.

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.

b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Procedures for routine cleaning

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.

f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.

b. Repair instructions.

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and

training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully

operational facility using the actual equipment in place. Conduct training using final operation

and maintenance data submittals.

D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove

instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial

training use.


HCM Project # 212021.00 NORTHWEST HOSPITAL

OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 1

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

3. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5

inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.

2. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate

type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include

physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent

testing agency.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content

of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of

treatment.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with International

Building Code in effect for Project:

1. Preservative-treated wood.

2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.

3. Powder-actuated fasteners.

4. Expansion anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-

retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification

marking is representative of the material tested.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber

from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air

circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency

is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed

sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior

construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC3b for exterior construction

not in contact with the ground.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC

Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar

members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact

with masonry or concrete.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with

requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-

test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test

method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame

spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of

significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and

with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the

burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to

accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where

indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where

exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry

plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Blocking above ceiling.

2. Blocking within return air plenums.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Blocking within walls.

4. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of

other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

4. Cants.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 3 grade lumber with 19

percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.

3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber

of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will

interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to

eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard panels, select boards with no knots

capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, fire-

retardant treated, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified

in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,

or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating

complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

D. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads

and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

1. Design Standard: Grabber Construction Products; John Wagner Associates.

2. Type and Size: To suit stud, track, or channel gauge and as follows:

a. Where Overlaid with Gypsum Board or Other Finish Material:

1) For Fastening to 20 Gauge and Lighter Material: No. 8 by 9/16-inch Wafer

Head Streaker.

2) For Fastening to 18 Gauge and Heavier Material: No. 8 by 1/2-inch Wafer

Head Driller.

b. Where Not Overlaid With Finish Material:

1) For Fastening to 20 Gauge and Lighter Material: No. 8 by 9/16-inch Hex

Head Streaker.

2) For Fastening to 18 Gauge and Heavier Material: No. 8 by ½-inch Hex Head

Driller.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);

with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in

unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as

determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and

inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and

ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

3. Design Standard: Kwik Bolt 3; Hilti, Inc.; wedge type stud expansion anchor system.

H. Powder Actuated Devices:

1. Design Standard: Hilti, Inc. Modified AISI 1060 and AISI 1070 steel (austempered)

hardness 59-61 Rockwell C; zinc plating complying with ASTM B633, SC1, Type III.

2. Type and Size: Dome head nail with smooth shank, 0/145-inch diameter; X-DN1

fastener.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit

carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers,

blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,

specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections

where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels.

Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities

requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with

classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated

and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96

inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately

fitted to close furred spaces.

E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with

fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with

function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or

optimum joint arrangement.

F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated

lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.

2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying

with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

H. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully

penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.

Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails

snug but do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to

shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate

locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with

surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite

protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous

rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution

by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1

SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate cabinets.

2. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.

3. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.


1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and

hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction

before woodwork installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for

installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork

installation.

B. Solid-surfacing-material is a nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the same

composition throughout, consisting of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler, and

pigment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories

and finishing materials and processes.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale

details, attachment devices, and other components.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Show details full size.

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets and other

items installed in architectural woodwork.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Plastic laminates.

2. PVC edge material.

3. Thermoset decorative panels.

4. Solid-surfacing materials.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and

surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied

to 1 edge.

2. Thermoset decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color,

pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge.

3. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches (150 mm) square.

4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. Product

Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

E. Mock-Ups:

1. Provide mock-up of one complete OR Nurse Desk for review and approval by Architect.

If mock-up is approved, it shall be accepted as final construction.


A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program

certificates.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-

service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork

Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,

finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that

woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard

and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such

selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated,

provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined

by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate

markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or,

where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be

concealed from view after installation.

1. Solid-Surfacing-Material Wall Cladding: Class A surface burning characteristics as

determined by testing identical products in accordance with UL 723 (ASTM E84):

a. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in



A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork

have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than

installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with

requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative

humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress

to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field

measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to

ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be

supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS

A. Fabricators: Provide interior architectural woodwork by a firm pre-approved by Lifebridge

Health.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each

type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated..

B. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2-2009, Grade 155, made with binder

containing no urea formaldehyde.

3. Hardwood Plywood: Hardwood plywood panels HPVA HP-1, Type 1 Exterior, made

with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.

C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused,

melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components

with exposed or semiexposed edges.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as

required by woodwork quality standard.

Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure

decorative laminates as indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.

E. Solid-Surfacing Material: Cast, nonporous, filled polymer of composite construction with

through body colors complying with ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, with minimum physical and

performance properties specified.

1. Performance Characteristics:

a. Tensile Strength: 6,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638.

b. Flexural Strength: 10,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790.

c. Hardness: 85 minimum on the Rockwell “M” scale when tested in accordance

with ASTM D 785.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in

Finish Schedule on Drawings.

3. Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with

requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-

test-response characteristics specified.

1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced

woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise

adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from

untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL,

U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance

requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment

type:

1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying.

2. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation.

3. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and

drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from

drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated

woodwork.

4. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2,

made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at

time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed

index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by SierraPine

Ltd.; Medite Div.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural

cabinets.

B. Hinges: Five knuckle, 2-3/4-inch casework hinge for overlay doors.

1. Product: No. 374; Rockford Process (RPC).

2. Finish: US26D.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.

1. Manufacturer: The Stanley Works, Hafele, Ives Hardware.

2. Finish: US26D.

D. Catches: Magnetic catches.

1. Product: No. 325; Ives Hardware.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports:

1. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Double slot heavy-duty standard, with heavy-duty double

bracket.

a. Product: Series 85 standards; Series 185 brackets; Knape & Vogt.

b. Finish: Anochrome.

2. Shelves in Cabinets: Nickel-plated zinc shelf supports with shelf fixing lugs.

a. Product: No. 282.24.711; Hafele.

b. Four rows of 5mm diameter holes at 1 inch o.c., full height in each cabinet.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.

1. Box Drawer Slides: 90-lb. minimum capacity, for drawers not more than 6 inches (150

mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide.

a. Product: No. 3834C; Accuride International, Inc.

2. File Drawer Slides: 200-lb minimum capacity.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Product: No. 3640; Accuride International, Inc.

3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45-lb. minimum capacity, for drawers not more than 3 inches (75

mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide.

a. Product: No. 2006; Accuride International, Inc.

G. Door and Drawer Locks: Disc tumbler cylinder cam locks.

1. Product: No. C8053; National Division, Compx Security Products.

2. Alternate Product: No. DCN1; Olympus Lock, Inc.

3. Finish: Nickel.

H. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 3-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets

and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

I. Countertop Support Bracket and Wall Angle

1. Countertop Support Bracket, Product: EH Series; Rakks

a. Installation: Surface mounted or Flush mounted as indicated on drawings

b. Finish: Mill Aluminum

2. Wall Angle, Product: Cleat Stock; Rakks

a. Finish: Mill Aluminum

J. Stainless Steel Tubular Leg.

1. Type: Heavy Duty Leg, with leveler foot to allow height adjustment for uneven floors.

National Sanitation Foundation listed. Welded mounting plate for attachment to

underside of countertop substrate.

2. Height: As indicated on the drawings.

3. Leg Diameter: 4-inch OD.

4. Finish: Stainless Steel; 304 food grade

5. Load Rating: 2000 lbs vertical minimum.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to

less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.

Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior

walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead

expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

1. Wood Screws: Cadmium-plated steel.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. Sheet Metal Screws: Cadmium-plated steel.

3. Sheet Metal Angles: Galvanized steel sheet.

C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde for plastic-laminate-

faced casework.

D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with

the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA

Method 24):

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.

2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate and Wood Veneer: Unpigmented contact cement or

contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium grade interior

woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood

moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation

areas.

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before

fabrication.

D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius

indicated for the following:

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm)

Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch

(1.5 mm).

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum

extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for

shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for

scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will

be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.

Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check

measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings

before disassembling for shipment.

F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing

fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or

roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts

to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish, unless indicated to be

finished.

2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Grade: Premium.

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with

the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.

2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.

3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.

4. Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern,

and finish.

5. Substrate: Medium Density Fiberboard unless otherwise noted.

D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick,

matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide

surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels.

3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative

laminate, Grade BKL.

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products indicated in Finish Schedule on

Drawings.

G. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments

and drawers, unless located directly under tops.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


H. Provide continuous 1-1/2-inch by 4-inch hardwood lumber base for all base cabinets.

I. Provide hardwood plywood for all cabinets panels in contact with the floor. Seal the bottom

edge of all cabinet panels not clad with plastic laminate.

2.8 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Premium.

B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products as indicated in Finish Schedule

on Drawings.

D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material

manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.

2. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application.

E. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings in shop.

F. Substrate: Medium Density Fiberboard unless otherwise noted.

2.9 SHOP FINISHING

A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.

B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer

only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling

countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing

architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to

concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain

surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require

backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset

decorative panels.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and

complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2

for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for

fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.

Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400

mm).

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish

at cuts.

E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply

with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives

used to install woodwork.

F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure

with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.

Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush

with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide

unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or

other variation from a straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.

3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16

inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing

or metal framing behind wall finish toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing

behind wall finish.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other

supports into underside of countertop.

1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with

manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.

Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or

other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and

to walls with adhesive.

4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section

"Joint Sealants."

I. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes

with matching filler where exposed.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual

defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform

appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Formed Products:

a. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.

b. Formed equipment support flashing.

c. Sheet metal flashing and trim associated with the roof repairs at all penetrations in

the roofing system. This work is coordinated with roofing work to maintain the

existing roofing warranty.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,

structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure

due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain

watertight.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements

from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each

manufactured product and accessory.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim,

including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between

shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in

Project.

2. Site specific details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes,

seams, and dimensions.

3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including

layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.

5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of

expansion and contraction.

6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable.

7. Details of special conditions.

8. Details of connections to adjoining work.

9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches

(1:10).

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory

indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size

indicated below:

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including

finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other

attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous

Fabrications: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and

other exposed accessories.

3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance

manuals.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal

flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of

successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose

work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of

roofing materials, roof accessories, and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and

attachment to structural members.

4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and

condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing.

5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might

cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials

away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to

sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing

and trim installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish

required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply

coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'

written instructions.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry

film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed.

1. Finish: 4 (polished directional satin).

2. Surface: Smooth, flat.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,

separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal

flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or

manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and

bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by

manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or

factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for

metal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by

stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant

tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining

tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type,

grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and

remain watertight.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,

metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to

greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with

performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and

metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form

hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not

allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to

a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and

within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric

sealant.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion

joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl

sealant concealed within joints.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or

from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less

than thickness of metal being secured.

G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams,

and solder.

H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with

elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.

I. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.5 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.

2. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.

B. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:



C. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:



D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,

dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to


C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.

B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to

minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle

fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in

place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding

rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to

complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,

neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating

sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two

fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling,

and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated.

6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other

permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating

where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood

substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a

course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600

mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would

not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less

than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than

recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than

1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient

temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21

deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting

proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-

type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section

"Joint Sealants."

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges

of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre-tinning where

pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder aluminum sheet.

2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into

joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for

stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning

and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning

and neutralization.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet

metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet

Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and

weather resistant.

B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top

edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base

flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.

Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend

counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of

4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of anchor

and washer at 36-inch (900-mm) centers.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation

of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to

pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with

installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to

equipment support member.

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance

of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch

(3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim

are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a

clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated

beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1

SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.

3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.


1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for firestopping of existing mechanical and electrical

penetrations in existing rated walls.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design

designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in

compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for penetration firestopping.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to

comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following

requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in

"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following

requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing

and inspecting agency.

b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations

listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate

temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when

substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural

means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration

firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according

to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-

resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items

if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire-barrier walls, smoke-barrier walls and fire

partitions.

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of

roof/ceiling assemblies.

2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated.

3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per

UL 1479.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at

0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested

according to UL 1479.

F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

G. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for

VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by

penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting

agency for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.

c. Fire-rated form board.

d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.

4. Collars.

5. Steel sleeves.

2.2 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors. Applications include insulated and non-insulated metal pipes, conduit, cable bundles,

multiple pipes, plastic pipes, and fresh and waste water pipes.

1. Product: Hilti, Inc.; CP 680-P.

B. Intumescent Plug: Flexible polyurethane foam for use in walls and floors for temporary or

permanent sealing of single or bundled cables.

1. Product: Hilti, Inc.; CP 658T.

C. Intumescent Block: Flexible polyurethane foam for use in walls and floors for sealing single or

multiple penetrations in small to large openings and temporary or permanent sealing of cables,

cable tray, insulated metallic pipe, non-insulated metallic pipe, and combustible pipe

penetrations.

1. Product: Hilti, Inc.; CP 657.

D. Intumescent Sealant: Single-component acrylic-based sealant for use in walls and floors at

penetrations for insulated metallic pipe, non-insulated metallic pipe, plastic pipes, cable

bundles or HVAC penetrations.

1. 1. Product: Hilti, Inc.; FS-ONE.

E. Silicone Sealants:

1. Silicone-based elastomeric firestop sealant for use in walls and floors at construction and

expansion joints, top-of-wall joints, metal pipes, cable bundles, and HVAC penetrations.

a. Product: Hilti, Inc.; CP 601S.

2. Self-leveling, single-component, silicone-based, firestop sealant for use in floors at

construction and expansion joints, metal pipes, cable bundles, and multiple penetrations

in small or large openings.

a. Product: Hilti, Inc.; CP 604.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


F. Pre-Formed Firestop Plugs: Mineral wool plugs and strips for use at top-of-wall joints with

fluted metal decks.

1. Products: Hilti, Inc,; CP 767 and CP 777.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting


B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to

comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign

materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable

of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles

remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that

manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not

allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining

surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be

permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove

stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during

their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths

required to achieve fire ratings indicated.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible

forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of

firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and

that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that

penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove

damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems

complying with specified requirements.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Latex joint sealants.

3. Acoustical joint sealants.


1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.

2. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters

with acoustical sealants.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers,

for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other

specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of

joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates,

shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.

5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data

that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for

adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those

submitted.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants

showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.



B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.


testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,

indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for

compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single

manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by

joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair

or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified

in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant

manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with

performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from

the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to

design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the

weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have

not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in

repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791, 795.

b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraPruf II SCS2900.

c. Pecora Corporation; 895.

d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.

B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.

b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.

b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing

representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint

substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated

by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),

Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the

preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application

indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to

producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to

promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-

sealant performance.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and

approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint

sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing

optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning

operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint

sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

c. Porcelain enamel.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of

joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or

by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after

tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for

products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or

curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to

form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure

contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal

construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a

continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at

perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's

written recommendations.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of

sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each

floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;

extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure

for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.

c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind

of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion

passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were

installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether

joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant

configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same

procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean

and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.

Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other

requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated

requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of

products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating

substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such

protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint

sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original

work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior perimeter joints between masonry and frames of doors,

windows, and louvers, pipe penetrations, etc.

1. Joint Sealant: Single component neutral curing silicone sealant.

2. Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors,

and counters.

1. Joint Sealant: Single component mildew resistant acid curing silicone sealant.


C. Joint Sealant Application: Interior joints in high-humidity areas and in Morgue, Soiled Utility

Rooms, Janitor’s Closets.

1. Joint Sealant: Single component mildew resistant acid curing silicone sealant.


D. Joint Sealant Application: Interior joints where acoustical sealant is indicated.

1. Joint Sealant: Acoustical latex sealant.

2. Sealant Color: Painted to match adjacent wall surface.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior concrete, walls, and

partitions.

1. Joint Sealant: Single component neutral curing silicone sealant.


F. Joint Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior

doors.

1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant.

2. Sealant Color: Painted to match wall surface.

G. Joint Sealant Application: All interior vertical joints not otherwise scheduled.

1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant.

2. Sealant Color: Painted to match wall surface.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2




OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 STEEL DOOR FRAMES 08110 - 1

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOOR FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal door frames.

B. Related Sections

1. Division 8 Section "Vinyl Clad Flush Wood Doors."

2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware.

3. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal door frames.

4. Division 13 Section "Radiation Protection" for lead-lined, hollow metal door frames.

5. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door

controls and operators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.



descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door frame design.

2. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

3. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

4. Details of each different wall opening condition.

5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

6. Details of accessories.

7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the

supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those

on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door frame assembly.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled

by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive

pressure according to NFPA 252.

C. Smoke and Draft Control: Fire door assemblies shall also meet requirements for a smoke and

draft control door assembly tested in accordance with UL1784. Louvers are prohibited.

Installation of smoke doors shall be in accordance with NFPA 105.

1. Labeling: Smoke door assemblies shall bear an “S” label indicating a maximum air leakage rate of 0.3 ft³/min./ft² (3 m³/min./m²) and the tested performance pressure differential of 9=0.1, 0.2, or 0.3 in. (25, 50, or 75 Pa) of water.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit

and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded

to jambs.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a

vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood

blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air

circulation.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before

fabrication.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor

bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.

2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.

3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.

4. Kewanee Corporation (The).

5. Pioneer Industries, Inc.

6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for

exposed applications.

B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation;

mill phosphatized.

C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

E. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-

mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos

fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.

2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded.

3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick (16gage) steel sheet.

B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.

2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded.

3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch-thick (16 gage) steel sheet.

4. Frames for Doors Openings Wider Than 4 feet: 0.067-inch-thick (15 gage) steel sheet.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates

from same material as frames.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042

inch (1.0 mm) thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,

and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16

mm) high unless otherwise indicated.

B. Terminated Stops: Where indicated on interior door frames, terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm)

above finish floor with a 45-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet

closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground

smooth and flush with frame.

1. Provide terminated stops where indicated.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where

practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project

site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal

as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,

flush, and invisible.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be

grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot

welds per anchor.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as

follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.

3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.

4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and

mounted in metal-stud partitions.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as

follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or

hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the

Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door

Hardware."


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.

4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 16 Sections.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and

pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer

manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite

prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame

installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,

filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed

faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,

alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line

parallel to plane of wall.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line

from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in

place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with

ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving

surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.

c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.

d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

e. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

3. Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and

wall construction with grout.

4. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead

structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to

other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for

securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to

frame jamb members.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal

line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final

inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace

defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after

installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint

according to manufacturer's written instructions.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 VINYL CLAD FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08212 - 1

SECTION 08212 – VINYL CLAD FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with vinyl clad faces.

2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Division 8 Section "Steel Door Frames" for hollow metal door frames.

2. Division 13 Section “Radiation Protection” for lead-lined doors and lead-lined vision

panels in doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction

and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;

construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and

other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.

3. Indicate doors to be factory finished.

4. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200

by 250 mm), for each material and finish.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,

"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a

qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive

pressure according to NFPA 252.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

D. Face material may be light sensitive. Protect doors from exposure to natural and artificial light

after delivery.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient

temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the

construction period.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-

by-2134-mm) section.

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

(0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.

c. Delamination.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair

or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT

A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. Eggers Industries, eiDOOR.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products

that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.

C. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 or

M-2, except for density.

2. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores

instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

D. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).

b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).

E. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-

protection rating indicated.

F. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced

quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability

approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as follows:

a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking.

b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.

c. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates.

d. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved

screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for

exposed edges.

2.3 FLUSH DOOR FACING WITH VINYL

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Vinyl Clad: InPro Sanparrel (Rigid PVC) or Sanparrel GT (non-PVC), 0.040 face

thickness, color: 0539 Beechnut.

2. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.

3. Core: Particleboard.

4. Core for Fire-Rated Doors, 45-minute and higher: Mineral core.

5. Construction: Five plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.

6. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of

referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply

with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,

DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment

before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for

pairs of fire-rated doors.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,

including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,

before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Finish doors at factory.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing

characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and

the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at

Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.

Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no

evidence of repair or refinishing.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 1

SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:

1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with gypsum

board beads for concealed flange installation.


a. J.L. Industries; div. of Activar Construction Products Group; Model WB.

b. Karp Associates, Inc.; Model KDW.

c. Milcor Inc.; Style DW.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


d. Nystrom, Inc.; NW Series.

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.

4. Door Size: As indicated on Drawings.

5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage.

a. Finish: Factory prime.

6. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.

7. Hinges: Continuous piano.

8. Hardware: Lock.

C. Hardware:

1. Lock: Cylinder.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel

sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for

installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam

marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish

attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports

indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and

gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames.

2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.

3. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when

closed.

1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:

1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,

universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Provide access doors and frames in locations where access is required to mechanical, plumbing,

fire protection, and electrical equipment, devices, and controls.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 ALUMINUM SLIDING SELF CLOSING SERVICE WINDOW 08580 - 1

SECTION 08580 - ALUMINUM SLIDING SELF CLOSING SERVICE WINDOW

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes:

1. Aluminum, heavy-duty commercial sliding service windows as indicated in

drawings and in sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s technical product data substantiating that products

comply.

B. Shop drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of windows. Include details,

elevations and installation requirement of finish hardware and cleaning.

C. Certification: Provide printed data in sufficient detail to indicate compliance with the

contract documents.


A. Deliver windows crated to provide protection during transit and job storage

B. Inspect windows upon delivery for damage. Unless minor defects can be made to meet

the Architect’s specifications and satisfaction, damaged parts should be removed and

replaced.

C. Store windows at building site under cover in dry location.


A. Field measurements: Check opening by accurate field measurement before fabrication.

Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with

construction progress to avoid delay of work.

1.5 WARRANTY

All material and workmanship shall be warranted against defects for a period of one (1)

year from the original date of purchase.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S

A. Basis of design: Design is based on aluminum (SCDW) series, self closing deluxe sliding

service window manufactured by C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. (800) 421-6144

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Frames: 4-1/2” Aluminum frame modules shall be constructed of 6063-T5 extruded

aluminum. Replacement and servicing of glass shall be from the clerk side of the window

by means of an access panel in the top header and does not require the removal of the

frame from the opening. Window glides on top-hung heavy-duty ball bearing slides and

self closes when left unattended. Poly-pile weather stripping and self-latching handle.

With thumbturn lock and locked/unlocked indicator. Overall frame sizes are to be in

accordance with the contract drawings.

B. Finish: Kynar painted. Architect to select from manufacturer’s standard colors.

C. Glazing: ½” thick, tempered glass.

D. Options:

1. Stainless steel sill #SCDW1803

2. Without screen

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install window in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and

recommendations. Repair damaged units as directed (if approved by the manufacturer

and the architect) or replace with new units.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean frame and glazing surfaces after installation, complying with requirements

contained in the manufacturer’s instructions. Remove excess glazing sealant compounds,

dirt or other substances.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction

period to ensure that all the windows do not incur any damage or deterioration, other

than normal weathering, at the time of acceptance.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2




OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

b. Other doors to the extent indicated.

2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.

3. Electrified door hardware.


1. Division 8 Section "Steel Door Frames" for astragals provided as part of fire-rated labeled

assemblies and for door silencers provided as part of hollow-metal frames.

2. Division 8 Section "Vinyl Clad Flush Wood Doors" provided as part of fire-rated labeled

assemblies.

3. Division 8 Section “Automatic Door Operators” for automatic openers.

4. Division 13 Section "Radiation Protection" for lead-lined astragals provided as part of

fire-rated labeled assemblies.

5. Division 16 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage

wiring work.

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating,

purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.

1. Cylinders for locks specified in other Sections.

2. Permanent cores to be installed by Owner.


A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions

of individual components and profiles, and finishes.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following:

a. System schematic.

b. Point-to-point wiring diagram.

c. Riser diagram.

d. Elevation of each door.

2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm access control security

and building control system.

3. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door

hardware.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finish, color, and texture required for each type of door

hardware indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: Submit minimum 2-by-4-inch (51-by-102-mm) plate samples of each

type of finish required, except primed finish.

E. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size.

Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Samples before,

or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets.

1. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain

undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final

check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying

requirements.

F. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure

proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as

in the Contract Documents.

b. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door

and frame.

2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware

item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.

3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening

including name and manufacturer.

4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on

floor plans and in door and frame schedule.

6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

7) Mounting locations for door hardware.

8) Door and frame sizes and materials.

9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location,

sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.

a) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions

that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to

enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to

enter; unauthorized person wants to exit.

10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and

frame.

c. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date,

particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of

other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,

Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other

information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's

final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key

set to unique door designations.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, signed by product manufacturer.

1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors

complies with listed fire door assemblies

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks latches and closers.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.

Include final hardware and keying schedule.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing

a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work

to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.

3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard

units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer,


1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door

hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical

modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings

indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. After 5 minutes into the test, neutral

pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1016 mm) or less above the sill.

D. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner, Contractor,

and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware

Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing

door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required,

and plans for future expansion.

2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.

3. Requirements for key control system.

4. Address for delivery of keys.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to

Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets,

and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or

package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots with floor construction. Cast anchoring

inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in

Division 3.

B. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to

be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to

confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply

with indicated requirements.

C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware

with connections to power supplies fire alarm system and detection devices access control

system security system and building control system.

D. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing

construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify

existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and

to provide for proper operation.

1.9 WARRANTY


replace components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.


a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:

a. Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and

removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full

maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive

maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and

adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as

those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and

door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named

manufacturers' products.

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of

operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum

requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets"

Article.

C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.2 HINGES, GENERAL

A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches (1524 mm).

2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches (1549 to 2286 mm).

3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches (2311 to 3048 mm).

4. For doors with heights more than 120 inches (3048 mm), provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge

for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height greater than 120 inches (3048 mm).

B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into

wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

C. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Interior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.

2. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.

D. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings:

1. Hospital Tips: Slope ends of hinge barrel.

2. Safety Stud: Designed for stud in one leaf to engage hole in opposing leaf.

3. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove

in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging corridor

doors with locks.

4. Corners: Square.

E. Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.

2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.

3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.

4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors

wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

2.3 HINGES

A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.

B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).

2. Hager Companies (HAG).

3. Lawrence Hardware, Inc. (LB).

4. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK).


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


5. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).

2.4 PIVOTS AND PIVOT HINGES

A. Pivots: BHMA A156.4.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).

2. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America

(DAH).


4. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK).

5. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).

2.5 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,

comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans

with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the

wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).

B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not

require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or

special knowledge for operation.

C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA A156.25.

D. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Wrought.

2. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought.

3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

4. Lockset Designs: Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; ML2000 LWA Series.

E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire

doors, and as follows:

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw.

F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with

curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply

with the following:

1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.

B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A156.13; Series 1000.

1. Manufacturer: Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group

company (CR).

2.7 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS

A. General: BHMA A156.23; electrically powered, of strength and configuration indicated; with

electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door.

1. Type: Full exterior or full interior, as required by application indicated.

2. Strength Ranking: 1200 lbf. minimum.

3. Inductive Kickback Peak Voltage: Not more than [53] [0] V.

B. Manufacturers:

1. DynaLock Corp. (DLC).

2. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

3. Schlage Locknetics; and Ingersoll Rand Company (LSE).

4. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SMC).

5. Security Door Controls (SDC).

2.8 DOOR BOLTS

A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire

doors, and as follows:

1. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw.

B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

C. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; designed for mortising into door edge.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


b. Door Controls International, Inc. (DCI)

c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

d. Trimco (TRM).

D. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3; designed for mortising into door

edge.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Door Controls International, Inc. (DCI).

b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

c. Trimco (TRM).

2.9 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless

steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Six.

2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.

C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset.

1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other

manufacturers' cylinders. Provide interchangeable core for push-button combination

locks only.

D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:

1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of

construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.

Provide 10 construction master keys.

a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.

b. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

E. Manufacturer: Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company

(CR).

2.10 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A.

Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. No Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by change keys only.

2. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key.

3. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.

4. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include

the following notation:

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.

b. Master Keys: Five.

2.11 OPERATING TRIM

A. Standard: BHMA A156.6.

B. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manufacturers:


2. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).

2.12 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS

A. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic

or self-latching bolts are used.

1. Material: Polished brass or bronze, with strike plate.

2.13 CLOSERS

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices

are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."

1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to

door.

b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not

require more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open

door to minimum required width.

C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written

recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and

anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions

and requirements for opening force.

D. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-

public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturer: Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group

company (CR).

E. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3.

2.14 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Size: As specified in door hardware sets.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws.

C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from 0.050-

inch-thick stainless steel.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).

b. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).

c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).

2.15 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16.

B. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum

diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

C. Manufacturers:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH).

2. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America

(DAH).

3. Glynn-Johnson; and Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ)

4. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

5. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).

6. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).

7. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; and ASSA ABLOY Group company (SAR)

2.16 DOOR GASKETING


B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,

light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive

fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold or floor when door

is closed.

C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for

gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.

D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by

a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-control

ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.

E. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings

indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. After 5 minutes into the test, neutral

pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1016 mm) or less above the sill.

F. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily

replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

G. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.

H. Manufacturers:


2. National Guard Products (NGP).


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (PEM).

4. Zero International (ZRO).

2.17 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE

A. Boxed Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and regulated;

voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and listed and labeled

for use with fire alarm systems.

2.18 FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method

indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.

Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and

BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if

different from specified standard.

B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally

prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to

commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum

fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match

surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,

except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for

installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means

of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door

and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:

a. Mortise hinges to doors.

b. Strike plates to frames.

c. Closers to doors and frames.

3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications unless door blocking is

provided:

a. Closers to doors and frames.

b. Surface-mounted exit devices.

4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended

Fasteners for Wood Doors."


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.19 FINISHES

A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.



C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to

minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and

other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring

connections before electrified door hardware installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.

1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to

ANSI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless

otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors."


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface

protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install

surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible

ceilings. Verify location with Architect.

1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to

ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to

operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating

and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep

period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds

to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the

door.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

Operating Rooms – Lead-Lined Single Door

1 Set 195 x ¾” offset x US26D (RIX)

1 Set ML19 x ¾” offset x US26D (RIX)

1 Latchset ML2010 x LWA x 626 (CR)

1 Closer DC6000 x M54 x M71 x 626 (CR)

1 Armor Plate 34” x 2”LDW x US32D


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1 Mop Plate 8” x 1”LDW x US32D

3 Silencers GJ64 (GJ)

1 Wall Stop 407CVX x US26D (IVS)

Operating Rooms – Lead-Lined Double Doors

2 Sets 195 x ¾” offset x US26D (RIX)

2 Sets ML19 x ¾” offset x US26D (RIX)

2 Pulls 8100 Series x US26D (IVS)

2 Push Plates 8200 Series x US26D (IVS)

2 Magnetic Lock MagForce 350 + Series (LSE)

1 Coordinator COR Series x US26D (IVS)

1 Automatic Door Operator for (2) Unequal Leaves; Operator on Corridor Side; coordinate with release of

magnetic locks.

2 Armor Plates 34” x 2”LDW x US32D

2 Mop Plates 8” x 1” LDW x US32D

2 Wall Stops 407 CVX x US26D (IVS)


1 Power Supply

1 Power Transfer

Hardware Set No. 3

Clean Core

1-1/2 Pr FBB179HT x 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 x 26D (STH)

1 Pull 8100 Series x US26D (IVS)

1 Push Plate 8200 Series x US26D (IVS)

1 Automatic Door Operator

1 Kick Plate 8” x 2”LDW x US32D US32D




Hardware Set No. 4

Sterilizer Room

1-1/2 Pr FBB179HT x 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 x 26D (STH)

1 Lockset ML2055 x LWA x 626 (CR)

1 Cylinder (CR)


1 Kick Plate 8” x 2”LDW x US32D US32D




Hardware Set No. 5

Storage


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1-1/2 Pr FBB179HT x 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 x 26D (STH)


1 Cylinder (CR)

1 Automatic Door Operator

1 Armor Plate 34” x 2”LDW x US32D

1 Mop Plate 8” x 1”LDW x US32D US32D



Hardware Set No. 6 (not used for Bid Package 2)

Hardware Set No. 7

Office

1-1/2 Pr FBB179HT x 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 x 26D (STH)



1 Kick Plate 8” x 2”LDW x US32D

1 Mop Plate 8” x 1” LDW x US32D





OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 08716 - 1

SECTION 08716 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Power door operator for salvaged, relocated door 106. Coordinate provision of power

door operator with existing card reader system (provided by the Owner) for access from

the corridor 1E00 side and with the salvaged, relocated push plate for egress from the

decontamination 1E07 side. Coordinate with other salvaged hardware to be reused on

this door.


1. Division 8 Sections for door that need reinforcement for automatic door operator.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.4 SUBMITTALS


descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic

door operators, including activation and safety devices. Include operating characteristics,

electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For automatic door operators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

1. Indicate required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and

size of each field connection.

2. Include locations and elevations of entrances showing activation and safety devices.

3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and activation- and safety-device wiring.

4. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work for guide rails.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, manufacturer's

standard in size.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Product Certificates: For each operator for fire-rated door assemblies, signed by product

manufacturer. Certify that operator is listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors

required.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Maintenance Data: For automatic door operators, including activation and safety devices, to

include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.



for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project and who employs a certified

inspector.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's

place of business to Project site.

B. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by the AAADM.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic door operators, including activation and safety devices,

from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Exit-Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for

doors with automatic door operators serving as a component of a required means of egress.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of door frames by field measurements before

fabrication of exposed covers for automatic door operators.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed control mats that

control automatic door operators. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are

specified in Division 3 Sections.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Templates: Obtain and distribute, to the parties involved, templates for doors, frames,

operators, and other work specified to be factory prepared and reinforced for installing

automatic door operators. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate

provisions are made for locating and installing automatic door operators to comply with

indicated requirements.

C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic door operators,

including activation and safety devices, with connections to power supplies.

D. Pneumatic System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic door

operators with connections to compressed-air piping systems.

1.8 WARRANTY


replace components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.


a. Faulty or sporadic operation of automatic door operator, including activation and

safety devices.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering or use.


1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full

maintenance by skilled employees of automatic door operator Installer. Include quarterly

planned and preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,

lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door operation. Provide parts and

supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1. Engage a certified inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair,

and at end of maintenance period. Furnish completed inspection reports to Owner.

2. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working

hours.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Basis of Design: Horton

Automatics; a division of Overhead Door Corporation. Model # Series 4000 Electric Operator

with side load header or an equivalent product by one of the following:

1. DORMA Architectural Hardware.

2. DORMA Automatics.

3. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated, complying with standards indicated below:

1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

2. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-

bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

2.3 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and

movement; for condition of exposure; for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal

traffic load for type of occupancy indicated; and complying with UL 325. Coordinate operator

mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation and safety devices.

1. Emergency Breakaway: Where indicated for center-pivoted doors, provide emergency

breakaway feature for reverse swing of doors. Equip system to discontinue power to

automatic door operator when door is in emergency breakaway position, and to return to

closed position after breakaway and automatically reset.

B. Electromechanical Operating System: Self-contained unit powered by permanent-magnet dc

motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking

action of electric motor, connections for power and activation- and safety-device wiring, and

manual operation including spring closing when power is off.

C. Electrohydraulic Operating System: Self-contained low-pressure unit; with separate cylinders

for power and checking, connections for power and activation- and safety-device wiring,

manual operation including spring closing when power is off.

D. Hinges: Existing hinges to be salvaged and re-used.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


E. Cover for Surface-Mounted Operators: Fabricated from 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick extruded or

formed aluminum; manufacturer's standard width ; continuous over full width of operator-

controlled door opening; with enclosed end caps, provision for maintenance access, and

fasteners concealed when door is in closed position.

F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with non-

staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

2.4 POWER DOOR OPERATORS


B. Performance Requirements:

1. Opening Force:

a. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required to manually set

door in motion if power fails; not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to open door to

minimum required width.

b. Power-Operated Swinging Doors: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) required to

manually open door if power fails.

c. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N)

required for a door to open.

2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 40 lbf (178 N) required to prevent stopped door

in the last 10 degrees of opening from moving in the direction of opening; not more than

30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent stopped door from moving in direction of closing.

C. Configuration: Operator to control single swinging door.

1. Traffic Pattern: One way.

2. Operator Mounting: Surface.

D. Operation: Power opening and spring closing. Provide time delay for door to remain open

before initiating closing cycle as required by BHMA A156.10.

E. Operating System: Electromechanical or Electrohydraulic

F. Microprocessor Control Unit: Solid-state controls.

G. Features:

1. Adjustable opening and closing speed.

2. Adjustable opening and closing force.

3. Adjustable backcheck.

4. Adjustable hold-open time from zero to 30 seconds.

5. Adjustable time delay.

6. Adjustable acceleration.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


7. Adjustable limit switch.

8. Obstruction recycle.

9. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator.

H. Exposed Finish: Finish exposed components with Class II, clear anodic finish.

2.5 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES

A. General: Provide activation and safety devices in accordance with BHMA standards, for

condition of exposure and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load

for type of occupancy indicated. Coordinate activation and safety devices with door operation

and door operator mechanisms.

B. Motion Sensors: Self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; adjustable to

provide detection field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10.

1. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional detection.

2. For one-way traffic, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are fully closed.

C. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, infrared-scanner units; adjustable to provide detection field

sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. Sensors shall remain active at all times.

D. Combination Motion/Presence Sensors: Self-contained units consisting of both motion and

presence sensors in a single housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions

required by BHMA A156.10.

1. Motion Sensor: K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units.

a. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional

detection.

b. For one-way traffic, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are fully

closed.

2. Presence Sensor: Infrared-scanner units that remain active at all times.

E. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams

shall not be active when doors are fully closed.

F. Push-Plate Switch: Momentary-contact door control switch with flat push-plate actuator with

contrasting-colored, engraved message.

1. Configuration: Round push plate with 4-by-4-inch (100-by-100-mm) junction box.

a. Mounting: Recess mounted, semiflush in wall.

2. Configuration: Rectangular push plate with 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) junction box.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Mounting: Recess mounted, semiflush in wall.

3. Push-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

4. Message: International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open."

G. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide

electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Factory fabricate automatic door operators to comply with indicated standards.

B. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.

C. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use

countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match operator.

D. Provide metal cladding, completely cladding visible surfaces before shipment to Project site.

Fabricate cladding with concealed fasteners and connection devices, with accurately fitted joints

with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion, and with

allowance for thermal expansion at exterior doors.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard for the type of operator.

1. Application Process: Door manufacturer's standard process.

2. Provide sign materials with instructions for field application when operators are

installed.

2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS





C. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances, door and frame preparation and reinforcements, and other conditions affecting

performance of automatic door operators.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections

before automatic door operator installation.

C. Examine roughing-in for compressed-air piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before automatic door operator installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install complete automatic door operators according to manufacturer's written

instructions, including activation and safety devices, control wiring, and remote power units if

any; connection to the building's power supply; and signage.

1. Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs

and distortion.

2. Install operators true in alignment with established lines and door geometry without

warp or rack. Anchor securely in place.

3. Power Door Operator Installation Standard: BHMA A156.10.

B. Power Connection: See Division 16 Sections for connection to electrical power distribution

system.

C. Activation and Safety Devices: Install devices and wiring according to manufacturer's written

instructions and cited BHMA standard for type of operator and direction of pedestrian travel.

Connect activation- and safety-device wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and

Cables."

D. Signage: Apply on both sides of each door as required by cited BHMA standard for type of

door operator and direction of pedestrian travel.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Inspection: Engage Installer's certified inspector to test and inspect automatic door operators

and prepare test and inspection reports.

1. Certified inspector shall test and inspect each automatic door operator to determine

compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.

2. Inspection Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to Architect and

Contractor within 24 hours after inspection.

B. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust automatic door operators to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished automatic door operators, inspect

exposed finishes on doors and operators. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

C. Readjust automatic door operators after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent

to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).

D. Occupancy Adjustment: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to

two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and

maintain automatic door operators.


HCM Project # 212021.00 NORTHWES HOSPITAL

OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 1

October 3, 2013 GLAZING 08800 - 1

SECTION 08800 – GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified

in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Doors.


1. Division 8 Section “Aluminum Self-Closing Service Window”.

2. Division 13 Section "Radiation Protection" for integral blind vision panels in OR lead-

lined doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and

impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to

the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets

to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in

construction.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 1


1. Fire-resistive glazing products.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets, sealants, and colored spacers, in 12-inch (300-mm)

lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the

adjoining framing system.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use

same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For installers.

B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.


testing agency, for glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations

within previous 36-month period.

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who

are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited

according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain glass from single source from single manufacturer for

each glass type.

E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single

manufacturer for each product and installation method.

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in

referenced standards.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 1


1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."

G. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with

certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall

indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other

openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a

temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or

other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing

units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and

when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

B. Strength: Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise

indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 1


a. AFG Industries, Inc..

b. Guardian Industries Corp.

c. Pilkington North America.

d. PPG Industries, Inc.

2. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.

4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).

2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according

to NFPA 252 for door assemblies.

B. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat glass;

5/16-inch (8-mm) total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201

for Category II materials.


a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products);

FireLite Plus.

b. Schott North America, Inc.; Laminated Pyran Crystal.

c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L.

2.4 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to

maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.

2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.

3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM, silicon or

thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile

and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense

compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of

pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames

with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 1


2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with

other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,

and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at

time of installation.

3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than

250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.

b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.

c. Pecora Corporation; 890.

d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing

agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for

applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric

tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer

rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and

complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive

on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 1


2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application

indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that

listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-

protection rating indicated.

2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face

clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of

product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance

requirements.

2.9 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.

2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.10 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES

A. Glass Type: 45-minute fire-rated glazing; laminated ceramic glazing.

1. Provide safety glazing labeling.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 1


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and

offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.

Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to

provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant

thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass

from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair

performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 1


1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and

glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face

clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to

sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed

thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to

requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket

on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is

subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by

gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints

with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to

make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover

horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.

Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 1


3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and

press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed

and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at

corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal

without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by

gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and

press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-

glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to

produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints

with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass

lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding

into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and

backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance

for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond

of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide

supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed

streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove

nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 1


B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with

glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at

frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt,

scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from

natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date

scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as

recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1

SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless


2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312-inch (20-gage).

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into

top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of

studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-)

deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and

outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.

2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track.

3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.

4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract

with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly

indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of

studs.


a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System.

b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.

c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

d. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width

indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness,

with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-)

thick, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. Refer to Division 6

Section “Miscellaneous Carpentry” for specific requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal

frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other

conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Remove sprayed fire-resistive materials only to extent necessary for installation of non-

load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that

required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials

from damage.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy

trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

A. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly type.

1. Install framing system components at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to

structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are

indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating

partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;

install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in

finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of

overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to

match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to

underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-

rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than

1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2




OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Backing panels.


1. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board.

2. Division 9 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.

3. Division 13 Section “Radiation Protection" for lead-lined gypsum board.



1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack

panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold

damaged.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an

independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 40 percent.

B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)

of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as

manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

C. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mold Tough AR

Panels as manufactured by USG Corporation.

2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and

surfaces.

3. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.

4. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.4 BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer’s

standard edges.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShield Tile Guard" by

G-P Gypsum.


3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.

B. Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate: ASTM C1177/C 1177M.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensArmor Plus Interior

Guard" by G-P Gypsum.


C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C1288 or 1325, with manufacturer’s

standard edges.


a. National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Cement Board.

b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3272, score of 10.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

d. Expansion (control) joint.

e. zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.


following:

a. Fry Reglet Corp.

b. Gordon, Inc.

c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties

of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials

specified.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Backing Panels:

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-

type, sandable topping compound.

2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel

manufacturer.

3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering

gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by

panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag

wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

2. Insulation Content: Sound attenuation blankets shall be certified by the GREENGUARD

Environmental Institute for superior indoor air quality.

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal

frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting

performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Start application of panels at corner of room or space.

C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid

abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels

not less than one framing member.

D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with

not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not

make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

F. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

G. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,

etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in

area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow

1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

H. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these

locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints

between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

I. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to

open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings

and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both

faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with

manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking

paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily

installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. At the base of all non-fire-rated interior partitions, install a strip of cementitious backer unit, 3-

1/2-inches high, secured to bottom track and studs. Install the specified gypsum board

immediately above the cementitious backer unit and finish the joint between the two substrates.

A strip of cementitious backer unit would not be installed at the base of lead-lined gypsum

board.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end

joints.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses

of panels.

b. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required

by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on

walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to

framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches (400 mm)

minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-

resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers

vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring

member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer

joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger

joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. Fastening Methods: Unless, otherwise required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies,

fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary

fasteners.

3.4 APPLYING BACKING PANELS

A. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Install where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap

where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and install where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut

other construction or penetrations.

C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, where indicated.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations

approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for

decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended

for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C

840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.

3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.

4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.

5. Level 5: At all panel surfaces scheduled to receive semi-gloss paint.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.

E. Glass-Mat, Faced Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 FIRE AND SMOKE RATED PARTITION IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide painted stenciled lettering and numerals on each side of fire and smoke rated partitions

to indicate the hourly rating of the partition.

1. Examples: 2HR-FIRE, 1-HR SMOKE.

2. Stenciled Letters: 3 inches tall.

3. Location 12 inches above scheduled ceiling.

4. Spacing: 6 feet on center along whole length of wall.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from joint treatment compound and promptly remove from floors and

other non-gypsum board surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged

during gypsum board application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1

SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

B. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.



B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,

prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern,

and texture.

2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-)

long Samples of each type, finish, and color.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items

involved:

1. Ceiling suspension system members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.

4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:48).

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.


testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling.

D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components and anchor and fastener

type.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATEIRAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0

percent of quantity installed.

3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed


A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-

accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated.

NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of

Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in

original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they

will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct

sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized

moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed

and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,

and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for

Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the

following requirements:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-

burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as

determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension

system through one source from a single manufacturer

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated

that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical

ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of

test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795.

C. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each

product type.

D. Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces

coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with

fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or

ASTM G 21.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING ACP-1

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Clean Room VL 868; Armstrong

World Industries, Inc.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and patter as

follows:

1. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water

felted; with vinyl overlay.

2. Pattern: E (lightly textured).

C. Color: White.

D. LR: Not less than 0.80.

E. NRC: Not less than 0.10.

F. CAC: Not less than 40.

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).

I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 1220 mm).

J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Fungicide based.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING ACP-3 IN OPERATING

ROOMS (ACP-2 designation not used)

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Unitee CR Cleanroom; Price

Industries, Inc.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as

follows:

1. Type and Form: Price SC Series lay-in type, 0.040” aluminum.

2. Pattern: Non-perforated.

C. Color: B11 powder coat white finish.

D. LR: Not less than 0.82.

E. NRC: Not less than 0.55.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


F. CAC: Not less than 38.

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).

I. Modular Size: Refer to Drawings.

J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Fungicide based.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such

that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less

than 25 percent.

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with

applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for

Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating

Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are

indicated.

D. Attachment Devices:

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops

for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a

load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing

per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and

inspecting agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.

b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.

E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. Use only where

high-humidity finishes are indicated.

3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,

Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. Use minimum 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter wire

where high-humidity finishes are indicated.

F. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

G. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch-

(1-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating

designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.

H. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced

24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees.

I. Clean-Room Gasket System: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard system,

including manufacturer's standard gasket and related adhesives, tapes, seals, and retention

clips, designed to seal out foreign material from and maintain positive pressure in clean room.

2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING ACP-1

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 15/16 Co-Extruded Clean Room;

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

B. Wide-Face, Double-Web, Metal Suspension System: Main and cross runners formed from

extruded aluminum to produce structural members with 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide faces.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

2. Face Design: Flat, flush.

3. Face Finish: Painted white.

4. Gasket System: Clean-room type.

2.7 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR CLEANROOM PANEL CEILINGS ACP-3

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Unitee CR #4732; Price Industries.

B. Wide-Face, Double-Web, Extruded-Aluminum T-Bar Suspension System: Main and cross

runners formed from extruded aluminum to produce structural members with 1-inch wide

faces.

1. Structural Classification: Light-duty system.

2. Face Design: Flat, flush.

3. Face Finish: B11 sterile powder coat.

4. Wall molding: CR #4733.

5. Accessories: Provide Price hold down clips and vinyl gasket system. Install complete

system per manufacturer’s recommendations and ASTM C636.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:

a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.

b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.

c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,

paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 and effective

in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building

construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,

nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or

less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for

sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical

panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified

in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel

ceilings.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply

with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design

requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems

Handbook."

1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated

design.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces

by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard

suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in

form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a

minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will

not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure angle and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by

attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both

structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a

manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated

temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten

hangers to postinstalled mechanical anchors that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,

install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported

directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8

inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

12. Wire Nuts: Install on loose ends of each twisted hanger wire supporting suspension

system.

C. Install edge moldings at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal

edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and

not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a

tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect

securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.

Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system

runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a

neat, precise fit.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space.

2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of

suspension system runners and moldings.

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed

panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical

panel manufacturer.

4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having

jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel

manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as

recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and

suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning

and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be

successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES 09650 - 1

SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl composition floor tile.

2. Vinyl sheet floor covering without backing.

3. Resilient Base.

4. Resilient Molding Accessories.



B. Shop Drawings: Seaming Diagram. Include floor covering layouts, edges, columns, doorways,

enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Manufacturer’s standard sample size sections of each different color and pattern of floor

plank covering required.

2. Manufacturer’s standard sample size section but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long,

or each resilient base or accessory product color and pattern required.

3. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches

(230 mm) long, of each color required.

D. Product Schedule: For floor tile, sheet floor coverings, and resilient base and accessories. Use

same designations indicated on Drawings.




OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and

pattern of floor tile installed.

2. Sheet Floor Covering: Furnish quantity not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every

500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each

color, pattern, and type of sheet floor covering installed.

3. Resilient Base and Accessories: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every

500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of

resilient base and accessory installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are

competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming

method indicated.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Store floor coverings, resilient products, and installation materials in dry spaces protected from

the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by

manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).

1. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.

2. Store sheet floor covering rolls upright..


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than

70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the

following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by

manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile and resilient sheet flooring shall comply with

requirements of FloorScore Standard.

2.2 VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in Finish

Schedule on Drawings.

B. Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 0.080 inch (2.0 mm) thick.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.

E. Seaming Method: Heat welded.

2.3 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in

Finish Schedule on Drawings.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic), Type TS (rubber, vulcanized

thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).

3. Style: As indicated on Drawings.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

2.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES

A. Resilient Molding Accessories:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the same

manufacturer as the manufacturer of the resilient base.

B. Description:

1. Cove Cap: Johnsonite; SCC-XX-D.

C. Material: Rubber.

D. Colors and Patterns: Same color as indicated for resilient base.

2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for

applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering or

resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. VCT and Vinyl Sheet Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

b. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

c. Rubber Base or Molding Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in

other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign

deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor covering or resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by

manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.

Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed

with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation

only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of

water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level

measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor coverings and resilient products until they are same temperature as space

where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be

installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before

installation.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3.3 SHEET FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.

B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out floor coverings as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6

inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.

3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.

4. Avoid cross seams.

D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures,

and door frames.

E. Extend floor coverings into door reveals, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by

repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent

marking device.

G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to

produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,

telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfection.

3.4 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient

base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates

throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of resilient floor covering that

would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings

and resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering and resilient

product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor covering and resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage

from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of

construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering surfaces

before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

E. Cover floor coverings and resilient products until Substantial Completion.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 RESINOUS FLOORING 09671 - 1

SECTION 09671 - RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Decorative resinous flooring systems.


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed at joints in resinous flooring

systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data,

application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.


A. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified

requirements.

B. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer.

C. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring system.


A. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2




for installation of flooring systems required for this Project.

1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as

qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins,

hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer.

Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair

materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing

manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other

components.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions

for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions

affecting resinous flooring application.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate

permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after

application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams Company;

General Polymers; Ceramic Carpet #400.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.2 MATERIALS

A. VOC Content of Resinous Flooring: Provide resinous flooring systems, for use inside the

weatherproofing system, that comply with the following limits for VOC content when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Resinous Flooring: 100 g/L.

2.3 DECORATIVE RESINOUS FLOORING

A. Resinous Flooring: Abrasion-, impact- and chemical-resistant, decorative-aggregate-filled,

epoxy-resin-based, monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral

cove base.

B. System Characteristics:

1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance.

3. Overall System Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

C. Body Coats:

1. Resin: Epoxy.

2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.

3. Application Method: Self-leveling slurry with broadcast aggregates.

a. Thickness of Coats: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

b. Number of Coats: One.

4. Aggregates: Colored quartz (ceramic-coated silica).

D. Topcoat: Sealing or finish coats.

1. Resin: Epoxy.

2. Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.

3. Type: Clear.

4. Finish: Matte.

5. Number of Coats: Two.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coats indicated.

B. Waterproofing Membrane: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and primer and

body coats indicated.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer

and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

D. Metal Cap for Integral Cove Base: Square metal cap approved by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written

instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring

application.

B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence,

curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants

incompatible with resinous flooring.

1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:

a. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written

instructions are more stringent.

2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's

written instructions.

3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within

acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application

of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission

rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) of slab area in 24

hours.

b. Perform plastic sheet test, ASTM D 4263. Proceed with application only after

testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates.

c. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity

level measurement.

4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within

acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with

application only after substrates pass testing.

C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring


D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting

through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written

instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring

system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.

2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring


B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply waterproofing membrane, where indicated, in manufacturer's recommended thickness.

1. Apply waterproofing membrane to integral cove base substrates.

D. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply

according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing,

priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners.

1. Integral Cove Base: 6 inches (150 mm) high.

E. Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.

1. Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured,

remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.

F. Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended

in writing by manufacturer.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.

Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing

by resinous flooring manufacturer.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 HYGIENIC VINYL WALL COVERING 09721 - 1

SECTION 09721 - HYGIENIC VINYL WALL COVERING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes labor, materials and other services necessary to complete hygienic vinyl wall

coverings.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 15 - Mechanical.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this

specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority,

authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing

authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority

abbreviation and standard designation.

B. American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM):

1. AST ASTM E 84-05 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Provide hygienic wall covering which has been manufactured and

installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or

failure.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current printed product literature, specifications, installation

instructions, and field reports.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to indicate materials, details, and accessories, including but


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


limited to the following:

1. Submit a layout diagram indicating the location of each panel and joining method;

including overlapping method between the sheet flooring and the wall covering.

C. Samples: Submit duplicate sample pieces of Whiterock material, as well as accessory pieces.

D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance

characteristics and physical properties.

2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Current published manufacturer’s installation and

maintenance instructions.

3. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Specified herein.

E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed

products. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions

against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized

in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

1. Training: Installer who has attended an Altro Whiterock installation training clinic.

B. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate

conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements, also

coordination between the flooring, wall covering and corner guards, all by different manufacturers.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification

labels intact.

B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature and

humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

C. Store panels in temperature controlled environments. Leave protective blue film on panel until

ready to use.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Temperature Requirements: If storage temperature is below 65F (18C), the Altro Whiterock wall

panel must be moved to a warmer place and allowed to reach this temperature before installation.

For further information, refer to current Installation Guide.

B. Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at installation area between 65F (18C) and

80F (26C) for 48 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty

document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and

not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

C. Warranty Period for Altro Whiterock shall be 10 years commencing on Date of Substantial

Completion.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide extra materials of product and adhesives in accordance with Division 1 “Closeout

Procedures”.

B. Provide 20 sq ft of each color, pattern and type material required for project for maintenance use.

C. Provide 20 sq ft of extra materials in one piece and from same production run as installed materials.

D. Clearly identify each wall panel and each container of adhesive.

E. Deliver to Consultant, upon completion of the work of this section and store where directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Altro.

1. EASTERN USA: 224 Nazareth Pike, Bethlehem PA 18020

Toll-free: 800.377.5597 Tel: 610.746.4324 Fax: 610.746.4325

2. E-mail: [email protected] Web Site: www.altrofloors.com.

http://www.altrofloors.com/


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.2 HYGIENIC WALL COVERINGS

A. Acceptable Material: Altro Whiterock (measurements and product weights given below are

approximate):

1. WHITE W103: Thickness: 0.10" (2.5 mm); Panel Width: 4’ (1.22m); Panel Height: 8’

(2.5m); Weight 4’x8’ Panel: 24 lbs (10.4 kg). See interior elevations on the drawings

for panel height required. Inside and outside corners shall be “thermo-fused”. All

seams shall be heat welded.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Vinyl welding rod: Acceptable material:

1. Altro weld rod

B. Joint Strips:

1. 2-Part Joint Strip – A831/25 White.

C. Start and Edge Trim:

1. 2-Part Start and Edge Trim – A833/25 White.

D. Acrylic Adhesive: For dry, climate controlled areas, use AltroFix W49, a one-part, water-based,

acrylic adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Polyurethane Adhesive: The default adhesive for most installations, suitable for wet area, non-

climate controlled areas, and non-absorbent surfaces, use AltroFix W39, a two-part resin-based

polyurethane adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Caulking and Mastic Compounds and Tools:

1. FlexiJoint Coil – FJ101/white Length 164 linear feet.

2. FlexiJoint Steel Spacers (engineered steel).

3. Parabond Mastic – AP600; 10 oz.

4. Altro Mastic Caulking – A802 White/A803 Clear; 10.5 oz.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY

A. Source Quality: Obtain wall products from a single manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins,

product catalog, installation instructions and product label instructions for installation.

3.2 EXAMINATION


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed

under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

1. Walls should be smooth and level. High points must be removed and low points filled with

filler intended for the substrate and environmental conditions.

2. Surfaces must be permanently dry and free from all substances that may contribute to

adhesive bond failure.

3. Remove loose paint and conduct an adhesive bond test with paint.

4. Gypsum board substrates should be paint ready.

3.4 PREPARATION

1. All surfaces must be free from dust and cleaned prior to Whiterock installation. The

working environment must also be dust free. Failure to comply with these conditions will

reduce the bond strength between the adhesive and substrate, and may cause the Whiterock

panels to debond.

2. Very absorbent / porous substrates (particularly plaster finishes and unprimed sheetrock)

must have a proprietary sealer e.g. PVA primer or similar, applied to the surface a

minimum of 12 hours prior to the installation.

3. All electrical switches, power points etc., should be in a first fix / installation state. All

electrical equipment should only be moved or altered by a qualified electrician.

4. All plumbing should have pipe-work removed to a first fix or installation state and “tails”

left protruding from the substrate. Whiterock panels can then be drilled and slid over the

pipe tails. All holes should be drilled 1/8” (3mm) oversize to allow for expansion, then

sealed with AltroMastic caulking. Plumbing should always be done by a qualified plumber.

5. Hot pipes and steam pipes should be insulated and a 1/8” to 1/4” (3-6mm) expansion gap

should be created when installing panels around these pipes, then sealed with AltroMastic

caulking.

6. All pipes, fixing bolts, etc. extending through the Whiterock panels should have a minimum

1/8” (3mm) expansion gap and be sealed using AltroMastic caulking.

7. If fitting to door frames, these must be in place prior to installation of Whiterock.

8. Prior to installation, it is advisable to complete any painting which comes in contact with

Altro Whiterock, as sealant used at junctions is non-paintable.

9. Panels should be stored flat and be pre-conditioned a minimum of 24 hours in ambient


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


temperatures similar to the prevailing operational conditions.

10. The panels must be stored on a level flat surface off the ground (risk of condensation on the

panels if stored on damp surfaces). Storage on uneven surfaces could cause the panels to

distort prior to installation.

11. First, check the room using a 6’ (2 m) level to ensure all walls are flat, paying particular

attention to the corners, window reveals, and door entrances. These need to be inspected to

ensure they are free of any debris or irregularities, which could prevent the panels laying

flat to the substrate after the adhesive has been applied and the panel installed.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Hygienic Wall Installation: Install Altro Whiterock in accordance with the current published Altro

Installation Guide. All joints should be joined by approved methods as detailed in the installation

guide. Failure to install Altro Whiterock in accordance with recommended procedures will void the

Altro Limited Product Warranty.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon Owner’s request, provide manufacturer’s field service

consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product

installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Site Visits: Two.

3.7 CLEANING

1. Altro Whiterock can be cleaned with a diluted soap/detergent solution, such as Altro 44

Cleaner.

2. When cleaning the Whiterock surface, we recommend the temperature of water does not

exceed 140° F (60° C).

3. Pressure cleaning with hot water may be used with the pressure nozzle a minimum of 2 feet

(600mm) away from the surface.

4. To reduce the buildup of static, cleaning the panels with an anti-static solution is

recommended.

5. Stubborn stains use AltroClean 44 cleaner or equivalent alkaline cleaner.

6. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 DRY ERASE WALLCOVERING 09722 - 1

SECTION 09722 - DRY ERASE WALLCOVERING

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Magnetic Receptive Dry Erase Wallcovering.

2. Accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following::

1. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board” for wall substrate.

2. Division 9 Section “Interior Painting” for priming of substrate.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E84 Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. Gypsum Association GA-214-M-97 Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.


A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data and written installation instructions for each type of dry

erase wallcovering, adhesive, and accessories required. Manufacturer’s written product data shall

also indicate compliance with specified materials required.

B. Samples for Verification:

1. 7 inch (177.8mm) x 9 inch (228.6mm) samples of each dry erase

material required.

C. Seaming diagram for each location.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL

A. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer’s written instructions for recommended maintenance of each type

of dry erase wall covering required.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of dry erase wallcovering required produced by one manufacturer.

B. Installer: Installation by skilled commercial wallcovering contractor with no less than three years of

documented experience installing dry erase wallcovering of the types and extent required.

C. Composition:

1. mag•rite® II: Provide scrim backed, ferrous powder, pigmented vinyl capped with dry erase

film.

D. Surface Burning Characteristics Classification: Provide materials that meet Class I/A rating

when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for flame spread and smoke developed.

E. Field Samples: Prepare field samples for architect’s review and establish requirements for

seaming and finish trim.

1. Install sample panel of each type presentation wallcovering specified in area designated by

architect.

2. Maintain corrected and approved samples to serve as a standard of performance for the project.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver dry erase wallcoverings to the project site in unbroken and undamaged original

factory packaging and clearly labeled with the manufacturer’s identification label, quality or grade,

and lot number.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry storage area with temperature maintained above 55°F

(13°C) with normal humidity.

C. Store material within original packaging to prevent damage.


A. Do not apply dry erase wallcoverings when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the

temperature ranges required by the wallcovering manufacturer.

B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain substrate surface and ambient

temperatures above 55°F (13°C) unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Apply adhesive when substrate surface temperature and ambient temperature is above 55°F (13°C)

and relative humidity is below forty percent.

D. Maintain constant recommended temperature and humidity for at least 72 hours prior


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


to and throughout the installation period, and for 72 hours after wallcovering installation

completion.

E. Provide not less than 80-foot-candles per square foot lighting level measured mid-height at

substrate surfaces.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer’s limited five-year written warranty against manufacturing defects.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance instructions: Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods that may be

detrimental to finishes and performance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Wallcoverings: Walltalkers Wallcoverings manufactured by RJF International Corporation,

Fairlawn, Ohio. (www.walltalkers.com).

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Walltalkers mag•rite II: Magnetic receptive, moderate gloss vinyl surface for dry erase markers.

1. M248: 47/48 inch (1.19/1.22m) width, woven backing; color: white.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesives: Heavy-duty clear or clay based premixed vinyl adhesive.

B. Substrate Primer/Sealer: White pigmented acrylic base primer/sealer specifically

formulated for use with vinyl wallcoverings.

C. Presentation Starter Kit: Provide one Walltalkers starter kit containing eight dry erase

markers, one eraser, two dry erase cleaning cloths, one empty bottle for water, and one 8 ounce

(.23kg) bottle liquid surface cleaning solution for each room installed with dry erase wallcovering.

RK1RSK2: Regular starter kit with standard dry erase markers.

D. Broad Tip Dry Erase Markers:

1. EC12-99: Chisel BLK - 12CT

2. EC04-00: Set of four colors: red, blue, green, black.

E. Eraser:

http://www.walltalkers.com/


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. DEFE-99: Dry erase felt eraser.

2. DECC-Y1: Dry erase cleaning cloth - yellow.

F. Liquid Surface Cleaner: RCC8: 8 ounce (.23kg) bottle liquid surface cleaner.

G. Magnets: MAG1: Heavy duty magnet - black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and installation conditions to ensure surface conditions meet or exceed a Level 4

finish, per GA-214-M-97: Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish, and permanent lighting

should be installed and operational.

B. Test substrate with suitable moisture meter and verify that moisture content does not exceed four

percent.

C. Verify substrate surface is clean, dry, smooth, structurally sound, and free from surface defects and

imperfections that would show through the finished surface.

D. Evaluate all painted surfaces for the possibility of pigment bleed-through.

E. Notify the contractor and architect in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely

completion of the installation.

F. Beginning of installation means acceptance of surface conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Acclimate wallcovering in the area of installation a minimum of 24 hours before installation.

B. Read and follow the manufacturer’s installation instruction sheet contained in each roll of the dry

erase wallcovering.

C. Examine all materials for pattern, color, quantity and quality, as specified for the correct location

prior to cutting.

D. Primer: Use a quality pigmented acrylic wallcovering primer.

E. Adhesive: Apply a uniform coat of heavy-duty pre-mixed clay-based or extra strength clear

wallcovering adhesive.

F. Install each strip horizontally and in the same sequence as cut from the roll.

G. Install dry erase wallcovering sheets in exact order as they are cut from bolt. Reverse hang


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


alternate strips (except lined products). Do not crease or bend the wallcovering when handling.

H. Install dry erase wallcovering horizontally using a level line.

I. Using a level or straight edge, double cut the seam with a seam-cutting tool

(Ex: Double Seam-Cutter or Swedish Knife). Do not score drywall or plasterboard

when cutting material.

J. When covering the entire wall, seam the material out of the main writing and viewing areas of the

wall.

K. Apply wallcovering to the substrate using a wallcovering smoother, wrapped with a soft cloth, to

remove air bubbles. Do not use sharp edged smoothing tools. Smooth material on the wall from the

middle to the outside edge.

L. Remove excess adhesive immediately after the wallcovering is applied. Clean entire surface with a

warm mild soap solution, and clean soft cloths. Rinse thoroughly with water and let dry before

using. Change water often to maintain water clarity.

M. Stop installation of material that is questionable in appearance and notify the manufacturer’s

representative for an inspection.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of installation, remove all exposed adhesive immediately using a soft cloth and a

warm, mild soap solution and rinse thoroughly with water and dry with clean towel prior to using.

B. Upon completion of the work, remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from the

wallcovering installation. Leave areas in neat, clean, and orderly condition.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 1

SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

interior substrates:

1. Steel.

2. Galvanized metal.

3. Wood.

4. Gypsum board.


1. Division 6 Section for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.

2. Division 8 Sections for factory priming doors with primers specified in this Section.

3. Division 9 Section “Dry Erase Wallcovering.”



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat

indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as

materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material

and color applied.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved

Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures

are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5

deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by The Sherwin-

Williams Company.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply

with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not

apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.

3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250

g/L.

4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.

C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints

and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following

chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in

a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more

benzene rings).

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein.

b. Acrylonitrile.

c. Antimony.

d. Benzene.

e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.

f. Cadmium.

g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.

h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.

i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.

j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.

k. Diethyl phthalate.

l. Dimethyl phthalate.

m. Ethylbenzene.

n. Formaldehyde.

o. Hexavalent chromium.

p. Isophorone.

q. Lead.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


r. Mercury.

s. Methyl ethyl ketone.

t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.

u. Methylene chloride.

v. Naphthalene.

w. Toluene (methylbenzene).

x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.

y. Vinyl chloride.

D. Colors: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Low-VOC Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50, X-Green

1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.

2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3.

3. Basis of Design: ProGreen 200 Primer.

B. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer:

1. VOC Content E range of E2.

2. Basis of Design: PrepRite 200 Primer.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107.



3. Basis of Design: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish.

B. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.



3. Basis of Design: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish.

2.5 WOOD PRIMERS

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.



3. Basis of Design: PrepRite ProBlock Primer.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.6 LATEX PAINTS

A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex, Flat: MPI #143, X-Green



3. Basis of Design: Harmony Latex.

B. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex, Eggshell: MPI #144, X-Green


2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5.


C. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex, Semi-Gloss: MPI #147.


2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 5.5.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Wood: 15 percent.

2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces

are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.

If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-

applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as

required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in

writing by paint manufacturer.

E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal

fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that

promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

F. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

G. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and

sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or

furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar

hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush

marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines

and color breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and

occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping.

b. Uninsulated plastic piping.

c. Pipe hangers and supports.

d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets.

f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material.

g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

2. Electrical Work:

a. Switchgear.

b. Panelboards.

c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based): MPI #107.

b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex, Semi-Gloss: MPI # 147.

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:


a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer: MPI #134.


c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex, Semi-Gloss: MPI #147.

C. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood.


a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer: MPI # 39.



D. Gypsum Board Substrates:


a. Prime Coat: Interior low VOC latex primer/sealer: MPI #50. X-Green.


c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex, Flat: MPI #143, X-Green.




c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex, Eggshell: MPI #144, X-Green.







OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265 - 1

SECTION 10265 - IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall guards.

2. Corner guards.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, fire-test-

response characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for

each impact-resistant wall protection unit.

B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent.

Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their

preparation.

2. Provide color-coded floor plans locating types and colors of wall protection and heights

of corner guards.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size

indicated below.

1. Wall and Corner Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long.


A. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, from manufacturer.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance

manuals.

1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum

condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include

precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to

plastic finishes and performance.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Wall-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of

each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 8-foot- (2.4-m-)

long units.

2. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of

each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 4-foot- (1.2-m-)]

long units.

B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same

production run as installed units.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from

single manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.


A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers

inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures,

and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C)

during the period plastic materials are stored.

2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.

3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic

material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C).


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.

b. Store wall-guard covers in a horizontal position.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until

building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is

operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours before

beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.

1.10 WARRANTY


replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures.

b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-

resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and

sheet material, thickness as indicated.

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested according to

ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543.

3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.

4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in

ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for Alloy 6063-T5.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,

and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where

exposed to view.

E. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with

a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA

Method 24).

2.2 WALL GUARDS

A. Crash Rail: Heavy-duty assembly consisting of continuous snap-on plastic cover installed over

concealed Bumper Rail retainer system; designed to withstand impacts.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product:

a. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Acrovyn SCR-40.

2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.100-inch (2.5-mm) wall thickness; as follows:

a. Profile: Flat.

1) Dimensions: Nominal 4 inches high by 1 inch deep (100 mm high by 25 mm

deep).

2) Surface: Uniform.

b. Color and Texture: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish

Schedule on Drawings.

3. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.080-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded

aluminum.

4. Bumper: Continuous rubber or vinyl bumper cushion(s).

5. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; matching color cover;

field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

6. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware.

7. Mounting: Surface mounted directly to wall.

2.3 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from one-piece, formed or extruded metal

with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product:

a. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Acrovyn CO-8

2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm).

b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.

3. Wing Size: Nominal 2 by 2 inches.

4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

5. Mounting: Flat-head, countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting holes.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for

design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.

Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces

free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members

and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

2.5 METAL FINISHES



1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

3. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

4. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds,

and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment

of support fasteners.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify

compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing

finishes or primers.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall

protection system components.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without

distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be

visible in the finished Work.

1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights

indicated on Drawings.

2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a

complete installation.

a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.

b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice

aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no

closer than 12 inches (305 mm).

c. Adjust end caps as required to ensure tight seams.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a

standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1

SECTION 10801 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Washroom accessories.

2. Underlavatory guards.

B. Owner-Furnished Material: Install Owner-Furnished accessories as indicated in Toilet

Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions.

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other

work and substrate preparation.

3. Material and finish descriptions.

4. Features that will be included for Project.

5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each

accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances

required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment,

operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness,


B. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-

theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

C. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

2.2 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Bobrick

Washroom Equipment, Inc.

B. Grab Bar

1. Product: B-6806 Series.

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.

3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

5. Configuration and Length: As indicated is Schedule at the end of Part 3.

C. Mirror Unit:

1. Product: B-290 Series

2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated

below.

a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices

requiring a special tool to remove.

4. Size: 18 inches by 36 inches, unless indicated otherwise.

D. Robe Hook:

1. Product: B-6727.

2. Description: Double-prong unit.

3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors

and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and

with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and

firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested

according to method in ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

A. Staff Toilet Room

1. 1 36-inch-long Grab Bar.

2. 1 42-inch-long Grab Bar.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3. 1 Mirror.

4. 1 Underlavatory Guard.

5. 1 Robe Hook.

6. 1 Soap Dispenser – Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed.

7. 1 Paper Towel Dispenser – Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed.

8. 1 Toilet Tissue Dispenser – Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed.

9. 1 Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser – Owner-furnished, Contractor installed.

B. All Sink Locations Not Covered Above

1. 1 Soap Dispenser – Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed.

2. 1 Paper Towel Dispenser – Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed.

3. 1 Underlavatory Guard.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 MEDICAL EQUIPMENT 11700 - 1

SECTION 11700 - MEDICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Medical equipment, complete, as shown and specified.

1.3 IDENTIFICATION AND RESPONSIBILITY

A. General: Medical Equipment Work is listed and specified with corresponding symbols for

identification and responsibility clearly established for each item.

B. Identification: Symbols designating identification of equip are also used on Drawings.

C. Responsibility: Symbols designating responsibility have the following definitions:

1. OFOI: Owner Furnished, Owner Installed.2. OFVI: Owner Furnished, Vendor Installed.3. OFCI: Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LIST

A. General: As shown on Drawings and listed in Volume 2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install equipment per manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.

Install work level, plumb, true and securely fastened.

B. Connections: Connect equipment to mechanical and electrical work provided under Divisions

15 and 16.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 MEDICAL EQUIPMENT 11700 - 2

C. Locations: Install equipment in locations shown.

D. Damaged Work: Touch-up and restore any factory finishes partially damaged or defaced

during delivery, relocation, and installation to leave in condition acceptable to Architect.

E. Adjusting and Cleaning: Following installation, clean equipment per manufacturer’s

instructions. Leave equipment functioning properly.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 HEALTHCARE CASEWORK 12365 - 1

SECTION 12365 - HEALTHCARE CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Stainless-steel countertops and integral sinks.


1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring casework.

2. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for plastic-laminate and solid-

surfacing material countertops.

3. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed

partitions for anchoring casework.

4. Division 15 Sections for installing service fittings specified in this Section,

including connecting service utilities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing casework.

2. Indicate hardware locations.

3. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building

components, and equipment.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain healthcare casework through one source from a single

manufacturer.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of

polyethylene film or other suitable material.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of healthcare

casework.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of healthcare casework provided. Include

fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged

casework finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable

product by one of the following:

1. Blickman Inc.

2. Carr Corporation.

3. Continental Metal Products Co. Inc.

4. InnerSpace Corporation.

5. Jamestown Metal Products.

6. Scientek Technology Corp.

2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH

A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4 finish

with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each

piece.

B. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter

and leave surfaces clean.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL COUNTERTOPS AND SINKS

A. Countertops: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects. Ease

exposed edges and corners. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base

cabinets.

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316, not less than 0.062-inch (1.59-mm)

nominal thickness, with No. 4 directional satin finish.

2. Extend top down 1 1/2 inch (25 mm) at edges with a 1/2-inch (13-mm) return flange

under frame. Apply heavy coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to

undersurface.

3. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface.

4. Provide rolled edge unless otherwise indicated.

5. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of countertops containing sinks; pitch

two ways to sink to provide drainage without channeling or grooving.

6. Reinforce underside of countertop with channels or use thicker metal sheet where

necessary to insure rigidity without deflection.

7. Weld shop-made joints.

8. Fabricate units for installation without field-made joints.

9. Where stainless-steel sinks occur in stainless-steel countertops, factory weld into one

integral unit.

10. After fabricating and welding, grind surfaces smooth and polish as needed to produce

uniform, directionally textured finish with no evidence of welds and free of cross

scratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave

surfaces clean.

B. Sinks: Provide sizes indicated or healthcare casework manufacturer's closest standard size of

equal or greater volume as approved by Architect.

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm)

nominal thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least 5/8-inch (16-

mm) radius. Slope sink bottoms to outlet. Provide double-wall construction for sink

partitions with top edge rounded to at least 1/2-inch (13-mm) diameter. Provide

continuous butt-welded joints After fabricating and welding, grind surfaces smooth and

polish as needed to produce uniform finish with no evidence of welds and free of cross

scratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave

surfaces clean.

2. Punch holes for fittings at factory.

3. Provide with stainless-steel strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) unless otherwise

indicated.

4. Where indicated, provide stainless-steel overflow of standard beehive or open-top design

with separate stainless-steel strainer. Height 2 inches (50 mm) less than sink depth.

5. Apply 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to

undersink surfaces.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.4 WATER SERVICE AND COMPRESSED AIR FITTINGS

A. Service Fittings: Provide units that comply with SEFA 7, "Laboratory and Hospital Fixtures--

Recommended Practices." Provide fittings complete with washers, locknuts, nipples, and other

installation accessories. Include wall and deck flanges, escutcheons, handle extension rods, and

similar items.

B. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass unless otherwise indicated.

1. Reagent-Grade Water Service Fittings: Polypropylene, PVC, or PVDF for parts in contact

with water.

C. Finish: Chromium plated.

D. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units complying with ASME A112.18.1, with renewable

seats, designed for working pressure up to 80 psig (550 kPa).

1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide ASSE 1035 vacuum breakers on water fittings with serrated

outlets.

2. Aerators: Provide aerators on water fittings that do not have serrated outlets.

3. Self-Closing Valves: Provide self-closing valves where indicated.

4. Handles: Provide three- or four-arm, forged-brass handles for valves unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Needle Valves for Compressed Air: Provide units with renewable, self-centering, floating cones

and renewable seats of stainless steel or Monel metal, with removable serrated outlets.

1. Provide units designed for working pressure up to [60 psig (410 kPa)] [100 psig (690

kPa)] [125 psig (860 kPa)].

2. Handles: Provide knurled molded plastic handles.

F. Service-Outlet Identification: Provide color-coded plastic discs with embossed identification,

secured to each service-fitting handle to be tamper resistant. Comply with SEFA 7 for colors

and embossed identification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of healthcare

casework.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


3.2 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush joints and with internal supports

placed to prevent deflection. Locate joints only where shown on Shop Drawings.

B. Fastening: Secure countertops to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or

more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.

C. Provide chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound for closures at junctures of

top, curb, and splash with walls as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Sections for installing water and compressed-air

service fittings.

B. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases

and flanges of sink- and countertop-mounted fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer

of sink or countertop material. Securely anchor fittings to healthcare casework unless otherwise

indicated.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas

to match original factory finish as approved by Architect.

B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene or

other suitable water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at minimum of 48

inches (1200 mm) o.c.

C. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.



OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2

October 3, 2013 RADIATION PROTECTION 13090 - 1

SECTION 13090 - RADIATION PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lead sheet, strip, and plate.

2. Lead glass.

3. Lead-lined building materials and products including the following:

a. Gypsum board.

b. Steel hollow-metal door frames.

c. Vinyl clad flush wood doors.

4. Informational signs.


1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for lead-lined door assemblies.

2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for metal framing and furring for lead-lined gypsum

board and for finishing materials, accessories, and trim applied to lead-lined gypsum

board.

3. Division 9 Sections "Interior Painting" for field finishing door frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Lead Equivalence: The thickness of lead that provides the same attenuation (reduction of

radiation passing through) as the material in question under the specified conditions.

1. Lead equivalence specified for materials used in diagnostic x-ray rooms is as measured at

100 kV unless otherwise indicated.


A. Provide materials and workmanship, including joints and fasteners, that maintain continuity of

radiation protection at all points and in all directions equivalent to materials specified in

thicknesses and locations indicated.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Materials, thicknesses, and configurations indicated are based on radiation protection

design prepared by Owner's radiation health physicist. This design is available to

Contractor on request.

B. Lead-Lined Assemblies: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead thickness in doors, door

frames, window frames, penetration shielding, joint strips, film transfer cabinets, and other

items located in lead-lined assemblies not less than that indicated for assemblies in which they

are installed.

C. Lead Glazing: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead equivalence not less than that indicated

for assembly in which glazing is installed.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of radiation-protected areas. Indicate lead thickness or lead

equivalence of components. Show components and installation conditions not fully

dimensioned or detailed in product data.

1. Show ducts, pipes, conduit, and other objects that penetrate radiation protection; include

details of penetrations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of doors and frames prepared by or under the supervision

of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on

Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of radiation protection product from single source from

single manufacturer.

C. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


1. Review methods and procedures related to radiation protection including, but not

limited to, the following:

a. Sequence and schedule of radiation protection work in relation to other work.

b. Supplementary lead shielding at duct, pipe, and conduit penetrations of radiation

protection.

c. Methods of attaching other construction and equipment to lead-lined finishes.

d. Notification procedures for work that requires modifying radiation protection.

e. Requirements for field quality control.


A. Lead-Lined Gypsum Panels: Neatly stack panels flat to prevent deformation.

B. Lead-Lined Steel Frames: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Steel Door Frames"

for delivery, storage, and handling.

C. Lead-Lined Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Vinyl Clad Flush

Wood Doors" for delivery, storage, and handling.

D. Vistamatic Integral Blind Vision Panels: Per manufacturer’s recommendation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install radiation protection until spaces are

enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC

system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at

occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before

fabrication.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Vinyl Clad Flush Wood Doors."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM B 749, alloy UNS No. L51121 (chemical-copper lead).

B. Lead Glass: Lead-barium, polished float glass containing not less than 60 percent heavy metal

oxides, including not less than 48 percent lead oxide by weight.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


C. Grout: ASTM C 476, with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.

D. Lead-Lined Gypsum Board: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick gypsum board complying with Division 9

Section "Gypsum Board," of width and length required for support spacing and to prevent

cracking during handling, and with a single sheet of lead laminated to the back of the board.

1. Provide lead sheet lining the full width and length of board.

2. Construct joints in lead sheet such that their surfaces are in contact and overlap not less

than ½-inch.

3. Provide 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide lead strips for wrapping metal stud flanges.

E. Accessories and Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard fasteners and accessories as

required for installation, maintaining same lead equivalence as rest of system.

F. Asphalt Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

G. Asphalt Felt: ASTM D 226.

2.2 LEAD-LINED STEEL HOLLOW-METAL DOOR FRAMES

A. General: Steel door frames complying with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861, except 0.0667 inch (1.7

mm) thick, and lined with lead sheet of thickness not less than that required for doors and walls

where frames are used.


following:

a. Deronde Products.

b. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.

c. A & L Shielding Inc.

d. El Dorado Metals, Inc.

e. Fluke Biomedical; Radiation Management Services.

f. Mayco Industries; a Metalico company.

g. NELCO, Inc.

h. New Shield.

i. Radiation Protection Products, Inc.

j. Ray-Bar Engineering Corp.

2. Provide additional reinforcements and internal supports to adequately carry the weight

of lead-lined doors. Install reinforcements and supports before installing lead lining.

3. Form lead sheet to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across the head,

lapping the stops. Form lead shields around areas prepared to receive hardware.

Fabricate lead lining wide enough to maintain an effective lap with lead of adjacent

shielding.

4. Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and

pretreating.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.3 LEAD-LINED WOOD DOORS

A. General: Vinyl clad flush solid-core wood doors with lead lining, thickness not less than that

required for partition in which door is installed.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Eggers Industries; eiDOOR.

2. Door Construction: Veneer face, bonded particleboard core made with binder containing

no urea-formaldehyde resin, unless mineral core is required for fire rating.

3. Lead Lining: One or more continuous sheets of lead extending from top to bottom and

edge to edge, constructed either in the core or between the core and faces, at

manufacturer's option.

4. Comply with Division 8 Section "Vinyl Clad Flush Wood Doors" for grade, faces, veneer

matching, fabrication, finishing, and other requirements unless otherwise indicated.

5. Quality Standard: WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

6. Shield cutouts for locksets with lead sheet of same thickness used in door. Lap lining of

cutouts with door lining.

7. Prepare doors to receive vision panels; cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

Provide removable wood stops for glazed openings.

8. Provide lead-lined astragals for pairs of doors.

9. Factory fit doors to suit frame openings indicated with 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) clearance at

heads and jambs and minimum clearance at bottom. Factory machine doors for

hardware not surface applied.

2.4 LEAD-LINED VISION PANELS IN DOORS

A. General: Integral blind vision panels in OR lead-lined doors.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirement, provide products by the

following:

a. Vistamatic Vision Panels; Vistamatic Max and lead lined metal frames provided by Vistamatic.

2. Lead-lined 1/16” equivalent lead for both glass and frame.

3. Lever handle control. Refer to drawings for locations of controls, and whether or not

control is on one side or both sides of doors.

2.5 LEAD-LINED RECESSED STORAGE CABINETS

A. General: Lead-lined recessed storage (pass through type) cabinets shall be furnished by the

Owner and installed by the Contractor.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


2.6 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS

A. Informational Signs, General: Fabricate signs by engraving lettering in high-pressure-laminate

engraving stock with contrasting face and core. Machine engrave copy using high-speed

cutters mechanically positioned by master templates for accurately formed letters, numbers,

and symbols.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2. Provide copy indicated or as directed. Provide signs of sufficient size to contain required

information.

3. Indicate lead equivalence in millimeters and heights of radiation protection in inches

(millimeters).

B. Rooms Where the Level of Protection Is Uniform Throughout: Provide one sign for each room

indicating lead equivalence of partitions, ceilings, floors, doors, and other portions of radiation

protection enclosure. Indicate height of radiation protection above floor or indicate that

partitions are radiation protected to full height.

C. Rooms Where the Level of Protection Is Not Uniform Throughout: Provide one sign for each

room with different lead equivalences in different locations. Indicate, in tabular form, lead

equivalence of each wall, partition, ceiling, floor, door, and window. Indicate height of

radiation protection above floor or indicate that partitions are radiation protected to full height.

Indicate where lead equivalence changes or is not continuous.

D. Rooms Where Some Partitions Are without Radiation Protection: Provide one sign for each

partition that contains radiation protection and indicate its lead equivalence. Indicate height of

radiation protection above floor or indicate that partitions are radiation protected to full height.

E. Rooms Where Only the Door Has Radiation Protection: Provide one sign for each door

indicating its lead equivalence.

2.7 DOOR AND DOOR FRAME FABRICATION

A. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare doors and frames to receive templated mortised

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the

Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door

Hardware."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates in areas to receive radiation protection, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting

performance of radiation protection.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



3.2 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install with long edge parallel to supports and lead lining facing supports. Provide blocking at

end joints.

B. Fastening to Metal Supports: Use steel drill screws spaced as recommended in writing by

gypsum board manufacturer. Install lead strips covering face of framing and wrap around

flange to cover points of screws.

1. Where possible, install lead-lined gypsum board before installing gypsum board on other

side of partition, and do not fold lead strips back over inside of flange until after lead-

lined gypsum board is applied.

2. Apply lead disks recessed flush with surface of board over heads of screws securing trim.

C. Openings: Extend lead-lined gypsum board into frames of openings, lapping lead lining with

lead frames or frame linings at least 1 inch (25 mm). Arrange board around openings so neither

horizontal nor vertical joints occur at corners of openings.

D. Install control and expansion joints where indicated, with appropriate trim accessories. Install

lead strip on face of framing, extending across joint, and lap with lead lining of gypsum board.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES

A. Install lead-lined steel door frames according to Division 8 Section "Steel Door Frames."

1. Apply a coat of asphalt mastic or paint to lead lining in door frames where lead will

come in contact with masonry or grout.

B. Install lead-lined wood doors according to Division 8 Section "Vinyl Clad Flush Wood Doors."

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with door


D. Lap lead lining of frames over lining in walls at least 1 inch (25 mm).

E. Line astragals with lead sheet.

F. Hardware: Line covers, escutcheons, and plates to provide effective shielding at cutouts and

penetrations of frames and doors. See Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for other installation

requirements.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED VISION PANELS IN DOORS

A. Install vision panels according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2


B. Install vision panels level, plumb, square, true to line, and anchored securely in place to doors.

C. Install leaded side of frame on radiation side of door. Lap lead lining of frames over lining in

doors

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with


3.5 INSTALLATION OF PENETRATING ITEMS

A. At penetrations of lead linings, provide lead shields to maintain continuity of protection.

B. Provide lead linings, sleeves, shields, and other protection in thickness not less than that

required in assembly being penetrated.

C. Secure shields at penetrations using adhesive or wire ties but not penetrating fasteners unless

indicated on Drawings.

D. Recessed Storage Cabinets: Where recessed storage cabinets occur in lead-lined partitions, line

wall flange with lead sheet of same thickness as required for partition where it is located.

E. Outlet Boxes and Conduit: Cover or line with lead sheet lapped over adjacent lead lining at

least 1 inch (25 mm). Wrap conduit with lead sheet for a distance of not less than 10 inches (250

mm) from box.

F. Duct Openings: Unless otherwise indicated, line or wrap ducts with lead sheet for distance

from partition/ceiling equal to three times the largest opening dimension. Lap lead sheet with

adjacent lead lining at least 1 inch (25 mm).

G. Piping: Unless otherwise indicated, wrap piping with lead sheet for a distance of not less than

10 inches (250 mm) from point of penetration.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections

after radiology equipment has been installed and placed in operating condition.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace radiation protection that inspection reports

indicate does not comply with specified requirements.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Lock radiation-protected rooms once doors and locks are installed and limit access to only those

persons performing work in the rooms.


OR RENOVATIONS

BID PACKAGE 2



LWA Project # 12-215-01 NORTHWEST HOSPITAL October 4, 2013 – Construction Set OR RENOVATIONS – BID PACKAGE 2

MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - 1

SECTION 15010 – MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. GENERAL

1.1. Related Documents:

1.1.1. The general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section describes the general provisions for the mechanical and

electrical work included in Division 15. This section applies to all sections of Division 15.

1.3. Responsibility:

1.3.1. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all work included in the

Mechanical Division and the delegation of work to Subcontractors shall not relieve him of this responsibility. Subcontractors who perform work under these Sections shall be responsible to the General Contractor. The term "Contractor" is used throughout this Division and shall mean the General Contractor, although the actual performance of the work may be by a Subcontractor.

1.4. References and Definitions:

1.4.1. Following are definitions of terms and expressions used in Mechanical

and Electrical Sections:

Owner: Northwest Hospital a Life Bridge Health Center Architects: Hord Coplan Macht Engineers: Leach Wallace Associates, Inc. Provide - "furnish and install" Directed - "directed by the Architect” Indicated - "indicated in Contract Documents"

Concealed - "hidden from normal sight"; includes items in

shafts, pipe and duct spaces, and above ceilings.

Exposed - "not concealed" - Work within Equipment Rooms

and all visible (normal sight) work shall be considered exposed".

Piping - includes pipes, fittings, valves, hangers and

accessories comprising a system.



Ductwork - includes ducts, fittings, housings, plenums, dampers, hangers, and accessories comprising a system.

1.5. Standard Specification:

1.5.1. See General Requirements of the contract. 1.5.2. References to catalogs, standards, codes, specifications, and

regulations are the latest edition in effect at date of invitation to bid.

1.6. Codes, Regulations and Permits:

1.6.1. Give all necessary notices and obtain all required permits. Pay all fees and other costs, including utility connections or extensions in connection with the work. File all necessary plans, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. Obtain all required certificates of inspection and deliver same to the Architect before request for acceptance and final payment for the work.

1.6.2. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the

latest rules, regulations, and recommendations of the following bodies:

International Building Code (IBC) International Mechanical Code National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Electrical Code (NEC) National Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC) Fire Prevention Bureaus of Baltimore County and the State of Maryland. Baltimore Gas and Electric (BGE)

1.7. Materials List and Shop Drawings:

1.7.1. See General Requirements. 1.7.2. Within 15 working days after the award of the Contract, the Contractor

shall submit to the Architect for approval a list of manufacturer's names of material and equipment he proposes to provide. In the event any items of material or equipment contained in the list fail to comply with the specification requirements, such items will be rejected. If, prior to the expiration of the fifteen (15) day period or any duly authorized extension thereof, the Contractor fails to submit a schedule of acceptable material or equipment covering the items, the Architect will select the items and such selection will be final and binding upon the Contractor as a condition of the contract. Rejected items shall be resubmitted within 15 days. The Architect will select materials and equipment not submitted in such time.

1.7.3. After receiving approval of equipment manufacturers and prior to



delivery of any material to job site and sufficiently in advance of requirements to allow the Architect ample time for checking, submit for approval, dimensioned drawings or cuts showing construction size, arrangement, operating clearances, performance characteristics and capacity of materials and equipment. Each item of equipment proposed shall be a standard catalog product of the approved manufacturer.

1.7.4. Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogs, etc., submitted for

approval shall be properly labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used, section and article number of specifications governing, and Contractor's name, name of job, and date.

1.7.5. Catalogs, pamphlets or other documents submitted to describe items

on which approval is being required shall be specific and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc., of the item submitted shall be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted. Any deviations or exceptions taken in the specification by the Contractor shall be so noted.

1.7.6. If material or equipment is installed prior to receipt by the Contractor of

pertinent shop drawings marked "No Exception Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted", the Contractor shall be liable for its removal and replacement at no extra charge to the Owner.

1.7.7. The acceptance of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from

his responsibility to furnish material, equipment and systems and to perform work required by the contract documents. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for errors or omissions on shop drawings furnished by the Contractor even though such shop drawings containing errors or omissions are inadvertently accepted.

1.7.8. The Contractor is further advised that the Architect will not act as

coordinator between suppliers and subcontractors. All required coordination shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.8. Contractor’s Use of CAD Files:

1.8.1. At the Contractor’s written request, copies of the Engineer’s CAD files

may be made available for Contractor use in connection with the project, subject to the following conditions:

1.8.1.1. Submit written request to the Architect listing the specific

drawings the Contractor intends to use. Provide a specific list of submittals that the files will be used in preparing, and the list of names of subcontractors or suppliers.

1.8.1.2. The Contractor shall request in writing the electronic transfer

agreement. Prior to transfer of files, the Contractor shall prepare a separate electronic transfer agreement for each subcontractor or supplier who will be using the electronic files.

1.9. Equipment Start-Up and Initial Operation:



1.9.1. No equipment shall be operated for testing or trial use except after full compliance with the equipment manufacturers' specifications and instructions of the lubrication, alignment direction of rotation, balance, and other applicable considerations.

1.9.2. Particular care shall be taken to see that all equipment is completely

assembled and properly lubricated and all grease and oil cases and reservoirs have been filled to the correct level with the recommended lubricant.

1.9.3. It is the Contractor's responsibility to place each item of equipment

installed by him in operating condition, including all auxiliaries, piping, wiring, etc., and to start up each unit and check it for performance.

1.10. Guarantee:

1.10.1. The Contractor guarantees by his acceptance of the Contract that all

work provided shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one year after date of certification of completion and acceptance of work. Any defects in workmanship, materials or performance which appear within the guarantee period shall be corrected by the Contractor without cost to the Owner within a reasonable time to be specified in notice from the Architect. In default thereof, Owner may have such work done and charge the cost of same to the Contractor.

1.11. Site Visit:

1.11.1. Prior to preparing the bid, the mechanical and electrical subcontractors

shall visit the site and familiarize themselves with all existing conditions. Make all necessary investigations as to locations of existing equipment, ductwork, piping, utilities, etc., work to be removed, and all other matters which can affect the work under the Contract. No additional compensation will be made to the contractor as result of his failure to familiarize himself with the existing conditions under which the work must be performed.

1.11.2. See Instructions to Bidders.

1.12. Drawings:

1.12.1. The contract drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangements of systems and work included in the Contract. Do not scale the drawings. Consult the architectural and structural drawings and details for exact location of structure and equipment; where same are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect.

1.13. Record Drawings:

1.13.1. The Contractor shall keep accurate records of all deviations in work

are actually installed from work indicated. One complete set of contract documents shall be available at the construction site for indicating said deviations.

1.13.2. When work is complete, make one (1) complete "As-Built" set of

reproducible mylar sepias, certifying the accuracy of each drawing by



endorsement and signature thereon and deliver to the Architect who will, after approval, deliver the record drawings to the Owner.

1.13.3. See General and Supplementary Conditions.

1.14. Operating and Maintenance Instructions:

1.14.1. Upon completion of all work and of all tests, Contractor shall furnish

the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating the systems and equipment for a minimum period of two (2) days of eight hours each, or as otherwise specified. Instruct the Owner's representative fully in the operating, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment furnished. Instruction shall be divided into four (4) sessions of four hours each, each at a time directed by the Owner.

1.14.2. Contractor shall furnish to the Architect four (4) complete bound sets of

typewritten or blueprinted instructions for operating and maintaining all systems and equipment included in this Contract. Each set of instructions shall be contained in a hard-back ring binder properly indexed and labeled. Also provide two complete bound sets of approved shop drawings for all items of equipment utilized on the project. All instructions shall be submitted in draft for approval prior to the final issue. Manufacturers' advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instructions.

1.14.3. Instructions shall include a general description of each system together

with specific instructions describing routine and emergency procedures required of the building maintenance personnel for operating and maintaining each system. The instructions shall include the name or label, location, and function of all operating equipment and controls, and the location of the electrical service and breaker I.D. numbers. Operating modes and the procedures for indexing each mode shall be clearly described. Include lubrication charts and schedules of frequency of lubrication for all equipment designating each point of lubrication and type of lubricant to be used. A listing of names, addresses, and phone numbers of the service organizations for each item of equipment and a typewritten maintenance schedule for same shall be included.

1.14.4. The instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the

installation on which he is to give instruction and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Employ factory trained instructors wherever necessary as determined by the Architect.

1.14.5. During the guarantee period, the Contractor shall service all major

equipment items provided under this contract, including chillers, and air handling units which require outside service agencies. Service shall not include filter replacement, lubrication of motors and bearings or continuation of water and special system chemical treatment after formal acceptance of the systems by the Architect. Prior to the start of guarantee period, the Contractor shall provide the Architect with a schedule of required maintenance operations for each item of equipment. Submit schedule to the Architect for approval. Thereafter, monthly reports shall be submitted to the Owner for describing actual service provided. Forty-eight (48) hours advance notice shall be given



to Owner prior to work required under this Section.

1.15. Electrical Work:

1.15.1. Under Division 15 MECHANICAL, provide the following items of electrical work which shall conform with the applicable requirements of the Electrical Division:

1.15.1.1. Temperature control wiring. 1.15.1.2. Interlock wiring for mechanical equipment.

1.15.2. Under Division 16 ELECTRICAL, provide:

1.15.2.1. Power wiring complete from source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through motor starters.

1.15.2.2. All miscellaneous individual motor starters, local wall

mounted control devices, unless noted or specified otherwise.

1.15.2.3. All fire alarm interface wiring including smoke detectors

located in mechanical systems.

1.16. Fire Protection:

1.16.1. As minimum, one five pound CO2 extinguisher shall be provided with each work crew at all times when working within the building.

1.17. Schedule of Work:

1.17.1. See General Requirements.

1.18. Service Agencies:

1.18.1. All mechanical and electrical equipment suppliers shall have an

established authorized service agency located within the Washington-Baltimore Metropolitan areas. Within 30 days after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval a list of manufacturers' material and equipment names, including their respective service agency, he proposes to use. In the event any service agency in the list fails to comply with the specification requirement, such service agency will be rejected.

1.19. Singular Number:

1.19.1. Where any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the

singular number (such as "valve"), such reference applies to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation, shown, implied or otherwise, as indicated on the drawings.



2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Materials:

2.1.1. All materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds, suitable for the conditions and duties imposed on them at the building and shall be of reputable manufacturers'. The description, characteristics, and requirements of materials to be used shall be in accordance with qualifying conditions established in the sections following.

2.1.2. See Division 1 - General Requirements. 2.1.3. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the

manufacturers' name plate, giving name of manufacturer, description, size, type, serial or model number, electrical characteristics, etc., in order to facilitate the maintenance or replacement. The name plate of a subcontractor or distributor will not be acceptable. All equipment requiring electrical service shall be U.L. labeled, or if a U.L. label is not available from the manufacturer, the equipment shall be tested by an approved electrical testing company in accordance with NEC, and at no additional cost to the Owner. Submit data indicating compliance with standards prior to installation.

2.1.4. In specifying materials, four general procedures are used. The four

classifications are as follows: 2.1.4.1. GROUP I: When the material or equipment is specified by

name of other identifying information and one name brand only is used, it is considered that the use of that particular item is essential to the project, and the Contractor shall base his proposal on the uses of that item.

2.1.4.2. GROUP 2: When a material or equipment is specified by

brand name and other identifying information and two or more brand names are named, it is considered that any one of the brands so named will be performed as desired, and the Contractor shall base his proposal on one of the named brands.

2.1.4.3. GROUP 3: When the material or equipment is specified with

the phrase "... or equal..." after a brand name and other identifying information, it is intended that the brand name is used for the purpose of establishing a minimum acceptable standard of quality and performance and Contractor may base his bid proposal on any item which is in all respects equal to that specified and presents essentially the same appearance, size, operation and performance. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of the equal product.

2.1.4.4. GROUP 4: When material is specified as complying with the

requirements of published "Standard Specification" of trade associations, American Society for Testing and Material, government specifications, etc., the Contractor shall base his proposal on any item which can be shown to comply in all



respects to the referred to "Standard Specification."

2.1.5. It is distinctly understood: (1) that the Architect will use his own judgment in determining whether or not any materials, equipment or methods offered in substitution are equal to those specified and will fit within the space available; (2) that the decision of the Architect on all such questions of equality is final; and (3) that all substitutions will be made at no increases in cost to the Owner.

2.1.6. Upon receipt of written approval from Architect, Contractor may

proceed with substitution providing the Contractor assumes full responsibility for and makes, at his expense, any change or adjustment in construction or connection with any work that may be required by the substitution of such materials, equipment or methods. In the event of any adverse decisions by the Architect, no claim of any sort shall be made or allowed against the Owner.

2.2. Piping Supports, Generally:

2.2.1. Piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless

otherwise shown or noted on drawings. The different service pipes, valves, and fittings shall be so installed that after the covering is applied there will not be less than 1/2 inch clear space between the finished covering of parallel adjacent pipes. Hangers on different service lines running parallel with each other and nearly together shall be in line with each other and parallel to the lines of the building. Exact location of electric outlets, piping, ducts, and conduits shall be coordinated among the trades so that there will be no interference between lighting fixtures, piping, ducts, and conduits. Where conflicts between the trades result, they shall be resolved by the Contractor to the Architect's satisfaction and at no expense to the Owner.

2.2.2. Hangers shall be spaced so as to prevent sag and permit proper

drainage and shall not be spaced more than 10 feet apart unless a greater space is definitely indicated herein or on the drawings. Hangers shall be placed within one foot of each horizontal elbow.

2.2.3. Vertical runs of pipe and conduit not over 15 feet long shall be

supported by hangers placed not over one foot from the elbows on the connecting horizontal runs. Vertical runs of pipe and conduit over 15 feet long but not over 60 feet long and not over 6 inches in size shall be supported on heavy steel clamps. Clamps shall be bolted tightly around the pipes and conduits and shall rest securely on the building structure without blocking.

2.2.4. Hangers shall be of manufacturers hereinafter specified in Section

15050. Unless otherwise specified, pipe and conduit hangers and hanger supports shall conform with the following Grinnell figures:

2.2.4.1. Hangers generally shall be Fig. 69, 104, 212, 260 and 300. 2.2.4.2. Hangers Figs. 295 and 212 shall be provided with

turnbuckles and eye rods or rods with eye nuts. 2.2.4.3. Turnbuckles shall be Fig. 230 and 114, shall have not less

than 1-1/2 inch adjustment, and shall be provided with



lockouts. 2.2.4.4. Clamps shall be Fig. 261 or CT-121. 2.2.4.5. Wherever the movement of pipe due to expansion exceeds

3/4 inch per foot of hanger rod length, hangers shall be Figs. 171, 174 and 181.

2.2.4.6. Roller supports shall be adjustable, Grinnell Fig. 274. 2.2.4.7. Concrete inserts shall be Fig. 282 or 281. 2.2.4.8. On copper pipes, hangers in contact with pipe shall be

copper plated.

2.2.5. In lieu of individual hangers, multiple (trapeze) hangers may be used for water pipes having same elevation and slope and for electrical conduits as specified hereinafter:

2.2.5.1. Horizontal members shall consist of 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch

No. 12 gauge, cold formed electro-galvanized dipped channels designed to accept special springheld hardened steel nuts for securing hanger rods and other attachments. Provide metal framing system with applicable fasteners, brackets, fittings, clamps, etc. Two or more such channels may be welded together forming horizontal members of greater strength than single channels. Members shall be Kindorf Series B-995, Unistrut, or approved equal.

2.2.5.2. Each multiple hanger shall be designed to support a load

equal to the sum of the weights of the pipes and liquid, the weight of the hanger rods shall be such that the stress at the root of the thread will not be over 10,000 psi at design load, except that no rod shall be smaller than 3/8 inch. The size of the horizontal members shall be such that the maximum stress will not be over 15,000 psi at design load.

2.2.5.3. Horizontal runs of piping along walls, 4 inch and smaller,

exposed or concealed, shall be secured to metal framing system as specified herein. Provide appropriate clamps, brackets and similar attachments to secure piping to vertical members in accordance with applicable sections of the specification.

2.2.5.4. On copper pipes in contact with horizontal member, provide

rubber strip (Vibra Strip or equal) between hanger attachment and copper pipe.

2.2.6. Hanger attachments shall be suitable for each type of hanger and shall

be compatible with the building material to which it is secured. Under no circumstances shall pipe support be secured to any other mechanical, electrical or fire protection equipment. Support shall be suspended from building structure only. The type of attachments which shall be used for the various types of building construction encountered are as follows:



2.2.6.1. Steel beams - Fig. 226, or 66 attachments. 2.2.6.2. Bar joists - Fig. 225, or 60. 2.2.6.3. Brick or block walls - Fig. 194, 195, 199 or 202 fastened as

follows: For light duty, self-drilling anchors in brick and toggle bolts in block; for heavy duty, through bolts with backing plates.

2.2.6.4. Concrete (Existing) - Phillips "Redhead" or Rawl self-drilling

anchors or expansion bolts. 2.2.6.5. Concrete (New) - Inserts, Fig. 281 or 282. Power driver

fasteners may be used for light loading as hereinafter specified.

2.2.7. Welded attachments for securing hangers to piping or to structural

steel may be provided in lieu of other attachments specified if prior approval is obtained in the field from the Architect. Welded attachments shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point in the weld or attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod. Generally, welding shall not be permitted in finished spaces.

2.2.8. On insulated piping at hangers, provide calcium silicate inserts and

shields at each point of support, see Section 15050. 2.2.9. In no case shall wire or perforated strap be used for pipe or conduit

support. 2.2.10. Secure all hangers for piping and ductwork to joist and beams. In no

case shall supports be secured to underside of metal or wood deck unless otherwise directed in the field by the Architect. Contractor shall submit details of method of attachments for approval to the Architect.

2.2.11. See Section 15050 for vibration hanger requirements.

2.3. Motors:

2.3.1. Provide motors of a size adequate to drive the equipment but in no case less than the size shown or specified. If a motor larger than that specified is required, the Contractor shall bear the expense of changes in foundations, support, wire and conduit connections, circuit protective devices, variable frequency drives, or other affected elements of the system. Each motor shall have sufficient capacity to start and operate the machine it drives without exceeding the motor nameplate rating at the speed specified or at the load which may be obtained by the drive actually provided. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty at 115 percent of rated capacity; base temperature rise on an ambient temperature of 40 degrees centigrade. Motors for use with variable frequency controllers shall be designed to withstand a rise time of 0.10 microseconds and a peak voltage of 1600 per NEMA MG1 Section 31.40.4.2.

2.3.2. Motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be 3 phase, Class B, general purpose,

squirrel cage, open type, high efficiency, induction motors. The rated nominal full load efficiency shall be in accordance with the following



schedule when tested in accordance with NEMA test standards when wound for 208 or 480 volts, 60 Hertz, alternating current. Motors smaller than 1/2 hp shall be single phase, open capacitor type in accordance with NEMA standards wound for 115 volts, 60 Hertz, alternating current. Motors 1/6 hp and under may be split phase type.

2.3.3. Motor efficiencies shall comply with the United States Energy and

Independence and Security Act (EISA) of 2007 and NEMA Standard MG1 Table 12-2.

2.3.4. Devices (such as: capacitors) or equipment (such as: solid state

power factor controllers) when required for power factor correction shall be provided with the motors or item or motor driven equipment. The device shall be mounted and wired to the motor by the project electrical contractor.

2.3.4.1. For a motor or motor driven equipment requiring other than

across-the-line starting PF correcting capacitors (or other equipment) shall be connected to motor terminals via a contactor (controller) with a 120 VAC coil. The 120 VAC coil shall be energized via an auxiliary contact on the contactor (controller) used to establish the "run" operating mode for the motor or motor driven equipment.

2.4. Sleeves and Plates:

2.4.1. Pipe sleeves through concrete and masonry construction shall be

Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipes unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Openings that cannot be sleeved before slab or wall is poured shall be core drilled. Pipe sleeves through drywall and similar construction shall be sized to pass both pipe and insulation, and where permitted by code, may be Schedule 40 PVC.

2.4.2. Sleeves in existing concrete or masonry walls shall be set and secured

with mortar grout and fast drying bitumastic sealant. Caulk the annular space of pipe sleeves with an elastic caulk compound to make installation air and water tight.

2.4.3. Escutcheon plates shall be provided for all exposed pipes and conduits

passing through walls, floors, and ceilings in finished areas. Plates shall be chrome plated brass of the split ring type, of size to match the pipe or insulation where installed. Where plates are provided for pipes passing through sleeves which extend above the floor surface, provide deep recessed plates to conceal the pipe sleeves.

2.4.4. Except above suspended acoustical tile ceilings, provide 24 gauge

galvanized sheet metal sleeves for all ductwork passing through floor, ceiling or wall construction. Duct sleeves shall be large enough to pass duct with insulation and shall have 1/2 inch flanges returned against the construction material.

2.4.5. Where fire dampers are required, provide sleeves in compliance with

code requirements, minimum 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal. 2.4.6. At all sleeves where noise can be transmitted (Mechanical and

Electrical Rooms), smoke barriers, walls above ceiling to underside of



the structure of floor above, or at fire rated separations, seal openings between pipes and ducts and corresponding sleeve to prevent sound transmissions and maintain fire rating. Utilize U.L. approved resilient sealant for penetration seals. Submit method of sealing for approval.

2.4.7. Where watertight sleeves are indicated or required to suit the

installation, provide Link Seal rubber seals, as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, between pipes and sleeves.

2.5. Drives for Machinery:

2.5.1. Equip each motor driven machine with a V-belt drive except those

which are directly connected. Where factory designed and assembled belt drives which do not conform to the following are proposed to be furnished, such non-conformity must be noted on the submittals and such non-conformity may be cause for rejection of the item.

2.5.2. Select each drive according to the rating and recommendation of the

manufacturer for the service with which used, giving proper allowance for sheave diameter, center distance, and arc of contact less than 180 degrees. Size motors driving centrifugal fans so they have a nameplate rating of not less than 5 percent above the total of actual fan brake horsepower and drive loss at specified capacity if the wheel is of other than the forward curved blade type, and not less than 50 percent above the total of actual fan brake horsepower and drive loss at specified capacity if the wheel is of the forward curve blade type.

2.5.3. Belts shall be constructed of endless reinforced cords of long staple

Aramit, nylon, rayon, or other suitable textile fibers imbedded in rubber. Use belt with correct cross section to fit properly in the sheave grooves. Carefully match belts for each drive.

2.5.4. Motor sheaves less than 20 HP shall be adjustable pitch type so

selected that the required fan rotation speed will be obtained with the motor sheave set approximately in mid-position and have the specified pitch diameter in that position. During the Commissioning Phase, if required to meet the actual system requirements, a second set of sheaves and belts shall be provided and installed.

2.5.5. Select the motor of a capacity needed to operate the equipment at the

specified mid-position operating condition. Where non-overloading motors are specified, select the motor sheave. In no case shall motors be a smaller size than those shown.

2.5.6. Do not select fan sheave smaller in diameter than 30 percent of the fan

wheel diameter. 2.5.7. Construct sheave of cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on the

shafts and secured with key ways (not set screws) or proper size, except key ways may be omitted for sheaves having 1/2-inch or smaller bores where set screws may be used.

2.5.8. Provide OSHA approved guards for all belt drives, constructed in

accordance with SMACNA standards. Submit shop drawings for approval.



2.6. Drip Pans:

2.6.1. Where possible to run mechanical piping elsewhere, do not run mechanical piping directly above electrical (or electronic) work which is sensitive to moisture; otherwise provide drip pans under mechanical piping, sufficient to protect electrical work from leakage. Locate pan immediately below piping, and extend a minimum of 6" on each side of piping and lengthwise 12" beyond equipment protected. Fabricate pans 2" deep of reinforced metal with rolled edges and soldered or welded seams; 16 gauge steel with 2 oz. zinc finish hot dipped after fabrication. Provide 3/4" copper drainage piping, properly discharged, to nearest floor drain, service sink, or as directed in the field.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. Workmanship:

3.1.1. Each subcontractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of the installation of the work.

3.1.2. The quality of the workmanship required for each trade in the

execution of its work shall be the finest and highest obtainable in that trade working with the materials specified. Workmanship shall be satisfactory to the Architect and his decision as to acceptable quality if final.

3.2. Equipment Connections:

3.2.1. All equipment shall be installed and connected in accordance with the

best engineering practice and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Auxiliary piping, valves, and electric connections recommended by the manufacturer or required for proper operation shall be provided.

3.3. Commissioning Responsibilities:

3.3.1. The mechanical contractor, and all the sub-contractors and suppliers

within Division 15, shall cooperate with the commissioning agency (CA), and other commissioning team members, to facilitate the successful completion of the commissioning process.

3.3.2. The contractor shall assign a representative to the commissioning

team, and submit the person’s name to the commissioning agency, within one (1) month of the award of the contract. The representative shall have the authority to make decisions on behalf of the mechanical contractor as they relate to the organization and scheduling of HVAC commissioning. The representative shall ensure communications between Division 15 contractors and suppliers and all other commissioning team members, and shall foster the necessary cooperative action. One specific responsibility shall be to attend commissioning meetings, and ensure action items arising from them are attended to as required to allow the commissioning process to proceed on schedule.

3.3.3. The Mechanical Contractor, and all mechanical sub-contractors and



suppliers, shall cooperate with the Commissioning Agency in carrying out the HVAC commissioning process. In this context, the Mechanical Contractor shall:

3.3.3.1. Each contractor and sub-contractor in this division shall

include in their quotes the cost of participating in the commissioning process as specified herein.

3.3.3.2. Ensure the automatic temperature controls (ATC) contractor

performs HVAC commissioning responsibilities as listed in 15900.

3.3.3.3. Provide instruction and demonstrations for the Owner’s

designated operating staff, in conjunction with the commissioning agency and mechanical engineer, and with the participation of qualified technicians from major equipment suppliers and the controls contractor.

3.3.3.4. Include requirements for submittal data, O&M data, and

training information in each purchase order or sub-contract written.

3.3.3.5. Ensure cooperation and participation of specialty sub-

contractors such as sheet metal, piping, refrigeration, and water treatment as applicable.

3.3.3.6. Ensure participation of major equipment manufacturing in

appropriate start-up, testing and training activities. 3.3.3.7. Attend HVAC commissioning meetings scheduled by the CA. 3.3.3.8. Notify the CA a minimum of two weeks in advance of

scheduled equipment and system start-ups, so that the CA may witness system verifications, and equipment and system start-ups.

3.3.3.9. Provide sufficient personnel to assist the CA as required

during system verification and functional performance testing.

3.3.3.10. Prior to start-up, inspect, check and confirm the correct and complete installation of all equipment and systems for which system verification checklists are included in the commissioning plan. Document the results of all inspections and checks on the checklists and sign them. If deficient or incomplete work is discovered, ensure corrective action is taken and re-check until the results are satisfactory and the system is ready for safe start-up.

3.3.3.11. Notify the CA a minimum of two weeks in advance, of the

time for start of the TAB work. Attend the initial TAB meeting for review of the TAB procedures.

3.3.3.12. Provide equipment and systems start-up resources as

specified and required. If during an attempted equipment or system start-up, deficient or incomplete work is discovered that would preclude safe operation, the start-up shall be



aborted until corrective action has been taken. Ensure such action is taken and verified before re-scheduling a new start-up. Those responsible for deficient or incomplete work will be responsible for the costs associated with rescheduling.

3.3.3.13. Carry out performance checks to ensure that all equipment

and systems fully functional and ready for the CA to witness formal functional performance tests (FPTs).

3.3.3.14. Operate equipment and systems for FPTs in accordance with

the commissioning plan and as directed by the commissioning agency. If improper functionality, incomplete work, or other deficiencies affecting system performance are discovered, the FPTs will be stopped by the CA. Those responsible for deficient or incomplete work will be responsible for costs associated with rescheduling. Ensure that all corrections necessary for full and complete system operation as specified are completed; then with the ATC contractor and other applicable sub-contractors, carry out functional performance checks to confirm correct operation before applying to the CA to reschedule the FPTs for the system in question.

3.3.3.15. Prepare preliminary schedule for mechanical system

orientation and inspections, O&M manual submission, training sessions, pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, TAB, and task completion for use by the CA. Update schedule as appropriate throughout the construction period.

3.3.3.16. Attend initial O&M staff training session.

3.3.3.17. Conduct mechanical system orientation and inspection at the

equipment placement completion stage.

3.3.3.18. Update drawings to as-built condition and review with the CA.

3.3.3.19. Prepare O&M manuals as specified herein.

3.3.3.20. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the O&M staff training sessions as set up by the CA.

3.3.3.21. Provide written notification to the general contractor and CA

that the following work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents and the equipment, systems and sub-systems are operating as required.

3.3.3.21.1. HVAC equipment including all fans, air handling

units, ductwork, dampers, terminals and all Division 15 equipment.

3.3.3.21.2. Refrigeration equipment, pumping systems and

heat rejection equipment.

3.3.3.21.3. Fire stopping in the fire rated construction,



including fire and smoke damper installation, caulking, gasketing and sealing of smoke barriers.

3.3.3.21.4. Non-dedicated systems using the air-handling

units for smoke control.

3.3.3.21.5. Fire detection and smoke detection devices furnished under other divisions of this specification as they affect the operation of the smoke control systems.

3.3.3.21.6. That the building control system is functioning to

control mechanical equipment and smoke control systems as specified.

3.3.3.22. Provide a complete set of as-built drawings and O&M

manuals to the CA for review. 3.3.3.23. Integrate installation and programming scheduling with

construction and commissioning schedules. 3.3.3.24. Inspect, check and confirm the correct installation and

operation of input and output field points and devices through documented and signed off point-to-point checkouts.

3.3.3.25. Provide thorough training to operating personnel on

hardware operations and programming, and the application program for the system, in accordance with the O&M staff training program in the commissioning plan.

3.3.3.26. In conjunction with the mechanical contractor, demonstrate

system performance to the CA including all modes of system operation (e.g. occupied, unoccupied, emergency) during the functional performance tests (FPTs). If improper functionality, incomplete work, or other deficiencies affecting system performance are discovered, the FPTs will be stopped by the CA. Those responsible for deficient or incomplete work will be responsible for rescheduling costs.

3.3.3.27. Provide control system technician to assist during system

verification and functional performance testing. 3.3.3.28. Provide support and coordination with TAB contractor on all

interfaces between controls and TAB scopes of work. Provide, at no additional cost to the TAB and commissioning agencies, all devices, such as portable operator’s terminals and all software for the TAB agency to use in completing TAB procedures.

3.4. Waterproofing:

3.4.1. Under no circumstances shall waterproofing be damaged or

penetrated. Should conditions arise which indicate such necessity, notify the Architect.



3.5. Cutting and Patching:

3.5.1. Cutting and patching associated with the work in the existing structure shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Existing surfaces which are damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired or provided with new materials and methods similar to existing adjacent work, subject to approval of the Architect. Structural members shall not be cut or penetrated unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Verify in the field with the Architect. Holes cut through concrete and/or masonry to accommodate new work shall be cut by reciprocating or rotary nonpercussive methods. Existing masonry block walls shall be patched with new masonry or gypsum board attached and sealed to both block faces.

3.5.2. See General Conditions.

3.6. Surveys and Measurements:

3.6.1. Base all measurements (both horizontal and vertical) from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site and check correctness of same as related to the work. Verify locations of existing utilities and inverts of same prior to the start of any systems shown connecting to utilities.

3.6.2. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancy between actual

measurements or conditions and those indicated which prevent following good practice or the intent of the drawings and specifications, he shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed with his work until he has received instruction from the Architect.

3.7. Welding:

3.7.1. Welding shall conform to current standards and recommendations of

the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, with all Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Acts, State and City Fire Prevention Code Requirements, Fire and Safety Regulations, and NFPA Standard 241 including provision of appropriate portable fire extinguisher.

3.7.2. Before assigning any welders to work covered by this specification, the

Contractor shall provide the Architect with the names of pipe welders to be employed for the work, together with each welder's assigned number, letter, or symbol which shall be used to identify the work of that welder and which shall be affixed immediately upon completion of the work, copies of each welder's certified qualification tests prescribed by the National Certified Welding Bureau or by other reputable testing laboratory using procedures covered in the American Society of Mechanical Engineers Building Construction Code, Section IX, "Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures Welders, Brazers and Welding and Brazing Operators." Welders must be certified for all positions.

3.7.3. If requested by the Architect, the Contractor shall submit identifying

stenciled test coupons made by any operator in question. The Contractor shall require any welder to retake the tests when, in the opinion of the Architect, the work of the welder creates a reasonable doubt as to his proficiency. Tests, when required, shall be conducted



at no additional expense to the Owner; and the welder in question shall not be permitted to work as a welder on this project until he has been recertified. Recertification of the welder shall be made to the Architect only after the welder has taken and passed the required test; welder must pass the test without benefit or retests in order to resume work as a welder on the project.

3.7.4. Welding for pressurization piping systems shall conform to American

National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) B31.9, “Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping”. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of welding and shall repair or replace any work not in accordance with these specifications. Contractor shall, without cost to the Owner, check welds by radiograph, ultrasonic testing, sectioning or a combination of these methods wherever there is a question raised by the Architect as to the quality of a weld; examination of the questionable weld shall be in addition to other system tests specified. Welds shall have penetration complete to the inside diameter of the pipe and the recommended spacing and bevels between ends of pipe prior to welding shall be used in all cases to assure full penetration.

3.8. Handling and Storage of Materials:

3.8.1. Proper and suitable tools, equipment and appliances for the safe and convenient handling and placing of all materials and equipment shall be used. During loading, unloading, and placing, care shall be taken in handling the equipment and materials so that no equipment or materials, including Owner furnished, are damaged.

3.8.2. All mechanical and/or electrical equipment delivered to the job site

shall be stored under roof or other approved covering, on pedestals above the ground. All enclosures for equipment shall be weatherproof. Any motors which are not totally enclosed, that are involved in the work, shall be stored in a heated area with a minimum temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit. All valves shall be stored under roof on wood pedestals above ground. All insulation shall be stored under roof or in trailers, adequately protected from the weather. The Contractor shall follow all written instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer and all requirements of the Architect in oiling, protection and maintenance of equipment during storage. It shall be the Contractor's complete responsibility for the storage and care of the equipment and materials.

3.8.3. If any materials and/or equipment are found to be in poor condition at

the time of being installed, the Architect may, at his discretion, order the Contractor to furnish and install new equipment at no cost to the Owner.

3.9. Cooperation With Other Trades:

3.9.1. Exact location of air outlets, electric outlets, piping, ducts, and conduits shall be coordinated with all other trades so that there will be no interference between lighting fixtures, piping, ducts, and conduits. Where conflicts between the trades result, they shall be resolved by the Contractor to the Architect's satisfaction and at no expense to the Owner.



3.9.2. Mechanical trades shall give full cooperation to other trades and shall

furnish in writing, with copies to Architect all information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. Exact location of all mechanical equipment in finished spaces shall be coordinated with shop drawings and with elevations indicated on the architectural drawings.

3.10. Cleaning and Painting:

3.10.1. Thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces of equipment and material and leave in a neat, clean condition ready for painting. Restore and touch-up factory finishes which have been damaged during construction. Finished painting will be performed under another Division.

3.10.2. Miscellaneous requirements include:

3.10.2.1. Provide complete new finish if, in the opinion of the Architect, the factory finishes are severely damaged.

3.10.2.2. Touch up threads of zinc coated screwed pipe with

Rustoleum primer and one coat of enamel conforming to painting specification.

3.10.2.3. Paint behind grilles and registers in finished areas with two

coats of flat black paint following surface preparation of the zinc coated metal.

3.10.2.4. All exposed hangers, steel supports and miscellaneous

components, and cast iron pipe hangers shall be field painted with Rustoleum primer and one coat of enamel conforming to painting specification.

3.10.2.5. All steel support and miscellaneous components shall be

painted with Rustoleum primer and one coat of enamel conforming to the painting specification.

3.11. Accessibility:

3.11.1. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained,

in fully accessible positions. Equipment shall include, but not be limited to, air terminal units, coils, valves, motors, controllers, dampers, drain points, etc. Where required and where directed, provide 14 gauge steel access panels, Milcor or equal, to suit material in which installed. Doors installed in fire rated walls or shafts shall be labeled and shall match rating of the construction. Door shall be sufficient size to allow access to all components, except minimum size shall be 24" x 24".

3.11.2. Equipment deemed inaccessible by the Architect shall be reworked by

the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. All doors shall have cylinder locks operable from same key. Submit shop drawings for approval.

3.12. Equipment Bases Supports:



3.12.1. Under this Division provide all equipment supports required for the mechanical work.

3.12.2. Provide structural members and related materials, inertia pads,

platforms, and gratings. 3.12.3. All concrete bases, curbs, and supports shall be furnished under this

Division unless otherwise indicated. 3.12.4. The Contractor shall furnish all required foundation sizes, bolts,

washers, sleeves, plates and templates for equipment. 3.12.5. The size of the foundation bolts shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer. 3.12.6. The type and size of the supporting channels and supplementary steel

shall be determined by the Contractor and shall be of sufficient strength and size to allow only a minimum, deflection in conformance with manufacturer's requirements for loading. Contractor shall submit details for approval to the Architect.


3.13.1. Sleeves shall be provided by the trade installing the pipe or duct. The

sleeves shall be carefully located in advance of the construction of walls and floors where new construction is involved. Provide all cutting and patching necessary to set sleeves which are not placed prior to construction. All cutting and patching necessary to set sleeves which are not placed prior to construction shall be the responsibility of the trade providing the sleeves.

3.13.2. Sleeves shall be provided for all piping and ductwork passing through

concrete, masonry, plaster and gypsum wallboard construction. Caulk the annular space of pipe sleeves with an elastic caulking compound to make installation, air, and water tight.

3.13.3. Fasten sleeves securely in the construction so that they will not

become displaced when concrete is poured or when other construction is built around them. Take precautions to prevent concrete, plaster or other materials being forced into space between pipe and sleeve during construction.

3.13.4. Sleeves required in existing concrete or masonry walls shall be set and

secured with mortar grout and fast drying bitumastic sealant. 3.13.5. At all sleeves where objectionable noise can be transmitted, at smoke

barriers, at walls above ceilings that extend to underside of the structure of floor above, or at fire rated separations, seal all openings between pipes and ducts and corresponding sleeves to prevent sound transmission and to maintain fire rating. Use U.L. approved resilient sealant for penetration seals. Submit method of sealing for approval. Where watertight sleeves are indicated or required to suit the installation, provide Link Seal rubber seals as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, between pipe and sleeves.

3.13.6. Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction will occur,



provide sleeves of sufficient diameter to permit free movement of pipe. Where sleeves pass insulated pipes and ducts, the sleeves shall be large enough to pass the pipe or duct and the insulation. Check construction to determine proper length for various locations; make actual lengths to suit the following:

3.13.6.1. Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions and ceilings.

3.13.6.2. Terminate sleeves 2 inches above finished floor in

equipment rooms, kitchen and wet floor areas. 3.13.6.3. In all other areas, terminate sleeves 1/2 inch above finished

floor unless otherwise noted on the drawings or directed in the field.

3.14. Alterations and Demolition:

3.14.1. See General Conditions. 3.14.2. All existing piping, equipment, ductwork, and materials which are

required to be removed shall be removed. All existing materials and equipment which are removed and are desired by the Owner, or are indicated to remain as the property of the Owner, shall be delivered to him on the premises by the Contractor where directed by the Architect. All other materials and equipment which are removed shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be promptly removed by him from the premises.

3.14.3. Remove all indicated mechanical work by hand as far as possible.

Power-driven equipment shall be used as a last resort, and shall not be employed without consent of the Owner. Schedule all demolition work to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Contractor shall execute the removal work as quietly as practicable to avoid unnecessary disturbances to occupied areas.

3.14.4. Existing conditions, i.e., ductwork, piping, equipment, etc. may be

obtained from available record drawings and are not warranted to be complete or correct. Contractor shall verify exact location of all ductwork, piping etc., in the field prior to starting any work.

3.14.5. Existing duct and pipe sizes noted on the available record drawings

are for the convenience of the Contractor only. Contractor shall verify sizes in the field.

3.14.6. Existing piping and ducts no longer required to remain in service shall

be disconnected and removed back to service mains and trunk ducts, including existing piping hangers, supports, and air devices. Existing pipe and ducts indicated or required to remain in service shall be capped.

3.14.7. Existing piping that remains concealed, buried, or otherwise contained

in or below the remaining slabs and walls shall be capped, plugged, or otherwise sealed. All pipes shall be cut so that their capped or plugged ends will be far enough behind finished surfaces to allow for the installation of the normal thickness of finished material.



3.14.8. When existing mechanical work is removed, all related pipes, valves, ducts, and materials shall also be removed.

3.14.9. When the work specified herein connects to existing piping, or

ductwork, the Contractor shall perform all necessary alterations, cutting, or fitting of the existing work as may be necessary or required to make satisfactory connections between the new and existing work and to leave the completed work in a finished and workmanlike condition, to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.

3.14.10. When the work specified herein or under other divisions of the contract

necessitates relocation of existing mechanical equipment, piping or ductwork, the Contractor shall perform all work and make all necessary changes to existing work as may be required to leave the completed work in a finished and workmanlike condition, to the entire satisfaction of the Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.14.11. Existing mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork affected by

removal or new work installation and required to remain in service shall be reinstalled or supported as required in accordance with new work specification. All work shall be completed to the Architect's satisfaction and at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.14.12. Valve off or disconnect live services as required for removal work. 3.14.13. Refer to drawings for additional requirements.

3.15. Flashing:

3.15.1. Openings for pipes and ductwork through waterproofed floors and roof areas shall be flashed. Vent pipes shall be flashed with 4 lb. sheet lead 24 inches square. Flashing shall be extended up around vents, which shall terminate not less than 12 inches above roof, and shall be fastened under vent caps.

3.15.2. Refer to Architectural drawings and specification for additional roof

flashing requirements.

END OF SECTION


BASIC METHODS AND MATERIALS 15050 - 1

SECTION 15050 – BASIC METHODS AND MATERIALS 1. GENERAL


1.1.1. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section includes requirements for items of mechanical equipment,

materials and procedures which are common to more than one section of Division 15 and which are general in nature and use. This section applies to all sections of Division 15.

1.2.2. The requirements of Section 15010, Mechanical General Provisions,

shall apply to all work specified under this section.

1.3. Codes:

1.3.1. All plumbing products, materials of construction, and joining methods shall be in compliance with State of Maryland regulations on the limit of weighted average lead content as set forth in the Annotated Code, and in the installation or repair of plumbing intended to dispense water for human consumption.

1.4. Submittals:

1.4.1. Submit shop drawings for all items of materials specified in this section

in accordance with the General Requirements, Section 15010. 1.4.2. Manufacturer's product data shall include specifications, installation

instructions and general recommendations for each type of material required. Include data substaining that proposed materials comply with specified requirements for each type.

1.5. Tests and Adjustments:

1.5.1. The Contractor shall furnish labor, instruments, equipments, and

materials required to perform tests prescribed in the sections describing the various systems.

1.5.2. Replace or repair defects found during inspection or test with new

materials. Caulking of welded joints, screwed joints, cracks, or holes is not acceptable. Correct leaks in screwed fittings by remaking joints. In welded systems leaks in joints shall be cutout and rewelded. Repeat tests after defects have been eliminated.



1.5.3. Where reasonable doubt exists as to a system's ability to comply with contract requirements, perform any reasonable test required by the Architect.

1.5.4. Make static pressure tests and prove to the satisfaction of the Architect

that the piping is tight before pipes are concealed or insulated. Tests shall be provided as hereinafter specified.

1.5.5. Use test instruments for accuracy by an approved laboratory or by the

instrument manufacturer and furnish certificates showing degree of accuracy to the Architect when requested. Make calibration histories for each instrument available for examination.

1.5.6. Where gauges, thermometers and other instruments which are to be

left permanently installed are used for tests, do not install until just prior to the tests to avoid possible changes in calibration.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Hangers:

2.1.1. Refer to Section 15010, paragraph 2.2. 2.1.2. Hangers and accessories shall be Grinnel, Fee and Mason, Modern,

National, or B-Line of the types specified in Section 15010. 2.1.3. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide an adequate

pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized engineering practices, using standard, commercially accepted pipe hangers and suspension equipment.

2.1.4. The design of all hangers and support shall be in accordance with the

provision of the current issue of MSS-SP-58 document developed as a standard by the Manufacturers' Standardization Society.

2.1.5. Hangers for steel pipe, except as noted otherwise shall be spaced at

least every ten (10') feet. Hangers for cast iron pipe shall be provided at each joint. Hangers for copper pipe shall be placed at least every eight (8') feet, except pipes 3/4 inch and smaller shall have hangers at six (6') foot intervals.

2.1.6. Where concentrated loads of valves, fittings and similar items occur, or

if recommended by the piping manufacturer, closer hanger spacing will be necessary.

2.1.7. Generally, hangers shall be clevis type, standard weight. 2.1.8. Vibration hangers shall be provided as specified. 2.1.9. On insulated piping systems, provide Pipe Shields, Inc., Model CS-CW

or approved equal hanger shields at each point of support. Diameter



of hanger shield shall match thickness of the insulation. In lieu of, provide wood dowel insert and minimum twenty gauge protection shield at each point of support. Diameter of insert and shield shall match thickness of the insulation and encompass 50% of insulation surface. On cold systems seal insert vapor tight with appropriate coating.

2.1.10. Diameter of hanger shield shall match thickness of the insulation. 2.1.11. Hangers in direct contact with copper piping systems shall be copper

plated.

2.2. Identification and Equipment Tags:

2.2.1. All control devices, i.e. panels, switches, starters, push button stations, temperature controls etc., shall be clearly identified as to their function and the equipment controlled.

2.2.2. All equipment such as pumps, fans, filter housings, variable air volume

terminal units, etc., shall be marked to clearly identify said equipment and space or duty they serve. All air terminal units and their corresponding thermostats shall be marked with sequential numbers to identify each terminal unit with its respective control thermostat.

2.2.3. Mechanical equipment herein specified shall be identified using

engraved laminated black and white phenolic legend plates. Letters shall be minimum, 3/4" high white on surrounding black. Plates shall be mounted by means of sheet metal screws. Submit nameplate list to Architect for approval.

2.2.4. Mechanical and electrical equipment, i.e., air terminal units, valves,

etc., concealed above ceiling shall be identified as to location using clear plastic self-adhesive tape with black lettering, applied to ceiling tile "T" bars. Submit nameplate list to Architect for approval.

2.2.5. Piping shall be identified with colored, pre-rolled, semirigid plastic

labels as manufactured by Seton, Marking Services, Inc., or approved equal. Labels shall be Seton "set mark" system and shall be set around pipes with a field installed high strength cement around pipes with a field installed high strength cement compound applied along their longitudinal edge. Labels shall be placed around the piping or insulation every forty feet (40) and with one (1) label on each pipe in rooms smaller than fifteen feet (15). Medical gas and vacuum piping shall be labeled every twenty (20) feet. A label shall be placed at every major valve and at least six feet (6) from exit or entrance to an item of equipment. At Contractor's option, piping concealed above suspended ceilings only, may be identified by stenciling with black paint and taped color bands in accordance with the coding system herein specified.



2.2.5.1. Labels shall be provided in accordance with the following table with color coding and stencil designations as indicated:

SIZE OF LEGEND LETTERS

Outside Diameter Length of Color Size of Letters of Pipe (Inches) Field (Inches) (Inches) 3/4” to 1-1/4” 8” 1/2” 1-1/2” to 2“ 8” 3/4” 2-1/2” to 6” 12” 1-1/4” 8” to 10” 24” 2-1/2” over 10” 32” 3-1/2”

2.2.5.2. Color coding and stencil designations shall be as follows:

Service Color Stencil Designation Domestic Cold Water Green Domestic Cold Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Water Domestic Hot Water Recirculating Yellow Hot Water Recirculating Sanitary Brown Sanitary Sewer Storm Water Brown Storm Water Vent Brown Sanitary Sewer Condensate Drain Brown Drain Water Chilled Water Supply Blue Chilled Water Supply Chilled Water Return Blue Chilled Water Return Glycol Supply Green Glycol Supply Glycol Return Green Glycol Return

Steam Orange Steam (Designate Pressure) Steam Condensate Orange Steam Condensate Hot Water Heating Supply Yellow Hot Water Heating Supply Hot Water Heating Return Yellow Hot Water Heating Return

Oxygen Green Oxygen Medical Air Yellow Medical Air



Vacuum White Vacuum WAGD Purple WAGD Nitrogen Black Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide Gray Carbon Dioxide

Nitrous Oxide Blue Nitrous Oxide

2.2.6. Ductwork shall be identified by stenciling. Stenciled lettering shall be

minimum 3 inches high with adjacent direction of air flow arrows. Stenciled lettering shall be provided on all mains and principle duct branches. Mark each type of service every 30 feet with a marking of each shaft. Identify ductwork as follows:

Air Handling Units AHU-35 Return Systems RF-35 Exhaust Systems EF-5

2.2.7. All valves, except as specified below, shall be provided with colored

plastic or brass valve tags with stamped-in numbers. Tags shall be secured to valve wheels with metal chain. Stop valves on individual fixtures or equipment where their function is obvious, or where the fixture or equipment is immediately adjacent, need not be so equipped. Care shall be exercised in selecting valve numbers to be prepared on tracing linen showing locations, details of arrangements, etc., of all service and control valves indicating identity and function. One black line print of each drawing shall be mounted under glass where directed. Valve tags shall be Seton or approved equal minimum 1-1/2" round tags with white characters describing system and valve designation. Submit valve number list for approval.

2.3. Pipe, Fittings, and Joints:

2.3.1. General:

2.3.1.1. Piping materials shall conform to state and local code requirements. Pressurized piping systems shall conform to American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) B31.9, “Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping”. High-pressure piping shall conform to ANSI/ASME Section I, B31.1, “Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping”.

2.3.1.2. Quality and weight of materials shall comply with

requirements of applicable American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), ANSI, ASME, and Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) standards. ASTM number and wall thickness shall be indicated on each pipe length



2.3.1.3. Provide pipe and fittings for piping systems as hereinafter

specified. All references to codes shall apply to the latest year. All piping and fittings shall be made in America.

2.3.2. Pipe Materials:

2.3.2.1. Sanitary Drainage:

2.3.2.1.1. Underground sanitary drainage shall be cast iron soil pipe, service weight ASTM A74-98, fittings shall be cast iron service weight ASTM A74-98 fitting joints shall be premolded rubber gaskets, Tyler Pipe Industries, Ty-Seal Or Multiple Seal, polyvinyl chloride gaskets manufactured in accordance with ASTM-C-564.

2.3.2.1.2. Above ground sanitary drainage within the

building shall be no-hub cast iron soil pipe, service weight, ASTM A888-98 fittings shall be no-hub cast iron, fitting joints shall be no-hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel corrugated shield, Tyler no-hub coupling. CISPI 310-97.

2.3.2.2. Vent Piping:

2.3.2.2.1. Vent Piping shall be no-hub cast iron soil pipe,

service weight, fittings shall be no-hub cast iron, fitting joints shall be no-hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel corrugated shield, Tyler no-hub coupling.

2.3.2.3. Storm Water Drainage:

2.3.2.3.1. No-hub cast iron soil-pipe, service weight,

fittings shall be no-hub cast iron, fitting joints shall be no-hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel corrugated shield, Tyler no-hub coupling.

2.3.2.4. Air Conditioning Condensate and Equipment Drainage:

2.3.2.4.1. Above ground drainage pipe shall be copper

drainage tubing, DWV, ASTM B306 with wrought copper and bronze drainage fittings, ANSI B16-29 with soldered joints: Taramet Sterling “lead free” solder or equivalent.

2.3.2.5. Domestic Cold Water:



2.3.2.5.1. Domestic cold water above ground 2" and smaller shall be seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88, Type L hard tempered with wrought copper solder joint fittings, rated for 150 lbs. (water) ANSI B16.22 with soldered joints Taramet Sterling “lead free” solder or equivalent.

2.3.2.6. Domestic Hot Water and Hot Water Recirculation:

2.3.2.6.1. All sizes shall be seamless copper water tube,

ASTM B88, Type L hard tempered with wrought copper solder joint fittings, 150 lbs. (water) ANSI B16.22 with soldered joints: Taramet Sterling “lead free” solder or equivalent. Galvanized steel pipe is not permitted.

2.3.2.7. Chilled Water and Glycol Supply and Return:

2.3.2.7.1. Piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be black steel, ASTM A53B ERW ANSI Schedule 40 with steel butt-welded fittings ANSI B16.9 using long turn ells, ANSI B16.5 weld neck or slip-on flanges & Bonney Forge Weldolets and Threadolets. Joints shall be welded in accordance with the Engineering Standards of the Mechanical Contractors Association of America Inc., Part VII, Standard Procedure Specifications Nos. 1 and 2. Piping 12” and above shall be standard weight. All fittings shall be “Made in America.”

2.3.2.7.2. Piping 2" and smaller shall be black steel, ASTM A53A ANSI Schedule 40 with black malleable iron 175 lbs., screwed fittings, ANSI B16.3, joints threaded in accordance with the American Standard for pipe threads, ANSI B2.1. Fittings shall be “Made in America.”

or

2.3.2.7.3. Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88,

Type L, hard tempered with wrought copper solder joint fittings 150 lbs., ANSI B16.22. Joints soldered with ASTM B32 tin-antimony 95-5 or Taramet Sterling “lead free” solder or equivalent.

2.3.2.8. Hot Water Heating Supply and Return:



2.3.2.8.1. Piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be black steel, ASTM A53B seamless ANSI Schedule 40 with steel butt-welded fittings ANSI B16.9 using long turn ells, ANSI B16.5 weld neck or slip-on flanges & Bonney Forge Weldolets and Threadolets. Joints shall be welded in accordance with the Engineering Standards of the Mechanical Contractors Association of America Inc., Part VII, Standard Procedure Specifications Nos. 1 and 2. Piping 12” and above shall be standard weight. Fittings shall be “Made in America.”

2.3.2.8.2. Piping 2" and smaller shall be black steel,

ASTM A53A ANSI Schedule 40 with black malleable iron 175 lbs, screwed fittings, ANSI B16.3, joints threaded in accordance with the American Standard for pipe threads, ANSI B2.1. Fittings shall be “Made in America.”

or

2.3.2.8.3. Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88, Type L, hard tempered with wrought copper solder joint fittings 150 lbs., ANSI B16.22. Joints soldered with ASTM B32 tin-antimony 95.5 or Taramet Sterling “lead free” solder or equivalent.

2.3.2.9. Steam Supply, Pressure Relief, and Vent Piping:

2.3.2.9.1. Piping 2" and smaller shall be black steel pipe,

ASTM A53A ANSI Schedule 40 with cast iron 125 lbs., screwed fittings, ANSI B16.4, joints threaded in accordance with the American Standard for pipe threads, ANSI B2.1.

2.3.2.10. Steam Condensate Return Piping:

2.3.2.10.1. Piping 2" and smaller shall be black steel pipe,

ASTM A53A ANSI Schedule 80 with wrought iron 250 lbs., screwed fittings, ANSI B16.4, joints threaded in accordance with the American Standard for pipe threads, ANSI B2.1.

2.3.2.11. Fire Protection Service:

2.3.2.11.1. Above ground pipe 2" and below - Black steel

pipe, ASTM A53A, ANSI Schedule 40, assembled with black cast iron screwed



fittings one hundred seventy five pound (175 lb.) water ANSI B16.4, and threaded joints conforming to ANSI B2.1. At Contractor's option, pipe shall be assembled with UL listed and FM approved mechanically grooved couplings Victaulic Style 005.

2.3.2.11.2. At Contractor’s option, pipe shall be

assembled with mechanically grooved couplings Victaulic Style 005. Fittings shall be Victaulic FireLockTM, ASTM-A-395 and ASTM-A-536. UL listed and FM approved for service to 300 psig with schedule 10 pipe.

2.3.2.12. Medical Gas and Vacuum Piping:

2.3.2.12.1. Piping shall be seamless Type L copper tubing. All solder joint fitting used for connecting copper tubing shall be wrought copper. All copper-to-copper joints shall be made using a copper-phosphorous brazing filler alloy (BCup Series) without flux. Dissimilar metals such as copper and brass shall be joined using an appropriate flux with either a copper-phosphorous (BCup Series) or a silver (BAg Series) brazing filler alloy. Tubing shall be joined by brazing or silver soldering, without flux, by a compound having a melting point exceeding 1,050oF. A low flow (0.5 scfm) nitrogen purge should be continuously conducted through the tubing during brazing to prevent the formation of copper oxide scale on inner walls.

2.4. Valves:

2.4.1. General:

2.4.1.1. Valves shall be provided where indicated on drawings and

as herein specified. 2.4.1.2. Valves shall be placed in such a manner as to be easily

accessible for handwheel operation and stuffing maintenance.

2.4.1.3. Valves in piping where shown and where listed herein:

2.4.1.3.1. To balance flows in heating, and chilled water piping.

2.4.1.3.2. To isolate all items of equipment.



2.4.1.3.3. To isolate motorized flow control valves. 2.4.1.3.4. To isolate branch lines and riser at mains.

2.4.1.4. Valve pipe connections shall be screw, solder, welded,

flanged, or Victaulic as required to be consistent with other parts of the piping system.

2.4.1.5. Where piping or equipment may subsequently need to be

removed, provide valves with bodies having integral flanges or full lugs drilled and tapped to hold valve in place so that downstream piping or equipment can be disconnected and replaced with blank-off plate while valve is still in service.

2.4.1.6. Valves over ten feet above standing level and above 4" in

size shall have chain wheel with chain extending to within six feet of standing level. All wheel operated valves shall have an indicator to show the position of the disc or plug.

2.4.1.7. Install valves in accessible locations and adjust for smooth

and easy operation. 2.4.1.8. Valves for equipment and controls shall be installed full size

of pipe before reducing size to make connection. 2.4.1.9. Where there is no interference, shut-off valves shall be

installed with handwheel down on horizontal runs of pipe to prevent accumulation of foreign matter in packer between seats at closing end of wedge.

2.4.2. Balancing Valves:

2.4.2.1. Provide balancing valves where indicated and required to

balance water flow through the piping system. For pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger provide separate balancing valve and flow meter fitting.

2.4.2.2. Balancing valve for system piping shall be DeZurik,

Homestead or approved equal eccentric plug valve as follows: flanged 2-1/2" and larger, with Fluorinated Hydrocarbon filler in a PTFE U-ring (packing) and CIIR or EPDM plugs and Chloro-Isobutene Isoprene plug facing suitable for -20 to 250F continuous operation. Valves used in chilled water applications may have packing and plug facing suitable for a maximum operating temperature of 180F. Valves shall have lever actuators with adjustable memory stop. For 2" and smaller, provide combination balancing and flow fitting with screwed ends as manufactured by Nexus, Tour & Anderson, or approved equal.



2.4.3. Butterfly Valves - General HVAC Duty:

2.4.3.1. Butterfly valves shall be provided in chilled and hot water

systems size 4" and larger. 2.4.3.2. Butterfly valves shall be Crane/Centerline, Nibco or DeZurik

equal to DeZurik Model BGS resilient seated butterfly valve installed with welding neck companion flanges.

2.4.3.3. Butterfly valves shall be of the lug body style suitable for use

with ANSI 125 or 150 pound flanges. Bodies shall be ductile iron, or cast iron. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP67 rated at least 200 psi non-shock cold water working pressure. Bodies of all flangeless wafer valves shall have 4 flange bolt guides to center the body in the pipeline. Body to have 2” extended neck for insulating.

2.4.3.4. All valves shall have retained seat and shall provide bubble

tight shutoff up to the full valve rating without the use of downstream flanges.

2.4.3.5. All valves shall be furnished with bronze self lubricated

bearings. Shaft seals shall be provided to prevent leakage and to protect bearings from internal or external corrosion. Bearings shall be provided at the operator connection and at points immediately outboard of the seat.

2.4.3.6. Seats shall be of the reinforced resilient type. Seats shall

also act as a body liner to prevent flow from contacting the body casting. Seats shall have flange sealing to provide a positive seal without use of flange gaskets.

2.4.3.7. Shafts shall be one piece and shall be of Type 416 stainless

steel, and shall not have exposed stem-to-disc fasteners. Shaft diameter shall meet the 75B standard from AWWA specification C504-87 for butterfly valves. Shafts shall be finish ground to minimize bearing and shaft seal wear. Shafts of 12" and larger shall have non-adjustable thrust collar.

2.4.3.8. Discs shall be aluminum bronze, with EPDM rubber seat.

The disc-to-shaft connections shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Pins, shaft and disc of all valves shall be individually machined and completely interchangeable.

2.4.3.9. Actuator for valves shall be lever type with locking trigger

with notched quadrant. Sizes 8” and larger shall have weatherproof gear operators. All actuators shall have adjustable memory stops. All actuators manual or automatic shall be provided by the valve manufacturer.



2.4.3.10. Valves shall be lug-style and capable for use as isolation

valves and recommended by the manufacturer for dead-end service at full pressure without the need for downstream flanges.

2.4.3.11. Each valve shall have a metal tag permanently affixed to the

valve listing the following information:

2.4.3.11.1. Manufacturer. 2.4.3.11.2. Valve model/series designation. 2.4.3.11.3. Valve body material. 2.4.3.11.4. Disk material. 2.4.3.11.5. Seat material. 2.4.3.11.6. Certified pressure rating.

2.4.4. Ball Valves:

2.4.4.1. Ball valves shall be used in lieu of gate valves in all chilled

water, hot water heating, and domestic water piping systems size 3" and smaller for shut-off service. Ball valves shall be Apollo, or approved equal.

2.4.4.2. The body and bonnet shall be ASTM B62 bronze. Ball shall

be Type 316 stainless steel. Stem shall be stainless steel. Seats shall be TFE.

2.4.4.3. Stem shall be blowout proof and externally adjustable to

compensate for wear. Valve shall be equipped with vinyl covered lever handle which shall indicate position of ball orifice and shall have stops for fully open and closed position. Construction shall be such that power actuator can be used. Ball opening shall be full pipe size.

2.4.4.4. Valve shall be suitable for flow in either direction and shall

be rated 150 psig SWP and 600 psi non-shock WOG. 2.4.4.5. Valve shall be so constructed with two piece cast bronze

bodies, full port design, with adjustable stem packing. 2.4.4.6. Ball valves used for balancing shall have adjustable memory

stop. For use in insulated piping systems provide 2” extended handles of non-thermal conductive material.

2.4.5. Drain Valves:



2.4.5.1. Drain valves shall be ball valves with hose end connections and shall be provided at low points of all piping system and where indicated or required, 3/4" minimum. Provide Nibco Series 585-70-HC or approved equal. Valve shall be rated for 125 lbs.

2.4.6. Valve Schedule:

2.4.6.1. Unless otherwise specified, valves shall be Grinnell,

Stockham, Crane, Jenkins, or Nibco equal to the Nibco figure numbers indicated herein:

2.4.6.2. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Systems:

Check - Solder end S-413

2.4.6.3. Hot Water Heating:

Ball - 2" and smaller Check - 2-1/2" and larger Mueller No.105-MAP Check - 2" and smaller T-413-B Check - Solder end S-413-B Check valves at pump discharge shall be in-line spring loaded or swing design with weight or lever and spring.

2.4.6.4. Steam Supply and Steam Condensate Return:

Gate - 2" and smaller T-124 Globe - 2" and smaller T-211-B

2.5. Pipe Specialties:

2.5.1. Manual Air Vents:

2.5.1.1. Manual air vents shall be key-operated type installed where

indicated on the drawings or as required for proper venting of equipment. Vents at top of vent chambers or coils shall be 1/4" brass cocks, Crane #2190 H or approved equal.

2.5.2. Automatic Air Vents:

2.5.2.1. Automatic air vents on water systems shall be Spirotherm,

Sarco, Bell, and Gossett, or Amtrol equal to Spirotherm air release valve, 150 psi, and 250° operating temperature. Provide shut-off valve on each vent. Vents above suspended ceilings shall have 1/4" soft copper drain line extended indirect to nearest floor drain, service sink or drain line.

2.5.3. Strainers:



2.5.3.1. Strainers shall be Mueller Steam Specialty Company, Inc., or

approved equal, No. 351 for 2" and smaller and No. 758 for 2-1/2" and larger. Screens shall be stainless steel with 1/32" perforations for water. Provide valved blowdown connections on each strainer consisting of a gate valve set between two short nipples. Bush strainer outlet as required for 3/4" maximum connection. Provide a fine mesh start-up screen to be removed after system cleaning.

2.5.4. Flowmeter Fittings:

2.5.4.1. Flowmeter fittings shall be Barco or approved equal Venturi

type, or Dieterich Annubar type, or approved equal, brass or cast steel construction suitable for 150 psig working pressure and 250 degrees F operating temperature and shall be equipped with brass quick-disconnect valves for connecting flowmeter. The fitting shall have a maximum head loss of one foot water gauge at design rate and shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent for water temperatures from 40 degrees F to 215 degrees F. Maximum meter reading shall be 50 inches water gauge.

2.5.5. Pressure Gauges:

2.5.5.1. Gauges shall be Trerice, Ashcroft, Weiss, Winters, Crosby or

Marsh equal to Trerice No. 450 series, liquid filled, 4-1/2" diameter case, bottom connected for easy reading. Dial shall have black letters on white background.

2.5.5.2. Pressure gauges shall be suitable for field calibration. 2.5.5.3. Each gauge shall be mounted within six feet of the floor on

background or pipe mounted. Submit gauge locations and scale ranges for approval.

2.5.5.4. Provide Apollo or approved equal 1/4" ball valve where

"gauge cocks" are indicated or required. 2.5.5.5. Select gauge such that at normal service the gauge pointer

is at the middle of the scale range.

2.5.6. Thermometers:

2.5.6.1. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Trerice, Weiss, Taylor, or approved equal. Thermometers shall be bi-metal type with adjustable angle, self-powered (no battery), 3/8” LCD digits display, Hi-impact ABS case, dual F&C switchable, temperature range -40o-300oF (-40o-150oC), accuracy +/- 1% or 1o, whichever is greater. Unit shall be complete with brass socket with extension necks for insulated pipes.



2.5.6.2. Thermometer (remote indicating type) shall be Weksler

Series X, or approved equal, stainless steel casing, 4-1/2" dial, 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F reading, with Class 5A fully compensating capillary tubing (maximum length 25 feet), air temperature bulb and mounting bracket.

2.6. Pipe Anchors:

2.6.1. All pipe lines shall be anchored where specified herein, indicated on

drawings and where required to prevent uncontrolled movement. Anchors shall be constructed of steel and plates, assembled by bolting or welding and secured to the building structure by means of clamps or welding. Structural members shall not be cut or drilled. Anchors shall prevent both axial and lateral movement of the lines. Anchor vertical pipes by means of clamps welded to pipe and secured to wall or floor construction. Submit details of anchors to Architect for approval.

2.6.2. Anchor piping adjacent to flexible pipe connectors to prevent connector

from expanding against its restraining bolts and also to keep the pipe on both sides of the connector in alignment.

2.7. Expansion (Water Systems):

2.7.1. Where expansion joints are indicated or required, select joints with a

traverse of 150 percent of the pipe expansion from the ambient 40 degrees F to the maximum system operating temperature.

2.7.2. All expansion joints shall be suitable for minimum operating pressure

and temperature of 150 psi and 300 degrees F, respectively. Expansion joints 2" and larger shall have flanged ends, except when installed in copper pipe systems.

2.7.3. Expansion joints shall be as herein specified:

2.7.3.1. Flexible Ball Type - Barco Type N of Series 600. 2.7.3.2. Corrugated Type - Flexonics "Low-Corr" joints for pipes 3"

and larger. Flexonics Model H or HB for pipes smaller than 3". 2.7.3.3. Slip Type - Flexonics "Slip Pakt" with anchor base. 2.7.3.4. Submit for approval manufacturer's shop drawings of each

expansion joint provided depicting length of pipe, location of anchors and guides, calculated expansion offset and type of joint employed.

2.8. Pipe Guides:



2.8.1. Provide pipe guides where indicated on drawings or where required for proper installation of expansion loop. Limit use of guides with expansion loop to point shown or where required to prevent buckling of pipe whether indicated or not.

2.8.2. Do not use pipe guides as pipe supports. 2.8.3. Provide factory made cast semi-steel or other heavy fabricated steel

consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with a two-section guiding spider welded or bolted tight to the pipe of sufficient size to clear pipe insulation and long enough to prevent over-travel of spider in cylinder. Furnish a guide sleeve of a length not less than the length of pipe expansion plus the spider length.

2.8.4. When installed in cooling systems, guides shall permit the application

of thermal insulation.

2.9. Steam System Specialties:

2.9.1. Steam Traps:

2.9.1.1. Provide Sarco traps equal to the Sarco types indicated herein for all items of steam heating equipment. Traps shall be suitable for steam pressures encountered and shall have capacity to handle three times the condensate rating of the equipment served. Provide traps as herein specified:

2.9.1.1.1. Float and Thermostatic - Type FT & FTB

Series, as applicable.

2.9.1.1.2. Traps adjacent to equipment requiring special finishes such as aluminum, brass, chromium, copper, nickel-alloy, or stainless steel, shall be brass bodies chromium plated.

2.9.1.2. Elements shall not be placed in traps until system has been

cleaned. 2.9.1.3. Trap ratings shall be in accordance with the standards

adopted by the Steam Heating Equipment Manufacturers Association providing for continuous elimination of air when the trap is operating at its maximum rating.

2.9.1.4. All traps, except steam line drip traps and traps used in

conjunction with air heating units shall be based on the equipment's hourly condensate rate times a factor of five (5) for equipment controlled by modulating type valve. A factor of three (3) shall be used for equipment without modulating type control. Trap size shall be based on one of the above factors and the tables under the specific trap types, unless a



specific application requires a larger factor recommended by the trap manufacturer.

2.9.1.5. Traps shall be installed so as to permit gravity flow to the

traps, and also away from the trap where modulating control valves are used. Traps weighing over 25 pounds shall be supported independent of piping using concrete piers of steel brackets for those near the floor, steel brackets for traps located adjacent to walls, and pipe hangers for ceiling locations.

2.9.1.6. When installing traps, proper provision must be made for

expansion in both the steam and condensate lines to avoid stressing either piping or trap. Where trap locations are not at anchor points on the steam line, traps shall be bolted to brackets mounted from the steam line. Where pipe loop is not adequate to provide for expansion in the condensate return, properly sized expansion joints shall be installed together with proper guides.

2.9.2. Trap Applications:

2.9.2.1. Thermostatic traps, unless otherwise noted or shown on

drawings, may be used for riser drips and horizontal branch equipment lines not over 15-feet in length.

2.9.3. Thermostatic Steam Traps:

2.9.3.1. Thermostatic traps shall be of the corrugated bellows,

balanced pressure type, with a minimum of six corrugations on the bellow. The trap body shall be cast of forged brass designed for 125 psig steam working pressure. The corrugated bellows in traps for low pressure steam systems shall be special grade brass of phosphor bronze. Valves and seats of low pressure traps shall be of suitable non-corrosive metal and shall be removable. Trap maximum operating pressure shall be not less than 150 percent of the system operating pressure. Thermostatic traps shall comply with the applicable parts of Fed. Spec. WW-T-696. Trap capacities shall be as follows, based on 1/4 psi differential across trap:

2.9.3.2. Trap Size Operating Pressure Capacity (#/Hr)

1” 15 279 2.9.3.3. The capacities in the above table are used on continuous

condensate discharge temperatures at 10 degrees F below saturated steam condition.

2.9.4. Disc Diaphragm Traps:



2.9.4.1. In lieu of the bellows type thermostatic traps, Contractor may elect to use the disc diaphragm type thermostatic trap. Discs shall be constructed of phosphor bronze or stainless steel sheet and shall be provided with not less than six points of flexure. All joints shall be mechanically bonded and soldered, or joints may be heliarc welded, with or without mechanical bonding. Solder generally shall be silver solder. Soft solder in accordance with Fed. Spec. WW-T-696 with a tin content of not less than 60 percent, may be used on mechanically bonded joints for joint sealing purposes only on discs provided in traps installed on steam systems operating at less than 16 psig. Traps shall be fabricated with diaphragm center limit stops to prevent exceeding maximum design stroke by contraction. All trap elements shall be guaranteed for ten million cycles at maximum element stroke, at room ambient temperature, without failure.

2.9.5. Steam Pressure Reducing Valves:

2.9.5.1. Pressure regulators shall be Spence type ED for standard

applications, type E5D for minimum pressure applications with external pilot operate, packless type, guaranteed for dead-end service. Internal trim shall be stainless steel, including diaphragms, stem, seats and disc.

2.9.5.2. Valves shall be designed so that it may be serviced in the

line. Valve and seats shall be guaranteed against wire drawing. Springs in the path of flow are unacceptable.

2.9.5.3. Bodies shall be 250# iron construction. Pilot mountable

either side with union fittings. 2.9.5.4. Valves shall be sized such that inlet velocities will not

exceed 9000 feet per minute at full specified capacity and valve orifices shall be reduced in size as required to prevent valves from passing more than 120 percent of specified capacity under any condition.

2.10. Steam Expansion Joints:

2.10.1. Expansion joints shall be Advanced Thermal Systems Thermal Pak Model TP2, or approved equal, with integral internal and external guides and designed for the injection of self-lubricating packing under full line pressure. A (min.) 2” dia. Type A packing cylinder shall be welded in place and shall have internal acme threads to assure maximum evacuation of the injectable packing from the packing cylinder.

2.10.2. Traverse chamber and stuffing box shall be seamless steel A-53

Grade B pipe or equivalent tubing with circumferential weld attachments of the butt type only. Slip shall be machined from A-53



Grade B seamless pipe - schedule 80 to 16” size inclusive, and schedule 60 for sizes 18” to 24” inclusive. Slip shall be Corro-Cote Plus Plated - a duplex chrome plate consisting of 1 mil of Hard Chrome applied over 1 mil of Crack-Free Hard Chrome and certified by Permascope inspection per ASTM standard B-499. The stuffing box packing area in contact with the sliding slip shall be at least 15 times the expansion joints’ nominal pipe size. Stuffing Box injectable packing shall be - Type “T” for operating temperatures to 550°F.

2.10.3. Each slip shall be factory pre-set for 1” movement in extension and the

nominal traverse in compression unless otherwise directed. Prior t making the final connection of Expansion Joint to pipeline, it shall be the responsibility of the installer to verify that the correct amount of slip-precompression has been made to assure free movement of pipe from the installed pipe temperature to minimum and maximum temperature.

2.10.4. Factory produced primary and intermediate Guides shall be ATS

Radial type Model HL, HLS, GA or ATS Fig. 101 low friction Graphite type for low profile systems. Primary and intermediate guide spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ published recommendations.

2.10.5. Submittals for approval shall include the Manufacturers’ published Five

Year Warranty and Service Guarantee.

2.11. Vibration Isolation:

2.11.1. General:

2.11.1.1. Mechanical equipment and associated piping and ductwork shall be mounted on vibration isolators as specified and required to minimize transmission of vibrations and structure-borne noise to building structure or spaces.

2.11.1.2. Select vibration isolating units for the lowest operating speed

of equipment so designed that natural frequency of equipment and base mass is not less than 1.5 times the lowest operating frequency of the moving equipment but not a multiple or harmonic of the base frequency. Furnish vibration isolation producing a uniform loading and deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed, and be stable during starting and stopping of equipment without excessive traverse and eccentric movement of equipment.

2.11.1.3. Concrete pads under the isolation units shall be reinforced.

Use concrete having a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi and structural reinforcing bars conforming at ASTM A-615 Grade 60.



2.11.1.4. The installed vibration isolation system for each floor or ceiling mounted item of equipment shall have a maximum lateral motion under equipment start up and shut down conditions of 1/4". Motions in excess shall be restrained by approved spring type mountings.

2.11.1.5. All electrical connections, drain connections, etc., made to

equipment which rests on vibration isolators, shall be sufficiently flexible to permit the equipment to be properly isolated.

2.11.1.6. The type of isolation, base, and minimum static deflection

shall be as required for each specific equipment application, but no case less than that specified herein when supported on a solid concrete structural slab having a thickness of not less than 4". If vibration isolators with a deflection greater than the minimum specified are required to meet the noise criteria for the adjacent spaces, suitable isolation systems shall be submitted. Should vibration isolators installed for the equipment prove inadequate to prevent transmission of equipment vibrations to the building structure or limit equipment vibration originated noises in the building spaces to acceptable levels, the isolators shall be replaced with units having the largest deflection that can be practicably installed.

2.11.1.7. Spring and combination rail and spring isolation supports

where designated in the schedule are indicated for equipment structurally built or supported on a rigid structural steel frame suitable for these types of isolation. Where these types of isolation are not suitable for the equipment construction or operation, the equipment shall be mounted on a structural steel base as herein specified.

2.11.1.8. Equipment affected by wind pressure or with operating

weight different from installed weight shall have built-in adjustable vertical stops to prevent rising of equipment when weight is removed. Equipment containing liquid such as chilled water refrigeration units shall have vertical stops.

2.11.1.9. Inertia bases shall consist of a steel reinforced concrete slab

cast into a welded structural steel channel frame. Frame shall be fabricated of sufficient strength to prevent distortion of any type during construction, and when the equipment is in operation. Equipment anchor bolts with bottom plates and pipe sleeves shall be preset. One-half inch steel reinforcing bars shall be placed on 6" center both ways in a layer 1-1/2" above the bottom of the base; bars shall extend inside channel frame flanges not less than 1".



2.11.1.10. Where required due to equipment configuration, the inertia block construction shall change and the concrete thickness shall increase as necessary for the proper mounting of the equipment. The weight of the inertia base shall be equal to or greater than the weight of the equipment supported. Additional weight necessary to reduce vibration or motion caused by the equipment's unbalanced forces to less the 1/32" movement shall be provided when necessary.

2.11.1.11. Concrete sub-bases not less the 4" shall be provided for all

floor mounted mechanical equipment under another Division. Sub-bases shall rest on a structural floor and shall be reinforced with steel rods and interconnected with floor. A minimum clearance of 2" shall be provided between sub-bases and all inertia blocks, steel bases, and steel saddles with equipment in operation.

2.11.1.12. Each electric motor shall be mounted on the same

foundation as the driven machine. Piping connections including strainers at pumps shall be supported on the same foundation as the pumps.

2.11.1.13. All exterior vibration isolation shall be hot dip galvanized.

2.11.2. Vibration Isolation Equipment:

2.11.2.1. All isolation equipment shall be Mason Industries, Vibration

Eliminator, Amber/Booth, or Korfund equal to the following Mason Industries products:

2.11.2.1.1. Type III Mounting - Spring mounting with limit

stops. Mason Type SLR. 2.11.2.1.2. Type IV Hanger - combination spring and

double deflection neoprene element. Mason Type 30N.

2.11.2.1.3. Type V Hanger - similar to Type IV with

elevation holding device. Mason Type PC30N.

2.11.2.1.4. Type VII Hose - Flexible braided pipe

connector. Mason Type FFLSS or approved equal, with control rods.

2.11.2.1.5. Type XII Pad - Neoprene cross ribbed or

waffle pattern, 3/4" thick. Imprint durometer on material. Provide hot dipped galvanized steel bearing plates where necessary to spread loads. Mason Type Super W.



2.11.2.1.6. Type XVI Pad – All-directional seismic snubber. Mason Type Z-1011.

2.11.3. Application of Isolation Equipment:

2.11.3.1. Item Type Deflection

Piping: Hangers within 50 ft. V 1.50" isolated equipment First two hangers IV 0.75" near non-isolated equipment

Rooftop piping hangers V 1.50" from AHU dunnage

Rooftop piping on III 1.50" roof curbs

Flexible Pump Connectors: VII ----- Flexible Chiller Connectors VII ----- Chiller III 2.0”

AHU XII 0.15” AHU Seismic Restraints XVI -----

2.12. Test Plugs:

2.12.1. Pressure and temperature test plugs where indicated or required shall

be 1/4" npt fittings, suitable to receive either a 1/8" OD temperature or pressure probe. Fittings shall be solid brass with Nardel valve core, fitted with a color coded marked cap with gasket. The entire assembly shall be rated at 1000 psig. Provide two (2) pressure gauge adapters and two (2) 5" stem thermometers, 0 to 220 degrees F and 20 to 130 degrees F range. Plugs shall be as manufactured by Peterson Equipment Company, Inc., Richardson, Texas or Sisco plugs.

2.13. Electric Heat Tracing:

2.13.1. Electric heat tracing shall be self-regulating type, consisting of two (2) 16

AWG tinned-copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature all along its length, allowing the cable to be crossed over itself without overheating, to be used directly on plastic or metal pipe, and to be cut to length in the field. The heat tracing shall be covered by a metallic braid grounding shield, and a radiation cross-linked modified polyolefin



dielectric overall jacket. 2.13.2. In order to provide energy conservation and to prevent overheating, the

heater shall have a self-regulating factor of at least 90 percent. The self-regulating factor is defined as the percentage reduction, without thermostatic control, of the heater output going from 40oF pipe temperature operation to 150oF pipe temperature operation.

2.13.3. The heater shall operate on line voltage of 120 volts without the use of

transformers. 2.13.4. Heat tracing shall be controlled by an ambient sensing thermostat set at

40oF. 2.13.5. Heat tracing shall be manufactured by Pentair, Thermon, Chromalox, or

Heat Trace, Inc.

2.13.6. Digital heat trace controller shall be Chromalox ITC1, (1) Circuit, or approved equal by Pentair, Thermon, or Heat Trace, Inc.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. Cleaning:

3.1.1. After completion of installation, thoroughly clean dirt, rust, loose scale, oils and grease, and other foreign matter from metal and insulated surfaces, painted or unpainted, specified under Division 15 of the specification.

3.1.2. Clean all systems piping thoroughly of grease, metal shavings, welding

beads, or other refuse. Flush piping by use of portable pump or separate water supply to prevent damage to existing or new system pumps. Before cleaning closed systems, all air handling coils shall be isolated by closing inlet and outlet valves and opening the by-pass valves. The system shall be filled with sufficient detergent and dispersant added to remove all dirt, oil, and grease. System shall be circulated for at least 48 hours after which a drain valve at the lowest point shall be opened and allowed to bleed while the system continues to circulate. Bleeding shall continue until water runs clear and all detergent is removed. A sample of the water shall be tested and, if PH exceeds the PH of the make-up water, draining shall be resumed. After flushing, clean strainers of debris, open coils and close by-passes. Remove dirty water filters and install new water filters. Turn over replacement bag filters to Owner. Refill and vent water systems being sure to add water after venting to completely fill system.

3.2. Piping Installation:

3.2.1. Install piping without undue stress or strain in locations shown and run

parallel to the lines of the building, except to grade them as specified in a neat and workmanlike manner using a minimum of fittings. Provide



such fittings, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet the conditions of the installation. Contractor shall inform himself fully regarding any peculiarities and limitations of space available for installation of material under each section of specifications. Install piping to suit necessities of clearance with ducts, conduits, structure, and other work, and so as not to interfere with any passages or doorways and allow sufficient head room at all places. Use proper reducing fittings for changing piping sizes.

3.2.2. Do not install piping through transformer vaults, elevator equipment

rooms or other electrical or electronic equipment spaces. Do not route piping over electrical-distribution panels.

3.2.3. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established in the field in a neat

and workmanlike manner without damage or without forcing or springing. Perform cutting by means of an approved type of mechanical cutter of the wheel type where practicable. Ream pipe after cutting to remove all burrs.

3.2.4. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate

all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. Carefully investigate the architectural, structural, and existing conditions affecting the work, and arrange such work accordingly, providing such fittings, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions.

3.2.5. Install unions and flanges where shown and on each side of all pieces

of equipment and other similar items, and in such a manner that the unions of flanges can be readily disconnected. Do not place any union or flange in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the project.

3.2.6. Unions in steel pipe 2-1/2" and smaller for water service, shall be 250

lb. malleable iron brass, seat type. Use 150 lb. forged steel flanges for piping 3" and larger. Gaskets shall be 1/8" thick rated for 150 psi service at 250 degrees F. Unions in copper pipe 2" and smaller shall be wrought copper with red bronze ring nut. Use 150 lb. ASME copper flanges for piping 2-1/2" and larger. Flanges and gaskets for use in steam and condensate systems shall be rated for system operating pressures.

3.2.7. Use dielectric unions or couplings at all junctions of copper or brass

piping and fittings with ferrous material to prevent electrolysis and galvanic corrosion.

3.2.8. Joints between dissimilar piping material shall be made with

appropriate adapters in accordance with the respective manufacturer's printed instruction and recommendations.

3.2.9. Use reducing fittings, eccentric where required to prevent pocketing of

air and water or both, to make changes in pipe sizes.



3.2.10. Grade pipe minimum 1" in 40 feet to low points, unless otherwise specified or indicated. Provide drain valves at all low points.

3.2.11. Automatic temperature control valves furnished by the control

manufacturer shall be installed by the mechanical contractor under the control manufacturer's supervision.

3.2.12. Install wells in chilled water, and hot water heating systems for

automatic temperature control sensors. Exact locations and number of wells required shall be determined through coordination with the work required under Section "Automatic Temperature Control."

3.2.13. All piping shall be so installed so that it will in no way be distorted or

strained by expansion or contraction. Except as noted, all expansion and contraction shall be taken up by means of swing joints, loops, bends or long offsets. Swing joints made up with at least three fittings shall be provided in branches from mains to runouts. Size loops for the total pipe expansion without cold springing, but field cold spring one-half the pipe expansion corrected for ambient temperature.

3.2.14. Underground piping shall be installed in a continuous enclosure to

protect the pipe from damage during backfilling. The enclosure shall be split or otherwise provide access at the joints during visual inspection and leak testing. Backfill shall be clean and compacted so as to protect and uniformly support the piping. A continuous tape or marker placed immediately above the enclosure shall clearly identify the pipeline by specific name. In addition, a continuous warning means shall be provided above the pipeline at approximately one-half the depth of bury. Where underground piping is installed through a wall sleeve, the ends of sleeve shall be sealed to prevent the entrance of ground water. Piping underground within buildings or embedded in concrete floors or walls shall be installed in a continuous conduit.

3.3. Workmanship:

3.3.1. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at structure. Install

pipes without springing or forcing. 3.3.2. Clear windows, doors, and other openings with all pipes and ductwork.

Arrange pipes to permit expansion and contractions without misalignment or damage.

3.3.3. During construction all openings in piping and equipment shall be

closed with caps or plugs to keep out all foreign matter indicated. 3.3.4. All piping in finished spaces shall be run concealed unless otherwise

indicated.

3.4. Phasing:



3.4.1. The contractor shall schedule phasing to minimize the disruption of existing patient services. This phasing is essential to ensure a safe environment in patient care areas. Phasing shall include assurance for clean to dirty airflow, emergency procedures, criteria for interruption of protection, construction of roof surfaces, written notification of interruptions, and communication authority. Procedures must be developed for noise and vibration that will affect patients, and planned accordingly. The renovation areas shall be isolated from the occupied areas during construction using airtight barriers, and exhaust airflow shall be sufficient to maintain negative air pressure in the construction zone.

3.5. Welding:

3.5.1. See Section 15010, paragraph 3.7.


3.6.1. See Section 15010, paragraph 2.4.

3.7. Flow Meter Fittings:

3.7.1. Locate and arrange piping, both upstream and downstream of fitting to conform to the manufacturer's published literature.

3.7.2. When flow is measured in horizontal pipe, locate the connection

nipples at or slightly above the horizontal centerline of the pipe to minimize the entrance of gases and impurities.

3.7.3. Provide each fitting with an integral tab, or a metal tag or a stainless

steel wire, extending outside the pipe covering, and stamp or print in a plainly visible position the manufacturer's name and address; the model number of the meter to which it is to be connected; the name, number or location of the equipment served; the specified rate of flow and the multiplier (including unity, where applicable) to be applied to the meter reading.

3.7.4. Provide fittings with shut-off valves and with quick connecting hose

fittings for portable meters.

3.8. Tests:

3.8.1. The following tests shall be conducted by the Contractor and all piping shall be proven tight in the presence of the Architect or his representative. Notify Architect prior to tests. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to test shall be removed. Provide all equipment and labor required. Tests shall be at least four hours in duration. Piping may be tested in sections as approved by the Architect. Tests shall be specified herein.



3.8.2. Domestic water piping shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 psig. All openings in the water piping shall be plugged throughout the system, or portion thereof, filled with water, and tested with a pump to a pressure of 150 psig.

3.8.3. Sterilization:

3.8.3.1. Domestic water system piping shall be disinfected after tests in accordance with State or District Health Department requirements. Before placing the systems in service, contractor shall engage a qualified service organization to sterilize the new water lines.

3.8.4. The sanitary, storm water, condensate drain and miscellaneous drain

systems shall be hydrostatically tested. Tests shall be as required by code and as a minimum shall comprise the plugging of all openings in the line, filling the system (or portion thereof) with water until all joints are proven tight. Piping shall be tested with a minimum head of 10 feet of water.

3.8.5. All chilled water, hot water heating, steam and steam condensate

(steel) piping shall be hydrostatically tested to 1-1/2 times the system working pressure or a minimum of 100 psig, whichever is greater.

3.8.6. Fire protection piping shall be tested as specified in Section 15500.

3.8.7. All pressure piping systems, unless otherwise specified herein, shall be

filled with water and thoroughly flushed clean of foreign matter after erection and before connection of equipment.

3.8.8. Testing and certification of medical gas and vacuum systems shall be

required for all new work and modifications to existing medical gas and vacuum piping as indicated on the documents. Testing and certification of medical gas and vacuum system shall be as follows:

3.8.8.1. The medical gas and vacuum systems, including all source

equipment, valving, alarms and station outlets shall be evaluated and certified for mechanical and therapeutic function as defined in the National Fire Protection Assn. (NFPA) ii, Compressed Gas Assn. (CGA) and the AIA U.S. Department of Health and Human Services: "Guidelines for Construction and Equipment of Hospital and Medical Facilities," 2001 Edition, formerly: DHHS Publication No. (HRS-M-HF) 84-1. This testing shall be performed by an agency independent of the facility, contractor, or their suppliers. The Agency shall specialize in medical facilities and shall be able to demonstrate experience and expertise in medical gas and vacuum installations.

3.8.8.2. The Agency shall provide to the facility full documentation of

the following:



3.8.8.3. That all medical gas and vacuum systems as constructed

follow the guidelines of the NFPA 99, regarding the placement and applicability of valves, alarms, and source equipment. The Agency shall not be responsible for evaluation of Contractor's technique in such elements as routing and hangers except as per paragraphs 3.8.12.4, 3.8.12.5, 3.8.12.6, and 3.8.12.7 below.

3.8.8.4. That no cross connections exist in the pipeline as

constructed. Documentation shall include examination of the outflow of each station outlet, following a mechanical cross connection procedure as specified by the NFPA 99 par. 4-5.1 1.2. Additionally, each system outflow shall be examined with an appropriate analyzer and the concentrations shall be documented. All medical gas and vacuum systems shall be included in the mechanical examination.

3.8.8.5. Where laboratory systems are tested as separate systems,

cross connection tests will be performed to document their separation from medical systems as required by NFPA 99.

3.8.8.6. That all station outlets are delivering gas at a pressure and

flow consistent with anticipated needs, as these shall be defined by responsible authorities within the facility, but in no case to be below CGA or NFPA guidelines.

3.8.8.7. That the pipeline is free of debris, including liquid. 3.8.8.8. That all station outlets are functional. 3.8.8.9. That delivered gas is as pure as required by applicable

CGA/USP specifications for breathing gas. Samples shall be taken from such station outlets as shall be agreed by the facility and the agency. In no case shall the number of samplings be fewer than two (2), one from source and one from such station outlets as will provide the gas has traversed the greatest length of pipeline. Samples shall be evaluated against CGA/USP requirements for human use and compared to one another.

3.8.8.10. That all reserve source equipment and its control equipment

is in place and is operational. 3.8.8.11. That all valves are functional. The control zones shall be

documented without regard to plans. This documentation shall be compared to the as-built plans, and all discrepancies between the actual installation and the plans shall be reported to the facility.



3.8.8.12. That all alarms are functioning and are set in accordance with NFPA 99. The surveillance areas of each shall be documented and compared as in paragraph 3.8.12.11 above.

3.8.8.13. That medical air is dry. The examination shall consist of a

dewpoint taken at source and most distant station outlet of each lateral branch. Temperatures and pressures affecting the dryness shall be documented.

3.8.8.14. Where separate waste anesthetic gas disposal station

outlets are provided, the evacuation system shall be included in all mechanical examinations as per paragraphs 3.8.12.4, 3.8.12.6, 3.8.12.8, 3.8.12.10, 3.8.12.11, and 3.8.12.12.

3.8.8.15. The documentation shall be provided by an independent

testing agency approved by the Engineer, and shall contain all of the above information as well as the certification. These documents shall become part of the permanent records of the facility. Certification shall be issued upon successful completion of all specified tests. The Contractor shall not be released from his contractual obligation until certification is obtained.

END OF SECTION


SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15070 - 1

SECTION 15070 - SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 1. GENERAL


1.1.1. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section.

1.2. References:

1.2.1. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the latest rules, regulations, and recommendations of the following:

1.2.1.1. SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s

National Association) “Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems”

1.2.1.2. International Building Code 2012

1.3. System Description:

1.3.1. General Requirements

1.3.1.1. The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this section shall be applied to mechanical piping equipment. Structural requirements shall be in accordance with Division 13.

1.3.1.2. Seismic restraints shall not interfere with the operation and

performance of isolation efficiency of the vibration isolation system in any way.

1.3.2. Mechanical Equipment

1.3.2.1. Mechanical equipment shall be seismically protected shall include the following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications:

Air-Cooled Chillers Pumps with motors Water and Gas Piping Valves and Fittings for Piping Air Handling Units Ductwork Exhaust Fans

1.3.3. Mechanical Systems

1.3.3.1. The following mechanical systems shall be installed as required on the drawings and other sections of these specification and shall be seismically protected in accordance with this specification:



1.3.3.1.1. All piping inside the building except as specifically stated in section 1.3.5 below

1.3.3.1.2. All water supply systems

1.3.3.1.3. Heat distribution systems (supply & return)

1.3.4. Contractor Designed Bracing

1.3.4.1. The contractor shall design and install the bracing and anchorage systems in accordance with the following requirements.

1.3.4.1.1. Seismic design requirements.

Seismic design criteria: provide bracing and anchoring for equipment, piping, and ductwork designed, constructed, and installed to resist stresses produced by lateral forces specified under the IBC (2012 year), for Seismic Design Category C.

1.3.4.1.2. Design and install seismic anchorage and bracing for all floor or roof mounted equipment weighing 400 pounds or more and all suspended or wall mounted equipment weighing 20 pounds or more.

1.3.4.1.3. For this project, the following seismic coefficients

shall be used in calculating the required later force:

Risk Category: IV Seismic Importance Factor: 1.5 Mapped Spectral Response Accelerations: Ss=0.169, S1=0.051 Site Class: D Spectral response Coefficients: Sds=0.180, Sd1=0.082 Seismic design Category: C

1.3.4.1.4. All lateral forces shall be presumed to act through

the component’s center of gravity.

1.3.5. Items Not Covered By This Section

1.3.5.1. Items Requiring No Seismic Restraints

1.3.5.1.1. Seismic restraints are not required for the following items.

1.3.5.1.1.1. Gas piping less than 1-1/4” inside diameter

1.3.5.1.1.2. All other piping less than 2-1/2” inside diameter

1.3.5.1.1.3. Rectangular air handling ductwork less than

6 square feet in cross sectional area



1.3.5.1.1.4. Round air handling ductwork less than 28” in diameter

1.3.5.1.1.5. Piping suspended by individual hangers 12”

or less in length from the top of the pipe to the bottom of the supporting structural member where the hanger is attached, except as noted below

1.3.5.1.1.6. Ducts suspended by hangers 12” or less in

length from the top of the duct to the bottom of the supporting structural member, except as noted below

1.3.5.1.2. In exceptions 1.3.5.2.1.5 and 1.3.5.2.1.6, all hangers

shall meet the length requirements. If the length requirement is exceeded by one hanger in the run, the entire run shall be braced. Interior piping and ducts not listed above shall be seismically protected in accordance with the provisions of this specification.

1.4. Submittals:

1.4.1. Shop drawings and calculations:

1.4.1.1. Layout and mounting detail drawings showing system and proposed brace locations for all systems including pre-engineered systems.

1.4.1.2. The specific detail for each type of brace or anchor must be

referenced on a plan that identifies the required location. Supplying a book of details without referencing the proper detail to a specific location on a plan is not acceptable.

1.4.1.3. Structural calculations for required lateral force level for each

component.

1.4.1.4. All submittals, including pre-approved systems, shall be signed and sealed by a licensed engineer, licensed in the state in which the project is located.

1.4.2. Product data:

1.4.2.1. Technical data on seismic control devices.

1.5. Commissioning:

1.5.1. Division 15 will be responsible to carry out the commissioning requirements specified in Section 15010, 15850 and other sections referenced in 15850.

2. PRODUCTS



2.1. Flexible Couplings:

2.1.1. Flexible couplings shall have the same pressure and temperature ratings as adjoining piping.

2.2. Flexible Ball Joints:

2.2.1. Flexible ball joints shall have cast or wrought steel casing and ball parts capable of 360-degree rotation with not less than 15-degree angular movement.

2.3. Flexible Mechanical Joints:

2.3.1. Mechanical couplings for steel or cast iron pipe shall be of the sleeve type and shall provide a tight flexible joint under all reasonable conditions, such as pipe movement caused by expansion, contraction, slight settlings or shifting of the ground, minor variations in trench gradients, and traffic vibrations. Where permitted in other sections of these specifications, joints utilizing split-half couplings with grooved or shouldered pipe ends may be used.

2.3.2. Sleeve-type couplings shall be used for joining plain-end pipe sections.

The coupling shall consist of one steel middle ring, two steel followers, two gaskets, and necessary steel bolts and nuts to compress the gaskets.

2.4. Manufactured Ball Joints:

2.4.1. Manufactured ball joints shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended use, and shall be approved by the contracting officer before installation.

2.5. Bolts and Nuts:

2.5.1. Squarehead and hexhead bolts, and heavy hexagon nuts, ASTM B18.2.1, ASME B18.2.2. Bolts and nuts used underground and/or exposed to the weather shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.6. Sway Bracing Materials:

2.6.1. Sway bracing materials (e.g. rods, plates, rope, angles, etc.) shall structural steel and shall be as specified below:

2.6.1.1. Plates, rods, and rolled shapes, ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A

572/A 572M, Grade 503.

2.6.1.2. Wire Rope, ASTM A 603

2.6.1.3. Tubes, ASTM A 500, Grade B

2.6.1.4. Pipes, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B



2.6.1.5. Light gauge angles, less than ¼” thickness, ASTM A 653/A 653M

2.7. Anchors and Supports:

2.7.1. Drilled-in-place concrete anchors shall have an approved ICBO Evaluation Services Report.

2.7.2. Cast-in-place anchors shall comply with ASTM-A36, ASTM-A307, or

ASTM-F1554-36.

2.7.3. Anchors permanently exposed to weather or corrosive environments shall be stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized.

2.7.4. Structural steel for supports: ASTM-A36.

2.7.5. Cold formed metal and connection material: Unistrut or equal.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. Coupling and Bracing:

3.1.1. Coupling installation shall be installed per recommendations of SMACNA and USACE. Provisions of this section apply to all piping within the 5-foot line around the outside building unless buried in the ground. Piping grouped for support on trapeze-type hangers shall be braced at the most frequent interval as determined by applying the requirements of this specification to each piping run on the common support. Bracing components shall be sized as required for the total load carried by the common support. Bracing rigidly attached to pipe flanges, or similar, shall not be used where it would interfere with thermal expansion of piping.

3.2. Building Drift:

3.2.1. Joints capable of accommodating seismic displacements shall be provided for

vertical piping between floors of the building, where pipes pass through a building seismic or expansion joint, or where rigidly supported pipes connect to equipment with vibration isolators. Horizontal piping across expansion joints shall accommodate the resultant of the drifts of each building unit in each orthogonal direction. For treaded piping, swing joints made of the same piping material shall be provided. For piping with manufactured ball joints the seismic drift shall be 0.6 feet per foot of height above the base where seismic separation occurs, this drift value shall be used in place of the expansion given in the manufacturer’s selection table.

3.3. Flexible Couplings or Joints:

3.3.1. Building Piping 3.3.1.1. Flexible couplings or joints in the building piping shall be provided at bottom of

all pipe risers for pipe larger than 3-1/2” in diameter. Flexible couplings or joints shall be braced laterally without interfering with the action of the flexible coupling or joint. Cast iron waste and vent piping need only comply with these



provisions when caulked joints are used. Flexible bell and spigot piping joints using rubber gaskets may be used at each branch adjacent to tees and elbows for underground waste piping inside building to satisfy these requirements.

3.4. Pipe Sleeves:

3.4.1. Pipe sleeves in interior non-fire rated walls shall be sized as indicated on the

drawings to provide clearances that will permit differential movement of the piping without the piping striking the pipe sleeves. Pipe sleeves in fire rated walls shall conform to section 15050.

3.5. Spreaders:

3.5.1. Spreaders shall be provided between adjacent piping runs to prevent contact

during seismic activity whenever pipe or insulated pipe surfaces are less than 4” apart. Spreaders shall be applied at same interval as sway braces at an equal distance between the sway braces. If rack type hangers are used where the pipes are restrained from contact by mounting to the rack, spreaders are not required for pipe mounted in the rack. Spreaders shall be applied to surface of bare pipe and over insulation on insulated pipes utilizing high-density inserts and pipe protection shields.

3.6. Sway Braces for Piping:

3.6.1. Sway braces shall be provided to prevent movement of the pipes under

seismic loading. Braces shall be provided in both the longitudinal and transverse directions, relative to the axis of the pipe. The bracing shall not interfere with thermal expansion requirements for the pipes as described in other sections of these specifications.

3.6.2. Transverse Sway Bracing 3.6.2.1. Transverse sway bracing for steel and copper pipe shall be provided as

recommended by USACE. All runs (length of pipe between end joints) shall have a minimum of two transverse braces. Transverse sway bracing for pipes of materials other than steel or copper shall be provided at intervals not to exceed the hanger spacing as specified in section 15050. Bracing shall consist of at least one vertical angle 2 x 2 inches x 16 gauge and one diagonal angel of the same size.

3.6.3. Longitudinal Sway Bracing 3.6.3.1. Longitudinal sway bracing shall be provided at 40 foot intervals. All runs

(length of pipe between end joints) shall have one longitudinal brace minimum. Sway braces shall be constructed in accordance with USACE. Branch lines, walls or floors shall not be used as sway braces.

3.6.4. Vertical Runs 3.6.4.1. Run is defined as length of pipe between end joints. Vertical runs of piping

shall be braced at not more than 10 foot vertical intervals. Braces for vertical runs shall be above the center of gravity of the segment being braced. All sway braces shall be constructed in accordance with USACE. Sway braces



shall attach to the structural system and shall not be connected to branch lines, walls or floors.

3.6.5. Clamps and Hangers 3.6.5.1. Clamps and hangers on uninsulated pipes shall be applied directly to the pipe.

Insulated piping shall have clamps or hangers applied over insulation.

3.7. Sway Braces for Ducts: 3.7.1. Braced Ducts 3.7.1.1. Bracing details and spacing for rectangular and round ducts shall be in

accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual, including Appendix E, and TI 809-04 procedures.

3.7.2. Unbraced Ducts 3.7.2.1. Hangers for unbraced ducts shall be attached to the duct within 2 inches of the

top of the duct, with a minimum of two #10 sheet metal screws, in accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Unbraced ducts shall be installed with a 6 inch minimum clearance to vertical ceiling hanger wires.

3.8. General Requirements:

3.8.1. Design and install all bracing and anchoring for equipment, piping, and

ductwork in accordance with the requirements of this specification. 3.8.2. Every run which requires bracing shall have a minimum of two Transverse

Braces and one Longitudinal Brace.

3.8.3. A “run” is defined as suspended pipe, duct or trapeze rack having a minimum 5 foot (1.52 m) straight run length.

3.8.4. Brace spacing shall not exceed the maximum allowable brace spacing as

engineered by the manufacturer or custom bracing designer.

3.8.5. Bracing may be omitted from piping, ductwork, conduit, cable tray and bus duct runs less than 5 ft (1.52 m) in length.

3.8.6. Except for sprinkler piping, bracing may be omitted from piping and ductwork

runs where rod hung supports of less than 12 in (305 mm) in length are required.

3.8.6.1. All unbraced suspended ductwork and other unbraced suspended

utility systems are to be installed with a minimum 6 in (152 mm) clearance to suspended ceiling vertical hanger wires.

3.8.6.2. The piping, or ductwork shall be installed such that the lateral motion

of the members will not cause damaging impact with other systems or structural members or loss of vertical support.



3.8.7. A longitudinal brace at a 90 degree change in direction may act as a Transverse Brace if it is located within 2 ft (610 mm) or two duct widths, whichever is greater, of the change in direction.

3.8.8. A Transverse Brace may act as a longitudinal brace if it is located within 2 ft

(610 mm) or 2 duct widths, whichever is greater, of a change in direction and if the brace arm and anchorage have been sized to meet or exceed the requirements of the Longitudinal Brace.

3.8.9. When bracing equipment or a utility system that is suspended from an

overhead deck, brace back to the overhead deck or to the supporting structure supporting the deck. Do not brace to another element of the structure which may respond differently during a seismic event.

3.8.10. Obtain approval from the Structural Engineer prior to attaching to any brace

elements to structural steel or wood framing.

3.8.11. When utilizing cable bracing, tension the cable to remove slack without inducing uplift of the suspended element. Tension seismic bracing system prior to system start up and adjust if necessary after equipment start up.

3.8.12. As a general rule, do not mix rigid bracing with cable bracing in the same run.

However, once bracing has transitioned a 90 degree change in run direction, the bracing may switch from rigid to cable or vice versa if required due to a significant change in overhead deck elevation or to provide an implementable bracing scheme in a congested area.

3.8.13. Install brace members at an angle of 45 degrees from horizontal within a

tolerance of plus 2 ½ degrees or minus 45 degrees provided the brace length is accounted for in design. Brace angle may be increased to 60 degrees provided the brace spacing is reduced to ½ that required for a 45 degree brace.

3.8.14. Seismic bracing may not pass through a building separation joint. Utility

systems that pass through a separation joint must be seismically restrained within 5 ft (1.52 m) of point of connection or any hardware designed to accommodate seismic movement across the span of the separation joint.

3.8.15. With approval of the Structural Engineer, utility systems within a basement that

are suspended from the overhead deck may be braced to load bearing basement walls provided that the walls and the overhead decks will respond similarly during a seismic event.

3.8.16. Each layer of a multiple layer trapeze rack shall be braced individually based

on the weight of the individual layer.

3.8.17. Pipes, or ductwork constructed of non ductile material (plastic, fiberglass, or no hub cast iron), shall have brace spacing reduced to ½ of the spacing allowed for ductile materials. In addition, no hub cast iron piping shall be braced on either side of a horizontal 90 degree change in direction and when installed as a riser, shall include the use of a joint stabilizer where the joints are unsupported between floors.



3.8.18. Where brace elements are through-bolted, the mounting hole in the element is to be no more than 1/16 in (1.6 mm) in diameter larger than the bolt or threaded rod.

3.8.19. Seismic braces shall directly brace system and not the hanger.

3.9. Suspended Plumbing, Mechanical and Process Piping:

3.9.1. Install seismic bracing for pipe runs meeting the following parameters:

3.9.1.1. All piping 2 ½ in (38 mm) in diameter or greater for any use.

3.9.2. All trapeze assemblies supporting pipes shall be braced considering the total weight of the elements on the trapeze computed as pounds per lineal feet.

3.9.3. Unless an individual element or trapeze would otherwise require bracing,

brace trapezes with a minimum weight in excess of 10 lbs per lineal foot.

3.9.4. For the purpose of calculating weight, all piping is to be treated as full of water.

3.9.5. Locate seismic bracing no more than 10 ft from each main riser, at every piece of equipment, and at the entrance to the building.

3.9.6. Do not use branch lines to brace main lines.

3.9.7. At vertical pipe risers, wherever possible, support weight of riser at a point or

points above the center or gravity of riser.

3.9.8. Provide lateral guides at the top and bottom of the riser.

3.9.9. The bracing requirements and installation details for piping anchors and guides designed to accommodate thermal pipe movement require custom analysis and design. Thermal pipe stress analysis and anchor/guide design shall be undertaken by a licensed engineer trained in thermal pipe stress analysis. Seismic forces and detail requirements as specified in this section shall be included in the design of such anchors and guides.

3.9.10. Individually supported pipes on rollers or hangers suspended from dual

threaded rods shall employ a top roller in contact with the top of the pipe to prevent uplift during a seismic event.

3.10. HVAC Ductwork and Suspended HVAC Equipment:

3.10.1. Install seismic bracing on HVAC ducts meeting the following parameters:

3.10.1.1. All rectangular air handling ducts equal to or greater than 6 square feet in cross sectional area.

3.10.1.2. All round air handling ducts equal to or greater than 28 inches in

diameter.

3.10.2. All trapeze assemblies supporting ducts shall be braced considering the total weight of the ducts on the trapeze.



3.10.3. In line equipment rigidly mounted to the duct shall be braced independently of the duct work if the unit weighs 50 pounds or more. If the equipment is flexibly connected to the ductwork, independently brace all equipment weighing 20 pounds or more. All mechanical piping connections to the equipment are to be flexible. The nearest transverse brace for the connected duct shall be at a distance away from the equipment of no more than ½ the transverse brace spacing required.

3.10.4. Vertical duct runs which are mechanically attached to floors at a point of

penetration may be considered as a transverse and longitudinal brace location provided the anchorages and the duct framing accommodate the engineered load and provided the distance to the nearest 90 degree change in direction is no more than two duct widths.

3.11. Fire Protection Piping:

3.11.1. Install lateral (transverse) seismic bracing spaced no more than 40 ft on center on all feed and cross mains and all branch lines and other piping 2 ½” diameter and larger.

3.11.2. Install lateral (transverse) seismic bracing on the last length of pipe and at the

end of a feed or cross main. The distance between the end of the pipe and the last brace shall not exceed 20 ft.

3.11.3. Install longitudinal bracing at a maximum of 80 ft on center for feeds and cross

mains.

3.11.4. Seismic bracing maybe omitted from sprinkler piping suspended by individual hangers 6 in or less from the top of the pipe to the bottom of the structural attachment for the hanger provided the hanger rods are constructed in such a manner as to not produce bending in the rod or the attachment.

3.11.5. For the purpose of calculating weight, all piping is to be treated as full of water.

3.11.6. Tops of vertical riser piping shall be seismically braced using 4-way bracing.

3.12. Floor or Roof Mounted Equipment:

3.12.1. Provide one anchor on each leg or support with a minimum of three 3/8 in diameter anchors.

3.12.2. Friction shall be neglected when designing anchors for shear.

3.12.3. Seismic forces shall be presumed to act through the center of mass of the

equipment in a direction that will produce the largest single anchor force.

3.12.4. Vertical seismic forces, when required, shall be presumed to act concurrently with horizontal seismic forces.

END OF SECTION


MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION 15200 - 1

SECTION 15200 – MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION 1. GENERAL


1.1.1. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. Work included in this section consists of furnishing all labor,

equipment, materials and accessories, and performing all operations required, for the correct fabrication and installation of thermal insulation applied to the following piping, equipment, and duct systems, in accordance with applicable project specifications and drawings:

1. Heating systems (steam, steam condensate, hot water) 105F

(41C) and up 2. Domestic and service hot water systems, 105F (41C) and up. 3. Domestic cold water systems, 0°F (-18°C) to 60°F (16°C). 4. Cooling systems (chilled water), 0F (-18C) to 60F (16C) 5. Air handling ductwork, and plenums, to 1200F (649C)

1.2.2. Work excluded in this Section are the following:

1.2.2.1. Thermal building insulation. 1.2.2.2. Sound absorbing duct lining.

1.2.3. The requirements of Section 15010, Mechanical General Provisions, shall apply to the work specified under this Section.

1.3. Definitions:

1.3.1. The k factor means the number of British thermal units of heat

transmitted per (sq. ft.) Fahrenheit temperature difference through a material with flat, parallel sides one inch (1") apart. The material shall be tested and rated according to ASTM Test Method C-177.

1.3.2. The term “Mineral Fiber” as defined above specifications includes

fibers manufactured of glass, rock or slag processed from a molten state, with or without binder.

1.3.3. Unless otherwise specified, the term concealed, as used in this

specification, shall include all furred spaces, accessible pipe and duct shafts, and spaces above suspended ceilings.

1.3.4. Unless otherwise specified, the word exposed shall refer to all work

other than "concealed" work.

1.4. References

1.4.1. Thermal insulation materials shall meet the property requirements of one



or more of the following specifications as applicable to the specific product or use:

1.4.1.1. American Society for Testing of Materials Specifications:

a. ASTM C 547 “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation”

b. ASTM C553 “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications”

c. ASTM C585 “Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters or Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System)”

d. ASTM C 612 “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation”

e. ASTM C 795 “Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel”

f. ASTM C 1136 “Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation”

g. ASTM C 1290 “Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts”

h. ASTM G-21 “Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi” (fungi resistance section only)

i. ASTM G 22 “Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacterial (bacteria resistance section only)

1.5. System Performance

1.5.1. Insulation materials furnished and installed hereunder should meet the minimum economic insulation thickness requirements of the North American Insulation Manufacturers’ Association (NAIMA) to ensure cost-effective energy conservation performance. Alternatively, materials should meet the minimum thickness requirements of National Voluntary Consensus Standard 90.1 (1989), “Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings,” of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). However, if other factors such as condensation control or personnel protection are to be considered, the selection of the thickness of insulation should satisfy the controlling factor. In no case shall the insulation thickness be less than that specified herein.

1.5.2. Insulation materials furnished and installed hereunder shall meet the fire

hazard requirement of any one of the following specifications:

1. American Society of Testing of Materials ASTM E 84 2. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. UL 723 3. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 255

1.6. Fire Resistance:

1.6.1. Except for materials which are subsequently exempted, all materials

used as part of the thermal insulation shall have a fire hazard rating not



to exceed twenty five (25) for flame spread and fifty (50) for fuel contributed and smoke developed.

1.6.2. Test factory assembled materials as assemblies. 1.6.3. Determine ratings by the Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials, ASTM E-84 or NFPA No. 255. 1.6.4. The following will be required to establish that fire hazard ratings for

materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified: (1) label or listing by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., (2) certified test report from an approved testing laboratory.

1.6.5. The following materials are exempt from the foregoing Fire Resistant

Rating:

1.6.5.1. Jackets of canvas, PVC and nylon. 1.6.5.2. Polyurethane, polystyrene, cork and flexible, closed-cellular

insulation. 1.6.5.3. Nylon anchors for securing insulation to ducts and

equipment. 1.6.5.4. Factory premolded one (1) piece PVC fitting and valve

covers. 1.7. Qualifications:

1.7.1. Materials submitted shall be standard products of a manufacturer who

has been engaged in the production of the products for not less than three (3) years.

1.7.2. The installing sub-contractor shall have at least five (5) years of

successful installation experience on projects with similar insulation products.

1.8. Quality Assurance

1.8.1. Insulation materials and accessories furnished and installed hereunder shall, where required, be accompanied by manufacturers’ current submittal or data sheets showing compliance with applicable specifications listed in Section 1.4 above.

1.8.2. Insulation materials and accessories shall be installed in a

workmanlike manner by skilled and experienced workers who are regularly engaged in commercial insulation work.

1.9. Submittals:

1.9.1. Provide shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 and the

General Requirements which shall include all insulation, jackets, finishes, corner beads, etc. Shop drawings shall additionally describe each system or component to be insulated, insulation type and thickness, and method of installation.



1.10. Delivery and Storage of Materials

1.10.1. All of the insulation materials and accessories covered by this specification shall be delivered to the job site and stored in a safe, dry place with appropriate labels and/or other product identification.

1.10.2. The contractor shall use whatever means are necessary to protect the

insulation materials and accessories before, during, and after installation. No insulation material shall be installed that has become damaged in any way. The contractor shall also use all means necessary to protect work and materials installed by other trades.

1.10.3. If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site

exposure to moisture or water, the contactor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. An exception may be allowed in cases where the contractor is able to demonstrate that wet insulation when fully dried out (either before installation, or afterward following exposure to system operating temperatures) will provide installed performance that is equivalent in all respects to new, completely dry insulation. In such cases, consult the insulation manufacturer for technical assistance.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. General:

2.1.1. All insulating materials, including adhesives, jackets and coatings, to

be used on the project must be delivered to the building in the manufacturer's unopened container and must bear the manufacturer, brand and description of material.

2.1.2. After the necessary tests have been conducted to prove the water and

air systems tight, all piping, ductwork and equipment to be insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned and then covered. Insulation materials shall be the product of Owens Corning, CSG, Manville or Armstrong equal to the products specified herein.

2.1.3. Molded pipe insulations shall be manufactured to meet ASTM C 585

and ASTM C 547. 2.1.4. Light density glass fiber duct wrap shall be manufactured to meet the

requirements of ASTM C 1290. 2.1.5. Heavy density glass fiber duct board shall be manufactured to meet

the requirements of ASTM C 612. 2.2. Types of Insulation:

2.2.1. Type I - Pipe Insulation: Provide heavy density molded fiberglass pipe insulation with factory

applied all-service jacket. The K-factor shall not be more than 0.23 at seventy-five degrees Fahrenheit (75F) mean temperature, rated for a maximum service temperature of 850F (454C). Insulation shall be equal to Manville Microlok-AP-T Plus.



2.2.2. Type II - Pipe Insulation:

Provide closed cell elastomeric tubular insulation with built-in vapor barrier. The k factor shall not be more than 00.27 at seventy five degrees Fahrenheit (75oF) mean temperature. Insulation shall be equal to Armacell AP-Armaflex.

2.2.3. Type III - Pipe Insulation:

Provide molded hydrous calcium silicate insulation. The k factor shall not be more than 0.60 at six hundred degrees Fahrenheit (600oF) mean temperature. Insulation shall be equal to Manville Thermo-12 Gold.

2.2.4. Type IV - Duct Insulation:

Provide blanket type lightweight fiberglass duct insulation with vapor barrier facing. The k factor shall not exceed 0.31 at seventy five degrees Fahrenheit (750F) mean temperature. Insulation shall be equal to Manville Microlite with FSK Facing.

2.2.5. Type X - Pipe Insulation:

Provide closed-cell elastomeric pre-slit tubular insulation with built-in vapor barrier and with a pressure-sensitive adhesive system for closure and vapor seal. The k factor shall not be more than 0.27 at seventy five degrees Fahrenheit (75oF) mean temperature. Insulation shall be equal to Armacell Self-Seal AP-Armaflex.

2.2.6. Type XI – Pipe Insulation [Rigid Phenolic]:

Provide rigid phenolic insulation with factory applied all service jacket. The k factor shall not be more than 0.13 at seventy five degrees Fahrenheit (75° F) mean temperature. Insulation shall be equal to Kingspan Koolphan K.

2.2.13. Type XIII – Equipment or Duct Insulation: Provide flexible closed cell elastomeric insulation laminated with a white thermoplastic rubber (TPR) membrane. The k factor shall not be more than 0.27 at seventy-five degrees Fahrenheit (75° F). Insulation shall be equal to Armacell Armatuff 25.

2.3. Adhesives, Sealers and Coatings:

2.3.1. Provide all adhesives, sealers, vapor barrier coatings etc., compatible with the material to which they are applied. They shall not corrode, soften or otherwise attack such material in either the wet or dry state and must be suitable for the service temperatures.

2.3.2. Any cement, sealer or coating used shall be resistant to vermin and mold and shall be durable. It shall not discolor on aging; and where applied on the final surface of the insulation, it shall be light in color and be capable of being painted.

2.3.3. Adhesives, coatings and compounds shall be equal to the following: 2.3.3.1. Vapor barrier adhesive for sealing joints on pipe and duct

insulation - Foster 85-75.



2.3.3.2. Adhesive for installing duct insulation - Foster 85-20 and 81-91.

2.3.3.3. Insulating cement - Owens Corning No. 110

2.4. Fittings and Valve Covers:

2.4.1. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with Owens Corning PVC premolded one (1) piece PVC insulated fitting cover and factory precut insulation. Fittings shall have edges of one (1) piece cover sealed with Owens Corning vapor barrier pressure sensitive tape.

2.5. Metallic Components:

2.5.1. Staples shall be outward clinching type of 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2.5.2. Bands shall be galvanized steel, aluminum, brass, or nickel-copper

alloy, of three-quarter inch (3/4") nominal width. The band thickness, exclusive of coating, shall be not less than five thousandths inch (0.005") for steel and nickel copper alloy, seven thousandths inch (0.007") for aluminum, and one hundredth inch (0.01") for brass.

2.5.3. Wire shall be 14-gauge, nickel-copper alloy or copper clad steel, or 16-

gauge, soft annealed, galvanized steel. 2.5.4. Wire netting used for exposed surfaces of insulation that is to be

cement finished shall be 22-gauge, one inch (1") galvanized mesh, with continuous 26-gauge galvanized steel corner beads having two and one-half inch (2-1/2") wings.

2.5.5. Protect external corners on insulation of ducts and equipment exposed

in occupied spaces by corner beads two inches (2") by aluminum adhered to heavy duty Kraft paper.

2.5.6. All exterior piping shall be additionally covered with a sixteen mil (16

mil) (0.4mm) embossed aluminum or stainless steel weatherproof jacket. Jacketing shall be Childers Lock-on type with factory applied poly kraft moisture barrier. Jackets are to be fabricated with continuous Z-lock on the longitudinal seam and sections shall be joined with factory fabricated butt strap and sealant. Fitting shall be insulated and weatherproofed using similar materials.

2.5.7. Where indicated, all piping shall be covered with UV resistant Owens

Corning PVC jacketing. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s limitation with regard to surface temperature and thermal expansion. Fittings shall be insulation as prescribed above, jacketed with pre-formed fittings covers matching the outer jacketing.

2.6. Insulation Schedule:

Service Type Thickness

2.6.1. Domestic Water Piping: (Hot, Cold, Recirc.)

1. 1 1/2" Size and smaller I or X 1"



2.6.2. Storm Water Piping:

Vertical pipe four (4) feet below roof and horizontal pipe I 1"

2.6.3. Air Conditioning Condensate: I or II 1" 2.6.4. Chilled Water Supply

and Return Piping: 1. Above 1 1/2” I 1-1/2"

2.6.5. Glycol & Low Temperature Chilled Water Supply and Return: 1. Above 2” XI 1 1/2” 2. 2” size and smaller XI 1” 2.6.6. Hot Water Heating Supply

and Return Piping: 1. Above 1 1/2" I 2" 2. 1 1/2” size and smaller I 1 1/2"

2.6.7. Steam Supply Piping: 1. Medium pressure (251oF-305oF) a. All sizes III 3"

2. Low Pressure (201-250oF) a. Above 1 1/2" I 3"

b. 1 1/2”" size and smaller I 1-1/2"

2.6.8. Steam Condensate: a. Above 1-1/4" I 2" b. 1-1/4" size and smaller I 1"

2.6.9. Piping Concealed in Walls

and Cabinet Enclosures: II 1"

2.6.10. Air Conditioning Supply Air Ductwork: 1. Concealed IV 2" 2. Outdoor XIII 2”

2.6.11. Air Conditioning Return

Ductwork: 1. Outdoor XIII 2”

3. EXECUTION

3.1. General:

3.1.1. All insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work.

3.1.2. Insulation shall be continuous at all hangers, sleeves and openings.

Vapor seals shall be provided for all cold surfaces and shall be



continuous. 3.1.3. Arrange to permit expansion and contraction without causing damage

to insulation or surface. 3.1.4. Actual insulation thickness must be at least equal to the minimum

specified in the schedule. Where the manufacturer's rated or nominal thickness is less than the minimum specified, a thicker material or more layers will be requested so that the stated minimum thickness will be attained or exceeded.

3.1.5. Install insulation materials in a first class manner with smooth and even

surfaces. Scrap pieces of insulation shall not be used where a full length section will fit.

3.1.6. Unless otherwise specified herein, the application of all insulation

materials, accessories and finishes shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations.

3.1.7. Insulation materials shall not be applied until all surfaces to be covered

are clean and dry; all foreign material, such as rust, scale, dirt, etc., has been removed; and, where specified, surfaces have been painted. Insulation shall be clean and dry when installed and during the application of any finish. The insulation on pipe fittings, valves and pipe joints shall not be installed before the piping is tested and approved.

3.1.8. Omit insulation on the following unless directed otherwise:

3.1.8.1. Brass or copper pipe specified to be chrome plated. 3.1.8.2. Traps and pressure reducing valves, relief piping from safety

valves, and unions, flanges and expansion joints on hot water heating system.

3.1.8.3. All fire protection piping.

3.1.9. Replace and repair insulation disturbed by testing and balancing procedures required under Section 15825.

3.2. Pipe Insulation:

3.2.1. High density pipe saddles shall be provided at all points of support as

hereinbefore specified in Section 15010. 3.2.2. Insulate all valves and strainers. Use premolded covers and factory

precut insulation where applicable. Unions and flanges shall not be insulated except on cold service.

3.2.3. Insulate valves up to and including bonnets, except for cold water

valves which shall be insulated over packing nuts in a manner to permit removal for adjustment and repacking.

3.2.4. Insulate strainers in a manner to permit removal of the basket without

disturbing the insulation of the strainer. Obtain Engineer's approval of



installation method. 3.2.5. Application - Types I & III Insulation:

3.2.5.1. Insulate all pipes in a neat and workmanlike manner. Seal all longitudinal laps of jackets and staple every six inches (6"). Where the piping operates below ambient temperature, the staples shall be coated with vapor barrier adhesive. All butt joints shall be wrapped with a three inch (3") minimum wide strip of jacketing material securely sealed in place.

3.2.5.2. Insulate valves and fittings with pre-cut blanket type

fiberglass insulation and PVC covers as specified. Insulation shall be of the same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked in, fully insulating the pipe fitting. The one (1) piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by stapling, tack fastening, banding or taping the ends to the adjacent pipe covering. Chilled water supply and return piping and cold water systems piping shall be insulated as above and have all seam edges of the cover sealed with ZESTON vapor barrier adhesive mastic. The circumferential edges of cover shall be color matching tape. The tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and overlap itself at least two inches (2") on the downward side.

3.2.5.3. Where fittings are operating above ambient they may, in lieu

of the preceding paragraph, be covered with a three hour (3 hr.), hydraulic setting, combination insulating and finishing cement having k factor not greater than 0.87 at a mean temperature of two hundred degrees Fahrenheit (200° F). The thickness of this cement shall be such that the surface is substantially flush with the pipe covering. Where the insulation terminates at a fitting that is not covered, the end of the insulation shall be beveled off with this same cement. All fittings insulated in this manner shall be covered by a fabric jacket as specified, which shall be cemented down with lagging adhesive.

3.2.5.4. For all type III applications insulation shall be covered with a

three hour (3 hr.), hydraulic setting, combination insulating and finishing cement having k factor not greater than 0.87 at a mean temperature of two hundred degrees Fahrenheit (200oF). The thickness of this cement shall be such that the surface is substantially flush with the pipe covering. Where the insulation terminates at a fitting that is not covered, the end of the insulation shall be beveled off with this same cement. All fittings insulated in this manner shall be covered by a fabric jacket as specified, which shall be cemented down with lagging adhesive.

3.2.5.5. Where expansion joints are required to be insulated, they

shall be covered with readily removable sections of insulation of same composition and thickness as provided for



adjacent piping.

3.2.6. Application - Type II Insulation:

3.2.6.1. The material shall be slit lengthwise to permit installation or slipped over pipe before connections are made.

3.2.6.2. All joints and seams must be thoroughly bonded, both

mechanically and hermetically, by the adhesive recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Also, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed as to the adhesive to use where the insulation needs bonding to metal or other material used for any surface treatment where a finish coat of paint is required.

3.2.6.3. All penetrations of the insulation must be thoroughly sealed

so that the insulation itself will form a complete vapor barrier. Wherever the insulation terminates, the edges shall be sealed to the metal.

3.2.7. Application - Type X Insulation:

3.2.7.1. The material shall be applied lengthwise by placing the slit tubing over pipe. Longitudinal joint is made by peeling release paper from adhesive surface and applying pressure along longitudinal joint. Butt ends shall be secured with Armstrong 520 adhesive.

3.2.7.2. All joints and seams must be thoroughly bonded, both

mechanically and hermetically, by the adhesive recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Also the manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed as to use where bonding to other materials or metal is required.

3.2.7.3. All penetrations of the insulation must be thoroughly sealed

so that the insulation itself will form a complete vapor barrier. Wherever the insulation terminates, the edges shall be sealed to the metal.

3.2.8. Application – Type XI Insulation:

3.2.8.1. Insulation shall be in half sections or curved side wall segments for larger diameters. Apply minimum 3 inch wide matching butt strips to all circumferential joints with a 50% overwrap. For pipes larger than 12’ apply the strips on 12” centers.

3.2.8.2. For components where ASJ vapor retarder is not factory

applied, insulation shall be secured with 1” wide fiber reinforced strapping tape on 9” maximum centers. Cover all insulation with a field applied ASJ vapor retarder. Overlap the adjacent factory applied ASJ vapor retarder by 2” and cover with a butt strap.

3.2.8.3. All valves and flanges shall be insulated to the same



thickness as the pipe.

3.2.8.4. Fittings shall be two piece preformed insulation or fabricated with mitered segments, using Foster Stic Safe Adhesive 85-15 or equal.

3.2.8.5. Seal all joints with a non-setting joint sealant, Foster Flextra

Vapor Stop Sealant 95-50 or equal. The joints shall be tightly butted.

3.2.8.6. All terminants shall be sealed with a vapor retarder mastic,

Foster Vapor Safe Coating 30-90, or equal, and reinforcing fabric system.

3.3. Duct Insulation:

3.3.1. Provide accessories as required to prevent distortion and sagging of

duct insulation. Provide welded pins, adhesive clips and wire ties as recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Engineer.

3.3.2. Insulation shall cover all standing seams and metal surface. Provide

corner beading on all exposed ducts. 3.3.3. Staples shall be sealed to maintain vapor barrier. 3.3.4. Neatly cut insulation at dampers, temperature control sensors, and

controllers. Butter exposed edges with approved mastic coating. 3.3.5. Application - Type IV Insulation:

3.3.5.1. Insulation shall be cut slightly longer than perimeter of duct

to insure full thickness of corners. All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly fastened with staples. Tape the stitched seam with three inch (3") wide pressure sensitive tape. The insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of all square ducts eighteen inches (18") or wider by means of welded pins and speed clips. The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off flush after the speed clips have been applied. The vapor barrier facing shall be thoroughly sealed where the pins have pierced through with a tape of the same material by applying a vapor barrier adhesive to both surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.3.5.2. All joints and penetrations of the vapor barrier shall be

sealed with three inch (3") pressure sensitive tape. All cuts or tears shall be sealed with strips of the aluminum foil tape.

3.3.6. Application – Type XIII Insulation:

3.3.6.1. Apply a brush coat of manufacturer’s recommended

adhesive to dry, clean, metal surface covering an area equal to the size of one (1) sheet. Apply a brush coat of adhesive to the back of the sheet. Once the adhesive is tacky, position the sheet so that the edges overlap the previously installed sheets by one eighth inch (1/8”). Apply pressure to adhere



sheet. Compress butt edges into place. Spread joints and coat with adhesive. Apply adhesive to the butt edges of the insulation.

3.3.6.2. Apply manufacturer’s recommended seal tape to all joints

and exposed edges. Finish by applying even pressure using a roller.

3.4. Finishes:

3.4.1. Canvas jacket shall be provided on all interior exposed piping herein

specified to be insulated.

3.4.2. Where canvas jacket is to be installed on piping, apply Foster 30-36 adhesive to the canvas jacket by dipping to completely wet and saturate the canvas. While wet, position on the insulation and pull tight, bond lap and smooth out all wrinkles. Finish with a sealer coat of adhesive.

3.4.3. All pipes exposed to the weather shall be covered with aluminum

jacket minimum 0.016 inch thick kept in place with aluminum bands 12 inches on center. Longitudinal seams shall be on underside of pipe and horizontal joints shall be lapped 3 inches with aluminum bands at edge of overlap.

END OF SECTION


PLUMBING 15300 - 1

SECTION 15300 – PLUMBING 1. GENERAL


1.1.1. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section includes the storm, waste, drain, vent, and domestic water

systems from their source of supply or point of disposal to and including their connection to equipment and fixtures.

1.2.2. The requirements of Section 15010 Mechanical and Electrical General

Provisions shall apply to all work specified under this section.

1.3. Commissioning:


1.4. Codes:

1.4.1. All plumbing work shall comply with the National Standard Plumbing

Code and the regulations of the Health Department of Baltimore County and the State of Maryland. Obtain all approvals before starting plumbing work. Request all inspections during the course of work.

1.4.2. All plumbing products, materials of construction, and joining methods

shall be in compliance with State of Maryland regulations on the limit of weighted average lead content as set forth in the Annotated Code, and in the installation or repair of plumbing intended to dispense water for human consumption.

1.5. Equipment Connection:

1.5.1. Provide all plumbing connections required by equipment which is

provided on this project. Certain items of equipment shall be provided under this section and certain items will be furnished and set under other sections of the specifications. In all cases, provide valved water supplies, waste and vent lines, and, unless noted otherwise, make final connections after equipment is in place.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Pipe, Valves and Fittings:

2.1.1. Provide materials as hereinbefore specified in Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods.

2.2. Cleanouts:


PLUMBING 15300 - 2

2.2.1. Cleanouts shall be placed in piping throughout the building, where noted and where required by code and at not greater than seventy five foot (75') intervals. Cleanouts on piping below floors, at ends of runs and changes of direction of piping shall consist of Y branches, the full size of pipes to which they are connected with cleanout plugs and covers as listed below or as detailed. Extend cleanouts on concealed piping to finished walls, floors and grade. Cleanouts shall be Josam, Jay R. Smith, Watts, or Zurn equal to Josam numbers indicated below.

2.2.2. In concrete floor on grade (generally) - Series 58370-2-20C cleanout

with scoriated round satin bronze top, bronze cleanout plug with lead seal, and adjustable housing. In carpeted are, Josam Series 58370-2-14-20-C.

2.2.3. At base of vertical piping and in walls - Series 58510 cleanout tee with

countersunk bronze threaded plug. Where risers are concealed, provide Series 58760-2-20 cleanout tee with plug and satin finish bronze access cover and frame.

2.2.4. Cleanouts on exposed horizontal piping shall be Series 58510-25 with

bronze threaded plug.

2.3. Drains:

2.3.1. Provide traps for all drains. All sanitary traps shall be "deep seal" type. 2.3.2. Provide drains where indicated. Drains shall be Josam, Jay R. Smith

or Zurn equal to Josam equipment as follows:

Floor Drains – General, with Primer Tap Type "A" 30000-6A-17-50 (Nikaloy Top)

2.4. Plumbing Fixtures:

2.4.1. Provide all plumbing fixtures indicated on the drawings and as

specified herein. All exposed metal parts of all fixtures, including all trim and fittings, shall be brass, chromium plated. Each cold and hot water connection to each fixture shall be provided with a stop valve and all nipples shall be chrome plated red brass.

2.4.2. The Contractor shall provide metal supports necessary to adequately

and substantially hang and set all fixtures subject to the approval of the Engineer. No wood grounds, wood plugs, or expansion bolts shall be permitted for fixture support. Provide carriers where specified below.

2.4.3. Plumbing fixtures shall be as follows:

2.4.3.1. Fixtures shall be American Standard, Aquarius, Aqua Bath,

Bradley, Crane, Eljer, Elkay, Fiat, Guy Gray, Just, Kohler, or Stern-Williams, equal to the composite models specified herein.

2.4.3.2. Trim shall be Chicago, McGuire, Omni, Powers, Speakman,

Truebro, or T&S Brass and Bronze Works, equal to the composite models specified herein.


PLUMBING 15300 - 3

2.4.3.3. Flush valves shall be Delany, Sloan, or Zurn, equal to the composite models specified herein. Flush valve handles shall be located on the "wide side" of the toilet areas for handicapped use.

2.4.3.4. Toilet seats shall be Church or Olsonite, equal to the

composite models specified herein. 2.4.3.5. Carriers shall be Josam, Jay R. Smith, Watts, or Zurn, equal

to the composite models specified herein.

2.4.3.6. Hospital equipment will be furnished by owner for installation by contractor unless specified otherwise.

2.4.4. P-2A WATER CLOSET

2.4.4.1. Description:

Wall hung, water saver, siphon jet action, white vitreous china, elongated bowl, fitted with white open front seat, flush valve, mounted 18" high for handicapped use and adjustable horizontal carrier with appropriate fittings.

2.4.4.2. Composite:

Fixture American Standard 2257.103 Afwall 1.6

Seat Church 9500SSCT Flush Valve Zurn Z6000AV-WS1 Carrier Josam 12674 [Left Hand]

Josam 12684 [Right Hand] Josam 12694 – [Back to Back]

2.4.5. P-11A LAVATORY


Wall hung, nominal 20" x 18", white vitreous china, front overflow, self-draining deck, back and side splash shields, fitted with faucet with gooseneck spout, wrist blade handles and grid drain, faucet flow control, trap with nipple, supplies with stops and escutcheons, insulation kit, and concealed arm carrier (for installation at pipe chases) or wall hanger (for installation at partitions).

2.4.5.2. Composite:

Fixture American Standard 0356.015 Lucerne

Faucet Chicago 786-E35ABCP Drain Chicago 327XCP Flow Control Omni A-910VR-1.5-LF-349 Trap McGuire 8912 Supplies Chicago 1006-ABCP Insulation Kit Truebro 402W Carrier Josam 17100


PLUMBING 15300 - 4

2.4.6. P-11B LAVATORY


Wall hung, nominal 20" x 18", white vitreous china, front overflow, self-draining deck, back and side splash shields, fitted with sensor faucet with gooseneck spout, and grid drain, faucet flow control, trap with nipple, supplies with stops and escutcheons, insulation kit, transformer, and concealed arm carrier (for installation at pipe chases) or wall hanger (for installation at partitions).

2.4.6.2. Composite:

Fixture American Standard 0356.015 Lucerne

Faucet Chicago 116.113.21.1 Drain Chicago 327XCP Flow Control Omni A-910VR-1.5-LF-349 Trap McGuire 8912 Supplies Chicago 1006-ABCP Insulation Kit Truebro 402W Carrier Josam 17100 Transformer Chicago 240.630.00.1

2.4.7. P-15 SERVICE SINK


Floor mounted, one piece, white molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" deep, factory installed stainless steel drain body with strainer, fitted with stainless steel wall guard, vinyl bumperguards, wall mounted faucet with vacuum breaker spout, faucet flow control, mop hanger, and hose with bracket.

2.4.7.2. Composite:

Fixture Fiat MSB-2424 Wall Guard Fiat MSG-2424 Bumperguards Fiat E-77-AA Faucet Existing Relocated Flow Control Existing Relocated Mop Hanger Existing Relocated Hose with Bracket Existing Relocated Strainer Fiat 1453-BB

2.4.8. P-16 SCRUB SINK


Wall hung scrub station will be furnished by owner for installation by contractor. Provide trap with nipple, loose key stops (2), and floor mounted carrier. Contractor shall provide


PLUMBING 15300 - 5

steel channel as required to secure carrier to underside of structure.

2.4.8.2. Composite:

Trap McGuire 8912 Stops (2) Chicago 442-LK Carrier Josam 17720-66

2.4.9. P-18B SINGLE COMPARTMENT SINK


Countertop, 17-1/2" x 19" overall with 11-1/2" x 16" x 7-1/2" deep compartment, seamless 18 gauge type 304 (18-8) stainless steel, self rimming, 3 faucet holes, sound deadened, fitted with sensor faucet with gooseneck spout and faucet flow control, offset rear center grid drain, trap with nipple, transformer, and supplies with stops and escutcheons.

2.4.9.2. Composite:

Fixture Just SL-A-17519-A-GR Stylist Group A

Faucet Chicago 116.113.21.1 Flow Control Omni A-910VR-2.0-LF-349 Drain Just J-35FS Trap McGuire 8912 Supplies Chicago 1006-ABCP Transformer Chicago 240.630.00.1

2.4.10. P-22 DOUBLE COMPARTMENT SCRUB SINK


Wall hung scrub station will be furnished by owner for installation by contractor. Provide continuous waste, trap with nipple, loose key stops (4), and floor mounted carrier. Contractor shall provide steel channel as required to secure carrier to underside of structure.

The continuous waste piping for the scrub sinks shall be DWV copper with a 2” sweat trap with integral union nut for cleaning and a cross to the sink connections that will have sweat trap adaptors for the flanged tailpieces at the sink strainers.

2.4.10.2. Composite:

Continuous Waste McGuire 111CG17 Trap McGuire 8904 Stops (4) Chicago 442-LK Carrier Josam 17720-66

2.5. Specialties:


PLUMBING 15300 - 6

2.5.1. Provide Zurn or Josam shock absorbers equal to Josam Series No.

75000 where indicated, and sized in accordance with PSI Standard WH 201.

2.5.2. Trap Primer:

2.5.2.1. Provide automatic trap priming valve where required and

indicated on the drawings. Automatic trap priming valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products PR-500, Prime-Rite or equal by MIFAB, Model MR-500. Provide trap primer distribution unit where required to serve more than one floor drain. Provide 1/2" O.D. copper to floor drain connection.

2.20. Medical Gas Shut-Off Valves and Boxes:

2.20.1. Multiple Zone Valve Box Assembly shall be constructed of 18 gauge steel with anodized aluminum cover frame and cover window with pull ring. Anchor brackets shall be designed to permit any number of boxes to be ganged together in a vertical stack.

2.20.2. Shut-off valves shall be full port, double seal, ball type with Buna-N

seals and O-ring packaging, chrome plated brass ball and designed for working pressures up to 300 psig. Only one-quarter turn of the handle shall be required to operate the valve from "open" to "closed" position; the valve handle shall protrude from the box and prevent the door from closing when the valve is in the "closed" position. Valve shall be securely mounted to back of zone box and provided with type L copper tube extensions to permit brazing outside of the valve box. All valves shall be serviceable in the line and supplied clean and prepared for oxygen service with pipe ends capped.

2.20.3. Zone valve box assembly shall include 1-1/2" pressure gauges reading

0-100 psig for oxygen and air and 0-30 Hg for surgical vacuum. Vacuum shall be read upstream of the valve, oxygen and air shall be read downstream. Valves shall be piped left to right. Gauges shall be selected to read midway on the scale for "normal" operations.

2.20.4. The zone valve box assembly shall be supplied with color coded gas

identification labels. The window shall conceal exposed piping and valves within the box and shall have a caution label.

2.20.5. Multiple zone valve box assembly shall be manufactured by Amico,

series VB. Refer to floor plans and zone valve box details for valve arrangements and sizes.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. Installation of Piping:

3.1.1. Interior Drainage Systems:

3.1.1.1. Waste, vent and drain piping for sanitary and storm drainage, shall be of the sizes noted and shall be run as indicated. Pipes must be run in straight lines and have a uniform grade between elevations noted. No branch drain


PLUMBING 15300 - 7

shall have a grade less than that indicated for the main drain to which it is connected. Where elevations are not given, horizontal pipes shall have a uniform grade of one-quarter inch (1/4") per foot where possible but in no case less than one-eighth inch (1/8") per foot and shall be installed to the inverts shown. All piping shall be adequately supported as specified in Section 15010. All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended as vents full size to approximately eighteen inches (18") above the roof of the building. Two (2) or more vent lines shall be connected together where practicable and pipes in roof space shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the roof without forming traps in pipes. Vent pipes may be connected to other vent pipes or to main vent stacks provided the connections are at least four feet (4') above the floor on which the fixtures are located so that no vent pipe can be used as waste. Openings in roof for vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight. Use vent stack flashing sleeves where applicable. Provide Josam #26700 vandal proof vent cap on all vents through roof. Handicapped plumbing fixtures shall be roughed-in to suit the specific mounting of the fixture.

3.1.1.2. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of

fittings. Sanitary tees or short quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical; except use long turn tee wyes when two (2) fixtures share common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on greater than ninety degrees (90o). Where different sizes of drainage pipes or pipes and fittings are to be connected, use standard increasers and reducers of proper size. Reduction of size in horizontal drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

3.1.1.3. Drilling and tapping of drains, waste, or vent piping, and use

of saddle hubs and bands is prohibited. 3.1.1.4. Connect piping to fixtures or equipment by couplings or

unions so that devices may be replaced with no disturbance to piping.

3.1.2. Water Piping Systems:

3.1.2.1. Water piping shall be complete from service connection to all

fixtures, equipment, outlets, etc. Sizes of pipes shall be as shown or as specified.

3.1.2.2. Chromium plated piping shall be threaded and made up

carefully, and not more than one (1) full turn of thread shall be exposed beyond any fitting.

3.1.2.3. Ends of pipes or tubing and recesses of fittings to be

bronzed or soldered shall be thoroughly cleaned. Joints shall be assembled without binding. Brazing material or solder shall penetrate fully and shall fill the joint completely.


PLUMBING 15300 - 8

3.1.2.4. All brass and copper pipe and tubing shall be free from cuts, dents or other surface damage at the time of final inspection. Damaged pipe or tubing shall be removed and replaced with new pipe or tubing.

3.1.2.5. Horizontal runs of brass and copper pipe and tubing over

fifty (50) feet in length shall be anchored to wall or floor construction. Anchors shall be located near the midpoints of the runs so as to force the expansion equally to the ends or in a direction where expansion can take place without excessive strain. Swing joints, offsets, expansions, etc., shall be provided where necessary to accommodate expansion of piping, which will be approximately two (2) inches in one hundred (100) feet of brass or copper hot water piping.

3.1.2.6. Where non-ferrous metal piping and zinc-coated metal

piping are jointed, dielectric (insulating) couplings, fittings or unions shall be provided.

3.1.2.7. Where pipe sizes shown or specified differ from the

connection sizes of meters, pumps, fixtures, outlets, etc, reducing fittings shall be installed.

3.2. Traps:

3.2.1. Each fixture and piece of equipment connected to the sanitary system

shall be equipped with a trap. Provide traps for storm water lines where required by code. Each trap shall be placed as close to the fixture as possible and no fixture shall be double trapped. All traps on bell and spigot pipe shall be service weight cast iron and all traps on threaded pipe shall be galvanized cast iron recessed drainage type.

END OF SECTION


FIRE PROTECTION 15500 - 1

SECTION 15500 – FIRE PROTECTION 1. GENERAL


1.1.1. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section includes the fire protection systems. 1.2.2. The requirements of Section 15010 and 15050 shall apply to work

specified under this section. 1.2.3. Modify existing combination wet type automatic sprinkler-standpipe

system and make connection to the water main as indicated, all in accordance with NFPA Standards 13, 14, and 24 and Factory Mutual Standards.

1.2.4. All requirements of the State of Maryland, State Fire Marshal's Office,

and Baltimore County Fire Prevention Bureau shall apply to this specification.

1.3. Commissioning:


1.4. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1.4.1. Provide all piping as required by NFPA and approved plans in accordance with all applicable standards. Piping installation and hangers shall be in accordance with Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods, unless specified otherwise in this Section.

1.5. Codes and Regulations:

1.5.1. All requirements of the State of Maryland, State Fire Marshal's Office and the Baltimore County Fire Prevention Bureau, shall apply to this specification and design requirements, including the latest edition of the following codes and regulations:

State of Maryland Fire Prevention Code Underwriters Laboratories Fire Protection Equipment List Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems (NFPA 13) Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems (NFPA 14) Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and use of Protective Signaling Systems (NFPA 72A) Code for Life Safety from Fire in Buildings and Structures (NFPA 101) Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Act International Building Code



Factory Mutual Standards

1.6. Shop Drawings:

1.6.1. Eight (8) sets of calculations and shop drawings covering the sprinkler systems shall be prepared and submitted to the Engineer and owner’s insurance company for approval prior to being submitted to any County or State agencies. Shop drawings shall show light fixtures, ducts, mechanical equipment, structural elements, and all other items which may affect the layout of sprinkler heads and pipes. Plans showing sprinkler work shall be not less than one-eighth inch (1/8") per foot and shall be prepared on sheets with dimensions the same as the contract drawings. No work shall be started until shop drawings are approved by all the reviewing agencies.

1.7. Samples:

1.7.1. Submit to Architect, if requested, samples of all sprinkler heads to be provided.

1.8. Project Requirements:

1.8.1. The equipment manufacturer and installer shall have been engaged in

the sprinkler industry for a minimum of five years (5 yrs.).

1.8.2. Modify existing combination wet type automatic sprinkler-standpipe system serving the renovated area of the building. The standpipe system shall be Class I in accordance with NFPA Standard 14.

1.8.3. The renovated area of the building shall be fully sprinklered

throughout, and the sprinkler piping systems shall be either scheduled or hydraulically designed in accordance with NFPA 13 and the Hazard Occupancy requirements of the Owner’s insurance carrier. Contractor shall verify the exact design requirements with the owner’s insurance carrier. Sprinkler system shall be divided into zones as indicated on the documents.

1.8.4. Pipe sizes shall be as required by NFPA and Factory Mutual but in no

case less than those shown on the drawings. 1.8.5. Sprinkler heads shall be provided as required by NFPA. Sprinkler

head locations shall be coordinated with the architectural reflected ceiling plans. Sprinkler shop drawings shall indicate the ceiling grid, lighting fixtures, air devices, etc. Generally, sprinkler heads shall be centered in ceiling tiles.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. General:

2.1.1. Each item of equipment shall be capable of performing its function over

an extended period of time with a minimum of attention and maintenance. All equipment shall be constructed using new materials designed and built in accordance with the best practices of the industry. Each major item of equipment shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark; serial numbers; U.L. label, Factory Mutual



approval; operating instructions and hydraulic temperature characteristic conditions, etc., if applicable.

2.1.2. Unless specified otherwise, the standard manufactured products of

Tyco, Viking, Victaulic, Automatic, Reliable, Central, Standard, or Star shall be provided. Equipment and installation shall comply with the latest edition of NFPA Standards 13 and 14.

2.2. Piping:

2.2.1. Provide fire protection piping systems of materials as specified in

Section 15050, "FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE".

2.3. Sprinklers:

2.3.1. Sprinklers shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories and only new sprinklers shall be used. Any sprinkler that incurs damage, is painted, or is sprayed with any fire retardant or obstructive material shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. Sprinklers shall be provided and installed in accordance with NFPA 13 and Factory Mutual and properly coordinated with other work including duct and light fixture installation. The correct type of sprinkler head shall be used in every location.

2.3.2. The correct temperature rating of every sprinkler head shall be used

according to the maximum ceiling temperature rating and requirements in NFPA 13. All sprinklers with the exception of specified decorative types shall have their frame arms colored at the factory in accordance with the standard table in NFPA 13.

2.3.3. Sprinklers that may be subject to mechanical damage due to their

location (under stairwells, or low hanging sprinklers in corridors, storage rooms or under ducts) shall be provided with approved guards (Reliable Model MA or equivalent). Sprinklers under open gratings shall be provided with approved shields.

2.3.4. Sprinkler heads shall be provided as follows:

2.3.4.1. In critical care areas (operating rooms), provide quick

response concealed sprinkler heads, Viking Horizon Mirage VK462, Victaulic V38, or approved equal. Sprinkler cover shall match the adjacent ceiling with respect to color. Sprinkler heads shall not be installed in a "surgical field".

2.3.4.2. In all remaining suspended tile or plaster ceilings, provide

recessed sprinkler heads, Viking Microfast Model M quick response, VK302, Victaulic V27, or approved equal.

2.3.4.3. All exposed heads in suspended ceiling shall be chrome

plated. All others shall be brass. 3. EXECUTION

3.1. Installation of Piping:



3.1.1. Install all pipe, fittings, valves, controls, and hangers as indicated and required in accordance with NFPA Standards 13 and 14 and Factory Mutual Standards.

3.1.2. The work under this Section shall be coordinated with that of all other

sections and trades so that all work may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner and so that interference between piping, ducts, equipment, architectural and structural features will be avoided.

3.1.3. Piping shall run concealed in areas of drop ceilings. Piping shall be

installed and arranged to protect it from freezing and corrosion, and shall be pitched for drainage. Installation of all piping shall be in coordination with ducts, light fixtures, and any other work that may obstruct sprinklers.

3.1.4. Drains and test piping shall be furnished and installed so that all parts

of the system may be drained and tested properly. Piping shall not be exposed to freezing. All risers shall be equipped with drains with sizes as specified in NFPA 13.

3.1.5. All interior sectional control valves including riser control valves shall

be provided with auxiliary drainage so located as to drain that portion of the system controlled by the sectional valve. These drains shall discharge either outside, to drain connection leading to the main drain, or to a drain system. Obtain approval of all discharge locations.

3.1.6. Auxiliary drains shall be provided to properly drain points of the system

when a change in direction prevents drainage. 3.1.7. A test pipe(s) of not less than one inch (1") diameter, terminating in a

smooth bore corrosion resistant outlet, giving a flow equivalent to one (1) sprinkler shall be provided (Inspector's test). The test pipe shall be in the top level of sprinklers, piped from the end of the most remote branch line and discharged outside the building including a forty five degree (45o) elbow pointed downward at a point where it can be readily observed. Obtain Engineer's approval for each discharge location.

3.1.8. All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be accessible for

use by emergency and maintenance personnel. All valves controlling water supply for sprinklers shall be electrically supervised and shall be red in color or painted red by the sprinkler subcontractor.

3.1.9. Drain and auxiliary drain valves shall be globe or angle valves as

required and readily accessible for maintenance personnel. The Inspector's test shall be one inch (1") larger globe valve installed not over seven feet (7') above the floor and in a readily accessible location. Test Valves and the sight test shall be located at readily accessible points not above seven feet (7') above the floor.

3.2. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

3.2.1. Provide pipe hangers and supports for fire protection piping as

hereinbefore specified in Section 15010, and in no case less than the requirements of NFPA.



3.2.2. All sprinklered piping shall be substantial supported from the building structure which must support the total load of the water filled pipe plus a minimum of two hundred fifty pounds (250 lbs.) applied at the point of hanging in accordance with NFPA 13. All hanging apparatus and equipment shall be of an approved type installed in accordance with NFPA 13.

3.3. Identification:

3.3.1. Identification signs similar to or the same as those recommended in

NFPA 13 shall be affixed securely by chain to all valves. The signs shall be red in color (Reliable Model A, Style A and B, or equivalent). Riser drains shall read "RISER DRAIN" or "DRAIN". Auxiliary drain signs shall be labeled "AUXILIARY DRAIN". Inspector's Test's signs shall be labeled "INSPECTORS TEST".

3.3.2. An identification nameplate similar to or the same as those

recommended in NFPA 13 and shall be affixed securely by chain. Locate at sprinkler zone piping connection to existing standpipe riser. Nameplate shall be Seton style SPH indicating the location and basis of design including design density and discharge area.

3.4. Installation, Tests, and Acceptance:

3.4.1. Installation, tests, and acceptance shall be in accordance with all

applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4.2. Installation shall be in accordance with all applicable codes, including

the Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Act. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.

3.4.3. All required tests shall be performed by the installer (contractor). The

Contractor shall see that proper representatives of the Owner, the Engineer, and any other authority having jurisdiction desiring to witness the tests shall be notified at least forty eight hours (48 hrs.) ahead of the scheduled test time. The following tests shall be witnessed:

3.4.3.1. Lead-in connections to the system shall be flushed before

connection is made to any system piping using the criteria required in NFPA 13.

3.4.3.2. All piping shall be tested hydrostatically at not less than two

hundred psi (200 psi) for two hours (2 hrs.). The hydrostatic test pressure shall be measured at the low point of the system. The hydrostatic test shall be for the entire system as installed and specified.

3.4.3.3. All alarm equipment, drainage facilities, inspector's tests,

etc., shall be operated while the control valves are wide open. The main drain shall be opened and remain open until the system pressure stabilizes. All air shall have been bled from the system at the top inspector's test connection prior to these tests.



3.4.3.4. The Contractor shall furnish a written statement to the effect that all work covered in the contract has been completed and tested in accordance with the approved specifications and plans. Copies of the written statement shall be provided to the Owner and any other authority having jurisdiction.

3.4.4. The following materials shall be furnished by the Contractor at the

conclusion of the final acceptance test: 3.4.4.1. Any and all special tools noted by the manufacturer required

for the fire protection items furnished. 3.4.5. After completion of installation and tests clean interior and exterior

surfaces of equipment and materials, painted or unpainted, installed under this section of specifications of dirt, rust, loose scale, oils, grease and other foreign matter.

END OF SECTION


HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 15600- 1

SECTION 15600 – HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1. GENERAL



1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section includes heating and air conditioning equipment as indicated

on the drawings and described herein.

1.2.2. Unless noted otherwise, this section includes equipment for the following systems:

Glycol Chilled Water Humidification

1.2.3. The requirements of Section 15010 and 15050 shall apply to the work

specified under this section.

1.2.4. Vibration isolation for mechanical equipment specified under this section shall be provided under Section 15050.

1.3. Commissioning:

1.3.1. Division 15 will be responsible to carry out the commissioning requirements specified in Section 15010, 15825, 15850 and other sections referenced in 15850.

1.4. Shop Drawings:

1.4.1. Submit shop drawings for all materials specified in this section in

accordance with Section 15010. 2. PRODUCTS

2.4. Water Treatment:

2.12.1. Complete chemical water treatment equipment and service shall be provided for the hydronic water systems by Nalco Chemical Company, Arc Water Treatment Co., or Industrial Chemical Corporation. The treatment service shall provide all specified hardware, chemicals, and labor necessary for proper treatment for the specified warranty period for the following systems:

Glycol Systems

2.12.2. The system shall provide service visits and reports, on a monthly basis as a

minimum, for the purpose of monitoring performance, sampling and adjustments in treatment levels to achieve the desired results. At the end of the specified warranty period, the treatment company shall submit a detailed



service report with complete records of previous adjustments and chemicals injected. Leave reports on site with the Owner after every service visit.

2.12.3. The treatment company shall be responsible for damage to mechanical

systems as a result of improper levels of treatment and/or damaging chemicals. The treatment company will not be responsible if the systems lose excessive amounts of water due to leakage.

2.12.4. If the makeup water alkalinity exceeds 125 PPM or hardness exceeds 300

PPM, the contractor shall furnish and install an acid feed control system for any open recirculating systems

2.12.5. The water treatment contractor shall provide monthly reports after each

required site visit. Reports shall be signed and received by the building’s system operator.

2.12.6. The water treatment program under this contract shall be provided for a

period of one year from the date of system acceptance by the Owners' representatives. An initial dose of chemical shall also be applied immediately after each system is initially filled with water if operation is delayed after filling.

2.12.7. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data, including MSDS, for the

proposed water treatment system including chemicals, and all essential equipment. Furnish a list of services to be provided for all systems, and the proposed procedure for system cleaning including chemicals to be used.

2.12.8. Glycol Loop System Treatment:

2.12.8.1. Provide an inhibited ethylene glycol-based heat transfer fluid

specially formulated for heat transfer applications such as UCARTHERM 30HTF. Ethylene glycol shall be designed with a balanced industrial inhibitor system providing corrosion protection for iron, steel, copper, and brass and shall meet the following requirements:

Specific gravity at 68°F 1.048 to 1.059 pH, 50% solution 10.8 to 12.2 Reserve alkalinity, 10 ml 18 to 23 ml of 0.1 NHCl Pour point Less than -60°F Silicates None Chlorides Less than 5 ppm Tolytriazole Greater than 250 ppm as TTZ Phosphate Greater than 2000 ppm as PO1 Borate Greater than 1000 ppm as BO3

2.12.8.2. Dilution water shall conform to the following characteristics:

Hardness: Less than 100 ppm calcium carbonate hardness Corrosive: Less than 25 ppm chloride or sulfate ions



2.12.8.3. Provide a portable test kit complete with chemical reagents for the determination, pH (7.9-10.0), and glycol concentration via a Misco Products Duo-Chek refractometer, or approved equal.

2. EXECUTION

3.1. General:

3.1.1. Provide all required utilities, wiring, and accessories indicated or required. Properly test each piece of equipment to assure proper operation and demonstrate same to Owner's designated representative. Remove and replace at no expense to the Owner any item of equipment deemed by the Architect to be unsatisfactory.

3.1.2. Provide start-up and adjustments for all systems and equipment in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations using personnel who are factory trained and certified by factory as factory authorized personnel.

3.2. Start-Up Commissioning:

3.2.1. Verify operating safeties are in place, piped or discharging to a safe location

and functional prior to startup including but limited to the following:

3.2.1.1. Provide documentation of all pressure testing (piping, and ductwork).

3.2.1.2. Protect all equipment/systems operating during temporary or start-

up operation. Provide startup filtration (water), strainers (water) to protect equipment.

3.2.1.3. Retouch any marred or scratched factory-finished surfaces with

materials furnished by the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


PUMPS 15620- 1

SECTION 15620 – PUMPS 1. GENERAL



1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section includes pumps for heating, ventilating and air conditioning

systems as indicated on the drawings and described herein.

1.2.2. Types of pumps specified in this section include the following:

Closed Coupled Inline

1.2.3. The requirements of Section 15010 and 15050 shall apply to the work specified under this section.

1.2.4. Vibration isolation for mechanical equipment specified under this

section shall be provided under Section 15050.

1.3. Commissioning:


1.4. Shop Drawings:



2.1. Pumps:

2.1.1. Pump capacities shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 2.1.2. Reference Motor Specification Section 15010 for efficiency and construction

compliance. The motors shall be ODP or TEFC design. 2.1.3. Data submitted for approval shall include pump speed and characteristic

curves for performance of the impeller selected. Curves shall indicate capacity vs. head, NPSHR, efficiency and brake horsepower for the full range, from shut-off head to free delivery. Manufacturers’ pumps may be considered only if pump efficiencies are equal or greater than the basis of design.

2.1.4. Vibration isolation shall be provided as specified in Section 15050.


PUMPS 15620- 2

2.1.5. Pumps shall be selected so that the operating point on the selected impeller curve will be at or to the left of, and not more than 5% below, the point of maximum efficiency. Impeller size for specified duty shall not exceed 90% of volute diameter.

2.1.7. Pumps shall be provided with motors conforming to Section 15010. Motors

shall not exceed 1750 rpm unless noted on pump schedule. Pumps shall be non-overloading with respect to nameplate horsepower throughout the impeller performance curve, unless specifically noted on pump schedule.

2.1.8. The flush line to the mechanical seal shall be equipped with a 50 micron

cartridge filter or when the pump differential exceeds 30 PSIG, a cyclone separator can be utilized with a signal flow indicator. The mechanical contractor shall change the filters after the system has been flushed and on a regular basis until the pumps are turned over to the Owner. At final acceptance new filters shall be provided.

2.1.9. All flexibly coupled pumps shall be aligned with a laser alignment system.

Laser alignment reports for each pump shall be turned over to the Owner in the pump O&M package.

2.1.10. Type "B" Pump: (Close Coupled Inline for use up to 5 HP)

2.1.10.1. Pump shall be close coupled vertical or horizontal in-line type,

single stage design. The pumps shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections.

2.1.10.2. Cast iron, suitable for 175 psig working pressure at 140 deg. F.

The casing shall incorporate a seal vent line to facilitate air removal and promote continuous water flush across the seal faces. The casing shall have tapped and plugged holes for priming, draining, and gauges.

2.1.10.3. The impeller shall be of the enclosed type, vacuum cast in one

piece and constructed of bronze, ASTM B584. The impeller shall be finished, the exterior being turned and the interior being finished smooth and cleaned. The impeller shall be dynamically balanced. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft, fastened with a washer, gasket and capscrew.

2.1.10.4. Shaft sealing shall be accomplished by means of a John Crane

Mechanical seal suitable for 225°F operation. The seal shall have a ceramic seat, carbon washer, Buna-N elastomers, and stainless steel metal parts.

2.1.10.5. The pump shaft shall be ground and polished stainless-steel shaft

with stainless steel sleeve.

2.1.10.6. Pumps shall be manufactured by Armstrong Pumps, Inc., Taco Pumps, Bell & Gossett Pumps, Weinman or Aurora.

2. EXECUTION

3.1. General:


PUMPS 15620- 3

3.1.1. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions

and as indicated. Provide all required utilities, wiring, and accessories indicated or required. Properly test each piece of equipment to assure proper operation and demonstrate same to Owner's designated representative. Remove and replace at no expense to the Owner any item of equipment deemed by the Architect to be unsatisfactory.




3.2.1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 3.2.2. Verify that equipment is secure on mountings and supporting devices and

that connections to piping and electrical systems are complete. 3.2.3. Verify proper rotation and proper thermal-overload. 3.2.4. Provide lubrication of all components with factory-recommended lubricants. 3.2.5. Verify operating safeties are in place, piped or discharging to a safe location


3.2.5.1. Electrical – Overloads installed, disconnects accessible, equipment covers and guards installed.

3.2.5.2. Provide documentation of all pressure testing (piping and pressure

vessels). 3.2.5.3. Protect all equipment/systems operating during temporary or start-


3.2.5.4. Check alignment of pump drives. Perform laser alignment of all

flexibly coupled pumps. Submit final reports with O&M manuals. 3.2.5.5. Retouch any marred or scratched factory-finished surfaces with


END OF SECTION


PREPURCHASED EQUIPMENT 15625 - 1

SECTION 15625 – PREPURCHASED EQUIPMENT 1. GENERAL


1.1.1. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.

1.2. Commissioning:


1.3. Scope:

1.3.1. This section includes all prepurchased HVAC equipment as described

herein and shown on the drawings.

1.3.2. To assist in achieving the stated completion date, Northwest Hospital has initiated purchase agreements with manufacturers of certain long lead items of equipment required for this contract. The purchase orders in the amounts hereinbefore stated have been assigned by the owner and will become part of this contract. The purchase orders will be reassigned to the mechanical contractor.

1.3.3. The contractor shall receive, install and place into operation all items of

equipment. He shall also extend all guarantees and service the equipment under the conditions of the specifications (see section 15010).

1.3.4. Shop drawings of prepurchased equipment will be furnished to the

contractor by the Owner. Additional copies if required must be attained from the supplier by the Contractor.

1.3.5. Prepurchase items of equipment are as follows:

1.3.5.1. Factory fabricated air handling unit: (AHU-35) Manufacturer: Environmental Air Systems LLC

Amount: ( ) Contact Person: Sue Dexter Cesare

The Dexter Company [email protected] 410-323-6300



2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Air Handling Units (Custom Type “A”):

2.1.1. Furnish and install custom built-up air handling units of the configuration, capacity and style as indicated on the contract drawings and equipment schedule and as specified herein, as manufactured by Environmental Air Systems, Air Enterprises or Buffalo. Through properly designed access; ease of maintenance, removability of components, and unit serviceability shall be assured.

2.1.1.1. Each unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested

as an assembled unit and separated into sections (if required for shipping and/or rigging) only after the unit is complete and has been inspected by the Owner's representative.

2.1.2. The unit shall be constructed on an all aluminum or 304 stainless steel

structural base. The base shall be designed to distribute loads properly to a suitable mounting surface and be braced to support internal components without sagging, pulsating or oil canning. The support base shall have a maximum deflection of 1/2".

2.1.2.1. The unit base shall be constructed with sloped sumps in the

cooling coil condensate section. Floor joints shall be welded and watertight.

2.1.3. The unit base floor shall be minimum 3/16” thick aluminum treadplate

welded at all joints and to structural members. The base floor shall be aluminum designed for live load of 100 pounds per square foot. The base floor shall be constructed with adequate stiffening members to prevent oil canning.

2.1.3.1. Perimeter support members shall be minimum 6” properly

sized to support all components and housing during rigging, handling and operation of the unit.

2.1.3.2. The bottom of the base floor and base perimeter shall be

insulated with a minimum of 2” thick 3.0-pcf high density insulation, with vapor barrier. The insulation shall then be protected with a 0.040” thick aluminum sheet attached to the bottom of the base floor system.

2.1.3.3. Each section of the unit base shall be equipped with a

minimum 2” NPT drain to facilitate unit washdown and maintenance. The 2” drain piping shall extend through the base steel and provided with removable caps of non-corrosive material.



2.1.3.4. Each section shall be equipped with a threaded capped pipe

connection to be used for field testing of temperature and pressure.

2.1.3.5. All internal equipment shall be provided with a minimum 2”

high base to raise equipment and components off the unit floor for housekeeping.

2.1.3.6. All floor openings, supply and return air, piping, conduits,

etc., shall have a 2” frame continuously welded to the floor to allow proper duct and utility connection and to prevent moisture from entering the openings. Framed openings shall be provided with removable aluminum or 304 stainless steel grating designed and fabricated for a live load of 100 pounds per square foot.

2.1.4. The unit housing shall be a minimum of 2-1/2” double wall all-

aluminum construction with a minimum 0.040” aluminum interior and exterior skins. Interior finish to be solid smooth, mill finish; exterior finish to be a low-reflective textured mill finish. The unit panels shall be constructed with a continuous tight seal at the interior and exterior skins completing encapsulating the insulation. The panels shall be load bearing and capable of forming the enclosure without additional structural members. Panels shall be joined together with an independent joining member and fastened with closed end aluminum rivets or stainless steel fasteners.

2.1.4.1. Unit insulation shall be fiberglass, 2-1/2” 3.0-pcf high density.

Minimum U-valve shall be 0.10. The unit casing shall be constructed to prevent condensation on both the interior and exterior surfaces under the following design conditions:

Summer – 80°F DB and 74°F WB Winter – 15°F DB

Unit wall panels shall meet NFPA 90A requirements. The unit manufacturer shall provide the necessary system rating as required by local code officials. The unit shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50. Panels shall be constructed with a thermal break downstream of the cooling coil such that there is not through metal path between the interior and exterior surfaces of the casing.

2.1.4.2. A 2” wall panel can be constructed of 0.040” thick aluminum interior and exterior skins with foam core insulation. The panels shall meet NFPA 90A and shall be marked as such.

2.1.4.3. The thickness of unit panels, core density, rib structural

frame spacing shall be designed to eliminate panel pulsation and excess deflection. Maximum deflection shall be less



than 1/200 of any span at the specified test condition. Casings shall be built to exceed AMCA Class “C” requirements.

2.1.4.4. Exterior fasteners shall be stainless steel, interior fasteners

shall be aluminum or stainless steel.

2.1.5. Hinged access doors shall be provided in sections as shown on the drawings. Doors shall be constructed as described for housing.

2.1.5.1. Each door shall be hinged with a minimum of (2) – 9”

stainless steel patio hinges in a heavy duty extruded aluminum frame and shall seal against a specially formed closed cell foam gasket. Gasket shall seal door against frame both against flat surface of door and side of door. The gasket shall be an integral part of the extruded aluminum frame.

2.1.5.2. Door shall be maximum height housing will accommodate

(up to 72”) and shall be secured by a multi-point latching mechanism. Latching system shall include an inside handle. Door minimum actual width shall be 24” for areas requiring entrance by maintenance personnel. The latching system shall be single handle design.

2.1.5.3. Access doors to all sections shall have viewports of double

thickness insulated wire reinforced glass. 2.1.5.4. Removable access panels shall be provided in equipment

sections for removal of large components. Provisions for coil removal shall be provided. Coil panels shall be split to enable either top or bottom coil to be removed.

2.1.6. The roof shall be constructed as previously specified for housing with

no external standing seams or screws. A permanent factory roof system shall be sloped a minimum of 1/4” per foot to assure positive run-off.

2.1.6.1. The entire roofing system shall be a polymer membrane

permanently bonded to the unit roof. Membrane to be minimum 0.045” thick. Standing seam roofing system will not be acceptable.

2.1.6.2. Unit shall be provided with a non-corrosive rain gutter

system with downspouts to guide unit roof water run-off to the building roof.

2.1.7. Unit Casing shall conform to the following:

2.1.7.1. Sound Transmission Loss DB ASTM E-90-85 & E413-73

Octave #

Construction 2 3 4 5 6 7 STC+



(125) (250) (500) (1000) (2000) (4000)

Aluminum Liner 17 20 31 40 50 55 32

+Sound Transmission Class

Fan sound power level shall be AMCA Certified for sound performance in accordance with AMCA Standard 301. Unit casing transmission loss factor shall be published as tested by an independent laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90.

2.1.7.2. Sound Absorption ASTM C423-84A & E795-83

Octave #

Construction 2 3 4 5 6 7 NRC+

(125) (250) (500) (1000) (2000) (4000)

Aluminum Liner .59 .97 1.06 1.01 .99 .99 1.00

+Noise Reduction Coefficient

Test methods and facilities used to establish sound absorption values shall conform explicitly with the requirements of the ASTM Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Method: ASTM C423-84A and E7905-83.

2.2.8. Fans:

2.2.8.1. General:

2.2.8.1.1. Provide fans having a certified rating based on

tests performed in accordance with AMCA Bulletins Number 210, 211A and 300. See AMCA Standard 99 "Standard Handbook" for definitions of fan terminology. Arrangement, size and capacity of fans are indicated on the drawings.

2.2.8.1.2. All fans shall be statically and dynamically

balanced by the manufacturer. Field mounted vibration isolation units as hereinbefore specified shall be installed on each fan.

2.2.8.1.3. Diffuser cones and inlet bells are not permitted

in rating a fan unless they are an integral part of the fan design. Additionally, where applicable, fans shall not be rated for air-over (AO) duty.

2.2.8.1.4. Provide inlets and outlets of fans not duct

connected, including fans in plenum chambers or open to outside, with heavy guard screens to protect personnel. Construct guard screens in a manner that will not impair fan performance, and



when bolted to equipment will permit their removal for fan service and cleaning.

2.2.8.1.5. Provide lubrication facilities, such as oil

reservoirs, sight glasses, grease and relief fittings, fill and drain plugs, pipe connections, etc. Place in a readily and safely accessible location so that after installation they will perform required function without requiring the dismantling of any parts or stopping equipment.

2.2.8.1.6. All parts of fans shall be protected against

corrosion prior to operation of the fan. 2.2.8.1.7. Certified performance data including acoustical

data shall be submitted for each fan at design conditions. Data shall include published sound power levels based on actual test on the fan sizes being furnished, and conducted in accordance with current, AMCA Standards. Such data shall define Sound Power Levels (PWL), re: 10-12 watts for each of the eight frequency bands. Sound Power Levels shall not exceed those scheduled. Should additional attenuation be required to achieve the levels specified, it shall be included by the fan manufacturer. Any cost of field modifications necessitated by additional attenuation shall be so included by the fan manufacturer. Fan curves shall be submitted which will depict static pressure, total pressure, brake horsepower, and mechanical efficiency plotted against air volume. Data submitted in tabular form is not acceptable.

2.2.8.1.8. Motors, drives, rails, and bases shall be

furnished by the fan manufacturer.

2.2.8.1.9. All fan duct connections, either inlet or outlet, shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel. Gauge and reinforcement shall be in accordance with ASHRAE standards rated for fan shutoff pressure.

2.2.8.2. Plenum Centrifugal Fans: (Type B)

2.2.8.2.1. The fans shall be of the centrifugal plenum

(plug) type, designed without a scroll type housing as manufactured by Twin City, Loren Cook, Greenheck, Penn-Barry, or Howden Buffalo. Fans shall incorporate a non-overloading type backward inclined airfoil blade wheel, heavy gauge reinforced steel inlet plate with removable spun inlet cone, structural steel frame, and shaft and bearings in AMCA Arrangement 3 configuration. Fans shall be AMCA Class I, II, or III construction as indicated



on the plans. Each fan shall be run fully assembled at the factory, prior to shipment, at the operating RPM or maximum class RPM. The total fan assembly shall be checked for balance and compared against the acceptable levels on the Rathbone Chart.

2.2.8.2.2. Inlet plates shall be of heavy gauge reinforced

steel construction. The inlet plate shall be welded to the heavy structural angle frame to form an integral unit. The inlet plate shall incorporate a removable spun inlet cone designed for smooth airflow into the accompanying venturi-shaped inlet cone of the fan wheel.

2.2.8.2.3. All fan wheels shall have spun inlet cones

providing a minimum separation in air flow. Blades shall be die formed airfoil shaped. Sizes 182 and larger shall have 9 airfoil blades. All blades shall be welded to the inlet cones, as well as the backplate. No partial welding will be acceptable. Class I and II wheels shall have steel hubs and shall have blades constructed of high strength alloy steel having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi. All wheels shall be "true" lined, statically and dynamically balanced on precision electronic balancers. Each wheel shall be designed for critical speeds of at least 1.25 times the maximum class speed.

2.2.8.2.4. All sizes are to have shafts of solid AISIC-1040,

or C-1045 hot rolled steel accurately turned, ground, polished, and ring gauged for accuracy. Close tolerances are to be maintained where the shaft makes contact with the bearings. All shafts must be dial indicated for straightness after the keyways are cut. Shaft diameters shall have first critical speed at least 1.35 times the maximum class speed.

2.2.8.2.5. All fans are to have heavy duty, grease

lubricated, precision anti-friction ball or roller, self-aligning, pillow block type bearings. Bearings are to be selected for minimum average bearing life (AFBMA L-50) in excess of 200,000 hours when operating at maximum cataloged class conditions. All bearings shall be equipped with re-greaseable zerk fittings and where necessary, extended lube lines for easy access for re-lubrication. All fans with bearings larger than 2-3/16" shall have double row spherical split-housed roller bearings, Dodge SAF-XT.



2.2.8.2.6. Each fan component shall be thoroughly degreased and deburred before the application of a rust-preventative primer. After complete assembly, a second coat of primer shall be applied to the complete assembly. Plenum fans shall be furnished with removable framed screen enclosure around fan wheels and with belt guards per OSHA Requirements. Guards shall have tachometer openings at fan and motor shafts.

2.2.8.2.7. The fan manufacturer must furnish published

performance curves and such data is to be based on tests in accordance with current AMCA standards and in an AMCA approved laboratory. Plenum fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal, for air and sound.

2.2.8.2.8. Fans shall be provided with removable

protective screens.

2.2.9. Motors:

2.2.9.1. Provide motors of a size adequate to drive the equipment but in no case less than the size shown or specified. If a motor larger than that specified is required, the Contractor shall bear the expense of changes in variable frequency drives, foundations, support, wire and conduit connections, circuit protective devices, or other affected elements of the system. Each motor shall have sufficient capacity to start and operate the machine it drives without exceeding the motor nameplate rating at the speed specified or at the load which may be obtained by the drive actually provided. Rate motor for continuous duty at 115 percent of rated capacity; base temperature rise on an ambient temperature of 40 degrees centigrade. Motors for use with variable frequency controllers shall be designed to withstand a rise time of 0.10 microseconds and a peak voltage of 1600 per NEMA MG1 Section 31.40.4.2.

2.2.9.2. Motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be 3 phase, Class B, general

purpose, squirrel cage, open type, high efficiency, induction motors. The rated nominal full load efficiency shall be in accordance with the following schedule when tested in accordance with NEMA test standards when wound for 208 or 480 volts, 60 Hertz, alternating current.

2.2.9.3. Minimum Motor Efficiencies at Nominal Speed and Rated

Load HP Efficiency

10 89.5 15 91.0



2.2.9.4. Unless otherwise indicated each motor (5 HP or larger) or motor driven equipment (5 HP or larger) shall have a composite power factor (PF) rating of a minimum of 90% when the motor is operating at the design duty defined on the drawings. Power factor correction devices shall be provided to meet the stated criteria. Power factor correction devices shall not be installed on motors served by variable frequency drives.

2.2.9.5. Devices (such as: capacitors) or equipment (such as: solid

state power factor controllers) when required for power factor correction shall be provided with the motors or item or motor driven equipment. The device shall be mounted and wired to the motor by the unit manufacturer.

2.2.9.5.1. For a motor or motor driven equipment requiring

other than across-the-line starting PF correcting capacitors (or other equipment) shall be connected to motor terminals via a contactor (controller) with a 120 VAC coil. The 120 VAC coil shall be energized via an auxiliary contact on the contactor (controller) used to establish the "run" operating mode for the motor or motor driven equipment.

2.2.9.6. All motors for use with variable frequency controllers shall

include a maintenance free, circumferential, conductive micro fiber bearing protection ring to discharge shaft currents to ground. Bearing protection rings shall be Aegis, model SGR, or approved equal. Bearing protection shall be installed and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.2.10. Vibration Isolation:

2.2.10.1. General:

2.2.10.1.1. Mechanical equipment and associated piping

and ductwork shall be mounted on vibration isolators as specified and required to minimize transmission of vibrations and structure-borne noise to building structure or spaces.

2.2.10.1.2. Select vibration isolating units for the lowest

operating speed of equipment so designed that natural frequency of equipment and base mass is not less than 1.5 times the lowest operating frequency of the moving equipment but not a multiple or harmonic of the base frequency. Furnish vibration isolation producing a uniform loading and deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed, and be stable during starting and stopping of equipment without excessive traverse and eccentric movement of equipment.



2.2.10.1.3. The installed vibration isolation system for each

floor or ceiling mounted item of equipment shall have a maximum lateral motion under equipment start up and shut down conditions of 1/4". Motions in excess shall be restrained by approved spring type mountings.

2.2.10.1.4. All electrical connections, drain connections,

etc., made to equipment which rests on vibration isolators, shall be sufficiently flexible to permit the equipment to be properly isolated.

2.2.10.1.5. The type of isolation, base, and minimum static

deflection shall be as required for each specific equipment application, but no case less than that specified herein when supported on a solid concrete structural slab having a thickness of not less than 4". If vibration isolators with a deflection greater than the minimum specified are required to meet the noise criteria for the adjacent spaces, suitable isolation systems shall be submitted. Should vibration isolators installed for the equipment prove inadequate to prevent transmission of equipment vibrations to the building structure or limit equipment vibration originated noises in the building spaces to acceptable levels, the isolators shall be replaced with units having the largest deflection that can be practicably installed.

2.2.10.1.6. Spring and combination rail and spring isolation

supports where designated in the schedule are indicated for equipment structurally built or supported on a rigid structural steel frame suitable for these types of isolation. Where these types of isolation are not suitable for the equipment construction or operation, the equipment shall be mounted on a structural steel base as herein specified.

2.2.10.1.7. Each electric motor shall be mounted on the same foundation as the driven machine.

2.2.10.2. Vibration Isolation Equipment:

2.2.10.2.1. All isolation equipment shall be Mason

Industries, Vibration Eliminator, or Korfund equal to the following Mason Industries products:



2.2.10.2.1.1 Type II Mounting - Stable Springs. Mason Type SLF.

2.2.10.3. Application of Isolation Equipment:

2.2.10.3.1. Item Type Deflection

Centrifugal Fans: Floor Mounted II 1.50"

Schedule: RPM & up 500 & up 1.75" 385-499 2.50" 300-374 2.75" 225-299 3.75" 175-224 4.75”

2.2.11. Air Measuring Devices:

2.2.11.1. Devices shall be manufactured by Ebtron Gold Series

compatible with the variable air volume (VAV) system sequences as specified, or as indicated on the contract documents, or approved equal. Flow station transmitters shall be field selectable, fuse protected and isolated 0-10 VDC and 4-20 MA (4 wire) signal. System accuracy shall be within 3% of reading.

2.2.11.2. Sensor housings shall be mounted in an extruded, gold

anodized, 6063 aluminum tube probe assembly. 2.2.11.3. Each station shall be installed with minimum upstream and

downstream clearances in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instruction.

2.2.11.4. Air measuring devices installed at fan inlets shall be equal to

Ebtron GTX-116F. 2.2.11.5. Transmitters shall be Ebtron microprocessor based with LED

display.

2.2.12. Coils:

2.2.12.1. Cooling coils shall be of the sizes and capacities as scheduled on the drawings. All coils shall be ARI rated in accordance with standard 410.72.

2.2.12.2. All pipe connections to the coil headers shall be constructed of the same materials. For copper headers, provide a brass flange.



2.2.12.3. Chilled and hot water coils shall have tubes constructed of copper tubing, minimum 5/8 inch O.D. and shall have 0.025 inch minimum wall thickness. Fins shall be aluminum, plate fin type, and shall be spaced not closer than 10 per inch. Fins shall be expanded on tubing to form a permanent mechanical bond. Tube headers shall be brass, bronze, or copper with air vent and drain tappings.

2.2.12.4. Each coil section shall be mounted in a dieformed minimum 16

gauge, 304 stainless steel casing. 2.2.12.5. Provide a 22 gauge, 304 stainless steel drain pan under each coil

section connected to a copper or stainless steel downspout piped to drain. Seams shall be welded or brazed. Pans shall be as detailed. Condensate pans can be recessed into floor if required for height. Condensate pans shall be fully insulated with vapor barrier from beneath.

2.2.12.6. Coils shall be hydrostatically tested at 315 psig after final

assembly and shall be guaranteed for 200 psig working pressure. 2.2.12.7. Each coil section shall be arranged for bolting to other sections.

Each coil section shall be mounted in a die formed minimum 16 gauge, 304 stainless steel casing.

2.2.12.8. Each coil section shall be individually supported by stainless steel

channels to enable removal of individual sections without disruption to remaining sections.

2.2.12.9. All coil safing shall be minimum 22 gauge type 304 stainless steel. 2.2.12.10. Coil shall be same end connection and shall be circuited to

achieve the pressure drops scheduled. 2.2.12.11. Hot water heating coils shall be constructed as described for

cooling coils, with stainless steel casings. Coils shall be supported in the vertical with aluminum or stainless steel angle (minimum 2 x 2 x 1/4) and bolted with stainless steel bolts.

2.2.12.12. All coils shall be covered at the factory with plywood or similar

material during construction to protect the coil fin surface from damage.

2.2.12.13. The coil design shall allow for one end of the tubes to be free

floating to allow for expansion.

2.2.12.14. Complete coils shall be tested to 315 psig under water and shall be guaranteed for 250 psig working pressure.

2.2.12.15. Coils shall be individually supported by a stainless steel rack

system. This rack shall allow any one (1) coil to be removed through the unit casing without disturbing any other coil.

2.2.12.16. Coil piping connections shall be provided with a rubber gasket at

the casing penetration.



2.2.13. Steam Grid Humidifiers – Multiple Tubes

2.2.13.1. The humidifiers shall be of the direct discharge type, using steam

from existing steam lines or boilers to be injected into the air plenums for humidification.

2.2.13.2. Each humidifier shall consist of multiple, vertical steam discharge

pipes, supported on horizontal header manifolds, spaced to provide the optimum of steam to air contact while minimizing pressure drop. Each humidifier shall be sized to nominally match the air plenum width and height for maximum contact of the discharging steam to the air passing around the vertical steam discharge pipes.

2.2.13.3. The vertical steam discharge pipes shall be constructed of all 316

stainless steel, each having a full-length, inverted slot on each side, for steam discharge at 100% air to steam contact.

2.2.13.4. A full-length stainless steel fishbone shaped baffle shall be used

inside the vertical discharge pipe to wick condensate away from the discharge slots and back to the center of the pipe for re-evaporation.

2.2.13.5. The feeder manifolds shall be constructed of all 316 stainless

steel, sized to move the steam in a specific mass-flow speed range, for maximum condensate separation. Final condensate separation shall occur inside the feeder manifolds, after the control valve, with the dried steam then injected directly into the vertical discharge pipes.

2.2.13.6. The vertical steam discharge pipes and horizontal feeder

manifolds shall be coated with a thin, non-toxic insulative coating capable of reducing surface temperature to no more than 120°F during operation, to reduce condensate losses and heat gain to the air stream. The insulative coating shall have an insulating value at 30 mils equal to 8" of R-40 foam. The insulative coating shall have a flame spread and smoke developed rating of 5 under ASTM E-84 with a cross-hatch adhesion of 100% under ASTM D-3359, acceptable for use in air ducts.

2.2.13.7. The steam humidifier shall be designed with slip fittings for easy

assembly and (with the exception of the traps, strainer, valve and actuator) shall be designed for zero maintenance, having no plastic nozzles, collars, o-rings or gaskets. Manufacturer shall be responsible for any maintenance costs (not resulting from mishandling or misuse) required on the distribution manifolds for a period of 5 years.

2.2.13.8. Each humidifier shall be controlled by a modulating DDC signal

from the BAS system.



2.2.13.9. Each humidifier shall be supplied with an electronic actuated linear discharge plug-type steam control valve, sized for the required capacity and steam pressure.

2.2.13.10. Each humidifier shall be supplied with all necessary steam

specialty items including strainer, traps, and airflow proving device as required by the manufacturer.

2.2.13.11. Humidifier shall be Carel Model DSB/T Ultimate Steam or

approved equal by DRI-Steem. Capacities shall be as scheduled on drawings.

2.2.15. Air Filters:

2.2.15.1. General:

2.2.15.1.1. Provide as scheduled complete filter assemblies which shall include filter frames, filter media, and Dwyer magnehelic air filter gauge complete with static pressure tips, tubing and accessories. Mount the gauge on the exterior of the unit casing.

2.2.15.1.2. Capacities, efficiencies, frame type, and number

of filters within bank shall be scheduled. Provide one complete set of media to be installed and turned over to owner at acceptance. If required for start-up and prolonged testing, provide additional pre-filters. Filters, frames, and housings shall be as manufactured by CamFarr, Flanders, Purolator, or approved equal by American Air Filter.

2.2.15.2. Universal Filter Holding Frames: (Type A)

2.2.15.2.1. Filter holding frames shall be constructed of 16

gauge aluminum. They shall be equipped with polyurethane foam gaskets, fasteners and filter centering dimples. The four sealing flange corners shall be flush mitered and secured in order to form a uniform sealing and gasketing surface. The holding frame shall be designed to accommodate standard size filters with the application of the appropriate type fastener.

2.2.15.2.2. The frames shall be installed, bolted together, to

form a rigid filter assembly. The unit manufacturer shall install frames to enable proper service as indicated on the documents. In arrangements that are greater than four filters high, the unit manufacturer shall provide additional angle aluminum support.

2.2.15.3. HEPA Holding Frames (Type B)



2.2.15.3.1. Filter holding frames shall be constructed of 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel. They shall be equipped with fasteners and filter centering dimples. The frames shall have welded seams, ground and finished for smooth sealing surface.

2.2.15.3.2. Where scheduled for built-up unit casings the

frames shall be installed, bolted together, to form a rigid filter assembly. The unit manufacturer shall install frame to enable proper service as indicated on the documents. In arrangements that are greater than four filters high, the contractor shall provide additional angle aluminum support.

2.2.15.4. Prefilters: (Type A)

2.2.15.4.1. Filters shall be 2" Farr 30/30, or approved equal,

medium efficiency, pleated, disposable type. Each filter shall consist of a non-woven cotton fabric media, media support grid and enclosing frame. The filter shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories as Class II.

2.2.15.4.2. The filter media shall have an average efficiency

of 25-30% on ASHRAE Test Standard 52.76. It shall have an average arrestance of 90-92% in accordance with that test standard.

2.2.15.4.3. The effective filter media shall be not less than

4.6 square feet of media per 1.0 square foot of filter face area and shall contain not less than 15 pleats per linear foot. Initial resistance at 500 fpm approach velocity shall not exceed 0.28" w.g. The media support shall be a welded wire grid with an effective open area of not less than 96%. The media support grid shall be formed in such a manner that is effects a radial pleat design, allowing total use of filter media.

2.2.15.4.4. The enclosing frame shall be constructed of a

rigid, heavy-duty high wet-strength beverage board, with diagonal support members bonded to the air entering and air exit side of each pleat, to ensure pleat stability. The inside periphery of the enclosing frame shall be bonded to the filter pack, thus, eliminating the possibility of air bypass.

2.2.15.5. Intermediate and Final Filters: (Type B)(Synthetic/

Hydrophobic)

2.2.15.5.1. Filters shall be 12" Farr, Riga Flo 65 or 95 Flanders Rigid Pak, AAF, or approved equal by Purulator. Filters shall consist of high performance, deep pleated, totally rigid and



disposable type. Each filter shall consists of high density synthetic media, media support grid, contour stabilizers, diagonal support bracing and enclosing frame.

2.2.15.5.2. The enclosing frame shall be constructed of

galvanized steel assembled in such a manner that a rigid and durable enclosure for the filter pack is effected. The media pack shall be mechanically and chemically bonded to the inside periphery of the enclosing frame, thus eliminating the possibility of air bypass. The enclosing frame shall be equipped with galvanized steel protective diagonal support braces on both the air entering and exiting sides of the filters. The diagonal support braces shall be mechanically fastened to each contour stabilizer.

2.2.15.5.3. The filters shall have a minimum average

efficiency as scheduled in accordance with ASHRAE Standard (52-76) test method. The filters shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as Class II.

2.2.16. Dampers (Note: All dampers on vertical casing walls to be mounted

with blades in the horizontal direction):

2.2.16.1. Dampers shall be extruded aluminum, low leakage, with airfoil blades. Each blade shall have aluminum caps press fit to blade ends. Frames shall be 4” x 1” x 1/8” extruded aluminum hat channel with hat mounting flanges on both sides of the frame. Each corner shall be reinforced with two die-formed internal braces. Blade edge and frame seals shall be silicone double edge design and shall be locked in extruded blade slots without use of cement. Bearings shall be composed of a celcon inner bearing fixed to a 7/16” aluminum hexagon blade pin rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in frame. There shall not be any metal to metal or metal to plastic contact. Axles shall be square or hexagonal to provide positive connection to blades and linkage. Leakage through a representative 48” x 48” damper at 4” W.G. pressure differential shall not exceed 6.2 cfm per square foot.

2.2.16.2. Control dampers shall be aluminum construction – Tamco

Series 1500 or Ruskin Model CD 50.

2.2.16.3. Isolation dampers (high pressure fan isolation applications) aluminum construction Tamco Series 1500 or Ruskin Model CD 102.

2.2.17. Operators for Dampers:

2.2.17.1. Operators for dampers shall be products manufactured by

Johnson Controls and provided by air handling unit



manufacturer to be installed in the factory.

2.2.18. Louvers:

2.2.18.1. Stationary extruded aluminum louvers shall be Arrow Model EA-425-DD, drainable, for inlet and Model EA-405-P for relief or exhaust or approved equal by Pottorff. Frames shall be 4" deep with 45� blades, in 12 gauge thickness. Head, sills and jambs to be one piece extruded structural members in 606BT5 alloy. Where indicated on the plans, acoustical louvers shall be Model AC-482-6. Frames shall be 12” deep with 45o blades, in 12 gauge thickness. The underside of all blades shall be filled with glass fiber insulation with a perforated aluminum facing. All fastenings shall be either stainless steel or aluminum. Provide 1/2" square mesh aluminum bird screen in extruded aluminum frame attached to interior of louvers with stainless steel screws. Louvers shall be qualified to the AMCA certified ratings program and tested in accordance with AMCA 500.

2.2.19. Sound Attenuators:

2.2.19.1. Provide Industrial Acoustics Company, Vibro-Acoustics, Semco,

Dynasonics, McGill AirFlow, or Rink sound attenuators as scheduled on the drawings and herein specified. Outer casings of attenuators shall be made of 22 gauge galvanized steel. Seams shall be lock formed and mastic filled. Sound attenuators to be installed in the supply airstream downstream of the final filters shall be “clean type”.

2.2.19.2. Interior partitions for rectangular attenuators shall be made of 24 gauge galvanized perforated steel. Filler material shall be of inorganic mineral or glass fiber of a density sufficient to obtain the specified acoustic performance and packed under not less than 5% compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof. Combustion rating for the attenuator acoustic fill shall be not less than the following, when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84, NFPA Standard 255 or U.L. No. 723:

Flamespread classification 20 Smoke development rating 20 Fuel contributed 15

2.2.19.3. Provide airtight construction by use of a duct sealing compound as hereinbefore specified. Attenuator shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8" W.G. inside to outside of casing.

2.2.19.4. Attenuator net insertion loss data, self generated noise, and

pressure drop shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory. All tests shall be in accordance with ASTM E-377 and must be furnished as part of the manufacturer's printed instructions and in no case with less than the upstream and downstream duct runs indicated.



2.2.20.

2.2.21. Factory Painting:

2.2.21.1. The exterior surface of the air-handling unit shall be painted with a

color as selected by the Architect or Owner. Color samples shall be submitted to the Architect or Owner for approval.

2.2.21.2. Painted surfaces shall be guaranteed for ten years against color

fading, splitting, and pealing. Manufacturer shall repair any defects as identified by the Owner as a result of product failure.

2.2.21.3. All surfaces must include the following preparation prior to

painting:

2.2.21.3.1. All forms of surface contamination, especially oil and moisture, must be eliminated.

2.2.21.3.2. Remove all weld spatter and slivers. 2.2.21.3.3. Spent abrasive must be removed from the surfaces. 2.2.21.3.4. Solvent clean all surfaces in accordance with SSPC-

SP-1. 2.2.21.3.5. Follow all applicable safety standards.

2.2.21.4. All surfaces must be prepared using a wash primer to provide an

acid etched surface of at least 1 mil thickness. 2.2.21.5. Base coating shall be acrylic enamel or polyurethane epoxy

applied at a rate of 4-5 mil thickness. 2.2.21.6. The installing contractor shall repair any damage to the painted

surface occurring during the installation. The manufacturer shall coordinate this effort and supply the necessary touch-up paint and instruction of application.

2.2.22. Lighting System:

2.2.22.1. Unit shall be provided with a complete factory installed lighting

system. Vapor-tight, gasketed fluorescent fixtures with T-8 lamps and low temperature ballasts shall be provided and wired to a local switch.

2.2.22.2. Lighting system shall be wired to a single 115V connection point

within a junction box and mounted on the inside of the unit. All wiring shall be 600 volt rated type MTW/THWN stranded copper, enclosed in EMT or Liquidtite (max 3') conduit. All junction bases shall be U.L. approved and gasketed.

2.2.21. Modular UV Lamping System:



2.2.21.1. UVC lamp and fixture shall be factory-assembled and tested. The system shall consist of a housing, reflector, power source, emitter sockets and emitter tube. All components shall be constructed to withstand typical HVAC environments and shall be UL listed under UL Standard 1995.

2.2.21.2. Housing shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel and shall

be equipped with electrical connectors on both ends to facilitate simple fixture to fixture plug-in (coupling) for A/C power. Fixtures shall be used as built-up or as side access, as required or as shown in the plans. Each fixture shall incorporate all components into one integral assembly that maximizes serviceability. Fixtures shall be designed to be mounted anywhere in an HVAC system or as shown on the plans.

2.2.21.3. Power source shall be electronic, high efficiency 120V 1 phase /

60 Hz and shall be designed to maximum radiance and reliability at temperatures of 45-170°F. Power source shall include RF and EMI suppression.

2.2.21.4. Sockets shall be medium bi-pin, single click safety, twist lock type

and shall be constructed of a UVC-resistant polycarbonate. 2.2.21.5. Emitter shall be high-output, hot cathode, T5 diameter, medium bi-

pin type that produced UVGI of 254 nm. Total output per one inch arc length shall not be less that 10 MW cm2 at one meter in a 400 feet per minute air stream of 45°F. Each tube shall produce the specified output at airflow velocities up to 1000 fpm and air temperature of 55-170°F.

2.2.21.6. System shall be provided with a safety door switch to turn off lights

when access door is opened, and J-box and stationary radiometer. 2.2.21.7. Reflector shall be constructed of high spectral finished aluminum

alloy with minimum 85% reflectance of 254 nm UVC energy.

2.2.21.8. UVC System shall be American Ultraviolet or Sterile Aire, model DE.

2.2.22. Raceway:

2.2.22.1. General: Provide raceway and fittings of the types, grades, sizes

and weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type of service shown. Where types and grade are not indicated, provide proper selection to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable provisions of NEC for raceway.

2.2.22.2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): EMT shall be steel conforming to

ANSI C80.3 UL 797, and Federal Specifications WW-C-563A. 2.2.22.3. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LT/FMC): LT/FMC shall be

steel constructed of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked and double wrapped metal conforming to UL 360, UL 1660, and Federal Specifications WW-C-566, with a liquid-tight jacket of



flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conforming to NEMA Standard RN1.

2.2.22.4. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall conform to

Federal Specifications WW-C-563, UL 514B, and ANSI C80, Type 2 (concrete tight).

2.2.22.5. Fittings for liquid-tight flexible metal conduit (LT/FMC) shall

conform to Federal Specification W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G.

2.2.23. Low Voltage Conductors: (600 volts and less)

2.2.23.1. All wire conductors shall be copper (unless otherwise indicated)

with insulation rated for at least 600 V, conforming to UL 486A. Bare conductor size shall be as defined by standard American Wire Gage (AWG) numbers and shall not be smaller than #12 unless otherwise indicated. Copper conductors shall have a conductivity of at least 98%. Insulation shall be dual rated NEC type THHN-THWN. Wire shall be manufactured by: Triangle/Plastic Wire and Cable _PWC) Co., Pirelli, Phelps Dodge, General Cable, or Southwire.

2.2.23.2. Fittings for termination or splicing stranded wire shall be solder-

less and designed for standard wire, such as screw pressure fittings or compression (indent) type fittings, as manufactured by Thomas and Betts, Burndy, or Square D.

2.2.23.3. Provide VFD power cable for wiring between motors and unit

mounted variable frequency controllers. The VFD power cable shall have Class B soft drawn bare copper conductors, and cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene (XLPE) insulation, three symmetrical grounding conductors, a continuous welded aluminum sheath, and an overall PVC jacket. VFD cable shall be Okonite C-L-X or approved equal. Fittings for VFD cable shall be “Per fit” manufactured by American Connectors, Crouse-Hinds “TMC”, or approved equal.

2.2.24. Unit Testing and Inspection:

2.2.24.1. The complete unit shall be factory run tested as an assembly to

insure structural integrity and design suitability under simulated operating conditions. The factory run test shall be conducted to examine unit operation and minimum vibration levels as specified. Perform pressure tests on water coils and systems.

2.2.24.2. With fan assembly mounted on spring isolators and running at

design RPM, a full spectrum vibration analysis is to be recorded for each plane (horizontal, vertical, and axial) at each fan and motor bearing. In accordance with AMCA 204-96, fan assembly vibration levels as tested shall not exceed 0.2 in/sec peak velocity. Any fan, motor, drive and base assembly vibration shall be brought to within manufacturer's specified levels. Test results shall be included in the final O&M manual.



2.2.24.3. An air pressure test with fan(s) operating to assure tight housing

construction and integrity. The positive pressure side of the unit casing shall be pressurized to the full shutoff head capacity of the supply fan(s) and shall be inspected for leaks and distortion. The negative pressure side shall be tested at 120% of design negative pressure. Visible distortion shall be corrected and leakage detected shall be stopped by sealing. Leakage shall be 1/2% or less, and panel deflection shall be measured. Total deflection shall not be greater than 1/200th of the span. Leak testing shall be in accordance with SMACNA, HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

2.2.24.4. Energize unit electrical devices and dampers to insure operational

integrity prior to unit shipment. Replace non-functional items and certify, in writing, that such replacement have been undertaken and is in proper operational order. Submit unit housing panel acoustical performance and physical properties test data prior to shipment.

2.2.24.5. The equipment manufacturer shall warrant parts and workmanship

for three years from the date of equipment start up. During this warranty period, the manufacturer will provide replacement parts as required to return the unit to operation. Warranty covers all parts except consumable items. A copy of the warranty shall be furnished after the unit is shipped.

2.2.24.6. The coils shall be covered with plywood to protect them from

damage during unit fabrication and shipment. Coils with damaged fins shall be rejected.

2.2.24.7. Open ends of the unit shall be covered with plastic to protect

internal components during shipment. Units shipped between November and March shall be totally wrapped.

2.2.24.8. The unit manufacturer shall provide a factory visit for the

owner and one representative from the engineer’s office to witness the unit testing and for final inspection prior to shipment. The costs for site visit including transportation shall be included.

2.12. Variable Torque AC Variable Speed Controller: Pulse Width Modulation Type

2.12.1. AC Adjustable Frequency Controllers shall be provided for fans as

scheduled on the plans. The adjustable frequency controller (AFC) shall convert three phase 60 Hertz utility power to adjustable voltage and frequency, three phase, AC power for stepless motor control from 10% to 110% of base speed. The AFC shall be as manufactured by ABB, GE, Yaskawa, Danfoss, SSD, or Toshiba.

2.12.2. The AFC shall be a voltage source type with a PWM output utilizing IGBT

transistor semi-conductors. The base VFD shall be U.L. Listed for 100 KAIC without the need for input fuses.



2.12.3. The VFD shall meet EMI/RFI Product Standard EN61800-3 for First Environment Restricted Level.

2.12.3.1. Qualifications shall include International Building Code 2006.

2.12.4. The AFC together with all options and modifications shall be mounted within

a standard NEMA 1 enclosure suitable for continuous operation at an ambient temperature of 0o to 40o C with relative humidity to 95% non condensing. All high voltage components within the enclosure shall be isolated with steel covers. The complete unit shall carry UL or ETL approval.

2.12.5. Circuits shall provide DV/DT and DI/DT protection for semi-conductors. AFC

shall be capable of starting into a rotating load without delay. Protective circuits shall cause instantaneous trip (IET) should any of the following faults occur:

2.12.5.1. 110% of controller maximum sine wave current rating is exceeded. 2.12.5.2. Output phase to phase and phase to ground short circuit condition.

2.12.5.3. High input line voltage.

2.12.5.4. Low input line voltage.

2.12.5.5. Loss of input phase.

2.12.5.6. External fault. This protective circuit shall permit, by means of the

terminal strip, wiring of remote NC safety contacts such as high static, firestat, etc., to de-energize the AFC.

2.12.6. The following adjustments shall be available in the controller and retained in

non-volatile memory:

2.12.6.1. Maximum frequency (15 to 400 hz) factory set at 60 hz. 2.12.6.2. Minimum frequency (3 to 60 hz) factory set at 6 hz.

2.12.6.3. Acceleration (.1 to 360 seconds) factory set at 20 seconds.

2.12.6.4. Deceleration (.1 to 360 seconds) factory set at 20 seconds.

2.12.6.5. Volts/Hertz ratio factory set for 460V at 60 hz.

2.12.6.6. Voltage offset or boost factory set at 100% torque.

2.12.6.7. Current limit (50% to 110% sine wave current rating) factory set at

100% current.

2.12.7. The AFC shall have the following basic features:

2.12.7.1. Door mounted operator controls consisting of membrane command center which will enable manual hand-off-auto and speed control, local/remote indication and manual/or automatic speed control selection. In addition, the command center will



serve as a means to configure controller parameters such as minimum speed, maximum speed, acceleration and deceleration times, volts/hz ratio, and torque boost.

2.12.7.2. Main input disconnect to provide a possible disconnect of all

phases of the incoming AC line to both the controller and the bypass circuitry. This disconnect shall be mounted inside the controller enclosure and have through-the-door interlocking toggle with provisions for padlocking.

2.12.7.3. Input fuses, or circuit breaker overcurrent protective device.

2.12.7.4. Electronic motor overload relay.

2.12.7.5. Automatic restart after power outage, drive fault or external fault,

with drive in its automatic mode. The circuit shall enable the user to select up to five (5) restart attempts. The reset time between fault occurrences shall also be selectable. All settings shall be via the membrane command center.

2.12.7.6. Door-mounted LED display for digital indication of:

2.12.7.6.1. Frequency output. 2.12.7.6.2. Voltage output.

2.12.7.6.3. Current output.

2.12.7.6.4. First fault indication.

2.12.7.7. Relay for remote indication of drive fault and motor running. 2.12.7.8. Smoke purge circuit to enable acceptance from a contact closure

from the building control and monitoring system (BCMS), that will start the controller regardless of mode and operate the motor at a preset adjustable speed.

2.12.7.9. A minimum of two critical frequency avoidance bands, field

programmable via the membrane command center. Each critical frequency avoidance band shall have a bandwidth adjustable via the keypad of up to 10 Hz.

2.12.7.10. The drive shall be equipped with a direct interface device utilized

to provide communication to the building BCMS system, Johnson Controls, and a USB port for communication with a PC.

2.12.7.11. Isolated process follower to enable VFC to follow a 4-20 MADC or

0-10VDC grounded or ungrounded signal.

2.12.7.12. The AFC shall have the capability to ride through power dips or outages up to 16.66 milliseconds without a controller trip.



2.12.7.13. AC line reactor 5% impedance to minimize line surges, line notching, and voltage distortions, or DC bus choke with 5% impedance (equivalent).

2.12.7.14. Manual bypass-to-line with magnetic contactors to transfer motor

from the VFC to line speed operation on utility supplied input power while the motor is at any speed. Two motor contactors, electrically interlocked shall be utilized, one contactor between the controller output and the motor, and the other between the by pass power line and the motor, providing across the line starting.

2.12.7.15. Motor protection per the NEC shall be provided in both the

"controller" mode and the "bypass" mode by a motor overload relay. The 24 volt DC relay control logic, allowing common start/stop commands in the "controller" mode and the "bypass" mode shall also be included within the enclosure.

2.12.7.16. In addition to the door interlocked, main power input disconnect

providing positive shutdown of all power to both the bypass circuitry and the VFC. The bypass circuit shall provide a service switch to safely trouble shoot and test the controller, both energized and de-energized, while operating the bypass mode. Terminal connectors for over pressurization switches shall be provided, to protect the ductwork in the bypass mode.

2.12.8. Termination points shall be provided for final wiring connections by Division

16. Provide means of disconnect for each pump or fan on enclosure.

2.12.9. The VFC and all components shall be supplied within a single NEMA 1 enclosure, shall be UL or ETL listed as a single unit.

2.12.10. The manufacturer shall have service and parts suppliers located within a two

hour driving distance. Start-up service shall be provided by a factory authorized technician.

2.12.11. The VFC shall carry a full parts and labor warranty for two years from date of

start-up.

2.12.12. Provide schematic single line diagrams of the VFC showing all power and control circuits as part of the shop drawing submittal.

2. EXECUTION

3.1. General:

3.1.1. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated. Provide all required utilities, wiring, and accessories indicated or required. Properly test each piece of equipment to assure proper operation and demonstrate same to Owner's designated representative. Remove and replace at no expense to the Owner any item of equipment deemed by the Architect to be unsatisfactory.



3.1.2. Provide start-up and adjustments for all systems and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations using personnel who are factory trained and certified by factory as factory authorized personnel.



that connections to piping, ductwork, and electrical systems are complete. 3.2.3. Verify proper rotation and proper thermal-overload. 3.2.4. Provide lubrication of all components with factory-recommended lubricants. 3.2.5. Verify operating safeties are in place, piped or discharging to a safe location


3.2.5.1. ATC-high limit pressure switches, low temperature protection, high temperature devices.

3.2.5.2. Electrical – Overloads installed, disconnects accessible,

equipment covers and guards installed. 3.2.5.3. Provide documentation of all pressure testing. 3.2.5.4. Protect all equipment/systems operating during temporary or start-

up operation. Provide startup filtration (water/air), strainers (water) to protect equipment.

3.2.5.5. Clean air handling unit interiors and install clean filters. 3.2.5.6. Check alignment of pumps and fan drives. Perform laser

alignment of all flexibly coupled pumps and dynamic balance of fans. Submit final reports with O&M manuals.



END OF SECTION


CHILLERS 15640- 1

SECTION 15640 – CHILLERS 1. GENERAL



1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section includes all air cooled chillers as indicated on the drawings

and described herein.

1.2.2. Unless noted otherwise, this section includes all equipment for the following systems:

Scroll Compressor Air Cooled Chiller

1.2.3. The requirements of Section 15010 and 15050 shall apply to the work

specified under this section. 1.2.4. Vibration isolation for mechanical equipment specified under this

section shall be provided under Section 15050.

1.3. Commissioning:


1.4. Shop Drawings:



2.1. Outdoor Packaged Air-Cooled Chiller

System Description: Chiller shall incorporate Scroll type compressors and consist of multiple independent refrigerant circuits. Each refrigerant circuit shall consist of an individual compressor set, common dual circuit evaporator, dual circuited condenser, electronic expansion valves, liquid line solenoid valves, filter driers, fin and tube condenser, and control system. Each circuit shall be constructed to be independent of other circuits from a refrigeration and electrical stand-point. The multi-circuit chiller must be able to produce chilled water even in the event of a failure of one or more refrigerant circuits. Chiller shall be manufactured by Airstack or approved equal.

2.1.1. General

2.1.1.1. Chiller Modules shall be ETL listed in accordance with UL Standard 1995, CSA certified per Standard C22.2#236.


CHILLERS 15640- 2

2.1.1.2. Chiller modules shall be AHRI certified.

2.1.1.3. Chiller shall be designed to operate using R-410A Refrigerant.

2.1.1.4. Chiller shall be designed for parallel evaporator water flow.

2.1.1.5. The liquid to be chilled will be water containing corrosion inhibitors and antifreeze solution as required. 2.1.1.6. Chiller shall be designed to operate using 480 volt, 3 phase,

60 Hz electrical power supply.

2.1.1.7. Modules shall ship wired and charged with refrigerant. All modules shall be factory run tested prior to shipment on an AHRI certified or 3rd party verified test stand.

2.1.1.8. Compressors, heat exchangers, condenser fans, piping and controls shall be mounted on a heavy gauge, powder coated

steel frame. Electrical controls, contactors, and relays for each module shall be mounted within that module. Module shall be provided within a steel enclosure suitable for outdoor use. Exposed steel surfaces shall be provided with a powder coat paint finish.

2.1.2. Chilled Water Mains: Each module shall include supply and return mains for

chilled water. Cut grooved end connections are provided for interconnection to four inch standard (4.5” outside diameter) piping with grooved type couplings. Rolled grooved shall be unacceptable.

2.1.3. Evaporators: Each evaporator shall be a brazed plate heat exchanger

constructed of 316 stainless steel; designed, tested, and stamped in accordance with UL 1995 code for 650 psig working pressure. The evaporator heat exchanger shall not be mounted above the compressor, to eliminate the effect of migration of refrigerant to the cold evaporator with consequent liquid slugging on start-up.

2.1.4. Compressor: Each module shall contain two hermetic scroll compressors in

a tandem piping arrangement mounted to the module with rubber-in-shear isolators. Each system also includes high discharge pressure and low suction pressure safety cut-outs. Compressors shall be provided with a factory noise control wrapping or field installed wrapping equal to Kinetics Noise Control KNM-100ALQ.

2.1.5. Condenser Fans: Each module shall contain dual condenser fans for each

refrigerant circuit. These fans shall be multi-blade vane-axial type made of plastic composite material for quiet operation. Fans shall be direct drive at a maximum RPM of 1,150. Fan motors shall all be pressure controlled and suitable for outdoor use.

2.1.6. Central Control System.

2.1.6.1. Scheduling of the various compressors shall be performed


CHILLERS 15640- 3

by a microprocessor based control system (Master Controller). A new lead compressor is selected every 24 hours to assure even distribution of compressor run time.

2.1.6.2. The Master Controller shall monitor and report the following on

each refrigeration system:

a. Discharge Pressure Fault b. Suction Pressure Fault c. Compressor Winding Temperature d. Suction Temperature e. Evaporator Leaving Chilled Water Temp.

2.1.6.3. The Master Controller shall be powered by the chillers single

point power connection and shall monitor and report the following system parameters:

a. Chilled Water Entering and Leaving Temperature b. Discharge Refrigerant Temperature c. Chilled Water Flow

2.1.6.4. An out of tolerance indication from these controls or sensors

shall cause a “fault” indication at the Master Controller and shutdown of that compressor with the transfer of load requirements to the next available compressor. In the case of a System Fault the entire chiller will be shut down. When a fault occurs, the Master Controller shall record conditions at the time of the fault and store the data for recall. This information shall be capable of being recalled through the keypad of the Master Controller and displayed on the Master Controller’s 2 line by 40 character back-lit LCD. A history of faults shall be maintained including date and time of day of each fault (up to the last 20 occurrences).

2.1.6.5. Individual monitoring of leaving chilled water temperatures

from each refrigeration system shall be programmed to protect against freeze-up.

2.1.6.6. The control system shall monitor entering and leaving chilled

water temperatures to determine system load and select the number of compressor circuits required to operate. Response times and set points shall be adjustable. The system shall provide for variable time between compressor sequencing and temperature sensing, so as to fine tune the chiller to different existing building conditions.

2.1.7. Chiller shall have external inputs and outputs to be compatible with the

building management system to include Remote Start/Stop capability and Cooling Alarm output

2.1.8. Each refrigerant circuit shall include all refrigerant specialties including a

properly sized refrigerant receiver to provide reliable operation down to 0F Ambient.


CHILLERS 15640- 4

2.1.9. Chiller shall incorporate appropriate refrigerant specialties including a properly sized refrigerant receiver and flooded head pressure control valves for operation to -20F.

2.1.10. Chiller shall be provided with a single point power connection. This will

include pre-engineered wiring for field installation and connection to a factory mounted chiller junction box. Junction box shall include individual fusing for each Module Set and provide a single point of connection to building power.

2.1.11. Safeties, Controls and Operation

2.1.11.1. The chiller safety controls shall be provided (minimum) as

follows:

Low evaporator refrigerant pressure Loss of water flow through the evaporator High condenser refrigerant pressure High compressor motor temperature Low suction gas temperature Low leaving evaporator water temperature

2.1.11.2. Failure of chiller to start or chiller shutdown due to any of the

above safety cutouts shall be enunciated by display of the appropriate diagnostic description at the unit control panel. This annunciation will be in plain English. Alphanumeric codes shall be unacceptable.

2.1.11.3. The chiller shall be furnished with a Master Controller as an

integral portion of the chiller control circuitry to provide the following functions:

Provide automatic chiller shutdown during periods when the load level decreases below the normal operating requirements of the chiller. Upon an increase in load, the chiller shall automatically restart. Provisions for connection to automatically enable the chiller from a remote energy management system. The control panel shall provide alphanumeric display showing all system parameters in the English language with numeric data in English units.

2.1.11.4. Normal Chiller Operation

When chiller is enabled, the factory supplied Master Controller modulates the chiller capacity from minimum to maximum as required by building load. The Chiller control system shall respond to Entering Water Temperature and will have an integral reset based on entering water temperature to provide for efficient operation at part-load conditions.


CHILLERS 15640- 5

2. EXECUTION

3.1. General:

3.1.1. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated. Provide all required utilities, wiring, and accessories indicated or required. Properly test each piece of equipment to assure proper operation and demonstrate same to Owner's designated representative. Remove and replace at no expense to the Owner any item of equipment deemed by the Architect to be unsatisfactory.





that connections to piping and electrical systems are complete. 3.2.3. Verify proper rotation and proper thermal-overload. 3.2.4. Provide lubrication of all components with factory-recommended lubricants. 3.2.5. Verify operating safeties are in place, piped or discharging to a safe location


3.2.5.1. ATC-high limit pressure switches, low temperature protection, high temperature devices.

3.2.5.2. Refrigeration – pressure relief, leakage detection. 3.2.5.3. Electrical – Overloads installed, disconnects accessible,

equipment covers and guards installed. 3.2.5.4. Provide documentation of all pressure testing (piping and pressure

vessels). 3.2.5.5. Protect all equipment/systems operating during temporary or start-


3.2.5.6. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test,

inspect, and adjust chiller components and equipment installation and to perform startup service.



END OF SECTION


AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800 - 1

SECTION 15800 – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1. GENERAL



1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section includes the air distribution system including those devices

distributing the air to the spaces, and those items which collect, filter, control, and convey air.

1.2.2. Fans which are not an integral part of a factory fabricated air handling

unit are included under this section.

1.2.3. Factory fabricated air handling units are excluded from this section.

1.2.4. The requirements of Section 15010, Mechanical and Electrical General Provisions, shall apply to the work specified under this section.

1.2.5. Except for duct pressure tests, all testing and balancing of the air

distribution system shall be performed under Section 15825 of the Specifications.

1.2.6. Where applicable, provide all equipment with UL labels in accordance

with local jurisdictions. Where manufacturer's labels are not available test all equipment as necessary to demonstrate UL compliance to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3. Commissioning:


1.4. Shop Drawings:



2.1. Variable Air Volume Control Units:

2.1.1. Provide low pressure variable air volume control units as indicated on the plans.

2.1.2. Type "VSD" Unit: (Digital)

2.1.2.1. Units shall be Titus, Enviro Tec, Krueger, Nailor, Trane, or

Price, equal to Titus Model DESV-3000, suitable for single



duct variable air volume installation. Capacities shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

2.1.2.2. The unit casing shall be minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel

with a steel bladed damper. All seams shall be factory sealed to prevent leakage.

2.1.2.3. The terminals shall have an approved non-porous EPFI sealed

liner. The liner and insulation must meet the requirements of U.L. 181 and NFPA 90A. The liner must meet bacteriological standards of ASTM C665. Liners made of Tedlar, Mylar, Silane or Alpha-Temp are not acceptable. Insulation shall be 1.5 pound density, 3/8 inch thick with a thermal conductivity of 0.25 BTU-in/hr-ft2. The lining shall be the Titus EPFI sealed Fibre Free lining system or approved equal.

2.1.2.4. The unit inlet shall be equipped with a cross-shaped flow

sensor with amplifying pick-up points connected to central averaging chambers. The sensor shall maintain control accuracy with the inlet duct in any configuration. All pneumatic tubing shall be UL listed, fire retardant (FR) type.

2.1.2.5. Sound ratings shall be tested as power levels 10-12 watts and

shall not exceed values scheduled. The manufacturer shall furnish certified sound power levels for both discharge sound and casing radiated sound, tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 37-72. Sound data based on prior ASHRAE Standards will not be acceptable. The tests shall be conducted in an ARI-ADC approved sound facility. The data shall include the second through sixth octave bands for all unit sizes with multiple inlet static pressures. All attenuation factors shall be clearly defined. Provide additional approved attenuation as required to achieve the scheduled values. Sound power levels shall be submitted for each unit at its scheduled maximum air volume and inlet pressure of 1" w.g.

2.1.2.6. The direct digital controls (DDC) shall be provided by the

automatic temperature control contractor. Controller shall be shipped to terminal unit manufacturer for factory mounting. The terminal unit manufacturer shall mount the electronic damper actuator and velocity flow sensor. Refer to Section 15900 for additional requirements. The damper actuator shall apply at least 40 in-lbs of torque to the damper shaft. Electronic actuators shall be provided by the automatic temperature control contractor.

2.1.2.7. Hot water coil shall be provided with unit where scheduled.

Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Coils shall be designed for minimum working pressure of 150 psig and shall be air tested under water at minimum 250 psig. Coil capacity shall be as scheduled and shall be ARI certified.

2.1.3. Type DQCV: (Return/Exhaust Terminals)(Digital)



2.1.3.1. Units shall be Titus, Enviro Tec, Johnson Controls, Krueger, or Price, equal to Titus Model PQCV. Capacities shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

2.1.3.2. The unit casing shall be minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel

with a steel bladed damper. All seams shall be factory sealed to prevent leakage.

2.1.3.3. The unit inlet shall be furnished with an Ebtron Silver Series

STA Model P Flow Station. The sensor shall maintain control accuracy with the inlet duct in any configuration. Flow Station shall be UL Listed as a complete assembly with field selectable fuse protected and isolated 0-10 VDC and 4-20 MA (4 wire) signal. The flow station shall be installed in the field.

2.1.3.4. Sound ratings shall be tested as power levels 10-12 watts and

shall not exceed values scheduled. The manufacturer shall furnish certified sound power levels for both discharge sound and casing radiated sound, tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 37-72. Sound data based on prior ASHRAE Standards will not be acceptable. The tests shall be conducted in an ARI-ADC approved sound facility. The data shall include the second through sixth octave bands for all unit sizes with multiple inlet static pressures. All attenuation factors shall be clearly defined. Provide additional approved attenuation as required to achieve the scheduled values. Sound power levels shall be submitted for each unit at its scheduled maximum air volume and inlet pressure of 1" w.g.

2.1.3.5. The direct digital controls (DDC) shall be provided by the

automatic temperature control contractor. Controller shall be shipped to terminal unit manufacturer for factory mounting. The terminal unit manufacturer shall mount the electronic damper actuator and velocity flow sensor. Refer to Section 15900 for additional requirements. The damper actuator shall apply at least 40 in-lbs of torque to the damper shaft. Electronic actuators shall be provided by the automatic temperature control contractor.

2.2. Air Devices:

2.2.1. Provide air devices of minimum sizes and quantities indicated and of the

types specified. Contractor shall carefully study the drawings and the field conditions to ascertain the air device requirements as to suitability, location, air capacity, required accessories and finish. Devices shall be selected to provide draft-free air distribution over entire area served and sound rating shall not exceed scheduled NC level. Shop drawings shall indicate NC values.

2.2.2. Provide Titus, Krueger, Anemostat, Donco, or Price air devices in

accordance with the enclosed schedule.

2.2.3. Size of grilles and registers indicated on the drawings for installation in acoustical tile grid systems are nominal size. Devices shall be selected to fit standard ceiling tile space within the suspended grid.



2.2.4. Margins and frames shall be as indicated or directed to suit field conditions. Devices shall have plaster frames when installed in plaster or drywall construction.

2.2.5. Finishes shall be as specified herein. Devices installed in acoustical tile

ceilings shall be white baked enamel finish.

2.2.6. Finish (off-white) of T-bar diffusers shall match specified ceiling grid system. Perimeter T-bars adjacent to Type "A" diffusers shall be provided by the ceiling contractor. All center T-bars shall be supplied with air device.

2.2.7. All devices located in toilet rooms, locker areas and kitchens shall be of

aluminum construction, unless otherwise specified herein.

2.2.8. Paint ductwork behind grilles and registers with flat black enamel so that bright surface of metal cannot be seen. Properly prime galvanized surface prior to painting.

2.2.9. Provide air devices in accordance with the following schedule. Model

number are those of Titus, unless otherwise indicated. Device Type Model Finish and Frame Type Louvered Ceiling Diffuser C TDC #26, Type 3 Supply Register G 300FL #26, Type 1 Laminar Flow Ceiling Diffuser H TLF, TLF-AA #26, Safety Cable Return Register I 350RL/RS #26/SS, Type 1 Frame Exhaust Register N 350FL #26 Laminar Flow Ceiling Diffuser O PRICE LFD SS, Safety Cable Operating Room P PRICE HORD SS Air Curtain

2.3. Fire Dampers:

2.3.1. Fire dampers shall be Ruskin, Air Balance, National Controlled Air, Greenheck, or approved equal U.L. labeled dynamic dampers. Damper shall match the wall, floor or ceiling rating in which it is installed, except no damper shall have less than 1-1/2 hour rating. Dampers shall be all welded construction and shall be fitted with integral galvanized sleeves. Dampers shall be Type "B" for low pressure rectangular ducts and Type "C" for circular, flat oval, or rectangular as required for medium pressure ducts. Dampers behind grilles and registers shall be Type "A".

2.3.2. Fire damper assembly shall include fire damper and damper enclosure

wall sleeve complete with duct attachment flanges, in accordance with all code requirements. Provide an access door (minimum 12" x 12") at each



fire damper located so as to permit easy maintenance of damper and fusible link. All fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with NFPA requirements.

2.3.3. Submit shop drawings indicating installation details, samples upon

request, and manufacturer's installation drawings for approval to the Architect of all fire damper assemblies for low pressure and medium pressure duct systems. Dampers shall not be installed prior to receiving written approval of submitted samples.

2.4. Combination Fire Smoke Dampers:

2.4.1. Combination fire smoke dampers shall be 1-1/2 hour rated under UL

Standard 555, and shall further be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems under the latest version of UL555S, and bear a UL label attesting to same. The leakage rating under UL555S for medium pressure duct applications shall be no higher than leakage class I (4 cfm/s.f. at 1" w.g. and 8 cfm/s.f. at 4" w.g. or .02 m3/s/m2 at 249 Pa or .04 m3/s/m2 at 996 Pa). The leakage rating under UL555S for low pressure duct applications shall be no higher than leakage class II (10 cfm/s.f. at 1" w.g.).

2.4.2. Include on submittal data information for evaluation of damper flow

characteristics, certified leakage rates and electrical load information (current at specified voltage).

2.4.3. Damper frames shall be constructed of minimum 16 gage galvanized

steel channel. Blades for medium pressure duct applications shall be airfoil shaped double skin construction. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber designed for smoke seal to 450F. Jamb seal shall be flexible metal compression type. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeves, pressed into frame. Damper materials shall be consistent with requirements of installed duct systems. Damper sleeve gage shall be in accordance with UL555 and NFPA 90A.

2.4.4. Actuators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of

damper fabrication. Actuator shall be normally closed 120 volt AC two position type. Damper and actuator shall be supplied as a single entity which meets all applicable UL555 and UL555S qualifications for both dampers and actuators. Qualified actuators (supplied by damper manufacturer or ATC contractor) shipped loose for field mounting, must bear a U.L. label affixed by the damper manufacturer.

2.4.5. Combination fire smoke dampers shall be equipped with a fusible link

which shall melt at 165F causing damper to close and lock in a closed position.

2.4.6. Combination fire smoke dampers for medium pressure duct applications

shall be Ruskin Model FSD-60 or approved equal. Combination fire smoke dampers for low pressure duct applications shall be Ruskin Model FSD-36 or approved equal.

2.5. Smoke Dampers:



2.5.1. Smoke dampers shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems under the latest version of UL555S, and bear a UL label attesting to same. The leakage rating under UL555S for medium pressure duct applications shall be no higher than leakage class I (4 cfm/s.f. at 1" w.g. and 8 cfm/s.f. at 4" w.g. or .02 m3/s/m2 at 249 Pa or .04 m3/s/m2 at 996 Pa). The leakage rating under UL555S for low pressure duct applications shall be no higher than leakage class II (10 cfm/s.f. at 1" w.g.).

2.5.2. Include on submittal data information for evaluation of damper flow

characteristics, certified leakage rates and electrical load information (current at specified voltage).

2.5.3. Damper frames shall e constructed of minimum 16 gage galvanized steel

channel. Blades for medium pressure duct applications shall be airfoil shaped double skin construction. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber designed for smoke seal to 450F. Jamb seal shall be flexible metal compression type. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeves, pressed into frame. Damper materials shall be consistent with requirements of installed duct systems. Damper sleeve gage shall be in accordance with UL555 and NFPA 90A.

2.5.4. Actuators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of

damper fabrication. Actuator shall be normally closed 120 volt AC two position type. Damper and actuator shall be supplied as a single entity which meets all applicable UL555 and UL555S qualifications for both dampers and actuators. Qualified actuators (supplied by damper manufacturer or ATC contractor) shipped loose for field mounting, must bear a U.L. label affixed by the damper manufacturer.

2.5.5. Smoke dampers for medium pressure duct applications shall be Ruskin

Model SD-60 or approved equal. Smoke dampers for low pressure duct applications shall be Ruskin Model SD-36 or approved equal. Provide factory mounted end switch Ruskin Model SP-100 for all dampers.

2.6. Ductwork:

2.6.1. General:

2.6.1.1. The Duct Manual as herein referenced shall mean the

SMACNA manual as published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

2.6.1.2. Unless noted otherwise, ductwork shall be constructed of

prime, first quality galvanized steel of gauges as called for in the Duct Manual. Reinforce all ducts to prevent buckling, breathing, vibrations, or unnecessary noise. Such reinforcing shall be as recommended in Duct Manual, plus any additional reinforcing as required to meet job conditions. Longitudinal and cross joints, elbows, transitions, etc., shall be furnished as specified in Duct Manual, including recommended duct supports to suit job conditions.

2.6.1.3. All uninsulated rectangular ductwork shall be crossbroken on

all four sides of each panel section. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets and elbows, as well as the



panels of straight sections of ducts, shall be crossbroken. Crossbreaking shall be applied between the standing seams or reinforcing angles. The center of the crossbreak shall be of the required height to assure each panel section being rigid, to prevent vibrations and "breathing."

2.6.1.4. Prior to fabrication of any ductwork, Contractor shall submit to

the Architect for approval shop drawings and data for each duct system which shall describe for each duct, the size, gauge, material, joint type, seam type, and reinforcement to be provided. All construction shall be in accordance with the requirements hereinafter specified. No ductwork shall be fabricated or installed until the details of construction are submitted and approved. Ductwork installed at variance to these conditions shall be subject to removal and replacement at no cost to the Owner.

2.6.1.5. Provide 22 gauge galvanized sleeve around ducts passing

through drywall construction. 2.6.1.6. Provide 22 gauge aluminum flanged trim collar and sleeve

around exposed ducts through walls, floor or ceilings in finished areas to provide finished appearance.

2.6.2. Low Pressure Ductwork:

2.6.2.1. Ductwork shall conform with requirements and details, unless

specified or indicated otherwise in the Duct Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible," 1995 with 1997 Addendum. A copy of the Duct Manual shall be secured by the Contractor and shall be kept at the project for convenient reference.

2.6.2.2. Flexible duct connections at air handling unit connections,

where indicated or required to eliminate duct vibration shall be "Ventglass" duct fabric as manufactured by Ventfabrics, Inc., or approved equal. Refer the detail for acceptable installation techniques.

2.6.2.3. Except as noted herein under "Medium Pressure Ductwork," all

ductwork including outside air, return air, and exhaust air provided on the project shall be low pressure construction. Rectangular low pressure ductwork construction shall conform to the following SMACNA Standards:

1. Material gauges

A. Refer to the “Duct Construction Schedule” on

the drawings.

2. Longitudinal Seams Fig. #1-5, Types L-1, L-2 & L-4

3. Corner Closures Fig. #1-13, 1-14

& 1-16



4. Hangers Fig. #4-1, 4-2, &

4-4 & Tables 4-1 & 2

5. Rectangular Elbows Fig. 2-2, Types #RE-1, #RE-2, & #RE-3

6. Vaned Elbows (Applies to RE-2 type) Fig. 2-3 & 2-4

Runner Type 1 to have a vane at each tab

7. Transitions, Offsets Fig. #2-7 8. Branch Connections Fig. #2-6, 45o

only 9. Volume dampers, up to 12” deep Fig. #2-12,

Figs. A&B w/locking quadrant

10. Volume dampers, over 12” deep Fig. #2-13, Fig.

w/locking quadrant

11. Access doors Minimum

12"x12", unless otherwise noted. Provide Ventlock w/#140 Ventlock latch, insulated or approved equal

12. Diffuser Plenum Fig. #2-16

2.6.2.4. Duct sizes indicated on the drawings are air side sizes. Where

duct lining is indicated, increase sheet metal sizes accordingly to compensate for thickness of lining. Duct lining shall conform to paragraph 2.4 of this section.

2.6.2.5. Seal all traverse joints and fittings in all low pressure

supply, return, and exhaust ductwork and reheat coil connections to supply air terminal units with United Duct Sealer. At contractor's option, mineral impregnated woven fiber tape as manufactured by Hardcast, Inc. shall be considered equal.



2.6.2.6. Provide Elgen Model E115, E116, or E117 low leakage or approved equal quadrant on all volume dampers.

2.6.2.7. Provide stand-offs, on volume dampers installed in all

insulated ductwork. Depths of stand-offs shall exceed thickness of specified insulation to provide sufficient operating clearances.

2.6.2.8. Flexible ductwork shall be Hart & Cooley Type F-114 or

approved equal. Flexible duct shall comply with NFPA Bulletin 90A and shall be U.L. listed as Class 1 Air Duct & Connector, Standard 181. Flexible duct shall be approved and suitable for installation in ceiling return air plenums.

2.6.2.9. Provide Spin-In Fittings with integral volume damper, at

flexible duct connections to sheet metal duct. Seal all spin-in fittings to sheet metal duct with United Duct Sealer.

2.6.2.10. Support all ducts in accordance with Duct Manual, Tables 4-1

& 4-2 and as hereinbefore specified and as indicated and noted on the drawings.

2.6.3. Medium Pressure Ductwork:

2.6.3.1. Medium pressure ductwork shall be rated as indicated on the

“Duct Construction Schedule” on the drawings. 2.6.3.2. Medium pressure ductwork shall consist of rectangular, circular

and flat oval types as indicated on the drawings. At contractor's option, rectangular ductwork may be substituted for flat oval or circular type. Equivalent flat oval or circular sizes to rectangular sizes shall be maintained. Submit rectangular duct sizes for approval.

2.6.3.3. Ductwork, other than medium pressure type specified herein,

including supply, return, relief, outdoor air, and exhaust shall be low pressure ductwork.

2.6.3.4. All medium pressure duct systems shall be leak tested in strict

conformance with SMACNA standards. Tests shall be witnessed by the balance subcontractor as hereinafter specified.

2.6.3.5. Rectangular medium pressure ductwork, unless otherwise

specified herein, shall conform with the requirements and details contained in the Duct Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible," 1995 with 1997 Addendum hereinafter referred to as "Duct Manual." A copy of the Duct Manual shall be secured by the Contractor and shall be kept at the project for convenient reference. Construction shall conform to the following:

1. Reinforcements & Gauges

A. Refer to the “Duct Construction schedule” on the Drawings.



2. Transverse Joints Table 1-12, Figs.

T-22, T-23, & T-24.

3. Longitudinal Joints Figs. #1-5, L-1 and L-3

4. Vanes and Vane Runners Fig. #2-3 & 2-3

Runner Type-1 to have a vane at each tab

5. Branch Connections Fig. #2-6 45o only

6. Offsets & Transitions Fig. #2-7

7. Supporting Systems Fig. #4-4 Trapeze

type only, Tables 4-1 & 4-2

8. Riser Supports Fig. #4-6 Fig B 9. Volume Dampers Ruskin CD-60

Airfoil 10. Duct Sealants See Page 1-7

through 1-11. Use 3 3M EC-750 or approved equal, on seams & joints

11. Access Doors Ruskin or

approved equal minimum 12" x 12", with 6 latches, insulated

12. Welded galvanized Coated with

minimum two coats of corrosion resistant aluminum paint

2.6.4. Circular Medium Pressure Ductwork:

2.6.4.1. Circular medium pressure ductwork shall be manufactured by

McGill AirFlow, Semco, Lindab Safe, Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc., or Eastern Sheet Metal and shall consist of spiral pipe and welded fittings that shall be factory painted. Circular duct shall have locked seams so made as to eliminate any leakage under the pressures for which the system has been designed. Longitudinal seam duct shall have fusion welded butt seam. All welded seams shall be factory painted. Circular duct shall be manufactured of galvanized steel meeting ASTM A-527-80 by the spiral lockseam method and in the minimum gauges listed:



2.6.4.1.1. For systems operating at 2.0" W.G. or less positive

pressure the minimum gauges shall be as follows:

Diameter Spiral Seam Longitudinal Seam - 8" 28 26 - 14" 28 26 - 26" 26 24 - 36" 24 22 - 50" 22 20 - 60" 20 18 - 84" N.A. 16

2.6.4.1.2. For systems operating at up to 10.0" W.G. or less

positive pressure the minimum gauges shall be as follows:


2.6.4.1.3. For systems operating between 0.0" and 2.0" W.G.

negative the minimum gauges shall be as follows:


2.6.4.2. All fittings are to have continuous welds along all seams. All

welded seams shall be factory painted. All divided flow fittings are to be manufactured as separate fittings, not as tap collars welded into spiral duct sections. Fittings and couplings shall be of the following minimum gauges:

Diameter Minimum Gauge through 14" 24 ga. through 26" 22 ga. through 50" 20 ga. through 60" 18 ga. through 84" 16 ga.



2.6.4.3. All 90 degree tees and 45 degree laterals, either full size or reducing shall be conical pattern produced by machine or press forming. The entrance shall be free of weld build-up, burrs, or irregularities. Provide tangential tees where indicated and as required to suit the installation.

2.6.4.4. Elbow diameters 3" through 8" shall be two section die-

stamped elbows. All other elbows shall be gored construction with all seams continuous-welded and painted. Elbows shall be fabricated in a centerline radius of 1.5 times the cross section diameter. All elbows not die-stamped shall be fabricated according to the following schedule:

Elbow Angle Number of Gores Less than 30o 2 30o through 60o 3 Over 60o 5

2.6.4.5. The reduction of divided flow fittings shall be conical spun

section in the thirty-six reductions in sizes 4" through 22". 2.6.4.6. Offset fitting shall be constructed so that length is not less than

2 duct diameters. 2.6.4.7. Galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding shall be

coated with corrosion resistant aluminum paint, minimum 2 coats.

2.6.4.8. Supports, sealants and testing shall conform with applicable

portions of the Duct Manual and as hereinbefore specified. 2.6.4.9. Flexible ductwork in medium pressure duct systems shall be

Hart & Cooley Genflex Type SLR-25VM or approved equal. 2.6.4.10. Dampers in circular M.P. duct systems shall be Ruskin Model

CDR 92 or approved equal with locking type quadrant. 2.6.4.11. Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall

penetrations in medium and high pressure ductwork in accordance with duct sealing requirements of the "Duct Construction Manual".

2.7. Fans:

2.7.1. General:

2.7.1.1. Provide fans having a certified rating based on tests performed

in accordance with AMCA Bulletins Number 210, 211A and 300. See AMCA Standard 99 "Standard Handbook" for definitions of fan terminology. Arrangement, size and capacity of fans are indicated on the drawings.

2.7.1.2. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced by the

manufacturer. Field mounted vibration isolation units as hereinbefore specified shall be installed on each fan.



2.7.1.3. Diffuser cones and inlet bells are not permitted in rating a fan

unless they are an integral part of the fan design. Additionally, where applicable, fans shall not be rated for air-over (AO) duty.

2.7.1.4. Provide inlets and outlets of fans not duct connected, including

fans in plenum chambers or open to outside, with heavy guard screens to protect personnel. Construct guard screens in a manner that will not impair fan performance, and when bolted to equipment will permit their removal for fan service and cleaning.

2.7.1.5. Provide lubrication facilities, such as oil reservoirs, sight

glasses, grease and relief fittings, fill and drain plugs, pipe connections, etc. Place in a readily and safely accessible location so that after installation they will perform required function without requiring the dismantling of any parts or stopping equipment.

2.7.1.6. All parts of fans shall be protected against corrosion prior to

operation of the fan. 2.7.1.7. Certified performance data including acoustical data shall be

submitted for each fan at design conditions. Data shall include published sound power levels based on actual test on the fan sizes being furnished, and conducted in accordance with current, AMCA Standards. Such data shall define Sound Power Levels (PWL), re: 10-12 watts for each of the eight frequency bands. Sound Power Levels shall not exceed those scheduled. Should additional attenuation be required to achieve the levels specified, it shall be included by the fan manufacturer. Any cost of field modifications necessitated by additional attenuation shall be so included by the fan manufacturer. Fan curves shall be submitted which will depict static pressure, total pressure, brake horsepower, and mechanical efficiency plotted against air volume. Data submitted in tabular form is not acceptable.

2.7.1.8. Motors, drives, curbs, and bases shall be furnished by the fan

manufacturer in accordance with the requirements of Section 15010. Note potential drive change requirements for motors 20 HP and above.

2.7.2. Domed Exhaust Ventilators: (Type "H")

2.7.2.1. Domed centrifugal power roof ventilators shall be Acme

Engineering Inc., Loren Cook, or Breidert, equal to Greenheck Model GB or B as scheduled.

2.7.2.2. The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge

aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. The fan shroud shall have a rolled bead for added strength.

2.7.2.3. Fan wheels shall be of the centrifugal backward curved non-

overloading airfoil design, direct or V-belt drive as scheduled. Fan wheel and fan housing shall be of heavy gauge all-



aluminum construction, with motor and drive assembly located out of exhaust airstream in separate compartment that is forced air cooled with outside air. All exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel.

2.7.2.4. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in

permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearing shall be selected for a minimum of (L50) life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower.

2.7.2.5. Motors shall be in accordance with Section 15010 of these

Specifications.

2.7.2.6. All fans shall be provided with birdscreen, factory-wired safety switch and gravity backdraft damper. Prefabricated roof curbs shall be fully welded aluminum, 12” high, with insulation, wood nailer, and cant. For pitched roofs, curbs shall be constructed to match roof pitch.

2.8. Sound Attenuators:

2.8.1. Provide Industrial Acoustics Company, Vibro-Acoustics, Semco,

Dynasonics, McGill AirFlow, Rink, or Kinetics Noise sound attenuators as scheduled on the drawings and herein specified. Outer casings of attenuators shall be made of 22 gauge galvanized steel. Seams shall be lock formed and mastic filled. Sound attenuators to be installed in the supply airstream downstream of the final filters shall be “clean type”.

2.8.2. Interior partitions for rectangular attenuators shall be made of 24 gauge

galvanized perforated steel. Filler material shall be of inorganic mineral or glass fiber of a density sufficient to obtain the specified acoustic performance and packed under not less than 5% compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof. Combustion rating for the attenuator acoustic fill shall be not less than the following, when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84, NFPA Standard 255 or U.L. No. 723:

Flamespread classification 20 Smoke development rating 20 Fuel contributed 15

2.8.3. Provide airtight construction by use of a duct sealing compound as

hereinbefore specified. Attenuator shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8" W.G. inside to outside of casing.

2.8.4. Attenuator net insertion loss data, self generated noise, and pressure

drop shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory. All tests shall be in accordance with ASTM E-377 and must be furnished as part of the manufacturer's printed instructions and in no case with less than the upstream and downstream duct runs indicated.

3. EXECUTION



3.1. Air Devices:

3.1.1. Install air devices in accordance with the manufacturer's latest

published installation instructions to insure against incorrect air pattern, drafts, and dirt smudging.

3.1.2. Construct, and install sheet metal duct or plenum connections to air

devices in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.1.3. Make modifications of duct systems required to accommodate actual

sizes of air devices furnished, i.e., transformations and collar sizes without additional cost.

3.2. VAV Terminal Units:

3.2.1. Install terminal units in accordance with details shown on the drawings.

Provide all necessary supports as indicated and required. Locate units to provide full accessibility to all damper operators, controllers and accessories.

3.3. Fire Dampers, Smoke Dampers, and Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers:

3.3.1. All fire dampers, smoke dampers, and combination fire/smoke

dampers shall be tested upon installation, and at a period of one year after project completion. Contractor shall inspect, test and provide a written report documenting the testing procedure prior to the expiration date of the one year warranty. Any dampers failing inspection shall be repaired/replaced at no additional cost to the owner.

3.3.2. The dampers shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 80 and 105, and Joint Commission Standard EC.02.03.05 EP18. Per NFPA 80, dampers shall be tested and operation documented after installation. Each damper must be numbered and tested. The installing or testing contractor shall request a test sheet with available device numbers from the Facilities Department. Each electrical or pneumatic device shall be operated through the fire alarm system and closure verified. The printed report from the fire alarm system shall be provided to indicate the operation of the initiating device. Each gravity fire alarm system shall be provided to indicate the operation of the initiating device. Each gravity fire link shall be released and damper closure verified. The device shall be logged on the test sheet with the initials of the tester, type of device, location, and date of test. All testing shall be in the presence of the commissioning agent.

3.4. Ductwork:

3.4.1. Install hangers, supports, and their attachments, generally, in conformance with SMACNA standards referred to in this section of the specifications and applicable portions of article "Piping, Conduit and Supports," of Section 15010.

3.4.2. Furnish hangers capable of withstanding 5 times the weight of the load

imposed on them without Damage to duct or any adjacent construction.



3.4.3. Neatly erect ducts and plenums of sizes and arrangements shown and detailed and as required to carry out intent of specifications and drawings. Work must meet approval of the Architect in all its parts and details.

3.4.4. Sizes shown are air side sizes. Where ducts are indicated as lined,

dimensions shall be increased to reflect the thickness of the lining. 3.4.5. Install ductwork in such a manner as to meet recommendations of

NFPA Standard 90A. 3.4.6. Contractor shall review and coordinate the installation of the ductwork.

No ductwork shall be fabricated prior to the contractor obtaining exact field dimensions of the building structure, including new and existing ceiling space conditions, architectural, mechanical, electrical, and structural obstructions, etc., which may affect the installation of the air distribution system. Notify the Architect immediately upon any discrepancies.

3.4.7. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate

all duct offsets, rises, drops, fittings and accessories which may be required. Carefully investigate in the field the architectural, mechanical, electrical, and structural conditions affecting the work, and arrange such work accordingly, providing such fittings, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions.

3.4.8. Provide each air outlet with a collar adequately stiffened, fastened, and

made suitable for securing air device thereto. Make field changes in ductwork, such as those required to accommodate the sizes of factory fabricated equipment actually furnished, i.e., VAV terminal units, coils, fans, filter housings, and similar items, without additional cost. Provide duct flanges to match those of connecting factory fabricated equipment. When necessary, relocate and modify ductwork to avoid obstructions such as structural members, piping and conduit, in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

Construct and install all ductwork in accordance with the SMACNA Standard specified.

3.4.9. Leak Testing of Ductwork:

3.4.9.1. Low Pressure System:

Test new ductwork for leaks by sealing openings and pressurizing system to that static pressure which the system will operate. Use test methods approved by Architect. Seal all joints as herein described. Leakage shall not exceed 3 percent of air flow specified at the system's nominal static pressure. Perform additional test as may be required by the Architect. Random testing of low pressure ductwork, downstream of all terminal units shall be required if duct sealing appears inadequate. Keep ducts free of audible leaks which are detectable in all finished spaces. Notify Testing and Balancing Contractor, who shall witness tests, at least 48 hours in advance of test. Refer to the duct



construction schedule on the drawings for additional information.

3.4.9.2. Medium Pressure System:

Test all medium pressure ductwork. Conduct test on the first section of each type of ductwork of each pressure classification to demonstrate the tightness of the joints, the finally installed ducts sections in parts, and then by complete air handling systems. Include the first sections tested at least five transverse joints and typical fittings of each type of ductwork. Air leakage from each system shall not exceed 1-1/2 percent of the air flow specified for each system. Refer to the duct construction schedule on the drawings for additional information.

Keep ducts free of audible leaks which are detectable in all finished spaces. Notify testing and balancing contractor who shall witness tests, at least 48 hours in advance of tests.

3.4.10. Cleaning:

3.4.10.1. Clean the inside of ductwork and casing of debris, dirt, and

other foreign matter before any system's fans and filters are operated for any reason. After the equipment has been used temporarily for any purpose, i.e., adjusting, testing and ventilating, clean or renew (depending on type) filter media and clean ducts down stream from the filters which have handled unfiltered air. Additionally, clean exhaust and return ducts, which in the opinion of the Architect, have been handling excessive dirty air prior to acceptance of the system.

3.4.10.2. Keep main duct risers capped with plastic or poly after duct

testing to help maintain clean risers. Provide roll filter media at each open end duct to help maintain clean risers until project balancing begins.

END OF SECTION


SYSTEMS BALANCING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS 15825 - 1

SECTION 15825 – SYSTEMS BALANCING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS 1. GENERAL



1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section includes all labor and materials necessary to adjust,

balance and test performance in accordance with design criteria and the equipment and components of systems included in Division 15 as follows:

1.2.1.1. Air Distribution 1.2.1.2. Water Distribution 1.2.1.3. Equipment Performance and Commissioning

1.2.2. Static pressure duct leakage tests will be performed under another

section and shall be witnessed under this section.

1.3. Commissioning:


1.4. Qualifications:

1.4.1. Work included in this section shall be performed by a pre-approved air

and water balancing firm, who shall test, adjust, balance, and commission the air and water systems for this project in accordance with AABC Standard Procedures. Submit the name and qualifications of the air balance firm for approval within thirty (30) days after award of contract.

1.4.2. Qualifications shall include the name of the technician that will be

assigned to this project. The technicians qualifications shall be included and shall include successfully completed projects of similar size and complexity, references, and formal training.

Acceptable air and water balance firms for this project shall include Leach Wallace Associates, Inc., American Testing, Inc., Precision Balancing, Inc., and Weisman, Inc.

1.4.3. If the Contractor fails to submit the name of an acceptable agency

within the specified time, the Architect will select a firm to accomplish the work, and the selection shall be binding at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.4.4. All work shall be performed under direct supervision of a qualified



engineer. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. If requested, calibration tests of equipment to be used shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.

1.5. Test Report:

1.5.1. The balancing agency shall prepare a written report which shall include

diagrams and description of procedures together with all recorded test data. The report shall be submitted in bound volumes for a permanent record. Submit four (4) copies of report. A set of contract drawings shall also be submitted. Drawings shall have each air device, flow fitting, pump, fan, and traverse location identified in red ink by a number which shall match identification numbers utilized in the balancing report.

1.6. Test Procedure:

1.6.1. Systems may be tested in increments when approved by the Engineer. 1.6.2. When testing and balancing involve the building temperature control

systems, cooperate with the temperature control subcontractor to achieve the desired results. All setpoints shall be documented and included with test report.

1.6.3. At the time of the final inspection, recheck in the presence and at the

request of the Engineer not to exceed ten percent (10%) of the previously recorded readings from the certified report selected at random from the log by the Engineer.

1.6.4. Permanently mark the settings of valves, dampers, and other

adjustment devices so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Do not permanently mark devices before final acceptance.

1.6.5. Perform all tests in accordance with AABC standard procedures. Any

deviation from same must be approved by the Engineer. 1.6.6. Should the basic system or any of its components fail to meet contract

requirements, and thereby make the testing and balancing work invalid, notify the Engineer and stop the tests until such time that the failure is corrected.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Testing and Commissioning Instruments:

2.1.1. Use instruments of equal or better quality than those described in the technical portions of Associated Air Balance Council National Standards for Testing and Balancing, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems, Fifth Edition, 1989.

2.1.2. Instruments used for balancing air and water systems must have been

calibrated within a period of six (6) months prior to balancing. Submit serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments to be used prior to the start of work.



2.1.3. Instrumentation shall include, as a minimum, the following items of equipment:

1. Pressure gauges and fittings. 2. Dry bulb and wet bulb thermometers. 3. Contact pyrometer. 4. Portable flow meter and, if required, orifice plates. 5. Pitot tube and manometers. 6. Alnor Velometer with attachments. 7. Amprobe. 8. Tachometer.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. General:

3.1.1. Within fifteen (15) days of receipt of notice to proceed, review plans and specifications of systems to be tested, balance, and commissioned to confirm that the arrangement, instrumentation and balancing devices will permit the system to be balanced and tested in the manner described in this section and report to the Engineer any devices which need to be added or any phase of the design which needs to be modified to permit the fulfillment of this contract.

3.1.2. Conduct balancing and testing in accordance with technical portions of

the Associated Air Balancing Council--"National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems, Fifth Edition, 1989". Test procedures not in accordance or not described in the standards, i.e., variable air volume systems shall be approved by the Engineer in writing.

3.1.3. Provide all labor, testing equipment, and materials required to conduct

tests and balance systems, and to perform the systems commissioning.

3.1.4. System shall be operated at least four (4) hours after stabilized

operating conditions have been established before conducting capacity tests. Capacity and performance tests of equipment and systems shall be performed only after balancing is complete.

3.2. Air Distribution Systems:

3.2.1. All air distribution systems including supply, return, outdoor air and

exhaust ductwork shall be tested and balanced. 3.2.2. Where the system cannot be properly balanced or equipment tested

due to system deficiencies such as inability to properly adjust fan speeds, improperly sized motors, excessively noisy equipment, malfunctioning controls, excessively out of balance air distribution system branch runs, and similar item, furnish to the Engineer in writing a list of the deficiencies prior to the submission of the test report.

3.2.3. Make openings in ducts required for pitot tube insertion and seal those

openings with snap-in plugs. Neatly remove duct insulation as required for test. Replacement of insulation, after testing is completed, is included under Section 15200.



3.2.4. Specific testing and balancing procedures shall include:

3.2.4.1. Test and adjust speed of all air apparatus. 3.2.4.2. Test and record motor voltage and amperage. 3.2.4.3. Make Pitot tube traverse of main ducts and obtain design air

quantity at fans. 3.2.4.4. Test and record system static pressures, suction, and

discharge as well as pressure drops across each system element; i.e, filters, coils, silencers, etc. Test and record static pressure and record settings of variable volume systems at pressure controllers. Record temperature control air pressure setpoints for minimum outside air, and maximum and minimum supply air volumes for all variable air volume systems.

3.2.4.5. Test and adjust systems for design supply, outside exhaust,

and return air quantities. 3.2.4.6. Test and record air entering and leaving conditions at air unit

on both heating and cooling modes. 3.2.4.7. Adjust all main and branch ducts for supply, return and

exhaust air. Set and "mark" all volume dampers. Identify, test, and adjust each grille, register, and diffuser to within ten percent (10%) of design quantities.

3.2.4.8. Verify operation of each room thermostat serving VAV

terminal units over full range of heating and cooling to insure proper sequence of control of the VAV operator and reheat coil valve. Record results.

3.2.4.9. Field test maximum and minimum air volumes of all variable

air volume terminal units and record final settings. Check factory settings of regulators and controllers before tests. Reset to the scheduled air volumes if required.

3.2.4.10. Verify accuracy of all duct air monitors by duct traverse. 3.2.4.11. Work in conjunction with the ATC Contractor and Engineer

to establish maximum and minimum settings on all variable air volume fans.

3.2.4.12. Check operation of variable air volume system controls.

Test supply and return fan and outside air volumes by duct traverse at maximum, midpoint, and minimum air volumes to verify that programmed volume differential is maintained.

3.2.5. Witness duct pressure tests as performed under Section 15800.

Submit with balancing report test condition and results for each section of duct tested. Include diagrams if required to define tested sections. Submit preliminary test data as soon as possible after testing.



3.3. Water Distribution Systems:

3.3.1. After the fluid piping system, including strainers have been cleaned and controls are functioning as required under other sections of Division 15, adjust balancing devices installed for this purpose in accordance with the AABC technical procedures to obtain the specified fluid flow or heat transfer rate.

3.3.2. Use reading from system flow fittings, when installed, to determine flow

quantity. Where fittings are not installed, determine liquid flow by measuring water pressure drop through devices with known Cv or pressure drop at specific flow rates. Use flow meter compatible with the type of fittings installed.

3.3.3. Where liquid flow balancing cannot be accomplished due to system

deficiencies such as excessive or lack of pumping head, inadequately sized motors, pressure drops not determinable or similar problems, prepare a list of such deficiencies and the suggested system modifications and furnish to the Engineer in writing and prior to submission of test report for necessary action.

3.3.4. Specific testing and balancing procedures shall include:

3.3.4.1. Check expansion tank for water level and tank pressure. Record pressure.

3.3.4.2. Check all air vents for operation. Completely eliminate air

from water systems. 3.3.4.3. Set and adjust all pumps for proper delivery rates. Record

all pump nameplate information. Record pump flow, water temperature, inlet and outlet pressures, and motor voltage amps, and rpm.

3.3.4.4. Set and adjust water flow in all piping branches and risers,

and record flow.

3.4. Equipment Performance:

3.4.1. Conduct performance tests only after the air and water systems have been balanced and the proper flow rates established.

3.4.2. Test and record capacity of heat transfer equipment including all coils.

Air side and water side capacities must agree within five percent (5%) of each other. Include the manufacturer's rated capacity at the test operating conditions with the report. Perform tests where possible at design conditions. If tests are not performed under design conditions, interpolate results to determine capacity at full load operating conditions.

3.4.3. Calculate efficiency of pumps and fans by recognized methods using

test data. 3.4.4. Test refrigeration equipment to determine heat extracted from or heat

added to the building by the equipment and the heat ejected from the device. Record date, time and outside weather conditions, including



ambient dry bulb, wet bulb, wind speed and direction, cloud cover, rain, and any special conditions pertinent to the test.

3.6. Commissioning Responsibilities:

3.6.1. With respect to HVAC commissioning, the TAB agency shall:

3.6.1.1. Include cost for HVAC commissioning requirements in the quoted price.

3.6.1.2. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CA prior

to, and during, on-site TAB work being done.

3.6.1.3. Submit proposed TAB procedures to the CA and mechanical engineer for review and acceptance.

3.6.1.4. Attend the TAB planning meeting scheduled by the CA. Be

prepared to discuss the procedures that shall be followed in testing, adjusting and balancing the HVAC system.

3.6.1.5. At completion of the TAB work, submit the final TAB report to

the general contractor, with copies to the Owner, CA and mechanical engineer.

3.6.1.6. Participate in verification of the TAB report by the CA for

verification or diagnostic purposes. This will consist of repeating a sample of 10% of the measurements contained in the TAB report as directed by the CA.

3.6.1.7. Participate in O&M personnel training sessions as scheduled

by the CA.

END OF SECTION


MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING 15850-1

SECTION 15850 – MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING 1. GENERAL



1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section includes all labor and materials necessary to the system

commissioning services in accordance with the design criteria and the equipment and components of systems included in Division 15. The systems to be commissioned are as follows:

1.2.1.1. Building Automation System

1.2.1.2. Chillers

1.2.1.3. VFDs

1.2.1.4. HVAC Pumps

1.2.1.5. Air Handling Units

1.2.1.6. Air Terminal Units

1.2.1.7. OR Terminal Units

1.2.1.8. Exhaust Fans

1.2.1.9. Humidifiers

1.2.1.10. Mixing Valves

1.2.1.11. Indoor Air Quality

1.2.1.12. Fire Dampers, Smoke Dampers, and Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers

1.2.2. The HVAC Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Firm), working in cooperation with the Architect and Owner, shall be responsible for the commissioning of the mechanical building systems. Through a process of reviews, testing and calibration of the equipment, the Commissioning Authority shall oversee the development of the building HVAC systems from a state of static completion to a state of dynamic operation to meet the design intent, in accordance with the contract documents. The Commissioning Authority shall submit the proposed commissioning plan to the Architect for approval prior to initiation of the commissioning process. As part of the HVAC operation and maintenance manual, a report shall be submitted which certifies the dynamic operational condition of the building (project) HVAC equipment and systems under full seasonal operation. The testing,



adjusting, and balancing reports and any approved alterations to the project shall be submitted with the report to assure coordination of related systems.

1.2.3. The HVAC mechanical and controls contractors shall follow the start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in this section. Division 15 has start-up responsibility and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional, meeting the design objectives of the contract documents. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the Commissioning Authority or Owner.

1.2.4. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems or sub-systems at the discretion of the Commissioning Authority and CM. Beginning system testing before full completion does not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including all pre-commissioning checklists as soon as possible.

1.3. Description: Functional Testing Requirements:

1.3.1. This section specifies the functional testing requirements for Division 15 systems and equipment. From these requirements, the Commissioning Authority (CA) shall review the step-by-step procedures to be executed by the Subs or the Commissioning Authority. Specific requirements are listed in the various Division 15 specification subsections. The general functional testing process, requirements and test method definitions are described herein. The test requirements for each piece of equipment or system to be performed by the contractor shall contain the following:

1.3.1.1. The contractors responsible to execute the tests, under the direction of the Commissioning Authority.

1.3.1.2. Pre-commissioning checklists associated with the components.

1.3.1.3. Functions and modes to be tested.

1.3.1.4. Required conditions of the test for each mode.

1.3.1.5. Special procedures.

1.3.1.6. Required methods of testing.

1.3.1.7. Required monitoring.

1.3.1.8. Acceptance criteria.

1.3.1.9. Sampling strategies allowed.

1.4. Qualifications:

1.4.1. Work included in this section shall be performed by the Mechanical Contractor and their subcontractors, who shall provide the system



commissioning services for this project in accordance with the industry standard procedures, and those included within.

1.4.2. Work included in this section shall be witnessed by Leach Wallace Associates, Inc., who shall review, approve and document commissioning services for this project.

1.5. Commissioning Report:

1.5.1. The commissioning agency shall prepare a written report which shall include diagrams and description of procedures together with all recorded test data. The report shall be submitted in bound volumes for a permanent record. Submit two (2) copies of report.

1.6. Mechanical Systems Commissioning Responsibilities:

1.6.1. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the mechanical

contractor and their subs are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only):

1.6.1.1. Construction and Acceptance Phases

1.6.1.1.1. Attend a commissioning scope meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the Commissioning process.

1.6.1.1.2. Contractors shall provide the Commissioning Authority with normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals of commissioned equipment.

1.6.1.1.3. Provide additional requested documentation prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to the Commissioning Authority prior to the scheduled functional testing.

1.6.1.1.3.1. Typically, this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any owner-contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-up and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning Authority.



1.6.1.1.3.2. The Commissioning Authority may request further documentation necessary for the commissioning process.

1.6.1.1.3.3. This data request may be made prior to normal submittals.

1.6.1.1.4. Provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment, through normal channels, to the Commissioning Authority for review and approval.

1.6.1.1.5. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing testing procedures.

1.6.1.1.6. Provide assistance to the Commissioning Authority in performing the functional performance tests as specified.

1.6.1.1.7. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures and the pre-commissioning checklists from the Commissioning Authority for all commissioned equipment. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and approval prior to startup.

1.6.1.1.8. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the mechanical-related portions of the pre-commissioning checklists for all commissioned equipment.

1.6.1.1.9. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout procedures, providing a copy to the Commissioning Authority.

1.6.1.1.10. Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing, and respond to punch list items in writing. Air and water TAB shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the respective air- or water-related systems.

1.6.1.1.11. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the functional performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem solving.



1.6.1.1.12. Provide skilled technicians to perform functional performance testing under the direction of the Commissioning Authority for specified equipment in this Section.

1.6.1.1.13. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the Commissioning Authority, CM and A/E and retest the equipment.

1.6.1.1.14. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.

1.6.1.1.15. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and final CAD as-builts for contractor-generated coordination drawings.

1.6.1.1.16. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified.

1.6.1.1.17. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty.

1.6.1.1.18. Contractors shall provide Commissioning Authority with Preventative Maintenance Log.

1.6.1.1.19. Contractors shall provide the Commissioning Authority with sequences of operations.

1.6.1.2. Warranty Period

1.6.1.2.1. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the Commissioning Authority, according to the specifications.

1.6.1.2.2. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.

1.6.2. Mechanical Contractor

1.6.2.1. The responsibilities of the HVAC mechanical contractor, during construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed within are:

1.6.2.1.1. All related equipment has been started up and start-up reports and prefunctional checklists submitted and approved ready for functional testing, except for the building automation control system.



1.6.2.1.2. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and Commissioning Authority by:

1.6.2.1.2.1. Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing the operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as required.

1.6.2.1.3. Prepare a preliminary schedule for Division 15 pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up and TAB start and completion for use by the Commissioning Authority. Update the schedule as appropriate. Provide confirmation of the following:

1.6.2.1.3.1. Piping system flushing complete and required report approved.

1.6.2.1.3.2. Water treatment system complete and operational.

1.6.2.1.3.3. Vibration control report approved (if specified).

1.6.2.1.3.4. Test and balance (TAB) complete.

1.6.2.1.3.5. Assist the CA in the verification of safeties and their operating ranges.

1.6.2.1.3.6. Record of all values for pre-test setpoints changed to accommodate testing has been made and verify that they have been returned to original values (control parameters, limits, delays, lockouts, schedules, etc.).

1.6.2.1.3.7. Other miscellaneous checks of the prefunctional checklist and start-up reports completed successfully.

1.6.2.1.4. Notify the CM or Commissioning Authority depending on protocol, when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning, startup of each piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be responsible to notify the CM or Commissioning Authority, ahead of time, when commissioning activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction. Be proactive in seeing that commissioning processes are executed and that the Commissioning Authority has the scheduling information needed to efficiently



execute the commissioning process.

1.6.3. Controls Contractor

1.6.3.1. The commissioning responsibilities of the controls contractor, during construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed within are:

1.6.3.1.1. Sequences of Operation Submittals. The Controls Contractor’s submittals of control drawings shall include complete detailed sequences of operation for each piece of equipment, regardless of the completeness and clarity of the sequences in the specifications. They shall include:

1.6.3.1.1.1. An overview narrative of the system (1 or 2 paragraphs) generally describing its purpose, components and function.

1.6.3.1.1.2. All interactions and interlocks with other systems.

1.6.3.1.1.3. Detailed delineation of control between any packaged controls and the building automation system, listing what points the BAS monitors only and what BAS points are control points and are adjustable.

1.6.3.1.1.4. Written sequences of control for packaged controlled equipment. (Equipment manufacturers’ stock sequences may be included, but will generally require additional narrative).

1.6.3.1.1.5. To facilitate referencing in testing procedures, all sequences shall be written in small statements, each with a number for reference. For a given system, numbers will not repeat for different sequence sections, unless the sections are numbered.

1.6.3.1.2. An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be included in the final controls O&M manual submittal.

1.6.3.1.3. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor in the following manner:



1.6.3.1.3.1. Meet with the TAB contractor prior to beginning TAB and review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system toward completing TAB. Provide the TAB any needed unique instruments for setting terminal unit boxes and instruct TAB in their use (handheld control system interface for use around the building during TAB, etc.).

1.6.3.1.3.2. For a given area, have all required pre-commissioning checklists, calibrations, startup and selected functional tests of the system completed and approved by the Commissioning Authority prior to TAB.

1.6.3.1.3.3. Provide a qualified technician to operate the controls to assist the TAB contractor in performing TAB, or provide sufficient training for TAB to operate the system without assistance

1.6.3.1.4. Assist and cooperate with the Commissioning Authority in the following manner:

1.6.3.1.4.1. Execute the functional testing of the controls system as specified for the controls contractor in Section 15905, using a skilled technician who is familiar with this building. Assist in the functional testing of all equipment specified in Division 15.

1.6.3.1.4.2. Execute all control system trend logs specified.

1.6.3.1.5. Provide a signed and dated certification to the Commissioning Authority and CM upon completion of the checkout of each controlled device, equipment and system prior to functional testing for each piece of equipment or system, that all control system functions for this and all interlocking systems are programmed and operable per contract documents, including final setpoints and schedules with debugging, loop tuning and sensor calibrations completed, except functional testing requirements.

1.6.3.1.6. Beyond the control points necessary to execute



all documented control sequences, provide monitoring, control and virtual points as specified in Section 15903.

1.6.4. TAB Contractor

1.6.4.1. The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed within are:

1.6.4.1.1. Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and component to the Commissioning Authority, CM and the controls contractor six weeks prior to starting the TAB. This plan will be developed after the TAB has some familiarity with the control system.

1.6.4.1.2. The submitted plan will include:

1.6.4.1.2.1. Certification that the TAB contractor has reviewed the construction documents and the systems with the design engineers and contractors to sufficiently understand the design intent for each system.

1.6.4.1.2.2. Details of how total flow will be determined (Air: sum of terminal flows via BAS calibrated readings or via hood readings of all terminals, supply (SA) and return (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations. Water: pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.).

1.6.4.1.2.3. Plan for formal progress reports (scope and frequency).

1.6.4.1.2.4. Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution).

1.6.4.1.3. A running log of events and issues shall be kept by the TAB field technicians. Submit hand-written reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the Commissioning Authority and CM at least twice a week.

1.6.4.1.4. Communicate in writing to the controls contractor all setpoint and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB that affect the control system setup



and operation.

1.6.4.1.5. Provide a draft TAB report within two weeks of completion. A copy will be provided to the Commissioning Authority. The report will contain a full explanation of the methodology, assumptions and the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and column headings. The report should follow the latest and most rigorous reporting recommendations by AABC, NEBB or ASHRAE Standard 111.

1.6.4.1.6. Provide the Commissioning Authority with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft reports.

1.6.4.1.7. Provide a final TAB report for the Commissioning Authority with details, as in the draft.

1.7. Commissioning Requirements:

1.7.1. Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems perform interactively according to the design intent and the owner’s operational needs. This is achieved by beginning in the design phase and documenting design intent and continuing through construction, acceptance and the warranty period with actual verification of performance. The commissioning process shall encompass and coordinate the traditionally separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing, performance testing and training. Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents.

1.7.1.1. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed

according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that they receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors.

1.7.1.2. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.

1.7.1.3. Verify that O&M documentation left on site is complete.

1.7.1.4. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained.

1.7.1.5. The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the system designers or installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product.

1.8. Abbreviations:



1.8.1. The following are common abbreviations used in the Specifications and in the Commissioning Plan. Definitions are found within:

1.8.1.1. AE – Architect and design engineers

1.8.1.2. CA - Commissioning authority

1.8.1.3. CC – Controls contractor

1.8.1.4. CM – Construction manager (the owner’s representative)

1.8.1.5. Cx – Commissioning

1.8.1.6. Cx Plan – Commissioning plan document

1.8.1.7. EC – Electrical contractor

1.8.1.8. FT – Functional performance test

1.8.1.9. GC – General contractor (prime)

1.8.1.10. MC – Mechanical contractor

1.8.1.11. PC – Pre-commissioning checklist

1.8.1.12. PM – Project manager (of the Owner)

1.8.1.13. Subs- Subcontractors to General

1.8.1.14. TAB – Test and balance contractor

1.9. Coordination:

1.9.1. The members of the commissioning team consist of:

1.9.1.1. The Commissioning authority (CA)

1.9.1.2. The Project Manager (PM)

1.9.1.3. The designated representative of the owner’s Construction Management firm (CM)

1.9.1.4. The General Contractor (GC or Contractor)

1.9.1.5. The architect and design engineers (particularly the mechanical engineer)

1.9.1.6. The Mechanical Contractor (MC)

1.9.1.7. The Electrical Contractor (EC)

1.9.1.8. The TAB representative

1.9.1.9. The Controls Contractor (CC)



1.9.1.10. Any other installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment.

1.9.2. If known, the Owner’s building or plant operator/engineer is also a member of the commissioning team.

1.9.3. The CM has hired the Commissioning Authority directly. The Commissioning Authority directs and coordinates the commissioning activities and is part of the CM team. All members work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of the Contract Documents. The Commissioning Authority’s responsibilities are the same regardless of who hired the Commissioning Authority.

1.9.4. The Commissioning Authority will work with the CM and GC according to established protocols to schedule the commissioning activities. The Commissioning Authority will provide sufficient notice to the CM and GC for scheduling commissioning activities. The GC will integrate all commissioning activities into the master schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning process. The Commissioning Authority will provide the initial schedule of primary commissioning events at the commissioning scope meeting. The Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase provides a format for this schedule. As construction progresses more detailed schedules are developed by the Commissioning Authority. The Commissioning Plan also provides a format for detailed schedules.

1.10. Commissioning Process:

1.10.1. The Commissioning Plan, provided as part of the bid documents, is binding on the Contractor. The commissioning plan provides guidance in the execution of the commissioning process. Just after the initial commissioning scope meeting the Commissioning Authority will update the plan, which is then considered the “final” plan, though it will continue to evolve and expand as the project progresses. The Specifications will take precedence over the Commissioning Plan.

1.10.2. The following provides a brief overview of the typical commissioning tasks during construction and the general order in which they occur.

1.10.2.1. Commissioning during construction begins with a scope meeting conducted by the Commissioning Authority where the commissioning process is reviewed with the commissioning team members.

1.10.2.2. Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the Commissioning Authority with necessary parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future activities and resolve problems.

1.10.2.3. Equipment documentation is submitted to the Commissioning Authority during normal submittals, including detailed start-up procedures.

1.10.2.4. The Commissioning Authority works with the Subs in



developing startup plans and startup documentation formats, including providing the Subs with pre-commissioning checklists to be completed, during the startup process.

1.10.2.5. In general, the checkout and performance verification proceeds from simple to complex; from component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels with pre-commissioning checklists being completed before functional testing.

1.10.2.6. The Subs, under their own direction, execute and document the pre-commissioning checklists and perform startup and initial checkout. The Commissioning Authority documents that the checklists and startup were completed according to the approved plans. This may include the Commissioning Authority witnessing start-up of selected equipment.

1.10.2.7. The Commissioning Authority develops specific equipment and system functional performance test procedures. The Subs review the procedures.

1.10.2.8. The procedures are executed by the Subs, under the direction of, and documented by, the Commissioning Authority.

1.10.2.9. The Commissioning Authority reviews the O&M documentation for completeness.

1.10.2.10. Commissioning is completed before Substantial Completion.

1.10.2.11. The Commissioning Authority reviews, pre-approves and coordinates the training provided by the Subs and verifies that it was completed.

1.10.2.12. Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required.

1.11. Related Work: Specific commissioning requirements are given in the following sections of this specification.

1.11.1. 15010 Mechanical General Provisions

1.11.1.1. Alerts all parties that additional detail in submittals may be required and directs to relevant sections within Division 15.

1.11.1.2. Defines Substantial Completion and Functional Completion milestones, relative to commissioning.

1.11.1.3. Alerts all parties that O&M documentation may be more detailed and directs to relevant sections within 15850.

1.11.1.4. Alerts the mechanical contractor to commissioning responsibilities in 15850.

1.11.2. 15825 TAB



1.11.2.1. Alerts the TAB of commissioning responsibilities within this section.

1.11.3. 15850 Commissioning

1.11.3.1. Describes the commissioning responsibilities of the mechanical, controls and TAB contractors and the pre-commissioning testing and startup responsibilities of each.

1.11.3.2. Describes the specific functional testing requirements for Division 15 equipment in the project.

1.11.3.3. Provides the pre-commissioning checklists for use on this project, including items for Div. 15 and Div. 16.

1.11.3.4. Provides example functional test procedures and formats for mechanical equipment.

1.11.3.5. Describes the commissioning process, responsibilities common to all parties, responsibilities of the A/E, Commissioning Authority, CM, PM, GC and Suppliers, focusing on the Commissioning Authority. The unique MC, EC, CC, and TAB responsibilities are included in Div. 15 and 16.

1.11.4. 15900 Automatic Controls

1.11.4.1. Lists special requirements and alerts the controls contractor of the special requirements of the control contractor and control system within this section.

1.12. Responsibilities:

1.12.1. The responsibilities of various parties in the commissioning process are provided in this section. The responsibilities of the mechanical contractor, TAB and controls contractor are in Division 15 and those of the electrical contractor in Division 16. It is noted that the services for the Project Manager, Construction Manager, Architect, HVAC mechanical and electrical designers/engineers, and Commissioning authority are not provided for in this contract. That is, the Contractor is not responsible for providing their services. Their responsibilities are listed here to clarify the commissioning process.

1.12.2. All parties shall attend commissioning scope meetings and additional meetings, as necessary.

1.12.3. Commissioning Authority (CA) - The Commissioning Authority is not responsible for design concept, design criteria, compliance with codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost estimating, or construction management. The Commissioning Authority may assist with problem-solving non-conformance or deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the general contractor and the A/E. The primary role of the Commissioning Authority is to develop and coordinate the execution of a testing plan, observe and document performance—that systems are functioning in accordance with the



documented design intent and in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractors will provide all tools or the use of tools to start, check-out and functionally test equipment and systems.

1.12.3.1. During the Construction and Acceptance Phase, the Commissioning Agent shall:

1.12.3.1.1. Coordinate and direct the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise.

1.12.3.1.2. Coordinate the commissioning work and, with the GC and CM, ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.

1.12.3.1.3. Revise, as necessary, the Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase.

1.12.3.1.4. Plan and conduct a commissioning scope meeting and other commissioning meetings.

1.12.3.1.5. Request and review additional information required to perform commissioning tasks, including O&M materials, contractor start-up and checkout procedures.

1.12.3.1.6. Before startup, gather and review the current control sequences and interlocks and work with contractors and design engineers until sufficient clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to write detailed testing procedures.

1.12.3.1.7. Review and approve normal Contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs, concurrent with the A/E reviews.

1.12.3.1.8. Write and distribute pre-functional tests and checklists.

1.12.3.1.9. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. Attends selected planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress. Review construction meeting minutes for revisions/substitutions relating to the commissioning process. Assist in resolving any discrepancies.



1.12.3.1.10. Witness all or part of the HVAC piping test and flushing procedure, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing and include the documentation in O&M manuals. Notify owner’s project manager of any deficiencies in results or procedures.

1.12.3.1.11. Witness all or part of any ductwork testing and cleaning procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing and include the documentation in O&M manuals. Notify owner’s project manager of any deficiencies in results or procedures.

1.12.3.1.12. Approve pre-functional tests and checklist completion by reviewing pre-commissioning checklist reports and by selected site observation and spot-checking.

1.12.3.1.13. Approve systems startup by reviewing start-up reports and by selected site observation.

1.12.3.1.14. Review TAB execution plan.

1.12.3.1.15. Oversee sufficient functional testing of the control system and approve it to be used for TAB, before TAB is executed.

1.12.3.1.16. Approve air and water systems balancing by spot testing, by reviewing completed reports and by selected site observation.

1.12.3.1.17. With necessary assistance and review from installing contractors, write the functional performance test procedures for equipment and systems. This may include energy management control system trending, stand-alone data logger monitoring or manual functional testing. Submit to CM for review, and for approval if required.

1.12.3.1.18. Analyze any functional performance trend logs and monitoring data to verify performance.

1.12.3.1.19. Coordinate, witness and approve manual functional performance tests performed by installing contractors. Coordinate retesting as necessary until satisfactory performance is achieved. Additional testing will result in payment to the CA.

1.12.3.1.20. Maintain a master deficiency and resolution log and a separate testing record. Provide the CM with written progress reports and test results with recommended actions.



1.12.3.1.21. Witness performance testing of smoke control systems by others and all other owner contracted tests or tests by manufacturer’s personnel over which the CA may not have direct control. Document these tests and include this documentation in Commissioning Record in O&M manuals.

1.12.3.1.22. Review equipment warranties to ensure that the Owner’s responsibilities are clearly defined.

1.12.3.1.23. Oversee and approve the training of the Owner’s operating personnel.

1.12.3.1.24. Compile and maintain a commissioning record and building systems book(s).

1.12.3.1.25. Review and approve the preparation of the O&M manuals.

1.12.3.1.26. Provide a final commissioning report (as described in this section).

1.12.3.2. Warranty Period:

1.12.3.2.1. Coordinate and supervise required seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency corrections.

1.12.3.2.2. Return to the site at 10 months into the 12 month warranty period and review with facility staff the current building operation and the condition of outstanding issues related to the original and seasonal commissioning. Also interview facility staff and identify problems or concerns they have operating the building as originally intended. Make suggestions for improvements and for recording these changes in the O&M manuals. Identify areas that may come under warranty or under the original construction contract. Assist facility staff in developing reports, documents and requests for services to remedy outstanding problems.

1.12.3.2.3. Assist in the development of a preventative maintenance plan, a detailed operating plan or an energy and resource management plan or as-built documentation.

1.12.3.3. Definitions:

1.12.3.3.1. Acceptance Phase - the phase of construction after startup and initial checkout when functional performance tests, O&M documentation review and training occur.



1.12.3.3.2. Approval - acceptance that a piece of equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning in the tested modes according to the Contract Documents.

1.12.3.3.3. Architect / Engineer (A/E) - the prime consultant (architect) and sub-consultants who comprise the design team, generally the HVAC mechanical designer/engineer and the electrical designer/engineer.

1.12.3.3.4. Basis of Design - The basis of design is the documentation of the primary thought processes and assumptions behind design decisions that were made to meet the design intent. The basis of design describes the systems, components, conditions and methods chosen to meet the intent. Some reiterating of the design intent may be included.

1.12.3.3.5. Commissioning authority (CA) - an independent agent, not otherwise associated with the A/E team members or the Contractor, though he/she may be hired as a subcontractor to them. The CA directs and coordinates the day-to-day commissioning activities. The CA does not take an oversight role like the CM. The CA is part of the Construction Manager (CM) team or shall report directly to the CM.

1.12.3.3.6. Commissioning Plan - an overall plan, developed before or after bidding, that provides the structure, schedule and coordination planning for the commissioning process.

1.12.3.3.7. Contract Documents - the documents binding on parties involved in the construction of this project (drawings, specifications, change orders, amendments, contracts, Commissioning Plan, etc.).

1.12.3.3.8. Contractor - the general contractor or authorized representative.

1.12.3.3.9. Control system - the central building energy management control system.

1.12.3.3.10. Construction Manager (CM) – In general, the construction management services contractor (CM) is hired by the owner to in the overall management of the project including supervising and on-site managing authority over a project’s construction.

1.12.3.3.11. Datalogging - monitoring flows, currents, status,



pressures, etc. of equipment using stand-alone dataloggers separate from the control system.

1.12.3.3.12. Deferred Functional Tests - FTs that are performed later, after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site conditions that disallow the test from being performed/

1.12.3.3.13. Deficiency - a condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents (that is, does not perform properly or is not complying with the design intent).

1.12.3.3.14. Design Intent - a dynamic document that provides the explanation of the ideas, concepts and criteria that are considered to be very important to the owner. It is initially the outcome of the programming and conceptual design phases.

1.12.3.3.15. Design Narrative or Design Documentation - sections of either the Design Intent or Basis of Design.

1.12.3.3.16. Factory Testing - testing of equipment on-site or at the factory, by factory personnel with an Owner’s representative present.

1.12.3.3.17. Functional Performance Test (FT) - test of the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods. Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all the control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state. Traditional air or water testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) is not functional testing, in the commissioning sense of the word. TAB’s primary work is setting up the system flows and pressures as specified, while functional testing is verifying that which has already been set up. The commissioning authority develops the functional test procedures in a sequential written form, coordinates,



oversees and documents the actual testing, which is usually performed by the installing contractor or vendor. FTs are performed after pre-commissioning checklists and startups are complete.

1.12.3.3.18. Indirect Indicators - indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a control system screen reporting a damper to be 100% closed.

1.12.3.3.19. Manual Test - using hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts or direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the “observation”).

1.12.3.3.20. Monitoring - the recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of control systems.

1.12.3.3.21. Over-written Value - writing over a sensor value in the control system to see the response of a system (e.g., changing the outside air temperature value from 50o F to 75o F to verify economizer operation). See also “Simulated Signal.”

1.12.3.3.22. Owner-Contracted Tests - tests paid for by the Owner outside the GC’s contract and for which the CA does not oversee. These tests will not be repeated during functional tests if properly documented.

1.12.3.3.23. Phased Commissioning - commissioning that is completed in phases (by floors, for example) due to the size of the structure or other scheduling issues, in order minimize the total construction time.

1.12.3.3.24. Pre-commissioning checklist (PC) - a list of items to inspect and elementary component tests to conduct to verify proper installation of equipment, provided by the Commissioning Authority to the Sub. Pre-commissioning checklists are primarily static inspections and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., belt tension, oil levels OK, labels affixed, gages in place, sensors calibrated, etc.). However, some pre-commissioning checklist items entail simple testing of the function of a component, a piece of equipment or system (such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three phase pump motor



of a chiller system). The word pre-functional refers to before functional testing. Pre-commissioning checklists augment and are combined with the manufacturer’s start-up checklist. Even without a commissioning process, contractors typically perform some, if not many, of the pre-commissioning checklist items a commissioning authority will recommend. However, few contractors document in writing the execution of these checklist items. Therefore, for most equipment, the contractors execute the checklists on their own. The commissioning authority only requires that the procedures be documented in writing, and does not witness most of the pre-commissioning checklist, except for larger or more critical pieces of equipment.

1.12.3.3.25. Program Manager (PM) – The PM is the Owner’s on-site representative, the contracting and managing authority for the owner over the construction project, a staff position.

1.12.3.3.26. Sampling. - functionally testing only a fraction of the total number of identical or near identical pieces of equipment.

1.12.3.3.27. Seasonal Performance Tests - FT that are deferred until the system(s) will experience conditions closer to their design conditions.

1.12.3.3.28. Simulated Condition - condition that is created for the purpose of testing the response of a system (e.g., applying a hair blower to a space sensor to see the response in a VAV box).

1.12.3.3.29. Simulated Signal - disconnecting a sensor and using a signal generator to send an amperage, resistance or pressure to the transducer and DDC system to simulate a sensor value.

1.12.3.3.30. Specifications - the construction specifications of the Contract Documents.

1.12.3.3.31. Startup - the initial starting or activating of dynamic equipment includes executing pre-commissioning checklists.

1.12.3.3.32. Subs - the subcontractors to the GC who provide and install building components and systems.

1.12.3.3.33. Test Procedures - the step-by-step process, which must be executed to fulfill the test requirements. The CA develops the test



procedures.

1.12.3.3.34. Test Requirements - requirements specifying what modes and functions, etc. shall be tested. The test requirements are not the detailed test procedures. The test requirements are specified in the Contract Documents (Sections 15850, etc.).

1.12.3.3.35. Trending - monitoring using the building control system.

1.12.3.3.36. Vendor - supplier of equipment.

1.12.3.3.37. Warranty Period - warranty period for entire project, including equipment components. Warranty begins at Substantial Completion and extends for at least one year, unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents and accepted submittals.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Test Equipment:

2.1.1. Division 15 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this Division.

2.1.2. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required functional performance testing shall be provided by the Division contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 15 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the HVAC system and controls system in Division 15, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. Two-way radios shall be provided by the Division Contractor.

2.1.3. Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents shall be included in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site, except for stand-alone datalogging equipment that may be used by the Commissioning Authority.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. General:

3.1.1. Review plans and specifications of systems to be commissioned. Report to the Engineer any devices that need to be added or any phase of the design which needs to be modified to permit the fulfillment of this contract.

3.1.2. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ):



3.1.2.1. Parties Responsible to Perform IAQ Checks

3.1.2.1.1. CA: performs and oversees checks, inspections and reviews.

3.1.2.1.2. TAB contractor: performs checks using test instruments for tasks under Part C.

3.1.2.2. Prerequisites: CA will perform each check and review as soon as the materials or work is such that IAQ related determinations can be made.

3.1.2.3. Purpose: The purpose of the IAQ check is to minimize the potential for IAQ problems in the facility during occupancy. The CA is not responsible for any IAQ issues during construction, nor for IAQ issues in the occupied part of the facility, if construction is being performed in other parts of the facility.

3.1.2.4. The following tasks will be conducted and documented:

3.1.2.4.1. Submittal Reviews

3.1.2.4.1.1. Filtration and filter type.

3.1.2.4.1.2. Materials that had specifications for emissions rates as part of the contract documents.

3.1.2.4.1.3. HVAC materials that have a potential for airflow erosion, corrosion and microbial contamination (HVAC insulation materials, etc.).

3.1.2.4.2. Static Inspections and Checks

3.1.2.4.2.1. Review the code compliance calculations for accuracy.

3.1.2.4.2.2. Verify that the outdoor air intakes are sized and located according the plans and specifications.

3.1.2.4.2.3. Verify that no outside conditions exist that could compromise the quality of the air entering the outdoor intakes.

3.1.2.4.2.4. Inspect air intakes and exhausts for short-circuiting.

3.1.2.4.2.5. Document any required ductwork cleaning.



3.1.2.4.2.6. Prior to building turnover, verify that final filters are installed; and the coils, inside of units, and ductwork is clean.

3.1.2.4.2.7. Inspect air supply system components to ensure control and minimization of the presence of free and standing water and to minimize microbial contamination (condensate trays, traps, humidifiers, water baffles, mist eliminators and cooling towers).

3.1.2.4.2.8. Verify proper access for cleaning of both sides of coils, condensate pans and/or humidifier reservoirs in all HVAC equipment.

3.1.2.4.2.9. Meet with contractors prior to the start of construction and review any specified manufacturer’s recommended curing, drying and airing procedures (for minimizing emission rates). Document the compliance of the contractors.

3.1.2.4.2.10. When the building is partially occupied during construction, meet with the Contractor and issue a plan in writing for operation of the overall HVAC systems. The plan will describe how the system can be operated at as close to normal operating conditions as possible, to minimize dust and dirt from contaminating the ductwork and coils and polluting the occupied areas, and to prevent damaging moisture migration.

3.1.2.4.2.11. Review TAB reports for consistency with the specifications.

3.1.2.4.2.12. After completion of TAB, review with the TAB contractor, any areas they may consider as being potentially problematic regarding maintaining adequate minimum outdoor air, proper exhaust or room pressure differential.

3.1.2.4.3. Air Flow and Pressurization Checks



3.1.2.4.3.1. Verify that the specified minimum ventilation rates are maintained during all occupied modes of operation, particularly during VAV terminal box turn-down.

3.1.2.4.3.2. Spot-check TAB supply air flow readings in critical areas.

3.1.2.4.3.3. Spot-check the TAB measurements and setup of the exhaust systems for each area. When purging is specified in the contract documents, develop a plan for, and see that the Contractor purges the building prior to occupancy.

3.1.2.4.3.4. Verify that the total building pressurization criteria is met through varying HVAC loads and economizing conditions.

3.1.2.4.3.5. Verify that room pressure differentials are as specified between critical areas (clean rooms, bio-hazards, film developing rooms, chemical storage areas, etc.).

3.1.2.4.3.6. Verify that the design engineer’s specification for interstitial and area pressurization differentials has been met.

3.1.2.4.3.7. Verify that room (building) construction meets with the design intent.

3.1.2.4.4. Verification

3.1.2.4.4.1. Verify that the specified ventilation effectiveness throughout the various areas of the building is being met by: smoke tube testing for airflow patterns, flow hood readings, air contaminant monitoring, or other.

3.1.2.4.4.2. Perform IAQ testing using the following methods, if requested by the owner (surface cultures for microbial contamination, airborne culture testing, CO2 monitoring, VOC monitoring, CO monitoring,



etc.),

3.1.2.4.5. Acceptance Criteria

3.1.2.4.5.1. Unless noted in the requirements, the commissioning agent in concert with the CM will make determinations and interpretations for when IAQ issues are considered to be in compliance with the contract documents.

3.2. Pre-Commissioning and Functional Performance Test:

3.2.1. The pre-commissioning and functional performance test forms that are to be utilized for this project will be included within the Commissioning plan.

3.3. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals:

3.3.1. The following O&M manual requirements do not replace O&M manual documentation requirements elsewhere in these specifications.

3.3.2. Division 15 shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems covered in Division 15 and deliver this documentation to the GC for inclusion in the O&M manuals, according to this section, prior to the training of owner personnel.

3.3.3. The CA shall receive a copy of the O&M manuals for review.

3.3.4. In addition to documentation that may be specified elsewhere, the controls contractor shall compile and organize at minimum the following data on the control system in labeled 3-ring binders with indexed tabs. Three copies of the controls training manuals shall be provided in a separate manual from the O&M manuals.

3.3.5. The specific content and format requirements for the standard O&M manuals are detailed in 15010. Special requirements for the controls contractor and TAB contractor are found Section 15900 and 15825.

3.3.6. Commissioning Authority Review and Approval - Prior to substantial completion, the Commissioning Authority shall review the O&M manuals for systems that were commissioned and to verify compliance with the Specifications. The Commissioning Authority will communicate deficiencies in the manuals to the CM, PM or A/E, as requested. Upon a successful review of the corrections, the Commissioning Authority recommends approval and acceptance of these sections of the O&M manuals to the CM, PM or A/E. The Commissioning Authority also reviews each equipment warranty and verifies that all requirements to keep the warranty valid are clearly stated. This work does not supersede the A/E’s review of the O&M manuals according to the A/E’s contract.

3.3.7. Commissioning Record in the O&M Manual:



3.3.7.1. The Commissioning Authority is responsible to compile, organize and index the following commissioning data by equipment into labeled, indexed and tabbed, three-ring binders and deliver it to the GC, to be included with the O&M manuals. Three copies of the manuals will be provided.

3.3.7.2. Final Report Details. The final commissioning report shall include an executive summary, list of participants and roles, brief building description, overview of commissioning and testing scope and a general description of testing and verification methods. For each piece of commissioned equipment, the report should contain the disposition of the commissioning authority regarding the adequacy of the equipment, documentation and training meeting the contract documents in the following areas.

3.3.7.2.1. Equipment meeting the equipment specifications

3.3.7.2.2. Equipment installation

3.3.7.2.3. Functional performance and efficiency

3.3.7.2.4. Equipment documentation and design intent

3.3.7.2.5. Operator training

3.3.7.3. All outstanding non-compliance items shall be specifically listed. Recommendations for improvement to equipment or operations, future actions, commissioning process changes, etc. shall also be listed. Each non-compliance issue shall be referenced to the specific functional test, inspection, trend log, etc. where the deficiency is documented. The functional performance and efficiency section for each piece of equipment shall include a brief description of the verification method used (manual testing, BAS trend logs, data loggers, etc.) and include observations and conclusions from the testing.

3.3.7.4. Other documentation will be retained by the Commissioning Authority.

3.3.7.5. Warranty requirements.

3.3.7.6. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not commissioning tests).

3.3.7.7. The manual shall be organized and subdivided with permanently labeled tabs for each of the following data in the given order.

3.3.7.7.1. Sequence of operation

3.3.7.7.2. Control drawings

3.3.7.7.3. Points lists



3.3.7.7.4. Controller / module data

3.3.7.7.5. Thermostats and timers

3.3.7.7.6. Sensors and DP switch

3.3.7.7.7. Valves and valve actuators

3.3.7.7.8. Program setups (software program printouts)

3.3.8. TAB Documentation for the O&M Manual:

3.3.8.1. The TAB contractor will compile and submit the following with other documentation that may be specified elsewhere in the Specifications.

3.3.8.2. Final report containing an explanation of the methodology, assumptions, test conditions and the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and column headings.

3.3.8.3. The TAB contractor shall mark on the drawings where all traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the TAB report.

3.3.9. Review and Approvals.

3.3.9.1. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals shall be made by the AE and the CA.

3.3.10. Training of Owner Personnel

3.3.10.1. The CM shall be shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure that training is completed.

3.3.10.2. The CA shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment.

3.3.10.3. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc.

3.3.10.4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.

3.3.10.5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of



equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer’s representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to execute the training.

3.3.10.6. The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being discussed.

3.3.10.7. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference.

3.3.10.8. The training shall include:

3.3.10.8.1. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M manuals.

3.3.10.8.2. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures.

3.3.10.8.3. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.

3.3.10.8.4. Discussion of warranties and guarantees.

3.3.10.8.5. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.

3.3.10.8.6. Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans and manuals in the facility.

3.3.10.8.7. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.

3.3.10.8.8. The format and training agenda in The HVAC Commissioning Process, ASHRAE Guideline 1-1989R, 1996 is recommended.

3.3.10.8.9. Classroom sessions shall include the use of overhead projections, video/audio-taped material as might be appropriate.

3.3.10.9. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all



modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment. The mechanical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Project Manager.

3.3.10.10. Controls Contractor. The controls contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:

3.3.10.10.1. Provide the CA with a training plan four weeks before the planned training according to the outline described within.

3.3.10.10.2. The controls contractor shall provide designated Owner personnel training on the control system in this facility. The intent is to clearly and completely instruct the Owner on all the capabilities of the control system.

3.3.11. Written Work Products of Contractors

3.3.11.1. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial check out plan described below and the filled out start-up, initial checkout and pre-commissioning checklists.

3.3.12. Commissioning Requirements

3.3.12.1. Meetings

3.3.12.1.1. Scope Meeting: Within 90 days of commencement of construction, the CA will schedule, plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team in attendance. Meeting minutes will be distributed to all parties by the CA. Information gathered from this meeting will allow the CA to revise the Draft 2 Commissioning Plan to its “final” version, which will also be distributed to all parties.

3.3.12.1.2. Miscellaneous Meetings: Other meetings will be planned and conducted by the CA as construction progresses. These meetings will cover coordination, deficiency resolution and planning issues with particular Subs. The CA will plan these meetings and will minimize unnecessary time being spent by Subs. For large projects, these meetings may be held monthly, until the final 3 months of construction when they may be held as frequently as one per week. This will be scheduled following the



normal progress meetings.

3.3.12.2. Reporting

3.3.12.2.1. The CA will provide regular reports to the CM with increasing frequency as construction and commissioning progresses. Standard forms are provided and referenced in the Commissioning Plan.

3.3.12.2.2. The CA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team, keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through memos, progress reports, etc.

3.3.12.2.3. Testing or review approvals and non-conformance and deficiency reports are made regularly with the review and testing as described in later sections.

3.3.12.2.4. A final summary report (about four to six pages, not including backup documentation) by the Commissioning Authority will be provided to the CM, focusing on evaluating commissioning process issues and identifying areas where the process could be improved. All acquired documentation, logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications, findings, unresolved issues, etc., will be compiled in appendices and provided with the summary report. Pre-commissioning checklists, functional tests and monitoring reports will not be part of the final report, but will be stored in the Commissioning Record in the O&M manuals.

3.3.12.3. Submittals:

3.3.12.3.1. The Commissioning Authority will provide appropriate contractors with a specific request for the type of submittal documentation required to facilitate the commissioning work. These requests will be integrated into the normal submittal process and protocol of the construction team. At minimum, the request will include the manufacturer and model number, the manufacturer’s printed installation and detailed start-up procedures, full sequences of operation, O&M data, performance data, any performance test procedures, control drawings and details of owner contracted tests. In addition, the installation and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the



actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning authority. All documentation requested by the Commissioning Authority will be included by the Subs in their O&M manual contributions.

3.3.12.3.2. The Commissioning authority will review and approve submittals related to the commissioned equipment for conformance to the Contract Documents as it relates to the commissioning process, to the functional performance of the equipment and adequacy for developing test procedures. This review is intended primarily to aid in the development of functional testing procedures and only secondarily to verify compliance with equipment specifications. The Commissioning authority will notify the CM, PM or A/E as requested, of items missing or areas that are not in conformance with Contract Documents and which require resubmission.

3.3.12.3.3. The CA Commissioning Authority may request additional design narrative from the A/E and Controls Contractor, depending on the completeness of the design intent documentation and sequences provided with the Specifications.

3.3.12.3.4. These submittals to the Commissioning Authority do not constitute compliance for O&M manual documentation. The O&M manuals are the responsibility of the Contractor, though the Commissioning Authority will review and approve them.

3.3.12.4. Start-up, Pre-commissioning Checklists and Initial Checkout: The following procedures apply to all equipment to be commissioned. Some systems that are not comprised so much of actual dynamic machinery, e.g., electrical system power quality, may have very simplified PCs and startup-

3.3.12.4.1. General: Pre-commissioning checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are hooked up and operational. It ensures that functional performance testing (in-depth system checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment receives full pre-functional checkout. No sampling strategies are used. The pre-functional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior to formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system.



3.3.12.4.2. Start-up and Initial Checkout Plan: The Commissioning Authority shall assist the commissioning team members responsible for startup of any equipment in developing detailed start-up plans for all equipment. The primary role of the Commissioning Authority in this process is to ensure that there is written documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been completed. Parties responsible for pre-commissioning checklists and startup are identified in the commissioning scoping meeting and in the checklist forms. Parties responsible for executing functional performance tests are identified in the testing requirements in Section 15990 and here within.

3.3.12.4.2.1. The Commissioning Authority adapts, if necessary, the representative pre-commissioning checklists and procedures. These checklists indicate required procedures to be executed as part of startup and initial checkout of the systems and the party responsible for their execution.

3.3.12.4.2.2. The Commissioning Authority provides these checklists and tests to the Contractor. The Contractor determines which trade is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line item tasks and notes that trade on the form. Each form will have more than one trade responsible for its execution.

3.3.12.4.2.3. The subcontractor responsible for the purchase of the equipment develops the full start-up plan by combining (or adding to) the Commissioning Authority’s checklists with the manufacturer’s detailed start-up and checkout procedures from the O&M manual and the normally used field checkout sheets. The plan will include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections of each procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan.



3.3.12.4.3. The full start-up plan could consist of something as simple as:

3.3.12.4.3.1. The Commissioning Authority’s pre-commissioning checklists.

3.3.12.4.3.2. The manufacturer’s standard written start-up procedures copied from the installation manuals with check boxes by each procedure and a signature block added by hand at the end.

3.3.12.4.3.3. The manufacturer’s normally used field checkout sheets.

3.3.12.4.4. The subcontractor submits the full startup plan to the Commissioning Authority for review and approval.

3.3.12.4.5. The Commissioning Authority reviews and approves the procedures and the format for documenting them, noting any procedures that need to be added/

3.3.12.4.6. The full start-up procedures and the approval form may be provided to the CM for review and approval, depending on management protocol.

3.3.12.5. Execution of Pre-Commissioning Checklists and Startup

3.3.12.5.1. Four weeks prior to startup, the Subs and vendors schedule startup and checkout with the CM, GC and Commissioning Authority. The performance of the pre-commissioning checklists, startup and checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. When checking off pre-commissioning checklists, signatures may be required of other Subs for verification of completion of their work.

3.3.12.5.2. The Commissioning Authority shall observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are multiple units, (in which case a sampling strategy may be used as approved by the CM). In no case will the number of units witnessed be less than four on any one building, nor less than 20% of the total number of identical or very similar units.

3.3.12.5.3. For lower-level components of equipment, (e.g., VAV boxes, sensors, controllers), the Commissioning Authority shall observe a sampling of the pre-functional and start-up



procedures. The sampling procedures are identified in the commissioning.

3.3.12.5.4. The Subs and vendors shall execute startup and provide the Commissioning Authority with a signed and dated copy of the completed start-up and pre-commissioning tests and checklists.

3.3.12.5.5. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the pre-commissioning checklist was actually performed shall initial or check that item off. It is not acceptable for witnessing supervisors to fill out these forms.

3.3.12.6. Deficiencies, Non-Conformance and Approval in Checklists and Startup

3.3.12.6.1. The Subs shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and pre-functional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies are provided to the Commissioning Authority within two days of test completion.

3.3.12.6.2. The Commissioning Authority reviews the report and submits either a non-compliance report or an approval form to the Sub or CM. The Commissioning Authority shall work with the Subs and vendors to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. The Commissioning Authority will involve the CM and others as necessary. The installing Subs or vendors shall correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the Commissioning Authority as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a Statement of Correction on the original non-compliance report. When satisfactorily completed, the Commissioning Authority recommends approval of the execution of the checklists and startup of each system to the CM using a standard form.

3.3.12.6.3. Items left incomplete, which later cause deficiencies or delays during functional testing may result in back-charges to the responsible party.

3.3.12.7. Functional Performance Testing



3.3.12.7.1. This sub-section applies to all commissioning functional testing for all divisions.

3.3.12.7.2. The general list of equipment to be commissioned is found herein. The specific equipment and modes to be tested are found herein.

3.3.12.7.3. The parties responsible to execute each test are listed with each test herein.

3.3.12.7.4. Objectives and Scope

3.3.12.7.4.1. The objective of functional performance testing is to demonstrate that each system is operating according to the documented design intent and Contract Documents. Functional testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the testing process, areas of deficient performance are identified and corrected, improving the operation and functioning of the systems.

3.3.12.7.4.2. In general, each system should be operated through all modes of operation (seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load) where there is a specified system response. Verifying each sequence in the sequences of operation is required. Proper responses to such modes and conditions as power failure, freeze condition, low oil pressure, no flow, equipment failure, etc. shall also be tested. Specific modes required in this project are given herein.

3.3.12.7.5. Development of Test Procedures

3.3.12.7.5.1. Before test procedures are written, the Commissioning Authority shall obtain all requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list,



program code, control sequences and parameters. Using the testing parameters and requirements herein, the Commissioning Authority shall develop specific test procedures and forms to verify and document proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. Each Sub or vendor responsible to execute a test shall provide limited assistance to the Commissioning Authority in developing the procedures review (answering questions about equipment, operation, sequences, etc.). Prior to execution, the Commissioning Authority shall provide a copy of the test procedures to the Sub(s) who shall review the tests for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection. The Commissioning Authority may submit the tests to the A/E for review, if requested.

3.3.12.7.5.2. The Commissioning Authority shall review owner-contracted, factory testing or required owner acceptance tests which the Commissioning Authority is not responsible to oversee, including documentation format, and shall determine what further testing or format changes may be required to comply with the Specifications. Redundancy of testing shall be minimized.

3.3.12.7.5.3. The purpose of any given specific test is to verify and document compliance with the stated criteria of acceptance given on the test form.

3.3.12.8. Documentation, Non-Conformance and Approval of Tests

3.3.12.8.1. Documentation. The Commissioning Authority shall witness and document the results of all functional performance tests using the specific procedural forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms are provided to the CM for review and approval and to the Subs for review. The Commissioning Authority will include the filled out forms in the O&M manuals.



3.3.12.8.2. Non-Conformance

3.3.12.8.2.1. The CA will record the results of the functional test on the procedure or test form. All deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported to the CM on a standard non-compliance form.

3.3.12.8.2.2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of the Commissioning Authority. In such cases, the deficiency and resolution will be documented on the procedure form.

3.3.12.8.2.3. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures. However, the Commissioning Authority will not be pressured into overlooking deficient work or loosening acceptance criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues, unless there is an overriding reason to do so at the request of the CM.

3.3.12.8.2.4. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the Commissioning Authority discusses the issue with the executing contractor. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the Sub accepts responsibility to correct it:

1) The Commissioning Authority documents the deficiency and the Sub’s response and intentions and they go on to another test or sequence. After the day’s work, the Commissioning Authority submits the non-compliance reports to the CM for signature, if required. A copy is provided to the Sub and Commissioning Authority. The Sub corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of correction at the bottom of the non-compliance



form certifying that the equipment is ready to be retested and sends it back to the Commissioning Authority.

2) The Commissioning Authority reschedules the test and the test is repeated.

3.3.12.8.2.5. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the Commissioning Authority discusses the issue with the executing contractor. If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is responsible:

1) The deficiency shall be documented on the non-compliance form with the Sub’s response and a copy given to the CM and to the Sub representative assumed to be responsible.

2) Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are brought into the discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with the A/E. Final acceptance authority is with the Project Manager.

3) The Commissioning Authority documents the resolution process.

4) Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of correction on the non-compliance form and provides it to the Commissioning Authority. The Commissioning Authority reschedules the test and the test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved.

END OF SECTION


AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 15900- 1

SECTION 15900 – AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 1. GENERAL


1.1.1. The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section includes the controls, instrumentation, and associated

piping and wiring required to make the mechanical systems perform as described in these specifications and as shown. Performance and acceptance standards are detailed within.

1.3. Coordination of Work:

1.3.1. The complete control system shall include all control and interlock

wiring. Interlocking of pumps, fans, and air units shall be performed under this section. Provide necessary relays, transformers, switches, etc., required. Power wiring complete from source to motor or equipment junction box shall be provided under Division 16, ELECTRICAL. Coordination of specific power requirements for SCU locations shall be the responsibility of the control manufacturer.

1.3.2. Automatic temperature control valves furnished by this contractor shall

be installed by the project mechanical contractor under the control manufacturer's supervision. Specific piping diagrams shall be submitted with a preliminary damper and valve schedule.

1.3.3. All automatic dampers furnished by the control manufacturer shall be

installed by the project mechanical contractor, or his sheet metal subcontractor, under the control manufacturer's supervision.

1.3.4. Furnish all flow meters and flow switches indicated and necessary to

perform control sequences described. Water flow meters and switches shall be furnished and installed by the control manufacturer. Provisions for installation of devices in piping shall be provided by the mechanical contractor under the control manufacturer's supervision. Specific electrical requirements for flow meters or transmitters shall be coordinated by the control manufacturer.

1.3.5. Division 15 will be responsible to carry out the commissioning

requirements specified in Section 15010, 15850 and other sections referenced in 15850.

1.3.6. The control manufacturer shall cooperate with the project air and water

balancing agency in the performance of their work as required and directed.

1.3.7. After contract award and prior to engineering submittals, the control

contractor shall designate the Project Manager and Project Engineer.



A Project Initiation meeting shall be held with the consulting engineer, and the Owner's representative, and the Contractor's Sales Engineer responsible for the project. The objective of this meeting will be to review the project in its entirety, the control applications and devices applied, and project concept so that both the Owner and the Engineer can provide input prior to the submittal process.

1.4. Review of Materials:

1.4.1. Submit for approval complete schematic control diagrams

supplemented by diagrams, showing system components and control devices correctly located thereon and schematic one-line piping and wiring. Identify items by numbers corresponding with those shown on the contract drawings. All devices and control points shall have their respective identification or address number labeled.

1.4.2. Provide in a book form with hard cover, three copies of complete

operating instructions for the entire Temperature Control System. Include detailed illustrations of each control panel, together with descriptions of each instrument in each panel, their use, their specified or adjusted settings, and applicable temperature control diagrams. Describe each control system including association with apparatus and control panel or panels. Include both the schematic, wiring and interconnection diagrams and any additional detail piping and wiring diagrams showing all graphic coding, and terminal numbers for wire or pipe connections. Include forms for each field processing unit and direct digital controller listing; location, addresses, keyboard function codes, hardware, etc. Provide computer programming logic ladder diagrams for the final actual sequences.

1.4.3. The manual and specifications shall be furnished which provide full

and complete coverage of the following subjects.

1.5. Operational Requirements:

1.5.1. This document shall describe, in concise English terms, all the functional and operational requirements for the system and its functions that have been established. It shall not require knowledge of digital processor programming techniques or control system theory.

1.6. System Operation:

1.6.1. Complete guidance and procedures for operation of the system,

including required actions at each operator position; operation of computer peripherals; input and output formats and procedures; and emergency, alarm, and failure recovery procedures. Step-by-step instructions for system startup, backup equipment operation, and execution of all system functions and operating modes shall be provided.



1.7. Functional Description:

1.7.1. Detailed documentation, in language readily understandable to

engineering personnel, of the theory of operation, design philosophy, and specific functions of the system. Full details of data communications, including data types and formats, data processing and disposition, data like components and interfaces, and operator test or self-test if data link integrity for all system components and computer peripherals during each system function and operating mode shall be provided. Hardware and software functions, interfaces, and requirements shall be explicitly detailed for all system components in all system functions and operating modes. Person-machine interactions shall be functionally described as required to supplement data called for in the preceding paragraph in providing a complete system description. Known or established constraints on system operation shall be fully described. Any operating procedures currently implemented or planned for implementation in an automatic mode shall be stated and described.

1.8. Software:

1.8.1. Documentation of the theory, design, interface requirements, and

functions of all software modules and systems for all digital processors shall be provided. This shall include test and verification procedures and detailed descriptions of program requirements and capabilities. All data necessary to permit modification, relocation, or other reprogramming and to permit combination of new and existing software modules to respond to changing system functional requirements without disrupting normal operation shall be provided. Program logic ladder diagrams shall be provided. One (1) copy of all software including object and source code shall be provided on media as directed by owner.

1.9. Maintenance:

1.9.1. Documentation of all user-personnel maintenance on all system

components including inspection, periodic preventive maintenance, fault diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective units shall be provided. This documentation shall include calibration, maintenance, and repair of all sensors and controls, plus diagnosis and repair or replacement of all system and hardware.

1.10. Spare Parts:

1.10.1. Submit a recommended list of spare parts based on the strategy of

minimizing the time the DDC System could be out of service, failure histories of system components, and current cost. The list shall take into account the distances from the installation to the local and regional service organizations as well as normally expected procurement time.



1.11. Service and Guarantee:

1.11.1. On completion of the job, the control contractor shall have completely

adjusted the entire control system. He shall arrange to instruct the "Owner's" designated representatives on the operation of the control system and supply him with three copies of the Control Operating and Instruction Manual. He shall provide laminated and framed as-built drawings of each system, mounted as directed adjacent to equipment controlled. He shall obtain from the "Owner's" representative, a signed receipt that he has received the instruction manuals, and complete instruction of the operating of the control system.

1.11.2. The control system herein specified shall be free from defects in

workmanship and material under normal use and service during the entire warranty period. Warranty period shall begin upon final test and written acceptance of the control systems.

1.11.3. After completion of the installation, the control manufacturer shall

regulate and adjust all thermostats, control valves, control motors, controllers and other equipment provided under this section as required for preventive maintenance for one year from the date of written acceptance.

1.11.4. The control manufacturer will, upon completion of the installation,

during the warranty period, make available to the Owner an annual service agreement covering all labor and material required to effectively maintain the control system after the warranty. Service agreement shall be for a period of one (1) year with the owner's option to renew for an additional one (1) year period.

1.12. Identification:

1.12.1. Identify control wires and compressed air piping with a distinctive

number on a nonconductive tag attached to each end or at junction points or by color coding of that wire or tube. Designate on control diagram the identifying color and/or number or other identifying designation used.

1.12.2. Identify all control equipment and devices, including panels,

controllers, valves, and automatic dampers, firestats, etc. All components in control panels and on apparatus shall be identified with engraved phenolic nameplates cemented or screwed in place. Identify valves with plastic tags. Designations shall match those used on control diagrams and shop drawings.

1.13. Training:

1.13.1. Provide the services of instructors who shall give full instruction to

designated personnel in the adjustment, operation and maintenance of the Control System specified here. The instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter which they are to teach.

1.13.2. The training program shall be accomplished in two phases. The first



phase shall consist of one (1), eight hour instruction period held at the project site prior to the final system test period. The second phase shall consist of on-the-job training and shall consist of at least two (2), four-hour instruction periods at times specified by the owner.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. General:

2.1.1. Provide a complete system of Direct Digital Temperature, Building Automation and Automatic Temperature Control of the electronic/pneumatic type. System shall be an extension of the existing Johnson Controls System. The system shall be complete in all respects including all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary, and shall be installed by personnel regularly employed by the manufacturer.

2.1.2. The control system contractor shall be a direct wholly owned branch of

Johnson Controls and not a representative or distributor.

2.2. Humidity - Temperature Transmitters:

2.2.1. Space humidity temperature transmitters shall be Rotronic Roline L or approved equal by Vaisala Model HMD/W60/70. Range shall be 0 to 85 percent relative humidity, -10o to 50o C temperature range, and 4 to 20 mA output signal. Transmitters shall be installed in a fashion that will enable quick removal for service and calibration.

2.3. Receiver Controllers:

2.3.1. Receiver-Controllers shall be of the two-pipe relay force balance type

with integral gauge ports and shall be provided with gauges to indicated branch and sensor air pressures. Controllers used for controlling temperature shall be provided with thermometers.

2.3.2. All receiver-controllers shall be mounted within control cabinets with

thermometers or indicators mounted in face of cabinet. Receiver-Controllers shall be suitable to receive one, two, or three inputs as required and shall be equipped with set point (internal or external) proportional band authority.

2.4. Low Limit Devices:

2.4.1. Analog Sensor - Duct (Averaging)

Low limit temperature transmitters shall be platinum equivalent RTD averaging elements with 4-20 MaDC output signal. Accuracy shall be +/-1oF. Sensor probe length is minimum ten feet.

2.5. Freezestats:

2.5.1. Freeze protection thermostats shall be of the manual reset type which

will respond to the lowest temperature to which any one foot portion of its 20 foot element is exposed. On multi-coil units, provide a low limit



stat on each coil and wire units in series. For interface in EMS, provide 2 pole freezestats.

2.6. Network Control Units (NCU):

2.6.1. Stand alone DDC Panels shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking,

multi-user, real time Digital Control Processors. Each standalone DDC Panel shall consist of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and input/output modules.

2.6.2. Each Digital System Controller shall perform its assigned control and

energy management functions as a stand-alone unit. These stand-alone capabilities shall include, but not be limited to all closed loop control functions (P, PE, PID, Incremental, Floating, etc.) and all energy management functions. Additionally, control units shall be networked for single point programming and for sharing of point information and control instructions.

2.6.3. Control algorithms shall be available and resident in the Digital System

Controller to permit Proportional, Integral and Derivative control modes in any combination to meet the needs of the application. Other control modes such as incremental, floating or two-position must be available to adapt to job needs.

2.6.4. All control shall be performed in a digital manner using the digital

signal from the microprocessor based controller converted through electronic circuitry for modulation of electric actuators or through transducers to produce the pneumatic signal for operation of pneumatic actuators.

2.6.5. Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own

operating system and databases including:

- Control processes - Energy Management Applications - Alarm Management - Historical/Trend Data for all points - Maintenance Support Applications - Custom Processes - Operator I/O - Dial-Up Communications - Manual Override Monitoring

2.6.6. Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and

outputs:

- Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts - Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control - Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow and position

measurements - Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity

control of primary equipment - Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring



2.6.7. The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the following pre-

tested control algorithms:

a. Two Position Control b. Proportional Control c. Proportional plus Integral Control d. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control e. Automatic Control Loop Tuning

2.6.8. Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of

times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.

2.6.9. The system shall provide protection against excessive demand

situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.

2.6.10. The system shall provide automatic restart. Upon the resumption of

normal power, the DDC panel shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.

2.6.11. The system shall have a library of routines available in firmware that

would be capable of generating additional programs as may be required for specific client requirements.

2.6.12. Each NCU panel shall be capable of supporting an operator's terminal

for local command entry, instantaneous and historical data display, and program additions and modifications.

2.6.12.1. There shall be a provision for both permanently mounting

the standalone DDC panel Operator Terminal, or using it as a portable handheld unit.

2.6.12.2. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall simultaneously

display a minimum of 6 points with full English identification to allow an operator to view single screen dynamic displays depicting entire mechanical systems.

2.6.12.3. The operator functions provided by the DDC panel Operator

Terminal shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

- Start and Stop Points - Modify Setpoints - Modify PID Loop Setpoints - Change Time/Date - Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling - Add/Modify Setpoint Weekly Scheduling - Enter Temporary Override Schedules - Define Holiday Schedules - View Analog Limits - Enter/Modify Analog Warning Limits - Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits



- Enter/Modify Analog Differentials - View Point History Files

2.6.12.4. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to

all real or calculated points in the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the network. This capability shall not be restricted to a subset of predefined "global points", but shall provide totally open exchange of data between the operator terminal and any DDC panel in the network.

2.6.12.5. Operator access at all DDC panel Operator Terminals shall

be identical to each other, as well as identical to the PC of Laptop Operator Workstations. Any password changes shall automatically be downloaded to all controllers on the network.

2.6.12.6. The DDC panel operator terminal shall provide English

language prompting to eliminate the need for the user to remember command formats or point names. Prompting shall be provided of points being displayed, to eliminate the possibility of operator error.

2.6.12.7. A multi-function touchpad shall be provided for point and

command selection, as well as parameter entry. To minimize the possibility of operator error, the DDC panel Operator Terminal shall change and limit touchpad functions based upon an operator's password clearance, the function being performed and types of points being displayed. Screen displays shall clearly indicate only valid touchpad functions.

2.6.12.8. Context-Sensitive Help: On-line, interactive user's "Help"

manuals and tutorials shall be provided. Based upon operator request, the "help" function shall provide general system operating instructions, and specific descriptions of commands available in the currently displayed menus.

2.6.12.9. Identification for all real or calculated points shall be

consistent for all network devices. The same English language names used at PC workstations shall be used to access points at the DDC panel Operator's Terminal to eliminate cross-reference or look-up tables.

2.6.12.10. In addition to instantaneous summaries, the DDC panel

Operator's Terminal shall allow a user to view a Point History file for system points. Point History files shall provide a record of value of analog points over the last 24 hours, at 30-minute intervals, or a record of the last ten status changes for binary type points.

2.6.13. Changes made during setup or normal operation to the Network

Control Unit by the network or central terminal shall not be affected by loss of communication on the communication bus or by a power



outage. 2.6.14. It shall not be necessary to disconnect the communications bus for

communication between the Network Terminal and the Network Control Unit.

2.6.15. The controller shall contain all necessary mathematics, logic, utility

functions and all standard energy calculations and control functions in ROM to be available in any combination for field programming to the unit. These routines shall include, but not be limited to:

2.6.15.1. Math Routines:

- Basic Arithmetic - Binary Logic - Relational Logic - Fixed Formula for Psychometric Calculations

2.6.15.2. Utility Routines for:

- Process Entry and Exit - Keyboard Functions - Variable Adjustments and Output - Alarm Indication - Restart

2.6.15.3. Control Routines for:

- Signal Compensation - Loop Control - Energy Conservation - Timed Programming

2.6.16. Final field programs shall be stored in battery backed up RAM, or

stored on tape drive. 2.6.17. The NCU shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion

through the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, field controllers, sensors, and actuators.

2.6.18. To maintain long term analog accuracy in the controller sensing

circuits, the NCU shall sense the voltage being supplied to the resistance sensing element and through firmware compensate for power supply changes due to long-term drift or drift due to ambient temperature change at the power supply.

2.6.19. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly

shutdown of all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.

Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically



resume full operation without manual intervention.

Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS-232C port, or via telephone line dial-in.

2.6.20. Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics,

communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device.

2.6.21. All variables shall be identified as being reliable or unreliable. When a

calculation is required to see a value (sensed or calculated), which is identified as being unreliable, the unreliable data value will flash. The calculation will use a default value programmed into the unit.

2.6.22. The DDC panel shall provide local status indication for each binary

input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.

2.6.23. The NCU shall be an approved U.L. system, with U.L. listing as

Signaling System. 2.6.24. Programming the NCU when it is used as a stand-alone system shall

be accomplished with a Portable Programming Unit (PPU). The PPU shall include a digital tape unit or P.C. Computer for loading remotely generated program tapes into the controller. The PPU shall not be furnished under this Contract.

2.6.25. As indicated in the point schedule, the operator shall have the ability to

manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC panel via local, point discrete, onboard hand/off/auto operator override switches for binary control points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel is powered or not.

DDC panels shall monitor the status or position of all overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC panels shall also collect override activity information for daily and monthly reports.

2.6.26. Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data

communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel mounted or portable DDC panel Operator's Terminals. Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers, or network terminals.

2.6.27. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all

network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress



induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signal wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code.

2.7. Application Specific Controllers:

2.7.1. Each Standalone DDC Controller shall be able to extend its

performance and capacity through the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs).

2.7.2. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of

performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.

2.7.3. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating

system and data bases including:

- Control Processes - Energy Management Applications - Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)

2.7.4. The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through any network-resident PC workstation, or any PC or network terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network.

2.7.5. Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the temporary

use of a portable service terminal. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Display temperatures 2. Display status 3. Display setpoints 4. Display control parameters 5. Override binary output control 6. Override analog setpoints 7. Modification of gain and offset constants

2.7.6. Powerfail Protection: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the controller.

2.7.7. Application Specific Controller types provided under this contract shall

be:

2.7.7.1. AHU Controllers:

a. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion:



- Large Air Handling Units - Mixed Air-Single Path - Mixed Air-Dual Path - Single Path - Dual Path

b. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point

input and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.

c. AHU Controllers shall have a library of control routines

and program logic to perform the sequence of operation as specified in the Execution portion of this specification.

d. Occupancy-Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control:

Each AHU Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall automatically select either Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions.

e. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each AHU

Controller shall automatically and continuously, maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored.

f. Alarm Management: Each AHU Controller shall perform

its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.

2.8. Operator Interface:

2.8.1. Basic Interface Description:

2.8.1.1. Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator

Workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting, English language point identification, and industry standard PC application software.

The operator interface shall minimize the use of a typewriter style keyboard through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device, and "point and click" approach to menu selection. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change setpoints from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device.

2.8.1.2. Graphical and Text-Based Displays: At the option of the

user, Operator Workstations shall provide consistent



graphical or text-based displays of all system point and application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all workstations.

2.8.1.3. Multiple, Concurrent Displays: The Operator Interface shall

provide the ability to simultaneously view several different types of system displays in overlapping windows to speed building analysis. For example, the interface shall provide the ability to simultaneously display a graphic depicting an air handling unit, while displaying the trend graph of several associated space temperatures to allow the user to analyze system performance. If the interface is unable to display several different types of displays at the same time, the FMS contractor shall provide at least two operator stations.

2.8.1.4. Password Protection: Multiple-level password access

protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. a. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator

devices, including portable or panel-mounted network terminals. Any additions or changes made to password definition shall automatically cause passwords at all DDC panels on a network to be updated and downloaded to minimize the task of maintaining system security. Users shall not be required to update passwords for DDC panels individually.

b. A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported:

- Level 1 = Data Access and Display - Level 2 = Level 1 + Operator Overrides - Level 3 = Level 2 + Database Modification - Level 4 = Level 3 + Database Generation - Level 5 = Level 4 + Password Add/Modification

c. A minimum of 50 passwords shall be supported at each

DDC panel. d. Operators will be able to perform only those commands

available for their respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device, including portable or panel mounted devices, shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.

e. User-defineable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60

minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line.



2.8.1.5. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the

operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Start-up or shutdown selected equipment b. Adjust setpoints c. Add/Modify/Delete time programming d. Enable/Disable process execution e. Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point f. Enable/Disable Totalization for each point g. Enable/Disable Trending for each point h. Override PID Loop setpoints i. Enter temporary override schedules j. Define Holiday Schedules k. Change time/date l. Enter/Modify analog alarm limits m. Enter/Modify analog warning limits n. View limits o. Enable/Disable Demand Limiting for each meter p. Enable/Disable Duty Cycle for each load

2.8.1.6. Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated

automatically or manually, and directed to either CRT displays, printers, or disk files. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports:

a. A general listing of all points in the network b. List all points currently in alarm c. List of all off-line points d. List all points currently in override status e. List of all disabled points f. List all points currently locked out g. List of all items defined in a "Follow-Up" file h. List all Weekly Schedules i. List all Holiday Programming j. List of Limits and Deadbands

Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user-selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system information.

2.9. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays:

2.9.1. Color graphic floor plan displays, and system schematics for each

piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems, and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided as specified in the Execution portion of this specification to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition.



2.9.1.1. System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text-based commands.

2.9.1.2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values,

humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without the operator intervention.

2.9.1.3. Windowing: The windowing environment of the PC Operator

Workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze total building operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.

2.9.1.4. Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software

shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. a. The FMS contractor shall provide libraries of pre-

engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.

b. The graphic development package shall use a mouse

or similar pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following:

- Define symbols - Position and size symbols - Define background screens - Define connecting lines and curves - Locate, orient and size descriptive text - Define and display colors for all elements - Establish correlation between symbols or text

and associated system points or other displays.

c. Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system, building layout, or any other logical grouping of points which aids the operator in the analysis of the facility.

To accomplish this, the user shall be able to build graphic displays that include point data from multiple DDC panels, including application specific controllers used for DDC unitary or VAV terminal unit control.

2.10. System Configuration and Definition:



2.10.1. All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy

management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control.

2.10.1.1. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment

and documentation necessary to allow an operator to independently perform the following functions:

a. Add/Delete/Modify Standalone DDC Panels b. Add/Delete/Modify Operator Workstations c. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers d. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated

point parameters, and tuning constants e. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each

point f. Add/Delete/Modify control loops g. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications h. Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar-based

programming i. Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point j. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every

point k. Add/Delete/Modify custom control processes l. Add/Delete/Modify any and all graphic displays,

symbols, and cross-references to point data m. Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition n. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords o. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages

2.10.1.2. Definition of operator device characteristics, DDC panels, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed through fill-in-the-blank templates and graphical programming approach.

2.11. Temperature Sensors: (Water Systems)

2.11.1. Temperature sensors for chilled and hot water systems shall have a

time constant response of less than three seconds to a temperature change of 1.0 degree. Sensors shall be coupled with Industrial grade adjustable span transmitters to achieve overall accuracy of plus or minus 0.10 degrees F.

2.11.2. Analog Sensor - Liquid Immersion Temperature

Temperature sensors for chilled, condenser, and hot water systems shall have a constant response of less than three seconds to a temperature change of 1.0oF. The sensor assembly, platinum RTD sensing element and transmitter shall provide the following range with accuracy specified: +32oF to 122oF, +/- .5oF. 2.11.2.1. Sensors installed in pipes shall be installed in thermometer

wells of bronze or stainless steel materials. Heat transfer



compounds shall be compatible with the sensor. Compression type fittings between sensors and thermometer wells are acceptable.

2.12. Temperature Sensors: (Air Systems)

2.12.1. Temperature sensors shall be RTD type. Sensors shall have a time

constant response of less than three seconds to a temperature change of 1.0 degree. Sensors shall be coupled with industrial grade adjustable span transmitters to achieve the following range with the accuracy specified: +10 degrees to +100 degrees F, plus or minus 1.0 degrees F. Sensors shall be suitable for insertion into air ducts and have a minimum insertion of 6". Sensors on all steam or liquid lines shall have an isolation valve between each sensor and its pressure source.

2.13. Differential Pressure Sensors:

2.13.1. Pressure sensors shall have adjustable high and low limits and be

suitable for operation in an ambient temperature range of 30 to 140 degrees F. Accuracy shall be within one percent of full scale. Operating range shall be adjustable. Provide three valve manifolds for isolation.

2.14. Pressure Differential Switches:

2.14.1. Pressure sensing elements shall be bellows or diaphragm type,

corrosion resistant. Units shall have adjustable range and differential pressure settings. Pressure sensor switches shall be snap action type with contacts rated at 120 volts, 15 amps AC. Sensor assembly shall operate automatically and reset automatically when conditions return to normal. Differential pressure switches shall be used to prove flow in air systems where required.

2.15. Digital System Output Transducers:

2.15.1. Provide electric to pneumatic transducers responding to the pulse

width modulating signals from the controller. Dual solenoid transducers shall be used on all modulating loops. Dual solenoids shall produce a constant volume output and shall be equipped with a relay to eliminate the possibility of varying volumes and pressure leaks affecting controllability. Single solenoids shall be used on two-position loops.

2.16. Electronic Flow Transmitter:

2.16.1. The electronic flow transmitter shall be capable of receiving signals of

total and static pressure from a flow element, of amplifying, and scaling to produce a 4-20 MADC or 2-10 VDC output signal linear and sealed to air volume or velocity.

2.16.2. Calibrated spans: 0 to 896 fpm up to 5664 fpm, in eight flow range

increments.



2.16.3. Performance Characteristics:

2.16.3.1. Reference accuracy (include non-linearity, hysteresis, and non-repeatability): +/- 1% full scale.

2.16.3.2. Output signal: 4 - 20mA or 2-10 VDC 2.16.3.3. Temperature Effects: +/- .033% full scale/oF between 40oF

to 100oF range. Original calibration at 70oF. 2.16.3.4. Power Supply: 24 VDC unregulated. 2.16.3.5. The transmitter shall not be damaged by over-pressurization

up to 200 times greater than span, shall be furnished with a factory calibrated span. The transmitter shall be housed in a stainless steel case with external signal tubing, power and output signal connections.

2.16.4. The electronic differential pressure transmitter shall be Air Monitor

Corporation, Veltron DPT-2500-Plus with automatic zeroing or approved equal.

2.17. Gauges and Thermometers:

2.17.1. Provide air gauges for all pneumatic outputs except room thermostats.

Also provide gauges to show position of all damper motors and valve operators. Use stem mounted type two inches or larger in diameter.

2.17.2. Duct thermometers shall be self-indicating type, liquid filled, minimum

3-1/2 inch dial. Provide remote bulb type with sensing element located near center point of air stream. Range shall be suitable for duty intended with dial graduations in one or two degree increments. Accuracy shall be ± one percent of full scale range.

2.17.3. Provide suitable mounting bracket for each thermometer and bulb.

2.17.4. Pipe thermometers shall be similar with wells for temperature sensing

elements. Wells shall be brass copper or stainless steel suitable for 125 psi.

2.18. Control Valves:

2.18.1. Valves shall have body, disc, stem, and stuffing box designed for 150

percent of the piping system's working pressure but in no case less than 150 pounds per square inch. For valves with 1-1/2 inch bodies or smaller, use brass or bronze type with screwed or union ends or flare connections. For valves from 2 inches to 3 inches, inclusive, use brass or bronze body type as specified for smaller valves, or iron body type specified for larger valves. For valves with 4 inch bodies and larger, use iron body type with brass or bronze trim and flanged ends. Provide visible position indicators on all automatic valves.

2.18.2. For valves controlling fluids hotter than 210 degrees F, construct all

internal trim, such as seats, springs, etc., of stainless steel. For



nonmetallic parts of hot water control valves, such as packings, glands, gaskets, etc., construct of material suitable for a minimum continuous operating temperature of 250 degrees F or 50 degrees F above the system design temperature, whichever is higher.

Valves shall have bronze seats and plugs with stainless steel discs and stems for steam control less than 35 psig. For steam control above 35 psig valves shall be all stainless steel trim.

2.18.3. All two-way valves shall provide tight shut-off when in the closed

position. 2.18.4. Provide limiting device to restrict valve travel where required to

maintain system flow characteristics. 2.18.5. Two-way modulating valves shall use V-port skirts and tapered plugs

or equivalent to provide equal percentage control of liquid and linear control of steam.

2.19. Operators for Valves and Dampers:

2.19.1. Use devices which are quiet in operation and which in the event of

power failure, will "fail safe" by spring action in either the normally open or normally closed position as required for freeze, moisture, smoke, or fire protection.

2.19.2. In general, where operators are sequenced with other operators they

shall be provided with positive positioning relays having adjustable operating ranges and starting points to permit adjustment of the control sequence as required by the operating characteristics of the system. However, where operators for sequencing valves are located in confined spaces within terminal units, springs with preselected ranges to provide necessary sequencing may be used.

2.19.3. Use nonferrous metal bellows or deeply corrugated bellows or

diaphragms of reinforced neoprene, approved rubber composition, or other approved elastomer, suitable for continuous or intermittent operation in the ambient atmosphere at the operator location.

2.19.4. Pilot positioners shall be field adjustable type to suit the equipment

served. 2.19.5. Damper operators shall be piston type with adjustable spring and

stroke and shall be of proper size to meet the power requirements as determined by the control manufacturer. Provide a minimum of one (1) operator per damper module.

2.20. Tubing:

2.20.1. Except as otherwise specified, all pneumatic tubing shall be copper

minimum size 1/4 inch. Tubing may be soft temper in concealed areas and shall be hard temper where exposed. Within control cabinets and above accessible suspended ceilings only, tubing may be polyethylene. Control tubing shall not be run exposed in finished



spaces or run in poured concrete floor slabs. Tag all tubing as hereinbefore specified. Fittings for copper tubing shall be solder joint type brass or copper except at connections to control units where compression type may be used. Tubing above lift out ceilings shall be type FR Poly. Install tubing as hereinafter specified.

2.21. Control Panels:

2.21.1. Control panels shall be fully enclosed cabinets, all steel construction

and shall meet the requirements of NEMA 1 enclosures. Cabinets shall have hinged door with locking latch. All cabinet locks shall have common key. Provide means of storing control system instructions inside cabinet for future reference. Final as-built control diagrams shall be laminated, and mounted adjacent to panels. Cabinet shall be finished with two coats of enamel in the manufacturer's standard colors. Panels shall be recessed, wall-mounted or free-standing as indicated and located where indicated on the drawings or directed.

2.21.2. Consolidate within control panels all digital system controllers and

devices of the control system other than those controls which by their use must be installed elsewhere. Those devices within panels shall include, but not be limited to, receiver controllers, switches, relays, PE and EP switches, and controllers.

2.21.3. Identify by a nameplate each piece of equipment on or in the panel.

Use nameplates of either plastic or metal and either attach to the panel or make integral with it. Cut lettering into the plate to a depth of not less than 1/64 inch and fill groove with a contrasting color of enamel or lacquer or by use of a laminated material. Use of plastic tape with embossed letters or painting of lettering directly on the surface of the plate or panel is not permitted.

2.21.4. The control panels shall include those gauges, pilot lights, and

switches which are indicated to be thereon.

2.22. Fire and Smoke Control Devices:

2.22.1. Provide detection devices as required by NFPA Standards 96 and 90A. Provide detectors in accordance with the requirements of Division 16.

2.22.2. Smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting the visible and invisible

products of combustion using the ionization chamber principal. Use detectors having no moving parts. Products of combustion upon entering the chamber change the resistance of the ionized field. The change in potential is detected and amplified electronically thereby transmitting a signal to stop equipment and sound an alarm. It must be possible to check the sensitivity of the detector.

2.22.3. Provide a detector to hold a signal of fire or smoke until manually

reset. Detectors shall be BRK DH1851 with element lengths full width of ducts or plenums in which they are installed. Detectors shall have provisions for signaling the fire alarm system.



2.23. Electric Components:

2.23.1. Unless otherwise specified, for low voltage circuits, use NFPA 70 Type T, TF, TW, THW, THWN, R, RH, RF-2, or FF-2 of 20 gauge and larger except low voltage dc and electronic circuits carrying less than 0.5 amperes cables of 2 or more conductors, not smaller than 22 gauge if not shielded, may be used in lieu of individual wires. Use shielded cables carrying circuits sensitive to external fields. Terminate cables in push-on, solder or screw type terminal strips. Do not tap cables at intermediate points.

2.23.2. Provide E.M.T. raceway systems for all wiring in accordance with

NFPA 70, and Electrical Specification, Division 16. 2.23.3. Relays shall be open contact, mercury tube or electronic type with

dust-proof enclosures having capacity suitable for the load controlled. 2.23.4. Provide all necessary wiring, relays, contacts, etc., to prevent nuisance

alarms of alarm points during "Off," "Unoccupied" or "Test" modes. 2.23.5. Manual transfer switches shall have operating levers and index plates

showing switch positions and names of apparatus controlled or other designations required.

2.23.6. Gradual switches shall be rotary type with operating knobs, pointers,

dials and nameplates. Provide the same proportioning action as specified for pneumatic controllers.

2.23.7. Transformers other than those used in bridge circuits shall have

primaries wound for the available current and secondaries wound for the correct control circuit voltage. Size to have capacity to operate simultaneously all apparatus served and in addition be capable of carrying a 25 percent overload for one hour. Enclose transformer in a steel cabinet with conduit connections, and provide a disconnect switch on the primary side, and a fuse cut-out on the secondary side.

2.23.8. Pilot lights shall be two-bulb design low voltage type, minimum 20,000

hour life, unless noted otherwise. 2.23.9. Operate electric and electronic mechanical controls at maximum of

120 volts or less. Where not provided under Division 16, Electrical, provide voltage transformers and isolating relays where control system must operate at voltage other than that of line voltage.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. Tests:

3.1.1. Pressure test control air piping with a system operating pressure exceeding 20 psi at not less than 150 pounds per square inch. Pressure test control air piping of 20 psig and less at 50 psig. Maintain pressure for one hour without pumping.

3.1.2. A correction of the final pressure of not more than 1/2 psi for each 5



degrees F change in average ambient temperature during the test is permitted. Correct leaks by remaking the joints and not by caulking.

3.1.3. After test and before connecting instruments, purge tubing to eliminate

loose scale, dirt and moisture. 3.1.4. Conduct resistance tests on conductors and equipment as specified

under Electrical Work, Division 16.

3.2. Acceptance Test:

3.2.1. System Operation:

3.2.1.1. Upon completion of the installation, completely adjust, calibrate and make ready for use thermostats, valves, damper motors, relays, and other controls installed under this section and verify by demonstration that the systems are operating properly in accordance with contract requirements and the manufacturer's most recent published data.

3.3. Wiring:

3.3.1. It shall be the responsibility of the temperature control contractor to

completely install all electrical work for the control systems as herein specified and described on the control drawings. Coordinate same with Electrical Contractor for extent of such work provided by that contract.

3.3.2. Wiring shall be performed in accordance with the applicable provisions

of Division 16, Electrical Work. All temperature control wiring shall be run in E.M.T. raceway and in accordance with Division 16. Provide power source and grounding as recommended by DDC manufacturer.

3.3.3. Enclose in steel cabinets or in panels electrical relays, terminal strips,

and miscellaneous devices that are not mounted on duct or piping systems.

3.4. Dampers:

3.4.1. Mount dampers with the pivot rods in a horizontal position. Where

suitable, thrust bearings are provided, damper blade pivot rods may be in a position other than horizontal.

3.4.2. Mount operator outside of the duct. Mount on support plates that are

completely outside the insulation and lagging. On casings or ducts handling cold air, install support plates in a manner that will prevent condensation on damper operator or on supports.

3.5. Tubing:

3.5.1. All pneumatic tubing shall be independently supported from the

building structure. Install tubing side by side, where feasible, neatly arranged, but not bundled in a way that would prevent lines being traced. Locate in a manner in which tubing will not interfere with or



require its removal for servicing of equipment, except for the tubing serving that item of equipment which is an integral part of the control system. Do not support tubing from or interfere with devices or supports needed to service equipment. Run exposed tubing parallel to the building walls, partitions, ceilings and floors. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality; careless or unsatisfactory work shall be removed or replaced at the direction of the Architect.

3.6. Temperature Sensors:

3.6.1. Temperature sensor assemblies shall be readily accessible and

adaptable to each type of application in such a manner as to allow for quick, easy replacement and servicing without special tools or skills.

3.6.2. Outdoor installation shall be of weatherproof construction in NEMA-12

enclosures. 3.6.3. Mount sensors in ducts in locations to sense the correct temperature of

the air only and do not locate in dead air spaces or positions obstructed by ducts, equipment, etc. The location shall be as approved. When an extended surface element is required to properly sense the average temperature it shall be securely mounted within the duct in an approved manner and shall be positioned to measure the best average temperature. Thermally isolate elements from brackets and supports to respond to air temperature only. Securely seal ducts where elements penetrate ducts. Wiring connections shall be provided that enable quick removal for service.

3.6.4. Provide all sensors measuring temperatures in pipes larger than one

inch in diameter, except as noted herein, or in pressure vessels, with wells properly fabricated for the service. Wells shall be non-corrosive to the medium being measured and shall have sufficient physical strength to withstand all (include test) pressures and velocities to which they are subjected. Install wells in the piping at elbows where piping is smaller than the length of the well to effect proper flow across the entire area of the well. Install wells either looking up-stream or down-stream. Provide suitable thermal transmission material within the well to speed the response of temperature measurement. Provide wells with sealing units to contain the thermal transmission material and allow for each removal. Well shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of line-size-pipe normal flow area. The location of installation shall be as approved. No wiring connections are to be provided to these devices. A mercury thermometer with well should be provided near each sensor.

3.7. Static Pressure Sensors:

3.7.1. Sensors installed outdoors shall be installed in NEMA-3R enclosure. 3.7.2. Sensors shall be installed in NEMA-12 enclosures and are to be

corrosion resistant throughout.

3.8. Commissioning Responsibilities – Controls Contractor:



3.8.1. With respect to HVAC commissioning, the controls contractor shall:

3.8.1.1. Include cost for commissioning requirements in the quoted price.

3.8.1.2. Review design for controllability with respect to equipment

selected for the project;

3.8.1.2.1. Review and confirm in writing that a proper hardware specification exists to permit functional performance testing as required by specification and sequence of operation.

3.8.1.2.2. Review and confirm in writing that proper

safeties and interlocks are included in design.

3.8.1.2.3. Ensure the proper sizing of control valves and actuators, based on design pressure drops. Ensure that control valve authority will result in capacity control as specified. Include valve sizing and authority information in submittal to mechanical engineer.

3.8.1.2.4. Ensure the proper sizing of control dampers.

Ensure damper authority to control air flows as specified. Review and confirm in writing proper damper positioning for mixing to prevent stratification. Ensure correct actuator vs. damper movement for smooth operation. Include damper sizing, control authority and actuator selection data in submittal to mechanical engineer.

3.8.1.2.5. Ensure the proper selection of sensor ranges,

and include data with submittal to mechanical engineer.

3.8.1.2.6. Clarify all questions concerning sequences of

operation with the mechanical engineer.

3.8.1.3. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CA.

3.8.1.4. Provide the following submittals to the CA for review;

3.8.1.4.1. Hardware and software submittals. 3.8.1.4.2. Control panel construction shop drawings.

3.8.1.4.3. Diagrams showing all control points, sensor

locations, point names, actuators, controllers and where necessary, points of access, all superimposed on diagrams of the physical equipment.



3.8.1.4.4. Narrative description of all control sequences for each piece of equipment controlled.

3.8.1.4.5. Logic diagrams showing the logic flow of all

control sequences.

3.8.1.4.6. A list of all control points, including analog inputs, analog outputs, digital inputs and digital outputs. Include the values of all parameters for each system point. Provide a separate list for each stand-along control unit.

3.8.1.4.7. A complete control language program listing

including all software routines employed in operating the control system. Also provide a program write-up, organized in the same manner as the control software. This narrative shall describe the logic flow of the software and the functions of each routine and sub-routine. It should also explain individual math or logic operations that are not clear from reading the software listing.

3.8.1.4.8. Hardware operation and maintenance manuals.

3.8.1.4.9. Application software and project applications

code manuals.

3.8.1.5. Inspect, check and confirm the proper installation and performance of controls/BAS hardware and software provided by others.

3.8.1.6. Integrate installation and programming scheduling with

construction and commissioning schedules.

3.8.1.7. Inspect, check and confirm the correct installation and operation of input and output field points and devices through documented and signed off point-to-point checkouts.

3.8.1.8. Provide thorough training to operating personnel on

hardware operations and programming, and the application program for the system, in accordance with the O&M staff training program in the commissioning plan.

3.8.1.9. In conjunction with the mechanical contractor, demonstrate

system performance to the CA including all modes of system operation (e.g. occupied, unoccupied, emergency) during the functional performance tests (FPTs). If improper functionality, incomplete work, or other deficiencies affecting system performance are discovered, the FPTs will be stopped by the CA. Those responsible for deficient or incomplete work will be responsible for rescheduling costs.

3.8.1.10. Provide control system technician to assist during system



verification and functional performance testing.

3.8.1.11. Provide support and coordination with TAB contractor on all interfaces between controls and TAB scopes of work. Provide, at no additional cost to the TAB and commissioning agencies, all devices, such as portable operator’s terminals and all software for the TAB agency to use in completing TAB procedures.

END OF SECTION


ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 ‐ 1

SECTION 16010 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 1. GENERAL


1.1.1. The general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. This section describes the general provisions for the electrical work

included in Division 16. This section applies to all sections of Division 16.

1.3. Responsibility:

1.3.1. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all work included in the Electrical Division and the delegation of work to Subcontractors shall not relieve him of this responsibility. Subcontractors who perform work under these sections shall be responsible to the General Contractor. The term "Contractor" is used throughout this Division and shall mean the General Contractor, although the actual performance of the work may be by a Subcontractor.

1.4. References and Definitions:

1.4.1. Following are definitions of terms and expressions used in Electrical

Sections:

Owner: Northwest Hospital Center

Architects: Hord Coplan Macht

Engineers: Leach Wallace Associates, Inc. Provide - "Furnish and install" Directed - "directed by the Architect”

Indicated - "indicated in the Contract Documents" Concealed - "hidden from normal sight"; includes items in

shafts, pipe and duct spaces, and above ceilings Exposed - "not concealed"; Work within Equipment Rooms

and all visible (normal sight) work shall be considered "exposed"

1.5. Standard Specifications:

1.5.1. See General Requirements of the contract.



1.5.2. References to catalogs, standards, codes, specifications, and regulations are latest edition in effect at date of invitation to bid.

1.6. Codes, Regulations and Permits:

1.6.1. Give all necessary notices and obtain all required permits. Pay all fees

and other costs, including utility connections or extensions in connection with the work. File all necessary plans, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Obtain all required certifications of inspection and deliver same to the Architect before request for acceptance and final payment for the work.

1.6.2. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the

latest issue of the codes, rules, regulations, and recommendations of the following bodies, unless otherwise noted:

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) International Building Code (IBC) Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Insulating Cable Engineer Association (ICEA) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Occupational Safety and Health Agency (OSHA) Maryland Occupational Safety and Health (MOSH) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

Baltimore Gas and Electric Co. (BGE) Verizon

Fire Prevention Bureaus of Baltimore County and the State of Maryland

1.6.3. The electrical installation shall be inspected and approved by the

inspection department of the governmental agency having jurisdiction, and certificates documenting approval shall be furnished to the Architect before requests for final payment. The Contractor shall allow inspections at any time and shall not impede or interfere with inspections.

1.7. Materials List and Shop Drawings:



1.7.1. See General Requirements. 1.7.2. Within 15 working days after award of the contract, the Contractor shall

submit to the Architect for approval a list of manufacturers' names of all material and equipment he proposes to provide. In the event any item of material or equipment contained in the list fails to comply with the specification requirements, such item will be rejected. If, prior to the expiration of the fifteen (15) day period of any duly authorized extension thereof, the Contractor fails to submit a schedule of acceptable material or equipment covering the items, the Architect will select the items and such selection shall be final and binding upon the Contractor as a condition of the contract. Rejected items shall be resubmitted within 15 days of receipt of notice of rejection. The Architect will select materials and equipment not submitted in such time.

1.7.3. After receiving approval of equipment manufacturers and prior to

delivery of any material to job site, submit for approval copies of detailed dimensioned shop drawings, together and descriptive specifications and engineering data sheets and catalog cuts showing construction size, arrangement, operating clearances, performance characteristics and capacity of all electrical materials, equipment and systems. Each item of equipment proposed shall be a standard catalog product of the approved manufacturer.

1.7.4. Shop drawings, specifications, catalogs, etc., submitted for approval

shall be properly labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used, section and article number of specifications governing, and Contractor's name, name of job, and date.

1.7.5. Shop drawings, catalogs, pamphlets or other documents submitted to

describe items on which approval is being requested shall contain detailed and specific information which will demonstrate fully that the material, equipment, or system will conform to the contract documents. Each shop drawing, catalog pamphlet, etc. shall be clearly marked in ink to identify the item submitted. Data of a general nature will not be accepted. Any deviations or exceptions taken in the specification by the Contractor shall be noted.

1.7.6. If material or equipment is installed prior to receipt by the Contractor of

pertinent shop drawings marked "No Exceptions Taken" or "Comments Noted," the Contractor shall be liable for its removal and replacement at no extra charge to the Owner.

1.7.7. The acceptance of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from

his responsibility to furnish material, equipment, and systems and to perform work required by the contract documents. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for errors or omissions on shop drawings furnished by the Contractor even though such shop drawings containing errors or omissions are inadvertently accepted.

1.7.8. The Contractor is further advised that the Architect will not act as

coordinator between suppliers and subcontractors. All required coordination shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Refer to other sections of these specifications for additional detailed



requirements for wiring diagrams, schematic diagrams, interconnection diagrams and similar shop drawings for systems and equipment such as:

- Fire Detection and Alarm Systems - Nurse Call Systems - Intercom and Paging Systems

1.8. Contractor’s Use of CAD Files:

1.8.1. At the Contractor’s written request, copies of the Engineer’s CAD files may be made available for Contractor use in connection with the project, subject to the following conditions:

1.8.1.1. Submit written request to the Architect listing the specific

drawings the Contractor intends to use. Provide a specific list of submittals that the files will be used in preparing, and the list of names of subcontractors or suppliers.

1.8.1.2. The Contractor shall request in writing the electronic transfer

agreement. Prior to transfer of files, the Contractor shall prepare a separate electronic transfer agreement for each subcontractor or supplier who will be using the electronic files.

1.9. Operating and Maintenance Manuals:

1.9.1. The Contractor shall assemble four (4) sets of Operating and

Maintenance Manuals for all electrical systems and equipment to be delivered to the Architect upon completion of the work and prior to occupancy by the Owner.

1.9.2. Each copy of the Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be bound

in a durable, hardback binder, with data sheets individually punched or perforated and entered. Data sheets shall be grouped and separated by dividers. At the Contractor's option, the manual may contain heavy manila tie-flap envelopes, punched and bound with data sheets inserted in the envelopes, and with a typed label on each envelope to identify its contents. The manual shall have an identifying label on the front cover and shall include at least the following:

- Index - One copy of the approved materials list. - One copy of each approved shop drawing and

associated data. - One copy of the nameplate data for each motor and

overload protection device. - One copy of each system or equipment manufacturer's

recommended preventive maintenance, if any. - One copy of each panelboard directory typed on a

separate sheet. - One copy of a time-current characteristic curve for each

type of fuse,overload device, circuit breaker or protective relay.

- One copy of each system or component operating



instruction (where applicable). - One copy of short-circuit analysis and overcurrent

protection. - One copy of each performance test. - One copy of all permits obtained and subsequent

records of inspections.

1.9.3. Instructions shall include the name or label, location, and a general description of each system together with specific instructions describing operating modes and routine or emergency procedures required of the building personnel for operating and maintaining each system. A listing of names, addresses, and phone numbers of the service organizations for each item of equipment and a typewritten maintenance schedule for each item of equipment shall be included.

1.10. Guarantee:

1.10.1. Unless otherwise indicated in Division 1 or elsewhere herein, all

material and equipment provided under this division shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one year after date of certification of completion and acceptance of work. All defects in workmanship, materials or performance which appear within the guarantee period shall be corrected by the Contractor on notice from the Architect, without cost to the Owner. In default thereof, Owner may have such work done and charge the cost of same to the Contractor. On phased projects, warrantee shall begin on accepted areas based on a mutually agreed upon acceptance date.

1.11. Site Visit:

1.11.1. Prior to preparing the bid, the mechanical and electrical subcontractors

shall visit the site and familiarize themselves with all existing conditions. Make all necessary investigations as to locations of existing equipment, ductwork, piping, utilities, work to be removed, etc., and all other matters which can affect the work under the Contract. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor as result of his failure to completely familiarize himself with the existing conditions under which the work must be performed.

1.11.2. See Instructions to Bidders

1.12. Drawings:

1.12.1. The drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to indicate the general arrangements and work included in the Contract. They are not intended to show all details of construction or exact location of the work. Consult the architectural and structural drawings and details for exact location of structure and equipment; where same are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect.

1.12.2. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the Architect for the final

locations of all outlets, including lighting fixtures. The contractor shall make minor adjustments to the locations at no extra cost to the Owner.

1.12.3. The Contractor shall carefully examine all contract documents and

shall be responsible for the proper fitting of all materials and equipment



as indicated. 1.12.4. Although the location of materials and equipment may be shown on the

drawings in a certain place, the construction may develop conditions that render this location inaccessible or impractical. In such cases, before fabricating and installing the work, the Contractor shall call the condition to the attention of the Architect for his direction. When requested by the Architect a detailed drawing of the proposed departure due to field conditions, or their causes, shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval. The Architect shall make all final written decisions as to the conditions which require the changing of any work.

1.12.5. Check Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be

installed and field inspect existing conditions.

1.12.6. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations.

1.13. Record Drawings:

1.13.1. The Contractor shall keep accurate records of all deviations in work as actually installed from work indicated. One complete set of contract documents shall be available at the construction site for indicating said deviations. The Contractor shall bring the drawings to each construction progress meeting for review.

1.13.2. When the work is complete, make one (1) complete "As-Built" set of

marked-up prints, certifying the accuracy of each print by endorsement and signature thereon and deliver to the Architect who will, after approval, make one complete set of reproducible "as-built" drawings and deliver to the Owner.

1.13.3. See General and Supplementary Conditions.

1.14. Operating and Maintenance Instructions:

1.14.1. Upon completion of all work and of all tests, Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating the systems and equipment for a minimum period of one day of eight hours, or as otherwise specified. Instruct the Owner's representative fully in the operating, adjustment, and maintenance of all equipment furnished. Instruction shall be divided into two (4) hour sessions, each at a time directed by the Owner.

1.14.2. The instructor shall be factory trained and thoroughly familiar with all

parts of the system or equipment on which he is to give instruction. 1.14.3. During the guarantee period, adjust, calibrate, and service all

equipment provided under this contract.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Materials:

2.1.1. All electrical materials and equipment shall be new, shall carry the label indicating product approval or listing of a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) label when such material, equipment



and/or system are of a type or class listed by a NRTL, and shall be suitable for the conditions and duties imposed on them at the building. Listing and labeling shall indicate compliance with all applicable United States product standards. Approved NRTL’s shall be recognized by OSHA in accordance with Title 29 CFR 1910.7.

2.1.1.1. If a NRTL label is not available from the manufacturer, when requested or required by the local authority having jurisdiction, the equipment shall be tested by an approved electrical testing company in accordance with NEC at no additional cost to the Owner. Submit data indicating compliance with standards prior to installation. The description, characteristics, and requirements of materials to be used shall be in accordance with qualifying conditions established in the following sections.

2.1.2. See Division 1 - General Requirements. 2.1.3. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the

manufacturers' name plate, giving name of manufacturer, description, size, type, serial or model number, electrical characteristics, etc., in order to facilitate the maintenance or replacement. The name plate of a subcontractor or distributor will not be acceptable.

2.1.4. In specifying materials, four general procedures are used. The four

classifications are as follows:

2.1.4.1. GROUP 1: When the material or equipment is specified by name or other identifying information and one name brand only is used, it is considered that the use of that particular item is essential to the project, and the Contractor shall base his proposal on the cost of that item.

2.1.4.2. GROUP 2: When the material or equipment is specified

by brand name and other identifying information and two or more brand names are given, it is considered that any one of the brands so named will perform as desired, and the Contractor shall base his proposal on one of the named brands.

2.1.4.3. GROUP 3: When the material or equipment is specified

with the phrase "...or approved equivalent..." after a brand name and other identifying information, it is intended that the brand name used is for the purpose of establishing a minimum acceptable standard of quality and performance and the Contractor may base his bid proposal on any item which is in all respects equal to that specified and presents essentially the same appearance, size, operation, and performance.

2.1.4.4. GROUP 4: When material is specified as complying with

the requirements of published "Standard Specification" of trade associations, American Society for Testing of Material, government specifications, etc., the Contractor shall base his proposal on any item which can be shown to comply in all respects with the referred "Standard Specification."



2.1.5. It is distinctly understood: (1) that the Architect will use his own

judgment in determining whether or not any materials, equipment or methods offered in substitution are equal to those specified and will fit within the space available; (2) that the decision of the Architect on all such questions of equality is final; and (3) that all substitutions will be made at no increases in cost to the Owner.

2.1.6. Upon receipt of written approval from Architect, Contractor may

proceed with a substitution providing the Contractor assumes full responsibility for and makes, at his expense, any change or adjustment in construction or connection with any work that may be required by the substitution of such materials, equipment or methods. In the event of any adverse decisions by the Architect, no claim of any sort shall be made or allowed against the Owner.

2.2. Nameplates:

2.2.1. All switchgear, switchboard, panelboards, circuit breakers, motor

control centers, motor starters, safety switches, control equipment, panels, transformers, and instrumentation shall be provided with engraved laminated black and white phenolic nameplates with beveled trim. Data and installation shall be approved by the Architect. Nameplate lettering shall be minimum 1/4 inch high etched letters. All nameplates shall be fastened with screws or epoxy adhesive.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. Workmanship:

3.1.1. Each subcontractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of the installation of the work.

3.1.2. Install all electrical equipment in accordance with the requirements of

the NEC, the National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) “Standard Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction" and the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.3. The quality of the workmanship required for each trade in the

execution of its work shall be the finest and highest obtainable in that trade working with the materials specified. Workmanship shall be satisfactory to the Architect and his decision as to acceptable quality if final.

3.2. Equipment Connections:

3.2.1. All equipment requiring electrical service shall be installed and

connected in accordance with the best engineering practice and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2.2. Equipment connections indicated on drawings shall be considered

diagrammatic. The actual connections shall be made to best suit the requirements of each case and to minimize the space used.



3.2.3. All conduit, outlets, wiring and all necessary fittings or accessories for connections to all electrical equipment shall be provided. All equipment ratings shown on the drawings are for the specified equipment. Should equipment of different ratings be furnished, all circuit components shall be adjusted accordingly, at the Contractor's expense, after approval by the Architect. The contractor shall be responsible for confirming the proper size and location of each equipment connection before fabrication and installation of the work.

3.2.4. The contractor shall review lugs and terminal configuration of all

equipment, existing and new, for coordination with installed conductor sizes. Where equipment has lugs that do not permit installation of the conductor size indicated on the drawings, the contractor shall provide adapters or alternately, provide a pullbox in the entering raceway. Within the pullbox, provide reducing lugs and smaller size conductors with ampacity equal to or greater than the overcurrent protective device, in accordance with NEC 240.

3.2.5. The Contractor shall reach an agreement as to the limits of

responsibility of the various trades when connecting to outlets provided by others, and when providing outlets to receive connections by others, so that all work and equipment will be provided with the proper services connected and ready to use.

3.3. Commissioning Responsibilities – Electrical (Division 16) Contractor:

3.3.1. With respect to HVAC commissioning, the electrical contractor shall:

3.3.1.1. Include cost for HVAC commissioning requirements in the quoted price.

3.3.1.2. Review design with respect to providing power to the HVAC

equipment;

3.3.1.2.1. Verify that proper hardware specifications exist for functional performance and sequence of operation required by specification.

3.3.1.2.2. Verify that proper safeties and interlocks are

included in the design of electrical connections for HVAC equipment.

3.3.1.3. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CA.

3.3.1.4. Schedule work so that required electrical installations are

completed, and systems verification checks and functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule.

3.3.1.5. Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation

and performance of all electrical services provided.

3.3.1.6. Provide electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and functional performance testing as required by the CA.



3.4. Waterproofing:

3.4.1. Under no circumstances shall any waterproofing (walls, floor, roofing, etc.) be damaged or penetrated. Should conditions arise which indicate such necessity, notify the Architect. Penetrations required by this contract shall be made watertight.

3.4.2. Roof penetrations shall be acceptable to the Architect, compatible with

the roofing system, and acceptable to the roofing manufacturer or other agent of warranty for the roofing system.

3.5. Cutting and Patching:

3.5.1. Cutting and patching associated with the work in the existing structure

shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Existing surfaces which are damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired or provided with new materials and methods similar to existing adjacent work, subject to approval of the Architect. Structural members shall not be cut or penetrated unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Verify in the field with the Architect. Holes cut through concrete and/or masonry to accommodate new work shall be cut by reciprocating or rotary non-percussive methods. Existing masonry block walls shall be patched with new masonry or gypsum board attached and sealed to both block faces.

3.5.2. Where existing conduits to be removed penetrate masonry walls or

floor slabs, the contractor shall cut the conduits off flush with or below the concrete surface, and patch with non-shrink grout, smooth and level, ready for final finishing. Any patches which are discernable through finishes shall be removed and reapplied. Conduits encased in concrete slabs and walls may be abandoned in place after removal of conductors.

3.5.3. See General Conditions.

3.6. Work in Existing Areas:

3.6.1. Portions of the existing building may be occupied by the Owner during construction, and the electrical systems associated with these portions of the building shall be kept in operation as much as possible. The duration of outages shall be kept to a minimum and they shall be scheduled and approved in advance by the Owner. Where necessary, provide temporary connections as required to maintain service.

3.6.2. In areas to be renovated, remove the entire electrical installation

except those portions indicated to be reused. All unused raceways and wiring exposed after demolition shall be removed back to the nearest point of concealment. Unused wiring shall be removed back to the source of voltage for the unused segment. All electrical equipment removed under this contract and not reused shall be disposed of as directed by the Owner.

3.6.3. Where existing electrical systems pass through renovated areas to

serve other portions of the building, they shall be suitably relocated or modified to avoid conflict with new work. Existing outlet, junction and pull boxes, etc. and equipment in areas to be renovated and requiring



access for service, operation, etc. shall remain "readily accessible" as required by the NEC.

3.6.4. Information describing existing circuits, systems, devices and

equipment is based on the best available information. The existing branch circuit numbers indicated may not agree with the actual space or pole number of the device used to protect the branch circuit, but they shall be made to match by the Contractor who shall rearrange the connections in the panelboard or shall (as part of the Record Drawing documentation) renumber the circuits to match actual conditions. Panelboard directories shall be revised and updated to incorporate all changes in branch circuit numbers.

3.6.5. The Contractor shall verify the exact location and rating of all existing

system components in the field before starting any work.

3.7. Tests:

3.7.1. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall, in the presence of the Architect, operate, test, adjust, and retest if necessary, the complete electrical system. The system shall function fully and completely as designed.

3.7.2. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, supplies, equipment,

instruments and power necessary for testing. The tests shall demonstrate the following to the Architect:

3.7.2.1. That all lighting, power and control circuits are continuous

and free from short circuits. 3.7.2.2. That all circuits are free from unspecified grounds. 3.7.2.3. That the insulation resistance-to-ground of all non-

grounded circuits is not less than one (1) megohm at 1000 volts D.C.

3.7.2.4. That all circuits and equipment are properly connected in

accordance with the applicable wiring diagrams, and are operable by demonstrating the functioning of each control device not less than ten (10) times and by continuous operation of each circuit for not less than one-half (1/2) hour.

3.7.2.5. Measure the ground resistance of the electrical installation

ground system by means of a three point or fall-of-potential method ground test. The resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms as measured by a Biddle "Ground Meter".

3.7.2.6. Voltage and Impedance testing shall be performed from an

approved reference point as defined by NFPA 99.

3.7.2.6.1. Voltage measurements shall be taken between the reference point and exposed fixed electrical equipment with conductive surfaces in a patient care vicinity. Voltage shall not exceed 20mV.



3.7.2.6.2. Impedance measurements shall be made

between the reference point and the grounding contact of 10% of all the receptacles in a patient care vicinity. Impedance measurements shall not exceed 0.2 ohms for a quiet ground systems and 0.1 ohms for all others.

3.7.2.7. All receptacles in patient care areas shall meet the

requirements in NFPA 99.

3.7.2.7.1. Physical integrity of each receptacle shall be confirmed by visual inspection.

3.7.2.7.2. Continuity of the grounding circuit in each

electrical receptacle shall be verified. 3.7.2.7.3. Correct polarity of the hot and neutral

conductors shall be confirmed. 3.7.2.7.4. The retention force of the grounding blade of

each electrical receptacle (except locking-type) shall be not less than 4oz.

3.7.3. All defects shall be repaired at once and the tests reconducted at the Contractor's expense.

3.7.4. For the purpose of these tests, normal and emergency conditions may

be simulated during these tests if approved by the Architect. The services of the manufacturer's factory-trained service engineer shall be provided to inspect the installation of all systems and equipment furnished under this division to assure that it is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, assist with start-up and instruct operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.

3.7.5. Also, the following testing procedure shall be made on all equipment

operating on 480 volts and below:

3.7.5.1. Measure the insulation resistance of all transformer windings, busses, etc. These measurements shall be made before the external connections are completed to the high and low voltage bushings of each transformer.

3.7.5.2. Circuit breakers of frame size 400 amperes and greater,

operating on normal power or equipment branch emergency power, shall be tested utilizing primary current injection. Secondary current injection testing is not acceptable.

3.7.5.3. Circuit breakers of frame size 225 amperes and greater,

operating on the life safety branch, critical branch, or unsegregrated emergency (generator feeds) shall be tested utilizing primary current injection. Secondary current



injection testing is not acceptable.

3.7.5.4. Verify transformer ratings on all tap positions for each transformer. Set tap changer on each transformer on positions required to give the desired secondary operating voltage. Measure load current and voltage at least 30 days but not more than 90 days after project occupancy or closeout, and make any adjustments as necessary.

3.7.5.5. Receptacle circuit voltage drop testing: Contractor shall

determine the (4) branch circuits from each receptacle/small power panelboard that represent the longest installed circuit lengths. Using an approved circuit analyzer or dummy load, the contractor shall measure the voltage drop for the furthest receptacle of each circuit under test.

3.7.5.6. Receptacle testing: Contractor shall test and verify the

correct polarity and grounding of each receptacle, and correct trip and timing of each GFI receptacle.

3.7.5.7. Make voltage build-up tests on all equipment and wiring

with a voltage sufficient to determine that no short circuits exist.

3.7.5.8. Make tests of each motor provided under Division 15 to

measure the actual service parameters while the motor is operating at design duty conditions including steady state full load amperes (FLA), voltage and power factor. Make any adjustments to overcurrent protective devices and motor overload elements as required.

3.7.5.9. Make tests of phase demand load current on each

panelboard serving single-phase loads, at least 30 days but not more than 90 days after project occupancy or closeout. Adjust panelboard branch circuit connections as required until all phase currents are balanced within 10%. Where one or more large single phase branch circuits has load current too great to be balanced by the remaining loads, the contractor shall balance as much as possible and document the condition.

3.7.5.10. All outages for performing tests and adjustments shall be

scheduled and coordinated in advance with the Owner.

3.7.6. Results of the above tests shall show the equipment and wiring meets the requirements of this specification before being accepted by the Architect. Should any of the above tests indicate defects in materials or workmanship, the faulty installation shall be repaired or replaced at once and the tests reconducted at the Contractor's expense. Test results shall be documented and included in the Operating and Maintenance Manual.

3.8. Coordinated Power System Protection:

3.8.1. A fault-impedance diagram, a short-circuit analysis or study, a power



system coordination study, and arc flash hazard analysis, shall be prepared by the Contractor to demonstrate that protective system after devices have been properly calibrated, adjusted, set and tested. These data, including complete descriptive and technical data of all protective devices, diagrams, and studies as required to ensure complete coordination, shall be prepared in conformance with industry practices, standards, or with other technical data approved by the Engineer, and shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer in accordance with submittal requirements.

3.8.2. Scope: The power system protection analyses shall encompass the

distribution system provided or modified under the project, back to all utility or generator sources. Where existing distribution system elements are connected, at a minimum the first connected bus or apparatus downstream of new or modified circuit elements shall be included.

3.8.3. The short-circuit analysis and coordination study shall be performed by

MET Electrical Testing, Coordinated Power Engineering, or other approved agency. The firm performing the short-circuit analysis and coordination shall be unaffiliated with any electrical distribution products manufacturer.

3.8.4. Reports shall be certified, sealed, signed and dated by a professional

engineer licensed to practice engineering in the state where the project is located. Certification shall include declaration of compliance with applicable codes in force for the project.

3.8.5. All adjustments and tests shall be performed by a qualified testing

agency. 3.8.6. Determination of Facts: The Contractor shall coordinate with the

serving utility for short circuit current availability at the site. Use of “infinite bus” utility source as an assumption, in lieu of actual utility availability, is not acceptable without written permission from the Architect.

3.8.7. Fault-Impedance Diagram: The diagram shall be prepared to reflect

the system impedance of power sources available to supply the building or facility, and the impedance of the new power system components for the facility.

3.8.8. Fault Locations and Short-Circuit Current Availability (SCCA): The

fault-impedance diagram shall, as a minimum, show fault locations for each voltage transformation and at each power distribution bus. The SCCA available at each fault location shall be shown in tabular form on the diagram for a bolted line-to-line fault and a line-to-ground fault. The SCCA analysis shall be submitted for review prior to release of electrical equipment for fabrication. No electrical equipment requiring overcurrent protective devices, or having a short circuit withstand rating, shall be released for fabrication prior to the review and approval of the study.

3.8.9. Protective Devices: The time-current characteristics, features, and

nameplate data for each existing protective device, including fuses, circuit breakers, and protective relays shall be determined and



documented when necessary to ensure coordination between existing and new protective devices. New protective devices proposed, including devices with fixed or adjustable time-current characteristics and features, shall demonstrate proper coordination with existing devices and new and related devices required to:

3.8.9.1. Minimize the extent of power outages by the operation of

the primary protective device nearest the load-side fault location.

3.8.9.2. Provide back-up protection on the supply-side of the

primary protective device if the primary protective device fails to operate.

3.8.9.3. To ensure a minimum of a 0.2-second delay between the

operation of the primary and the back-up, or secondary, protective device unless otherwise approved to prevent nuisance tripping.

3.8.9.4. Low voltage switchgear circuit breakers with static trip

units shall be configured with instantaneous trip turned “OFF” wherever practicable, to maximize selective coordination with downstream devices.

3.8.9.5. “I2T” settings, where present, shall be coordinated in the

“OFF”/”OUT” position, to provide enhanced arc flash protection. Where selective coordination requires “I2T” activation, notify the engineer in writing prior to completion of study for direction.

3.8.9.6. Recommended time delay settings for each automatic

transfer switch to prohibit nuisance tripping of emergency power system protective devices, while complying with NEC 517, 620, 700, and 701.

3.8.9.7. Where required by applicable code (emergency systems,

code mandated standby systems, elevators, etc.) systems shall be fully coordinated, including in the instantaneous region. Any overlap of time-current characteristics of successive devices is unacceptable, and where necessary, changes in the distribution devices or system configuration to correct shall be provided at no additional cost.

3.8.10. Power System Coordination Study: The study shall include all data

related to existing and new protective devices proposed as such data relates to the nameplate data, time-current characteristics, and the fixed or adjustable features of the existing or new protective devices. These data shall include:

3.8.10.1. The time-current characteristic curves published by the

manufacturer of the protective devices or equipment having adjustable time-current characteristics.

3.8.10.2. Data published by the manufacturer of circuit breakers or

protective relays which contain installation, operation and



maintenance instructions for calibration, adjustment, setting, and testing of the specific protective device.

3.8.10.3. Composite time-current characteristic curves for primary,

secondary and other related devices, as required to ensure coordinated power system protection between existing and new protective devices or equipment.

3.8.11. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis: Perform calculations in accordance with

NFPA 70E and IEEE 1584, to determine applicable arc flash incident energy at each bus or device. Calculations shall be performed at all significant locations of arc fault energy, including all 480/277 volt busses and 208/120 or 240 volt busses fed by transformers 100KVA or greater. For equipment equipped with a main or input circuit breaker, separate calculations shall be performed on the line and load side of the circuit breaker. Tabulate recommendations for required personnel protective equipment (PPE), and label all equipment with approved labels indicating incident energy and required PPE Level (0-3 or Unsafe).

3.8.12. For all busses with calculated PPE requirement of 3 or higher, provide a

separate tabulation of recommend maintenance settings that will reduce the required PPE to lowest level achievable, while temporarily sacrificing selective coordination.

3.8.13. Circuit Protective Devices: The Contractor shall calibrate, adjust, set and

test each new adjustable circuit protective device to ensure that they will function properly prior to the initial energization of the new power system under actual operating conditions.

3.9. Handling and Storage of Materials:

3.9.1. Proper and suitable tools, equipment and appliances for the safe and

convenient handling and placing of all materials and equipment shall be used. During loading, unloading, and placing, care shall be taken in handling the equipment and materials so that no equipment or materials, including Owner furnished, are damaged. Refer to the General and Supplementary Conditions of the specifications.

3.10. Cooperation with Other Trades:

3.10.1. The Contractor shall have a competent foreman on the premises at all

times to check, layout, and coordinate the installation of the work shown on the drawings and described in the following specifications. He shall provide information regarding locations and sizes of chases and openings and be responsible for the accuracy of such information. The foreman shall lay out and coordinate the installation of all hangers, inserts, sleeves and other work in masonry and concrete in advance of and during construction, giving consideration to the work of other trades to prevent interference in the location of other equipment.

3.10.2. Exact locations of electrical equipment, outlets, conduits, etc. shall be

coordinated with all other trades so that there will be no interference between mechanical equipment, piping, ducts, etc. Where conflicts between the trades result, they shall be resolved by the Contractor to the Architect's satisfaction and at no expense to the Owner.



3.11. Cleaning and Painting:

3.11.1. Thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces of equipment and material and leave in a neat, clean condition ready for painting. Restore and touch-up factory finishes which have been damaged during construction. Finished painting will be performed under another Division.

3.12. Accessibility:

3.12.1. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained,

in fully accessible positions. Equipment shall include, but not be limited to, switches, controllers, circuit breakers, and wiring splices. Where required and where directed, provide 14 gauge steel access panels, Milcor or equal, to suit material in which installed. Doors installed in fire rated walls or shafts shall be labeled and shall match rating of the construction. Door shall be sufficient size to allow access to all components, except minimum size shall be 12" x 12". Doors in kitchen areas and toilet rooms shall be stainless steel or have chrome plated finish.

3.12.2. Equipment deemed inaccessible by the Architect shall be reworked by

the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. All doors shall have cylinder locks operable from same key. Submit shop drawings for approval.

3.13. Equipment Bases and Supports:

3.13.1. The Contractor shall provide all supports, foundations and stands

required for the electrical equipment and shall provide and set all necessary anchor bolts.

3.13.2. Concrete pads shall be not less than (4) four inches high unless

otherwise indicated on the drawings and shall be sized for the specific the equipment base. Exposed edges and corners shall be chamfered and all exposed surfaces shall be finished smooth. Concrete pads shall be of 3000 psi strength and shall be set on concrete floor slabs and properly anchored.

3.13.3. Where equipment is indicated or specified to be floor-mounted, stands

shall be constructed of structural steel sections (or steel pipe and fittings braced and fastened with flanges) bolted to the floor.

3.13.4. Where equipment is indicated or specified to be hung from ceiling or

roof construction, the Contractor shall provide all necessary hanger rods of size and number required by the equipment and all necessary supplemental structural steel sections, securely fastened to the building construction.

3.13.5. Where equipment is indicated or specified to be wall-mounted, the

Contractor shall provide all necessary brackets, constructed of structural steel shapes suitable for the application, securely anchored to the building construction.

3.13.6. All motor-operated equipment, transformers and other vibrating

equipment shall be mounted on rubber-in-shear vibration isolators suitable for the application, unless otherwise specified.



3.13.7. Raceways/feeders serving motor-operated equipment, transformers, or

other vibrating equipment shall be hung with vibration isolators, Mason Type 30N or equivalent by Vibration Eliminator or Korfund.

3.13.8. Where equipment/devices are indicated to be mounted to fire-proofed

structure, the contractor shall provide necessary extensions so that devices are not mounted recessed within fireproofing.


3.14.1. Sleeves shall be provided by the Contractor for the installation of

conduit, etc. The sleeves shall be carefully located in advance of the construction of walls and floors where new construction is involved. Provide all cutting and patching necessary to set sleeves which are not placed prior to construction. All cutting and patching necessary to set sleeves which are not placed prior to construction shall be the responsibility of the trade providing the sleeves.

3.14.2. Sleeves shall be provided for all conduit, etc. passing through concrete

and masonry construction. Caulk the annular space of sleeves with an elastic fire resistant caulking compound to make installation fire, air and water tight.

3.14.3. Fasten sleeves securely in the construction so that they will not

become displaced when concrete is poured or when other construction is built around them. Take precautions to prevent concrete, plaster or other materials being forced into space between conduit, etc., and sleeve during construction.

3.14.4. Sleeves required in existing concrete or masonry walls shall be set and

secured with mortar grout and fast drying bitumastic sealant. 3.14.5. At all sleeves where objectionable noise can be transmitted, at smoke

barriers, at walls above ceilings that extend to underside of the structure of floor above, or at fire rated separations, seal all openings between conduit, etc. and corresponding sleeves to prevent sound transmission and to maintain fire rating. Use U.L. approved resilient sealant for penetration seals. Submit method of sealing for approval. Where watertight sleeves are indicated or required to suit the installation, provide Link Seal rubber seals, manufactured by Enpro Industries, or Metraflex Metraseal, between pipe and sleeves.

3.14.6. Where conduit motion due to expansion and contraction will occur,

provide sleeves of sufficient diameter or permit free movement of conduit. Check construction to determined proper length for various locations; make actual lengths to suit the following:

3.14.6.1. Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions and ceilings.

3.14.6.2. In all other areas, terminate sleeves 1/2 inch above

finished floors unless otherwise noted on the drawings or directed in the field.

3.15. Coordinated Drawings:



3.15.1. Prior to installation of mechanical work in all areas of the hospital

including all concealed and exposed areas (spaces without ceilings), the Contractor shall prepare completely coordinated layout drawings indicating the coordinated work of all trades involved. The drawings shall be a sheet size similar to the contract drawings. All work shall be to scale minimum 1/4" = 1' - 0". The drawings shall include all work shown on the drawings, including equipment (chillers, boilers, air handling units, pumps, water heaters, storage tanks, steam generators, convertors, etc), variable frequency controllers, ATC control panels, terminal units, ductwork, air devices, dampers, piping including sprinkler and plumbing, valves, light fixtures, electrical cable trays, raceways and conduits 2" and larger.

3.15.2. Prior to installation of electrical work in electrical rooms (switchgear,

paralleling gear, generator, substation rooms, etc.), mechanical rooms (chiller plant, boiler plant, fire pump room, etc.), IT rooms, control rooms (boiler, fire command center), and all other spaces where electrical distribution equipment is located including all concealed and exposed areas (spaces without ceilings), the Contractor shall prepare completely coordinated layout drawings indicating the coordinated work of all trades involved. The drawings shall be a sheet size similar to the contract drawings. All work shall be to scale minimum 1/4" = 1' - 0". The drawings shall include all work shown on the drawings, including all electrical equipment (substations, switchboards, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, etc.), all major Division 15 equipment (chillers, boilers, air handling units, pumps, water heaters, storage tanks, variable frequency controllers, ATC control panels, etc.), light fixtures, electrical cable trays, raceways and conduits 2" and larger.

3.15.3. All trades shall be responsible for the preparation of the coordinated

layout drawings. Each trade shall provide written certification that the coordinated drawings have accurately incorporated their work, and that all conflicts are resolved or a solution is proposed on the drawings. The Contractor shall schedule the trades accordingly and shall provide final certification that all coordination has been completed.

3.15.4. No work shall be installed prior to the Architect’s approval of the

drawings. The Contractor shall submit for approval of the Architect within 15 days after the award of the contract a schedule of proposed building areas to be grouped for coordination. Upon approval of the schedule, work may commence in areas of the building upon approval of that area’s coordinated drawings prior to approval of another area.]

3.16. Temporary Electrical Power:

3.16.1. Provide all temporary electric service for power and lighting including

panels, feeders, lighting, outlets, branch circuits, and other similar equipment for required construction.

3.16.2. All temporary work shall be in accordance with the latest OSHA and

MOSH safety requirements and shall be completely removed upon completion of the project.



END OF SECTION


SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEM 26010 ‐ 1

SECTION 16012 – SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEM 1. GENERAL

1.1. Description:

1.1.1. This specification covers design and installation of seismic bracing and anchorage required for conduit, cable tray, bus duct, and equipment. Contractor is responsible for design and installation of seismic bracing and anchorage systems.

1.1.2. Description of systems:

1.1.2.1. Transverse and longitudinal bracing for seismic forces on

suspended electrical systems including conduit, cable tray, bus duct, and equipment.

1.1.2.2. Anchorage of floor and roof mounted electrical equipment.

1.2. Quality Assurance:

1.2.1. Seismic design requirements: provide bracing and anchoring for

equipment, conduit, cable tray, designed, constructed, and installed to resist stresses produced by lateral forces specified under the authority below:

1.2.1.1. IBC 2009, for Seismic Design Category C.

1.2.2. Design and install seismic anchorage and bracing for all floor or roof

mounted equipment weighing 400 pounds or more and all suspended or wall mounted equipment weighing 20 pounds or more.

1.2.3. For this project, the following seismic coefficients shall be used in

calculating the required lateral force:

1.2.3.1. SDS = 0.180 (IBC)

1.2.3.2. SD1 = 0.082 (IBC) 1.2.3.3. Ss= 0.169 (IBC)

1.2.3.4. S1=0.051 (IBC)

1.2.3.5. Site Class: D

1.2.4. Seismic forces shall be presumed to act through the center of mass of

the equipment in a direction that will produce the largest single anchor force.

1.3. Submittals:

1.3.1. Shop drawings and calculations:

1.3.1.1. Layout and mounting detail drawings showing system and proposed brace locations for all systems including pre-



engineered systems. 1.3.1.2. The specific detail for each type of brace or anchor must be

referenced on a plan that identifies the required. Supplying a book of details without referencing the proper detail to a specific location on a plan is not acceptable.

1.3.1.3. Structural calculations for required lateral force level for each

component.

1.3.1.4. All submittals, including pre-approved systems, shall be signed and sealed by a licensed engineer, licensed in the state in which the project is located.

1.3.2. Product data:

1.3.2.1. Technical data on seismic control devices.

1.3.2.1.1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

1.3.2.1.2. Illustrated and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic restraint component used.

1.3.2.1.2.1. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic

restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3.2.1.2.2. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Suspended Bracing Systems:

2.1.1. Acceptable manufacturers:

2.1.1.1. Pre-engineered systems:

2.1.1.1.1. Base: 2.1.1.1.1.1. Unistrut

2.1.1.1.2. Optional:

2.1.1.1.2.1. International Seismic Application

Technology (ISAT) 2.1.1.1.2.2. B-Line



2.1.1.1.2.3. Other manufacturers desiring approval shall comply with Document 00440

2.1.1.2. Custom engineered systems designed using specified

criteria and common building materials.

2.2. Equipment Anchors and Supports:

2.2.1. Drilled-in-place concrete anchors shall have an approved ICBO Evaluation Services Report.

2.2.2. Cast-in-place anchors shall comply with ASTM-A36, ASTM-A307, or

ASTM-F1554-36

2.2.3. Anchors permanently exposed to weather or corrosive environments shall be stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized.

2.2.4. Structural steel for supports: ASTM-A36.

2.2.5. Cold formed metal and connection material: Unistrut or equal.

2.2.6. Any details provided are based on assumed equipment and

arrangement. Contractor shall be responsible for design and acquiring approval for support and anchorage of equipment and arrangement which varies from equipment and arrangement assumed in detail provided.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. General Requirements:

3.1.1. Design and install all bracing and anchoring for equipment, conduit, cable tray, and bus ducts in accordance with the requirements of this specification.

3.1.2. Every run which requires bracing shall have a minimum of two Transverse

Braces and one Longitudinal Brace.

3.1.3. A “run” is defined as suspended pipe, duct or trapeze rack having a minimum 5 foot (1.52 m) straight run length.

3.1.4. Brace spacing shall not exceed the maximum allowable brace spacing as

engineered by the manufacturer or custom bracing designer.

3.1.5. Bracing may be omitted from conduit and cable tray runs less than 5 ft (1.52 m) in length.

3.1.6. Bracing may be omitted from conduit and cable tray runs where rod hung

supports of less than 12 in (305 mm) in length are required.

3.1.6.1. All unbraced suspended utility systems having 2” diameter conduit and larger or systems weighing more than 5 lb/ft shall be installed with a minimum 6 in (152 mm) clearance to suspended ceiling vertical hanger wires.



3.1.6.2. The conduit and cable tray shall be installed such that the lateral

motion of the members will not cause damaging impact with other systems or structural members or loss of vertical support.

3.1.7. A longitudinal brace at a 90 degree change in direction may act as a

Transverse Brace if it is located within 2 ft (610 mm) of the change in direction.

3.1.8. A Transverse Brace may act as a longitudinal brace if it is located within 2 ft (610 mm) of a change in direction and if the brace arm and anchorage have been sized to meet or exceed the requirements of the Longitudinal Brace.

3.1.9. When bracing equipment or a utility system that is suspended from an

overhead deck, brace back to the overhead deck or to the supporting structure supporting the deck. Do not brace to another element of the structure which may respond differently during a seismic event.

3.1.10. Obtain approval from the Structural Engineer prior to attaching to any brace

elements to structural steel or wood framing.

3.1.11. When utilizing cable bracing, tension the cable to remove slack without inducing uplift of the suspended element. Tension seismic bracing system prior to system start up and adjust if necessary after equipment start up.

3.1.12. As a general rule, do not mix rigid bracing with cable bracing in the same run.

However, once bracing has transitioned a 90 degree change in run direction, the bracing may switch from rigid to cable or vice versa if required due to a significant change in overhead deck elevation or to provide an implementable bracing scheme in a congested area.

3.1.13. Install brace members at an angle of 45 degrees from horizontal within a

tolerance of plus 2 1/2 degrees or minus 45 degrees provided the brace length is accounted for in design. Brace angle may be increased to 60 degrees provided the brace spacing is reduced to 1/2 that required for a 45 degree brace.

3.1.14. Seismic bracing may not pass through a building separation joint. Utility

systems that pass through a separation joint must be seismically restrained within 5 ft (1.52 m) from the point of connection. Any hardware designed to accommodate seismic movement across the span of the separation joint shall be installed per manufacturer’s installation and listing instructions.

3.1.15. With approval of the Structural Engineer, utility systems that are suspended

from the overhead deck may be braced to load bearing concrete or CMU (concrete masonry) walls provided that the walls and the overhead decks will respond similarly during a seismic event.

3.1.16. Each layer of a multiple layer trapeze rack shall be braced individually based

on the weight of the individual layer.

3.1.17. Conduit and cable tray constructed of non ductile material (plastic, fiberglass, or no hub cast iron), shall have brace spacing reduced to 1/2 of the spacing allowed for ductile materials.



3.1.18. Where brace elements are through-bolted, the mounting hole in the element is

to be no more than 1/16 in (1.6 mm) in diameter larger than the bolt or threaded rod.

3.1.19. Seismic braces shall directly brace system and not the hanger.

3.2. Suspended Electrical Systems:

3.2.1. Install seismic bracing for all conduit 2 1/2 in (63.5 mm) trade size or greater.

3.2.2. All trapeze assemblies supporting conduits and cable trays shall be braced considering the total weight of the elements on the trapeze. For the purposes of calculating weight, all conduits are to be treated as full.

3.2.3. Brace all trapeze racks which support conduit 2 1/2 in (63.5 mm) trade size or

larger. Brace all other conduit rack and cable tray trapezes having a minimum weight in excess of 10 pounds (4.54 kg), per lineal foot. Include a minimum 10% additional capacity for future additions.

3.2.4. Seismic bracing may be omitted from cable trays and conduit suspended by

rod hung supports 12 in (305 mm) or less in length from the top of the element to the bottom of the structural attachment of the hanger provided lateral motion will not cause damaging impacts to other systems or loss of system vertical support.

3.2.5. All vertical risers involving conduit 2 1/2 in (63.5 mm) in diameter or larger

shall include lateral restraint at maximum 30 ft intervals and at the top and bottom of the riser.

3.3. Floor or Roof Mounted Equipment:

3.3.1. Provide one anchor on each leg or corner. Support with a minimum of three

3/8 in diameter anchors. 3.3.2. Friction shall be neglected when designing anchors for shear.

3.3.3. Vertical seismic forces, when required, shall be presumed to act concurrently

with horizontal seismic forces.

END OF SECTION


BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16110 ‐ 1

SECTION 16110 – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 1. GENERAL



1.1.2. The requirements of Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions shall

apply to all work specified under this Section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. The work covered by this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the installation of a complete system.


1.3.1. Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be firms regularly engaged in the

manufacture of products of the types and sizes required and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.

1.3.2. Code and Standard Compliance: Comply with the applicable

requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to the equipment specified and provide products and components which have been UL listed and labeled. Comply with applicable requirements of NEC for construction and installation of all products specified herein.

1.4. Submittals:

1.4.1. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's product data, etc. in

accordance with Section 16010. 1.4.2. Manufacturer's product data shall include specifications, installation

instructions and general recommendations for each type of material required. Include data substantiating that proposed materials comply with specified requirements for each type.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Raceway:

2.1.1. General: Provide raceway and fittings of the types, grades, sizes and

weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type of service required.



Where types and grade are not indicated, the Contractor shall provide proper selection to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable provisions of NEC for raceway.

2.1.2. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC): RMC shall be steel conforming to ANSI

C80.1, and UL 6. Raceways with integral “quick fit” couplings are not permitted.

2.1.3. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): IMC shall be steel conforming to

ANSI C80.6, and UL 1242. Raceways with integral “quick fit” couplings are not permitted.

2.1.4. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): EMT shall be steel conforming to

ANSI C80.3 and UL797. Raceways with integral “quick fit” couplings are not permitted.

2.1.5. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): FMC shall be steel conforming to UL 1..

“Reduced Wall” flex is not permitted.

2.1.6. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LT/FMC): LT/FMC shall be steel, constructed of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked and double wrapped metal conforming to UL 360, with a liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conforming to NEMA Standard RN1. “Reduced Wall” flex is not permitted.

2.1.7. Fittings for rigid metal conduit (RMC), intermediate metal conduit (IMC)

and electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be steel (no diecast) to match raceway material, set screw (compression for wet locations) and conform to UL 514B, and ANSI C80, Type 2 (concrete tight).

2.1.8. Fittings for PVC externally coated RMC shall conform to UL 514B,

water tight, corrosion resistant, with coating to match the raceway coating.

2.1.9. Fittings for flexible metal conduit (FMC) shall be steel “tite-bite” (no

diecast or set screw) and conform to UL 514B. 2.1.10. Fittings for liquid-tight flexible metal conduit (LT/FMC) shall conform to

UL 514B.

2.1.11. Expansion fittings shall be provided in each raceway crossing a building expansion joint or as required to accommodate expansion and contraction of the raceway. Expansion fittings for RMC and/or IMC raceway shall be OZ/Gedney Co., Type AX or EX or approved equivalent. Expansion fittings for EMT raceway shall be OZ/Gedney Co., Type TX or approved equivalent. Use of non-specified expansion fittings or other means (flexible conduit or expansion loops) is not permitted.

2.1.12. Cable supports in vertical raceway risers shall be provided as shown

on the drawings or as required by the NEC. Cable supports shall be



one piece, plug type, OZ/Gedney Co., Type S or approved equivalent.

2.2. Low Voltage Conductors (600 volts and less):

2.2.1. All wire conductors shall be copper (unless otherwise indicated) with insulation rated for at least 600 V, conforming to UL 83. Bare conductor size shall be as defined by standard American Wire Gage (AWG) numbers and shall not be smaller than #12 unless otherwise indicated. Copper conductors shall have a conductivity of at least 98%. Insulation shall be dual rated NEC type THHN-THWN. Wiring connected to isolated power systems shall be insulation type XHHW-2. Wire shall be manufactured by: Encore Wire, General Cable, Phelps Dodge, Cerro Wire, Industrial Wire and Cable Corporation, or Southwire. All wiring shall be stranded.

2.2.2. Fittings for termination or splicing stranded wire shall be solder-less

and designed for stranded wire, such as screw pressure fittings or compression (indent) type fittings, manufactured by Thomas and Betts, Burndy, or Square D. Splices which occur below grade or those in NEMA 4 junction boxes shall be "Scotch-cast" (a 3M Company product) insulated.

2.2.3. Wire pulling lubricant shall be Electro "Y-ER-EAS" or approved

equivalent, compatible with the specific wiring system application.

2.3. Low Voltage Armored Cable (600 volts and less):

2.3.1. All wire conductors in armored cable shall be copper (unless otherwise indicated) with insulation rated for at least 600 V, conforming to UL 83. Bare conductor size shall be as defined by standard American Wire Gage (AWG) numbers and shall not be smaller than #12 unless otherwise indicated. Copper conductors shall have a conductivity of at least 98%. Insulation shall be dual rated NEC type THHN. The cable shall be constructed with binders and fillers, jacketed with overlapping corrugated [steel][aluminum] painted green for identification of permitted health care facilities use.

2.3.2. Drain/bonding wire shall be #16AWG aluminum strip. 2.3.3. Armored cable shall be type HCF-90 manufactured by AFC

Corporation, or Duraclad AC-HCF by Southwire.

2.4. Boxes and Fittings:

2.4.1. Outlet Boxes:

2.4.1.1. At all outlets of whatever kind, for all systems, provide a suitable box especially designed to receive the type of fixture or device to be mounted thereon, except where otherwise



noted. For recessed fluorescent fixtures, provide fixture outlets with suitable fixture supports of size and kind required for the fixture to be hung. Fixture studs, generally, shall be 3/8 inch.

2.4.1.2. Wall outlet boxes shall be at least four inches square, except

where otherwise indicated. Boxes shall conform to NEMA OS 1 and UL 514 A.

2.4.1.3. Provide box covers to fit each outlet box installed of the

required depth so that the edge of the ring is flush with the finished plaster, masonry, acoustical material, or other finish.

2.4.1.4. Outlet boxes shall be zinc coated, galvanized pressed steel

not less than 14 USS gauge, or cast metal not less than 1/8" thick. They shall be Steel City, Raco, National, G.E., Appleton, or approved equivalent.

2.4.2. Pull and Junction Boxes:

2.4.2.1. Provide junction or pull boxes wherever indicated or where

required to facilitate wire pulling or connection. Fabricate boxes with 12 gauge minimum galvanized steel, and equip with screw cover. Size box per NEC. Label all circuits inside each box and on corner of cover exterior with one inch high stenciled letters.

2.4.2.2. Sheet metal boxes shall be adequately supported to

maintain shape. Larger boxes shall be adequately formed of structural steel bracing welded into a rigid assembly to maintain alignment in shipment and installation. Boxes shall conform to UL-50.

2.5. Occupancy Sensors

2.5.1. Provide occupancy sensors at the location indicated on the drawings. All devices shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Provide occupancy sensors of the manufacturer and catalog number indicated or equivalent by Wattstopper.

2.5.1.1. Single level lighting control wall mounted occupancy sensor

switch (O): Leviton ODS10-ID. 2.5.1.2. Dual level control lighting wall mounted occupancy sensor

switch (O2): Leviton ODSOD-ID. 2.5.1.3. Ceiling mounted ultrasonic occupancy sensor with

rectangular field of view (U): Leviton OSC20-UOW.

2.5.1.4. Ceiling mounted infrared occupancy sensor: Leviton OSC15-IOW.



2.5.1.5. Lighting control relay for use with occupancy sensors shall

be rated 20A at 120 or 277 volts, with isolated NO/NC HVAC interface relay, Leviton “Power Pack” model OSP20-RD0.

2.5.2. Occupancy sensors shall provide adequate coverage and satisfactory

operation for the rooms and areas served. Provide all materials necessary for a complete and working system, including additional sensors or different types of sensors if needed to ensure coverage.

2.6. Wiring Devices:

2.6.1. Provide wiring devices for each outlet at the location indicated on the drawings. All devices shall be the product of the same manufacturer unless otherwise noted or especially approved for the purpose. Provide wiring devices of the manufacturer and catalog number indicated or equivalent by Cooper, Pass & Seymour, or Leviton.

2.6.2. Lighting Toggle Switches:

Single Pole Switches Hubbell 1221 Double Pole Switches Hubbell 1222 Three Way Switches Hubbell 1223 Wall Dimmers Lutron Nova T Series 3-Way Dimmers Lutron Maestro Smart Dimmer

And Companion Dimmer

2.6.3. Receptacles: Receptacles shall be 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding-type unless noted.

2.6.3.1. Hospital Grade Wiring Devices:

Single Receptacle Hubbell 8310 GFI Duplex Receptacle Hubbell GFR8300H*L Hospital Grade Duplex Receptacle Hubbell 8300 (20 amp)

2.6.3.2. Double duplex or quad GFI receptacles shall consist of two

duplex GFI receptacles.

2.6.4. Color:

2.6.4.1. Devices shall be brown unless otherwise indicated.

2.6.4.2. All wiring devices connected to the emergency power system shall be red.

2.6.5. Device Plates:

2.6.5.1. Provide device plates for all outlets where devices are

installed. Where gang combinations are required, provide the combinations under a single multi-gang plate.



2.6.5.2. Provide stainless steel wall plates, with brushed finish, in

finished areas unless otherwise noted. Critical power wall plates shall be red. In mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and other unfinished areas, provide stainless steel wall plates on recessed outlets and galvanized, formed steel raised device covers on surface mounted outlets.

2.6.5.3. Receptacles located outdoors shall have an enclosure that is

weatherproof with an attachment plug inserted (“in use”) or removed.

2.6.5.4. All device plates shall be engraved to identify the panelboard

and circuit number supplying them. Coordinate the information and engraving with the Architect. Phenolic plates attached to the device plate are not acceptable.

2.6.5.5. On modular patient headwall systems, operating room

service columns, etc., equipped with factory-installed wiring devices and cover plates, the contractor shall provide engraving for the wiring devices. The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all of the circuit information, collecting the cover plates to be engraved, and installing the engraved cover plates in the correct position within the associated equipment.

2.7. Safety Switches:

2.7.1. Safety switches shall be fused or unfused types as indicated, heavy duty, and shall be enclosed in NEMA 1 steel enclosures unless otherwise indicated. Switches shall be front operated type, cover interlocked with switch. All non-conductive parts shall be finished or otherwise protected against corrosion.

2.7.2. Short circuit withstand ratings for fused safety switch units shall be

minimum 100,000 Amps RMS when used with Class R or J fuses. Non-fused switches shall be rated to equal or exceed withstand ratings of the feeder.

2.7.3. All fused safety switches shall accommodate current limiting "R"

rejection feature fuses.

2.7.4. Switches installed on the load side of variable frequency controllers shall be equipped with interlock accessory auxiliary contacts, which “break” before the safety switch is open.

2.7.5. Switches located where they are affected by outdoor weather shall be

NEMA 3R. 2.7.6. Switches shall have provisions for not less than two external padlocks.

Switches used for elevator equipment disconnecting means shall be capable of being padlocked in the “off” position only.



2.7.7. Units shall be manufactured by Square D or Eaton.

2.8. Manual Motor Starting Switches:

2.8.1. Manual starters shall be "toggle" or "pushbutton" actuated. "Toggle" actuators shall be labeled to indicate "on" and "off" positions. "Pushbutton" actuators shall be labeled "start" and "stop".

2.8.2. Provide each manual starter with a red neon indicator light to

"illuminate" when power is present on the load side of the starter. 2.8.3. Provide a properly sized starter and overload protection device (in

each phase) to be compatible with the motor it controls. Overload protection shall be in accordance with the NEC.

2.8.4. Manual motor starting switches shall be equipped with factory-installed

provisions for padlocking in the “off” position. 2.8.5. Starters shall be manufactured by Square D or Eaton.

2.9. Combination Magnetic Starters (Enclosed Type):

2.9.1. All enclosed starters shall be combination magnetic type with a fused or unfused safety switch as indicated on the drawings. All starters shall be furnished with NEMA rated magnetic contactors and external manual reset overload relay for ambient compensated bimetallic thermal overload units.

2.9.2. Starters shall be single speed, full voltage, non-reversing, electrically

operated, electrically held, three-pole assemblies with three phase overload protection.

2.9.3. Starters shall be equipped with the following features unless otherwise

specified herein or indicated on the drawings:

a. 120 volt control transformer with two primary and one secondary fuse and sized to accommodate all connected control circuit devices.

b. Hand-off-auto selector switch. c. Push-to-test red "on" and green "off" pilot lights. d. Auxiliary contacts (one N.O. and one N.C.) in addition to seal-in

and interlocking contacts.

2.9.4. Combination motor starters shall be manufactured by Square D or

Eaton.

2.10. Dry Type Transformers:

2.10.1. Dry type transformers shall be ventilating type, designed not to exceed



150oC rise above 40o ambient under full load conditions. In addition, the transformers shall have the ability to carry a continuous 15 percent overload without exceeding a 150oC rise above ambient. Provide full capacity 2-1/2 percent taps, 2 above and 4 below normal high voltage. Provide ground lug on all transformers. Transformers shall conform to UL-1561.

2.10.2. Transformers shall be self-cooled (Type AA) and shall achieve rated

load and temperature rise without use of cooling fans.

2.10.3. Provide guaranteed audible sound level below 45 db for 50 kVA and below, 50 db for 51-150KVA, and 55 db for 151-300KVA. For units 7.5 kVA and over, use acoustic lining and internal isolation of core and coil assembly. In addition to the internal vibration isolators provided with the transformers, mount the transformers on additional external rubber vibration isolators selected per manufacturer's criteria for the installation conditions.

2.10.4. Dry type transformers shall be UL listed and labeled, manufactured by

Eaton or Square D (Sorgel). Submit complete shop drawings on all dry type transformers.

2.10.5. Transformer efficiencies shall comply with NEMA Standard TP-1-2002.

2.11. Class 2 Control Power Transformer:

2.11.1. Transformer shall be single dry type, 300VA with three separate 100VA output secondary windings, 24VAC secondary, multi-tap 120/240/277/480V primary.

2.11.2. Transformer shall be overcurrent protection shall be primary fuse (or inherently protected by internal impedance), and low voltage circuit breakers with terminal blocks and indicator LED’s for each output winding.

2.11.3. Enclosure for transformer shall be NEMA 1, non-ventilated, plenum-

rated, galvanized steel.

2.11.4. Transformer shall be UL 508 Approved, Class 2, manufactured by Functional Devices, Inc., model PSH300A-IC, or approved equivalent.

2.12. Panelboards and Loadcenters (Circuit Breaker Type): 2.12.1. Provide panelboards of types and ratings indicated and with features

and types and sizes of circuit breakers and provisions shown on drawings and described herein. Use full distribution phasing of branch circuit connections. Provide ground bus in all panels. Panel buses shall be copper. The term "Panelboard" shall apply to all types of



"Panelboards" including "Load Centers" and "Distribution Panelboards."

2.12.2. Unless indicated in the panel schedule to be fused switch type, all

panelboards shall utilize circuit breakers for overcurrent protective devices.

2.12.3. Each panelboard shall be able to withstand a fault current of at least

the minimum AIC indicated. Each circuit breaker (main or branch) in a panelboard shall be rated to interrupt at least the minimum AIC indicated for the respective panelboard.

2.12.4. Provide doors with concealed hinges and flush tumbler lock and catch

on all panelboards. Key all panelboards alike. Panelboards 50 inches high and/or 30 inches wide or greater shall be provided with a "piano" hinge on the right side of the trim panel to enable the cover to be opened without removing it from the back box. Panelboards sized greater than 26” wide and 6” deep, installed in access controlled electrical or mechanical/electrical rooms only, shall be permitted to be provided with a four-piece sheet metal front trim, with exposed circuit breaker handles.

2.12.5. Finish panel boxes and trim with neutral gray enamel over rust

inhibiting primer treatment or use galvanized surface mounted boxes which have had a treatment applied to the galvanizing to prepare the surface for painting with paint to match adjoining walls. Panel boxes shall be constructed without knockouts. For recessed panelboards, provide six (6) spare 1-inch conduits terminated and capped in ceiling space above panelboard.

2.12.6. Where "space" is called for on schedule, provide necessary bus,

device supports and connections for future cutout.

2.12.7. Circuit breakers in panelboards up to 26” wide by 6” deep, main bus capacity of 400 amperes or less, shall be “Bolt-On” type, thermal magnetic tripping free of handle. Breakers and handle ties will not be acceptable.

2.12.8. The neutral bus in each panelboard shall be isolated from the cabinet

to prevent neutral grounds at the cabinet. Provide a 50% ground bus in each panelboard cabinet. Each ground bus shall be bonded to the cabinet. Bolt and screw heads of all ground bus lugs shall be painted green. In addition, nameplates shall be provided in each panelboard, designating neutral and ground bus.

2.12.9. Panelboards shall be manufactured by Square D or Eaton. Submit

shop drawings indicating all dimensions, gutter space, bus bar arrangement and size, circuit breaker type, metal gage, and any other special details called for on the drawings.

2.12.10. Provide a typewritten schedule of circuits, with legend as indicated in a



suitable frame on the inside of each panel cabinet door under clear plastic. Pole Numbers for panelboards indicated on the drawings are for the purpose of clarifying a grouping of wiring into circuits. Where panelboards are not marked with Pole Number locations or spacing numbers, provide a permanent label on each device in the panelboard as indicated. For existing panelboards which are modified, the Contractor shall update the existing schedule of circuits (or provide a new schedule) to accommodate the work in the contract.

2.13. Isolated Power Panelboards:

2.13.1. Where indicated on the drawings, provide isolation panelboards within

the operating rooms. The line isolated monitor (LIM) used in these units shall indicate alarm when the total hazard current exceeds 5 mA. The remote indicator alarm unit shall be located in the operating room and connected to the panel supplying power to the circuits in that room. Location within the operating room is as indicated on the drawings. The following components shall be provided by the manufacturer of the Operating Room Hospital Isolation Panels as one integral unit.

2.13.2. Transformers:

a. The transformer shall be wound with an electrostatic shield between

the primary and secondary windings. The shield shall be grounded to the enclosure. The electrostatic shield will be designed to prevent direct shorting of the primary winding to the secondary winding, and to reduce the coupling of harmonic distortions between the primary and secondary circuits.

b. The total leakage current to ground from the transformer shall not exceed the values shown in Table 29.2 of UL 1047.

c. Regulation to be certified not to exceed 2.5% at 0.8 power factor (PF) at 20ºC above the full load continuous operating temperature in accordance with NEMA-ANSI standards.

d. The transformer is to be single-phase, 60 Hz with primary and secondary voltages as listed in the drawings and/or schedule.

e. Class H rated insulation shall be used in the manufacture of the transformer and the temperature rise will be limited to 55ºC above ambient under full load conditions, when tested in accordance with NEMA-ANSI standards. Transformers must have a 220°C, UL recognized insulation system.

f. The core shall be of stacked design and securely clamped and bolted. The core and coils shall be internally isolated from the enclosure by means of a suitable vibration dampening system, varnish impregnated, and shall have a final wrap of insulating material to prevent exposure of bare conductors.

g. The design sound level of the completed units shall not exceed 27 dB for units up to 5 kVA, and 35 dB for 7.5 through 10 kVA units. Certified sound level reports shall be furnished for each individual unit upon the request of the consulting engineer.



2.13.3. Circuit Breakers:

a. All circuit breakers must be 2-pole with a minimum interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes. Panels shall have a minimum capacity of 16 secondary circuit breakers. Refer to the panelboard schedule for quantity and sizes of breakers. All circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic type. Thermal-only type circuit breakers will not be considered as equal.

2.13.4. Line Isolated Monitor (LIM):

a. The LIM shall use microprocessor-based digital signal processing to

continually monitor the impedance from all secondary conductors of the isolated power systems to ground. The LIM shall be capable of measuring all combinations of capacitive and resistive faults including balanced, unbalanced and hybrid faults. LIMs which internally switch between either line and ground will not be accepted. The LIM shall not contribute more than 15A to the total hazard current of the system being monitored.

b. The LIM shall have the following specifications: 1. Operating voltage 85 to 265 VAC

2. Accuracy 5% or better

3. Alarm level 2 or 5 mA (selectable)

4. Alarm bandwidth Zero (0)

5. Alarm hysteresis (on/off) 50 A

6. Mode Single- or three-phase

7. Monitor hazard current 50 A

8. Operating frequency 50 or 60 Hz

c. All of the listed specifications shall be contained within one unit and be user selectable thus allowing the LIM to be interchanged from system to system.

d. The LIM shall incorporate a momentary test switch. When pressed, it shall check and recalibrate the unit. Additionally, the test switch shall perform a complete test of all indicating lamps and meters on the face of the LIM and at any remote indicating stations.

e. The LIM shall use digital signal processing to determine the hazard current of the system being monitored. The microprocessor within the LIM shall be #MC68HC16Z1 manufactured by Motorola. The algorithms used to determine the system hazard current shall be preprogrammed into the LIM’s microprocessor. At least every 65 minutes, the unit shall recheck its calibration and recalibrate the system to original performance specifications. Additionally, by pressing the LIM’s momentary test switch, an immediate check and recalibration of the LIM shall be performed.

f. If internal components are more than 30% out of original specifications because of aging or failure, the LIM shall notify the user by displaying a unique error code thus eliminating the need for periodic manual testing to determine the unit’s integrity. LIMs which use analog signal processing technology and/or require manual testing or recalibration will not be accepted.



g. The LIM shall have an optical infrared LED type serial port on the face of the unit for transmitting pertinent LIM and isolated power system data directly to a personal computer (PC). The transmission of data shall not require any mechanical or direct electrical connection to the LIM. The protocol of data transmission shall be compatible with all Hewlett Packard palmtop personal computers including Hewlett Packard models HP95LX , HP100LX, and HP200LX.

h. The LIM shall provide both analog and digital indication of the isolated power system’s hazard current. Digital indication shall be provided by a digital meter and analog indication shall be provided by an LED bar graph type meter calibrated from 0 (zero) to 160% of the alarm setting of the LIM. LIMs with only analog or only digital indicating will not be accepted.

i. The LIM shall have a green safe light and red hazard light on the front panel. The red hazard light shall remain illuminated for the duration when the isolated power system hazard current is above the selected alarm level of the LIM. An audible alarm shall be incorporated into the unit and shall activate in conjunction with the red hazard light. The audible alarm shall have high, low, and off settings. A silence button shall be provided on the face of the unit to silence the audible alarm during fault conditions. Upon silencing the audible alarm, a yellow indicating light shall illuminate to indicate the audible alarm has been silenced. The red hazard light and yellow silence light shall automatically reset when the fault condition is eliminated. During fault conditions, the red hazard light and all red segments to the LED bar graph shall blink at a constant rate. All lamps are to be long life LED type.

j. A set of normally open and normally closed contacts, rated 3 amperes at 120 VAC shall be provided on the LIM for use with external alarm systems. The LIM shall also provide a 12 VAC output signal rated at 10 VA to power remote indicator alarm units. This 12 VAC output signal shall not increase the hazard current of the system being monitored. Provisions for connection of the remote metering shall also be provided as part of the LIM. These connections shall have the ability to operate either an analog or digital type remote meter.

k. The LIM shall incorporate a loss-of-ground feature which will activate the audible and visual alarms when connection is lost with the reference ground of the isolated power system being monitored. In addition to activating the alarm, the unit shall display an error code in the digital display of the LIM.

l. All switches, meters, and indicating lamps shall be flush with the face of the LIM to provide a neat and clean appearance. The entire front face of the unit shall have a polymer overlay that protects the unit from the intrusion of housekeeping cleaning agents. LIMs with exposed fuses, meters, switches, or circuit breakers will not be accepted.

m. The design of the LIM shall consist of two circuit boards interconnected by a ribbon connector. The two boards shall contain all of the unit’s electrical components and be mounted in the rear housing of the LIM. A phenolic cover shall complete the assembly. The unit shall not contain any components, such as circuit breakers, meter, switches or indicating lamps, which are mounted on or



attached to the front cover of the LIM. Access to the inside of the LIM shall be through the front of the unit thus eliminating the need to remove the unit from its mounting position to change any of the settings. Unique fasteners shall attach to the front cover of the unit to prevent unauthorized access to the interior of the LIM.

n. The LIM shall be an UL component recognized under UL1022 Standard for Line Isolation Monitors.

2.13.5. Remote Indicator Alarm:

a. The remote indicator alarm shall be flush mounted and have a

brushed stainless steel front trim. When the hazard current is within the predetermined limit for the circuits being monitored, a constant green light will remain illuminated. When the limit is exceeded, the green light will extinguish, a red indicator will illuminate, and an audible signal will sound.

b. A silencing switch for the audible signal shall be provided. When pressed, it will cause a yellow warning light to illuminate, indicating that the audible signal has been silenced. When the current flow to ground returns to an acceptable level, the unit will automatically reset. The wiring from the LIM to the indicator alarm shall not contribute any leakage current to the isolated system.

2.13.6. Enclosures:

a. The enclosure shall be 14-gauge steel which is degreased,

phosphatized, primed, and finish baked enamel paint. The front trim shall be type 304 stainless steel with a #4 brushed finish. The enclosure will be flush mounted unless otherwise stated on the plans; units through 5 kVA shall have a maximum depth of eight inches; 7.5 kVA through 10 kVA shall have a maximum depth of twelve inches. The flush trim panels shall have a hinged door, with keyed lock, to give access to the circuit breakers and LIM, and to provide for testing.

b. The front panel shall not contain any type of grille or louver for ventilation. The panel and transformer shall be so designed that heat generated by the transformer under full load conditions shall not affect the normal operation of the circuit breakers and LIM. The maximum front panel temperature shall not exceed 30C rise under full load continuous operation. Certification of this temperature test shall be provided to the consulting engineer upon request. The entire section behind the hinged door shall be of a dead front design. All hinges will be concealed.

2.13.7. Isolated power panelboards shall be manufactured by Square D (Sorgel

Medical Products Division).

2.14. Low Voltage Fuses:

2.14.1. Fuses rated 600 amperes or less for all general power circuits shall be dual-element, U.L. Class RK-5 current limiting time-delay type. Fuses



shall be of true dual-element construction, incorporating a thermal overload element using a 2500F melting point alloy for thermal protection, and a separate short circuit element. The design shall provide time-delay of not less than 10 seconds at 500% of ampere rating. Interrupting rating shall be 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Dimensions shall be as described in NEMA Standard FU-1 for Class H fuses. Fuses shall be dual element current limiting Bussman FRN-R (250 VAC or less) or FRS-R (251-600 VAC) with Class R rejection feature.

2.14.2. Peak let-through current (Ip) and energy let-through values (I2T) of

Class L and Class RK-5 fuses shall not exceed the respective U.L. Standards for these fuses.

2.14.3. Fuse classes, types and rating have been chosen on the basis of

Bussman fuses as listed below. Other acceptable manufacturers are Gould-Shawmut and Littlefuse Co. All fuses shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. Submit shop drawings on all fuses. Provide a list as part of the shop drawing showing the quantity of each type of fuse (one type for each ampere rating and one type for each variation in voltage, physical shape or performance characteristic).

3. EXECUTION

3.1. General:

3.1.1. Install all electrical equipment where indicated or required, in accordance with the requirements of the NEC, the National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) "Standard Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Constuction", and the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.2. Coordinate the installation with the work of all other trades.

3.2. Raceway Installation:

3.2.1. Conduit and tubing shall be not less than 3/4" trade size. Unless

otherwise noted, not more than three 90 degree bends shall be installed in any run of conduit and tubing.

3.2.2. All conduit and tubing shall have the ends closed immediately after

being placed to keep out all foreign matter. The entire conduit and tubing system shall be installed complete, tested for obstructions, omissions, smooth joints and thoroughly swabbed out and made dry before pulling in any wire. All conduit and tubing left empty for future use shall have a No. 14 AWG zinc coated steel pull wire or 1/8" polypropylene pull cord inserted in them and the ends capped.

3.2.3. Conduit and tubing shall be installed concealed in walls and above

ceilings throughout except as follows:



3.2.3.1. Where specifically indicated on the drawings to be exposed. 3.2.3.2. Where suspended ceilings are not provided and where

conditions prohibit concealed conduit and tubing installation in the floor or roof construction above.

3.2.3.3. In vertical shafts, electrical closets, mechanical and electrical

equipment spaces where concealment is not practical. 3.2.3.4. At surface mounted panelboards, etc. in otherwise finished

spaces but limited to vertical runs above and below the panelboard.

3.2.3.5. Where required for equipment connections.

3.2.3.6. Where specifically indicated to be routed underground,

encased in floor slabs, or in grade below floor slabs. Raceways shall not be encased in floor slabs or routed below floor slabs except where indicated on the drawings.

3.2.3.7. In unfinished shell spaces to serve surface mounted

devices.

3.2.4. Exposed conduit and tubing shall be run parallel to walls or ceilings and shall follow the contour of surfaces to which they are attached. Where exposed conduit and tubing rise through floor slabs or enters the structural system above, the curved position of bends shall not be visible.

3.2.5. Unless otherwise noted, EMT raceway shall be used throughout for all

services and systems, except where FMC, LT/FMC, RMC, IMC and armored cable are required or permitted under the following paragraphs.

3.2.5.1. FMC raceway shall be used in short lengths (6’-0” or less)

for connections to motors; rotating and/or vibrating equipment in dry locations; above ceiling between outlet boxes and recessed lighting fixtures; and in fishing hollow spaces of existing walls or above existing non-removable suspended ceilings. FMC shall be supported in accordance with the NEC. FMC shall not be used in elevator machine rooms except for uses permitted by NEC 620.21. FMC installations which, in the opinion of the architect, are unnecessarily long for the conditions of installation shall be reworked with hard conduit at no extra charge.

3.2.5.2. LT/FMC shall be used in short lengths for connections to

motors, rotating and/or vibrating equipment in exterior locations or where subject to moist, corrosive or humid atmosphere where condensate or water spray can be



expected to occur, or where subject to dripping oil, grease, or water.

3.2.5.3. RMC shall be used for all feeders and branch circuits in

damp or wet locations, encased in concrete (floor slabs, etc. where indicated on drawings), areas subject to physical damage, exterior work, and where specifically indicated on the drawings. IMC may be used at the contractors option where allowed by the NEC.

3.2.5.4. Type HFC Armored cable shall be utilized in concealed

locations, for normal power circuits, in lieu of wire in conduit, where permitted by code, for whips to lighting fixtures.

3.2.6. Where specifically indicated to be installed in floor slabs, raceway

installed in concrete floor slabs shall be RMC. Aluminum raceways shall not be installed in concrete floor slabs. Raceway installation in concrete slabs shall have a minimum concrete cover of 3/4", minimum spacing of 3 diameters, and shall have an outside diameter not more than 1/3 of the slab thickness. Install raceway between top and bottom reinforcing, securely fastened to reinforcing and/or structural slabs. Integrity of the slab waterproofing shall not be disturbed.

3.2.7. Suspended, concealed, or exposed raceways shall be supported by

hangers used only for raceway support. Raceway shall not be supported from ducts, pipes, etc. or hangers provided under other Divisions of the specifications for the support of pipes, ducts, suspended ceilings, etc. Single raceway shall be supported by 1/4" steel rods with "Caddy", Kindorf Series 6H or approved equivalent steel hangers. Where two or more raceways are run together they shall be suspended by trapeze hangers consisting of Kindorf channel or angle iron with "U" bolts or two piece straps engaging the channels or angle iron.

3.2.8. Raceways installed in drywall partitions shall be supported by screw-

on conduit hangers by “Caddy” or approved equivalent.

3.2.9. No raceway shall run through beams unless approved by the Architect or indicated on the drawings.

3.2.10. Raceway passing from heated to unheated spaces, interior to exterior,

through refrigerated spaces or cold section plenums of air conditioning units, etc. shall be suitably sealed with "Duxseal", sealing fittings, etc., to prevent condensation.

3.2.11. Raceways shall be installed at mounting heights as high as possible,

to maximize working clearance below. Raceways which, in the architect’s opinion, can be routed at greater mounting heights shall be reworked and raised up at no extra cost.



3.2.12. Raceway installations for high voltage, telephone, television and similar cable shall be made with long radius bends.

3.3. Low Voltage Conductors and Fittings:

3.3.1. Screw-on "Wirenut" type fittings shall not be used for connecting

stranded wiring unless the strands are twisted for each conductor before installing the "wirenut". Aluminum fittings shall not be used for wire splices, termination or any wire connections. When stranded wires are to be terminated in a screw pressure connection, carefully selected fittings and installation methods shall be used to avoid the problem of separating strands.

3.3.2. No splices or joints shall be permitted in either feeders or branches

except at outlets or accessible junction boxes. Joints in branch circuits shall be mechanically and electrically secured with solderless connectors as listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as pressure cable type, 600-volt rating, compression or indent type. Connectors shall be insulated by integral or separate cover, or by means of taping with approved plastic or rubber friction tapes to provide insulating value equal to that of the conductors being joined. In the making of a splice, connectors shall be brought up securely upon the conductor in a workmanlike manner in such a way that all conductors are equally engaged, the insulation is not ruptured, no bare wires are exposed or have "back-off" due to the application of pressure, and the connector will not loosen due to cycling or vibration. The number, size and combinations of conductors permitted by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as listed on manufacturers' packaging of the connector shall be strictly complied with. Wires, No. 8 AWG and smaller, shall be twisted together with a minimum of one turn of the stripped conductors before insertion into connectors. Splice connectors shall be of a type and be so installed that the conductor insulation will not be reduced when the conductor is positioned in its final operating position. Tools used to compress these fittings shall be the type that requires proper compression before the tool can be released.

3.3.3. All insulating materials for splices, connections, etc. such as rubber,

friction, glass and synthetic tapes, putties, resins, splice cases, compositions, and similar materials shall be of the type approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and similar applicable requirements and shall be applied and installed in an approved manner, all in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3.4. Grounding, neutral, and phase conductors shall be pig-tailed for

connection to receptacles so that any receptacle (including individual receptacles in a double duplex configuration) may be disconnected without interrupting connections to other receptacles on the same multi-wire branch circuit.

3.3.5. No wiring shall be installed until the building is under roof. Do not



install wire in raceways until after concrete work or plastering is completed. All raceways in which moisture has collected must be swabbed out before pulling in wire. Insulation resistance to ground must not be less than one megohm.

3.3.6. Wiring exposed to temperatures higher than 30oC (Celsius) shall have

insulation properly rated for the temperatures it must withstand (i.e., wiring in lighting fixtures or electric heating equipment unless provided by the fixture or equipment manufacturer shall be type THHN, AVB, or other as needed).

3.3.7. "Green Wire" grounding and neutral wires shall be color coded

throughout their entire length. Phase wires may be color coded throughout their entire length or may be color coded by applied sleeves or tape at each splice and termination and at a maximum interval of 3' for any accessible segment. Color coding shall be as follows:

208Y/120V 480Y/277V

PHASE A BLACK BROWN PHASE B RED ORANGE PHASE C BLUE YELLOW NEUTRAL WHITE GRAY GROUNDING GREEN GREEN

3.3.8. Green colored insulated equipment grounding conductors shall be provided for all feeders and for all branch circuits. Provide a "Green Wire" grounding conductor in addition to grounding provided by the raceway system enclosing the branch circuit or circuits. The size of the "Green Wire" grounding conductor shall be as indicated on the drawings, and shall interconnect the grounding terminal of each receptacle, lighting fixture or equipment enclosure containing the circuit and the grounding bus or terminal at the point or origin or the respective circuit. The "Green Wire" grounding conductor shall be run with each respective feeder or branch circuit conductor group. At each receptacle location, connect the "Green Wire" system to the receptacle enclosure using a separate pigtail.

3.3.9. All wiring whose voltage exceeds 100 volts with respect to ground shall

be protected by enclosing it in a raceway. All low voltage wiring not protected by raceway shall be rated for the application (e.g. plenum rated cable, etc.).

3.3.10. Wiring shall only be provided as single or combined wiring groups as

follows:

3.3.10.1. Multiwire branch circuits are not permitted; when multiple circuits in a single raceway or cable assembly are indicated by the branch circuit homerun on the floor plans, a separate phase and grounded (neutral) circuit conductor shall be



routed from the respective indicated space or pole numbers in the schedule for the panelboard, to the associated utilization point, device, or outlet.

3.3.10.2. Where multiple branch circuits are routed in a single

raceway or cable assembly, a shared equipment grounding conductor shall be permitted, except for circuits serving isolated ground receptacles or unless otherwise indicated.

3.3.10.3. The contractor shall review each utilization device or

equipment for connection requirements and provide neutral conductor if required.

3.3.10.4. Combining two or more branch circuits into a single raceway

or cable run, shall not be permitted unless shown on the drawings as a multi-circuit homerun. Multi-circuit homeruns shall not exceed three branch circuits or three phase conductors per raceway or cable run.

3.3.10.5. One section of conduit (raceway) shall not enclose more

than one branch circuit, or feeder, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3.10.5.1. Emergency power branch circuits/feeders shall not

be routed in the same raceway system as normal power branch circuits/feeders. Additionally, branch circuits/feeders originating from critical and life safety branch panelboards shall not be routed in raceway systems originating from other panelboards, whether of the same branch or not.

3.3.10.6. Where multiple circuits are routed in conduit or raceway,

separate neutral conductors shall be arranged as required to allow proper operation of ground fault circuit interrupter and arc fault circuit interrupter circuit breakers.

3.3.10.7. Where more than one branch circuit share a common

enclosure (i.e., pull box or junction box), the wiring comprising each branch circuit shall be secured as a group by "ties" or other grouping devices at intervals not to exceed 3 inches where accessible.

3.3.10.8. Where branch circuits are routed in wireway, the Contractor

shall increase the wiring size as required to comply with derating requirements of the NEC.

3.3.10.9. Wiring size shall be #12 AWG minimum for a typical 20

ampere, 120 volt or 277 volt lighting or receptacle branch circuit with a maximum total length of 60 feet and 150 feet, respectively. When circuit total lengths exceed those limits (measured horizontally and vertically along the path from the



Panelboard to the load) wiring size (including phase, neutral, and equipment grounding conductors) shall be increased from the sizes indicated in the panel schedules as follows:

120V to Ground 277V to Ground Size Max. Total Length Size Max. Total Length #12 60' #12 150' #10 100' #10 250' #8 over 100' #8 over 250'

3.3.10.10. When wire size is specifically indicated for circuits where voltage drop has been considered, the length restrictions noted above do not apply (i.e., motor branch circuits).

3.3.10.11. When wire size is increased only to accommodate length

relationships noted above, taps (i.e., pigtails to devices) up to 10' long may be made with #12 at utilization points.

3.3.11. Marking - Wire Identification:

3.3.11.1. Provide wire identification code "MARKING" on each phase,

neutral, and grounding wire at each accessible point along its length (i.e., panelboards, junction boxes, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and similar points.) In addition, mark the wire identification code on the back of the cover for each pull or junction box to indicate the phase, neutral, and grounding wires enclosed by the box.

3.3.11.2. The spacing between markings at each accessible point

shall not exceed three feet. The "MARKING" identification code shall be as defined by the panelboard schedules on the drawings.

3.3.11.3. Marking shall be permanent black letters or numerals on

white background (printed plastic pressure sensitive strips wrapped around the wire, hot stamped PVC sleeves slipped on or split and tied around the wire, or other approved methods). "Write on" tags are not acceptable.

3.4. Boxes and Fittings:

3.4.1. When a box is concealed in a stud wall it shall be securely attached to

a full depth stud (or section of stud) on each side of the box. 3.4.2. Each box shall be securely supported at two or more points and two or

more sides to prevent movement in any direction. 3.4.3. Boxes shall support devices and face plates. Face plates and devices

shall not be used to support boxes.



3.4.4. Outlet boxes shall not be installed “back to back” in partitions, if no other arrangement appears feasible because of space constraints, the contractor shall notify the Architect for clarification.

3.4.5. Where architectural elevation drawings indicate outlet locations, the

contractor shall follow the elevation dimensions exactly, using bridges between studs as required to support boxes. Shifting of boxes to the nearest stud is not permitted unless approved by the architect. Where multiple rooms have identical layouts, the contractor shall ensure that all outlets are identically positioned, with the exception of offsetting by one box width to prevent “back to back” outlet box installation.

3.5. Occupancy Sensors:

3.5.1. Install sensors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Contractor shall be responsible for aiming, programming, adjusting, and demonstrating satisfactory sensor coverage and operation.

3.5.2. Occupancy sensors equipped with manual override button shall be

programmed for manual “On”/automatic “Off” operation.

3.6. Receptacles:

3.6.1. Where solid wire is present, back wiring of receptacles is not

permitted. Back wiring of receptacles is only permitted with stranded wiring.

3.7. Safety Switches:

3.7.1. Where safety switches are installed on load side of a variable

frequency drive / controller, provide conduit with interlock wiring from safety switch auxiliary contracts to drive, and connect as required to shutdown drive prior to disconnecting power to the motor.

3.8. Dry Type Transformers:

3.8.1. Mount transformers with suitable racks hung with spring hangers from

the overhead structure except where floor mounting is indicated. 3.8.2. Provide supporting structure which does not extend below 7 feet above

the finished floor surface.

3.9. Isolated Power Panelboards:

3.9.1. Wiring:

a. Wiring within all panels shall meet all applicable NEC standards. Low leakage insulation shall be used on all secondary wiring. The total leakage for all panel types shall



not exceed the values shown in table 29.1 of UL 1047. b. The panel manufacturer shall provide certified test data on

each individual panel as to maximum leakage of each complete assembly.

c. The contractor shall wire all external receptacles to the panels using copper stranded conductor having a cross-linked polyethylene insulation or equivalent with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less. Under no circumstances shall wire pulling compound be used when pulling the wire for isolated circuits. All wiring shall be color-coded in accordance with NEC and appropriate NFPA standards.

d. The contractor shall lay out branch circuits to provide the shortest physical lengths possible. The maximum permissible total length of all branch circuits connected to a single isolated power panel is 400’.

3.9.2. Testing:

a. The contractor shall include the cost of, and make all arrangements for, testing all ungrounded isolated systems in the hospital by a qualified factory technician provided by the manufacturer of the isolation systems. The testing shall include a complete inspection of all connections and materials used. The contractor shall be prepared to demonstrate to the factory technician that proper polarity was observed, and installation practices were in accordance with the drawings and specifications for these systems.

b. The factory technician shall check and record system current leakages. The factory technician shall further simulate faults on the isolated system of a magnitude high enough to bring the total system leakage, which the LIM detects, above the calibrated point, thus verifying correct operation of the LIM. The faults simulated shall be combinations of resistive and capacitive faults.

c. The factory technician shall check the resistance between the ground point of each receptacle and the reference point, and it shall be less than 0.1 ohms. The voltage potential difference between any exposed conductive surfaces in the patient vicinity shall be checked, the difference to be no more than 40 millivolts. These tests are required by NFPA No. 99 for new construction areas.

d. The factory technician shall instruct the hospital maintenance staff in the use of the following:

1. the panel and LIM as a leakage measuring device.

2. how instrument leakage areas can be measured and labeled.

3. how to perform leakage tests.

e. The technician shall also test the system impedance of the entire isolated power system to ensure compliance with the applicable sections of NFPA No. 99, Chapter 3. The measured system impedance shall become part of the permanent logged records of each panel.



f. After all tests are complete, a letter shall be given to the hospital and the consulting engineer. The letter shall state that the system conforms with all codes, good installation practices, and the specifications.

g. Upon completion of all tests, the factory technician shall meet with hospital medical and maintenance staff to thoroughly explain the operation of the equipment installed, and the need and procedure for periodically testing and logging test results. The technician shall furnish log books to the maintenance department, enter the first readings of all panels in these log books, and clearly instruct the hospital maintenance staff how to enter future readings.

h. All questions from the hospital staff shall be answered completely and thoroughly at this time. The consulting engineer shall be notified of the dates and times of all tests so the consulting engineer may witness any of the tests or meetings conducted by the factory technician.

3.10. Fuses:

3.10.1. Fuses shall not be installed until installation is complete. Fuses shall be installed on the job site. They shall not be installed in equipment at the factory and shipped in place in the equipment.

END OF SECTION


LIGHTING FIXTURES 16500 ‐ 1

SECTION 16500 – LIGHTING FIXTURES 1. GENERAL




apply to all work specified under this Section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the installation of a complete system.

1.2.2. Regardless of the basic catalog number in the lighting fixture schedule,

every fixture shall be of the type required for the conditions in which it is to be installed and mounted.

1.3. Submittals:

1.3.1. Submittals for the items described in the section shall be in

accordance with Section 16010. 1.3.2. Submittals shall be provided for, but not limited to the following items:

1.3.2.1. Lighting Fixtures.

1.3.2.2. Lamps.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. Lamps:

2.1.1. Fluorescent lamps shall be T-8 style, low mercury, with 4100oK color characteristics unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, minimum 15,000 hour rated life, and shall be energy efficient.

2.1.2. All lamps shall be as manufactured by Sylvania, General Electric, or

Philips.

2.2. Fixtures:

2.2.1. Fixtures shall be as indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. Lighting fixtures not included in the schedule are not acceptable and should not be submitted as substitutions.

2.2.2. General: All materials, accessories, and other related fixture parts

herein mentioned shall conform to the requirements of the drawings, specifications, and the agencies heretofore mentioned. They shall be new and free from defects which in any manner may impair their character, appearance, strength, durability and function, and shall be



of prime quality intended for their respective purpose, and effectively protected from any damage or injury from the time of fabrication to the time of delivery and until final acceptance of the work. The above items shall meet with the approval of the Architect and the Engineer who reserve the right of rejection prior to or after installation if found not to be in strict accordance with the true intent of the Contract.

2.2.3. Sheet Metal Work: All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks

and dents, and shall have accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. All intersections and joints shall be formed of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion after assembly. All sheet metal shall be void of light leaks. All edges shall be finished so there are no sharp edges exposed. All mitres shall be in accurate alignment with abutting intersecting members. Piecing of plates in individual runs on single plans, and the use of spliced pieces or filler material to cover defective workmanship will not be tolerated. Sheet metal work shall be properly fabricated in order that planes will not deform, that is, become concave or convex, due to normal expected ambient and operating conditions.

2.2.4. Castings: Castings shall be exact replicas of the approved patterns

and shall be free of sand pits, blemishes, scale and rust, and shall be smoothly finished. Tolerance shall be provided for any shrinkage of the metal castings in order that the finished castings will accurately fit in their designated locations.

2.2.5. Lenses: Where optical lenses are used, they shall be free from

spherical and chromatic aberrations and other imperfections which may hinder the functional performance of the lenses. All lenses for fluorescent fixtures shall be 100 percent acrylic with lens thickness of 0.125 (+.005) (-.010) inches, as manufactured by KSH. These lenses shall be supported by a lens frame with a durable white finish, positive action latches and hinges which allow reversing the opening side and provisions to enable lens replacement without the use of special tools.

2.2.6. All fixtures shall be completely wired at the factory. 2.2.7. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that all

recessed fixtures have trims and mounting components compatible with the ceilings in which they are to be installed. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the compatibility of the fixture to the ceiling.

2.2.8. Light leaks between ceiling trims of recessed lighting equipment and

the ceilings will not be tolerated. 2.2.9. Yokes, brackets and supplementary supporting members needed to

mount lighting fixtures to 2" carrier channels or other suitable ceiling members shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

2.2.10. The Contractor shall furnish and install any necessary extra channels,

support wires or rods, and associated other items to provide a structurally sound system to support the fixture independently of the ceiling system.

2.3. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Listing:



2.3.1. The fixtures shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the appropriate and current requirements of the Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. "Standard for Safety", and others as they may be applicable.

2.3.2. A U.L. listing shall be provided for each fixture type, and the

appropriate label or labels shall be affixed to each fixture in a position concealing it from normal view.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. Lighting fixtures shall be supported independent of the ceiling grid system. The contractor shall furnish supporting means consisting of #12 gage support wires for fixtures installed in grid or solid ceilings. At least two (2) support wires shall be provided to support each fixture.

3.2. Where lighting fixtures are to be installed in areas without ceilings, the contractor

shall furnish supports consisting of threaded rods and steel channels as required to provide a finished mounting height of 8’-0” to bottom of fixture, unless pendant or chain mounting is indicated in the lighting fixture schedule.

END OF SECTION


FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 ‐ 1

SECTION 16721 – FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 1. GENERAL




apply to all work specified under this section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. The work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for the installation of the fire alarm system. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for all raceways, outlet and junction boxes, and all initiating and annunciating circuit conductors between the fire alarm control panel and the devices indicated. The Contractor shall furnish and install all fire alarm devices, perform all necessary software programming, and provide any system modifications required.

1.2.2. Visual notification appliance synchronization: The contractor shall be

responsible for synchronization as required by NFPA 72. [Where a combination of existing and new notification appliance devices and circuits serve the renovated area, the contractor shall be responsible for system reconfiguration as necessary to meet code.]

1.2.3. Duct detectors shall be furnished and installed under Division 16. The

electrical contractor shall be responsible for all final fire alarm connections to the duct detectors including raceways, outlet and junction boxes, and the initiating circuit conductors].

1.2.4. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the final

acceptance and walk through with the Authority having Jurisdiction, the Owner, and the Architect.

1.2.5. Coordination of work with other divisions: The contractor shall be

responsible for all required fire alarm provisions as required by work of other trades under other divisions of the contract. The contractor shall examine the contract documents, shop drawings, and submittals for each trade, and determine the necessary fire alarm work and 120V power connections to provide a complete and working system as intended, and in accordance with all codes. Work furnished under other divisions may include, but not be limited to:



1.2.5.1. Elevators 1.2.5.2. Sprinkler, standpipe, and fire pump systems 1.2.5.3. Dry chemical and gaseous fire suppression systems 1.2.5.4. Smoke dampers, air handling unit and ventilation system

controls 1.2.5.5. Door hardware, security devices, smoke curtains, fire shutters


1.3.1. The system and its components shall be the product of a single

manufacturer of established reputation and experience who has produced similar apparatus for a period of at least five (5) years.

1.3.2. The fire alarm system components, programming, and services shall

be sourced from an agency authorized by the manufacturer. Where required to establish or maintain UL listings, the services of the existing facility fire alarm service agency shall be utilized.

1.4. Submittals:

1.4.1. Shop drawings shall include a schematic diagram of the complete fire alarm system showing zoning, wiring, and connection of all equipment, and small scale floor plans showing locations of all devices and panels.

1.4.2. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's data, etc., in accordance with

Section 16010, for the following items:

1.4.2.1. Fire Alarm Control Panels 1.4.2.2. Graphic Remote Annunciator Panels 1.4.2.3. Remote Power Supplies 1.4.2.4. Networking Equipment 1.4.2.5. Initiating Devices 1.4.2.6. Warning Devices 1.4.2.7. Intelligent Interface Modules 1.4.2.8. Sequence of Operation – Written and Matrix Operation

1.4.3. Submit battery calculations showing compliance with Section 16721,

paragraph 2.5.6. 1.4.4. Fire alarm system submittals shall be prepared and submitted to the

Authority Having Jurisdiction as required to obtain necessary permits. Where applicable, submittals shall be certified by a NICET Level Designer or Professional Engineer.

1.5. References:



1.5.1. All work shall conform to the applicable portions of the latest revisions

of the following codes and standards: 1.5.2. The International Building Code (IBC)

1.5.3. The International Mechanical Code (IMC) 1.5.4. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code 1.5.5. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems

1.5.6. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

1.5.7. NFPA 170 – Standards for Fire Safety Symbols 1.5.8. Underwriters' Laboratory, Inc. (UL) Publications: Fire Protection

Equipment Directory, and UL Standard 864. 1.5.9. Americans with Disabilities Act, Public Law 101-336, 1990. 1.5.10. ANSI/ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

1.5.11. Maryland State Fire Prevention Codes

1.5.12. FM Global publications

1.5.13. Applicable state or local codes, amendments, and field directives.



1.6. Certification & Insurance:

1.6.1. The contractor shall provide the services and equipment of an alarm

service company listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., in its Directory as being capable of furnishing the signaling systems specified herein and who is authorized to, and shall issue a certificate to the equipment described herein as it representation that such equipment and all connected wiring and devices which form the specified system together with installation and maintenance service are in compliance with the requirements established by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

1.6.2. Specified equipment shall be furnished by a supplier who can provide

evidence of carrying insurance coverage which shall include comprehensive general liability, products liability, personal injury blanket contractual, premises operations and broad form property damage with limits no less than 1,000,000 dollars, bodily injury and property damage combined. A certificate of insurance shall be produced as evidence of coverage.

1.7. System Operation:

1.7.1. The fire alarm system is existing. The contractor shall match the

existing approved sequence of operation whenever possible.

1.7.2. A building evacuation alarm condition shall be established whenever any of the following alarm signal initiating devices are activated:

1.7.2.1. Manual stations. 1.7.2.2. Sprinkler flow alarm switches.

1.7.3. Whenever an alarm condition is established it shall be annunciated as follows:

1.7.3.1. A coded signal will be initiated and transmitted to the local

Fire Department via the municipal tie or remote monitoring interface panel.

1.7.3.2. Alarm horns, chimes and bells throughout the building will

sound [a coded alarm signal in accordance with the building coding scheme.

1.7.3.3. Areas equipped with voice evacuation shall play a pre-

recorded voice evacuation signal. 1.7.3.4. Flashing strobe lights throughout the building will flash.

Flashing lights shall operate separately from audible warning appliances, and be separately silenced and resettable. Flashing operation shall be synchronized where required by NFPA and ADA.

1.7.3.5. An LED indicating lamp shall light on the detector initiating

the alarm.



1.7.3.6. An alarm status message shall be displayed at the

addressable fire alarm control panel serving the area of alarm using a liquid crystal display. Subsequent alarms shall be presented in the order in which they occur.

1.7.3.7. Smoke doors throughout the building in alarm shall close

automatically.

1.7.4. Malfunction of any system initiating device, or a wiring fault, shall

establish “trouble”. Trouble conditions shall be annunciated as follows:

1.7.4.1. An alarm status message shall be displayed at the addressable fire alarm control panel serving the area of alarm using a liquid crystal display. Subsequent alarms shall be presented in the order in which they occur.

1.7.4.2. The appropriate LED’s on the graphic remote annunciator

panel shall illuminate.

1.7.5. An alarm initiated by a duct-type smoke detector shall shut down the associated air handling unit and/or operate smoke dampers in accordance with the IMC and NFPA 90A. Activation of any of these detectors shall establish a supervisory condition annunciated at the fire alarm control.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. General:

2.1.1. All detection and alarm system equipment shall be new, the product of single manufacturer, and shall have been manufactured within eighteen (18) months prior to installation.

2.1.2. The fire alarm components indicated on the drawings and specified

herein are products of the Simplex 4100 fire alarm system.

2.2. Alarm Initiating Devices:

2.2.1. Duct detectors shall be 4098 Series housing with analog detector sensor and air sampling tube to accommodate the ductwork. Provide each duct detector located above ceiling with a remote alarm LED/test station mounted on wall at 84” AFF, near the duct detector.

2.2.2. Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be addressable. Detectors shall be surface mounted on the ceiling as indicated on the drawings.

2.3. Alarm Indicating Devices:

2.3.1. Flashing strobe light units shall be Model 4904-9117, red with white

lettering, flush mounted, meeting or exceeding the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. Lamp shall be xenon strobe type, flash rate between 1 Hz and 3 Hz, providing 15/75 candela synchronized flash output.



2.3.2. Combination speaker and flashing strobe light units shall be Model

4906-9151, red with white lettering, flush mounted, meeting or exceeding the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. Lamp shall be xenon strobe type, flash rate between 1 Hz and 3 Hz, providing 15/75 candela synchronized flash output.

2.3.3. Visual alarm operation shall be synchronized as required by NFPA 72

and ADA.

2.4. Remote Booster Power Supplies:

2.4.1. Remote booster power supplies shall be Model BPS-6, 6.5 amperes, with two 3 ampere/24 VDC power supplies, and battery backup.

2.4.2. Booster power supplies shall be equipped with addressable modules

as required to allow independent activation, resetting, and trouble reporting.

2.4.3. Provide a smoke detector at each remote booster power supply as

required by NFPA 72.

2.5. Intelligent Interface Modules:

2.5.1. Provide SIGA-CTI (single) or SIGA-CT2 (dual) monitor modules for interface to non-addressable devices such as sprinkler flow and tamper switches, or other dry contact initiating devices.

2.5.2. Provide Model CIGA-CR control modules for initiation of contact-

closure devices such as smoke doors, stair pressurization fans, etc.

2.6. Fire Alarm and Detection System Wiring:

2.6.1. Wiring shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, installed in conduit. Color code shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Wiring shall be tested by the contractor to be free of ground shorts and ends at least twelve inches long shall be left at each outlet for connection to the devices.

2.6.2. All initiating loop (ZAS) wiring shall be power limited with type "FPL"

designation as listed by the NEC. Initiating circuits shall be minimum 14 gauge twisted pair, and shall be as manufactured by West Penn, Belden, or Atlas.

2.6.3. Annunciating circuit wiring shall be type THHN, THWN, or THW,

minimum 12 gauge, insulated copper conductors. Audible and visual annunciating circuit wiring shall be separated, and be individually resettable.

2.6.4. All fire alarm devices shall be wired in a continuous configuration with

no "T-taps" of initiating or annunciating circuits.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. Installation:



3.1.1. Locations for all ceiling-mounted equipment shall be coordinated with

lights, air outlets, and other obstructions. Smoke detectors shall be located at least 12 inches from all diffusers and return grilles.

3.1.2. Pull stations shall be mounted 48”, at locations indicated on the

contract drawings and within 60” of each exit door. Provide additional stations where required for multiple doors that exceed width limits.

3.1.3. No wiring other than that directly associated with fire alarm detection

alarm or auxiliary functions shall be permitted in fire alarm conduits. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the extent possible. Transposing or changing color coding or wires shall not be permitted. All conductors in conduit containing more than one wire shall be color coded and labeled on each end with "E-Z Markers" or equivalent. All fire alarm junction boxes shall be painted red with a yellow stripe. Conductors in cabinets shall be carefully formed and harnessed so that each drops off directly opposite to its terminal. Cabinet terminals shall be numbered and coded. All controls, function switches, etc., shall be clearly labeled on all equipment panels.

3.1.4. Contractor shall coordinate all fire alarm outages and tests in advance

with owner.

3.2. Field Quality Control:

3.2.1. Testing procedures for the acceptance of the alarm and detection system shall be conducted in accordance with provisions of Chapter 10 of NFPA 72.

3.2.2. As-built drawings in conformance with the provisions of Chapter 1 of

NFPA 72 shall be provided prior to the acceptance test. Drawings provided shall be reproducible vellum or sepia with a minimum scale of 1/8 inch equal to 1 foot. Graphic standards used shall comply with NFPA 170. Three sets of maintenance manuals, electric (compact disc) copy of all site specific software, and a complete acceptance test report shall be provided within 4 weeks of completion of all testing. “Final Acceptance” of the fire alarm system will not be granted until all documentation is received.

3.2.3. Guarantees:

3.2.3.1. All Contractors shall guarantee labor, materials, and equipment provided under this contractor against defects for a period of 1 year after the date of the final acceptance of this work by the Owner.

3.2.3.2. Service during the guarantee period shall be provided within

8 hours after notification and all repairs shall be effective within 24 hours after notification.

3.2.3.3. Should the Contractor fail to comply with the above

requirements, the Owner will then have the option to make the necessary repairs and back charge the Contractor without any loss of warranty or guarantee as provided by the contract documents.



END OF SECTION


TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 16750 ‐ 1

SECTION 16750 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1. GENERAL




apply to all work specified under this section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. The following specification pertains to the provisions of the telecommunications raceway system, and includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the installation of a complete system.

1.2.2. The service installation shall be made in strict accordance with the

rules and regulations of the telecommunications vendor(s) supplying the service and shall further be in accordance with the latest editions of the NEC and the National Electrical Safety Code.

1.2.3. All necessary permits shall be secured by the Contractor and all fees

relative to same shall be paid for by the Contractor. 1.2.4. Any charges imposed by the Telephone Company for one extension of

their services to supply this project shall be borne by the Owner. 1.2.5. Raceways, wall plates and outlets shall be provided as shown on the

drawings for the telephone, data, and communications services. The Contractor shall provide the telecommunications cabling system as indicated on the drawings and specified elsewhere in this specification

1.3. Submittals:

1.3.1. Submittals for the items described in this section of the specifications

shall be in accordance with Section 16010:

1.3.1.1. Outlet boxes. 1.3.1.2. Wall plates. 1.3.1.3. Pull ropes.

1.3.1.4. Telephone cabling

1.3.1.5. Data Cabling

1.3.1.6. Telecom faceplate and jacks

2. PRODUCTS



2.1. Outlet Boxes:

2.1.1. Telecommunications outlet boxes shall be provided where indicated on

the drawings. Boxes shall be provided as specified in Section 16110.

2.2. Raceways:

2.2.1. Raceways shall be provided in accordance with Section 16110, minimum size 3/4“.

2.3. Telephone And Data Cabling:

2.3.1. Telephone and Data cabling (supply or return) shall be Teflon coated, plenum rated, unless protected by enclosing it in a raceway.

2.3.2. Provide telephone cabling for all outlets indicated on the drawings.

Cabling shall be category 5E, gray in color, plenum rated.

2.3.3. Provide data cabling for all outlets indicated on the drawings. Cabling shall be Category 5E, 24 gauge, blue in color, plenum rated.

2.4. Telephone And Data Outlets/Jacks:

2.4.1. Telephone jacks shall be Panduit, Model CJ5880R min com, mini jack,

cat 5E module, 8 pos, 8 wire, T568A/B RJ45. Face plates shall be Model CFPE2E1 single gang with (2) module spaces (1 active, 1 blank).

2.4.2. Data jacks shall be Panduit, Model CJ5880R min com, mini jack, cat 5E

module, 8 pos, 8 wire, T568A/B RJ45. Faceplates shall be Model CFPE2E1 single gang with (4) module spaces. (2 active, 2 blank).

2.4.3. Data/telephone jacks shall be Panduit, Model CJ5880R min com, mini

jack, cat 5E module, 8 pos, 8 wire, T568A/B RJ45. Faceplates shall be Model CFPE2E1 single gang with (4) module spaces. (3 active- 2 data, 1 telephone, 1 blank).

2.4.4. Telephone jacks shall be White. Data jacks shall be Orange.

2.5. Cable Outlets/Jacks, Cabling:

2.5.1. Boxes and conduits shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. Telecommunications outlet symbols on the drawings indicate a variety of point-of-use outlets for jacks and cabling to be provided as indicated on the drawings and specified elsewhere in this specification. Where each symbol is indicated, provide a 4-11/16” x 4-11/16” x 2-1/8” deep minimum outlet box with a single gang cover and extend a 3/4 EMT conduit to accessible ceiling space above.

3.2. Where raceways must be bent, use "long sweep'" bends only. 3.3. Contractor shall terminate and test all telephone and data cables in accordance



with E1A/T1A standards. Contractor shall label all cables at both ends and all wall outlets. Coordinate specific requirements for this project with Northwest Hospital Information Services.

3.4 Provide conduit in walls to above ceiling for cabling. Support cabling with J

hooks to the existing I.S. closet.

END OF SECTION


HOSPITAL PAGING SYSTEMS 16760 ‐ 1

SECTION 16760 – HOSPITAL PAGING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1.1. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to work specified in this section.

1.1.2. The requirements of Section 16010, Electrical General Provisions, shall apply to all work

specified under this section.

1.2. Scope:

1.2.1. The work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the installation of conduit and outlet boxes to support the installation of the paging system provided by the Hospital/Hospital’s Vendor.

1.2.2. All head equipment will be provided by the owner/owner’s vendor. The contractor shall be responsible to coordinate all rough-in requirements with the owner/owner’s vendor.


1.3.1. The Contractor shall have been regularly engaged in work of this nature for not less than 3

years.

1.4. Submittals:

1.4.1. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's product data, etc., in accordance with the General Requirements, Section 16010.

1.4.2. Any variations of material and equipment specified must be approved by Owner prior to

submittals. Submit requests for approval prior to construction. 1.4.3. Submittals shall be provided for, but not limited to the following items:

1.4.3.1. Outlet boxes.

1.4.3.2. Raceways.

1.4.3.3. Pull ropes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. Outlet Boxes:

2.1.1. Outlet boxes shall be provided where indicated on the drawings, or as required by owner’s vendor. Boxes shall be provided as specified in Section 16110.

2.2. Raceways:

2.2.1. Raceways shall be provided in accordance with Section 16110, minimum size ¾”. All

raceways shall be EMT.


HOSPITAL PAGING SYSTEMS 16760 ‐ 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. Installation:

3.1.1. Hospital paging devices indicated on the drawings have been indicated for reference. Where required by owner’s vendor, provide outlet box and necessary conduit per Owner’s Vendor.

3.1.2. Provide a pull string, Jet Line No. 232, in each unused conduit.

END OF SECTION